ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM

B ENGINE

EC
SECTION
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM C

E
CONTENTS
CR (WITH EURO-OBD) TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ............................................ 61 F
Trouble Diagnosis Introduction ............................... 61
INDEX FOR DTC ...................................................... 10 DTC Inspection Priority Chart ................................. 65
Alphabetical Index .................................................. 10 Fail-safe Chart ........................................................ 66 G
DTC No. Index ....................................................... 12 Basic Inspection ..................................................... 68
PRECAUTIONS ........................................................ 15 Symptom Matrix Chart ............................................ 72
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System Engine Control Component Parts Location ............ 77
(SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- H
Circuit Diagram ....................................................... 82
SIONER” ................................................................ 15 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout ............. 84
Maintenance Information ........................................ 15 ECM Terminals and Reference Value ..................... 84
On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of Engine and CONSULT-II Function ............................................. 91 I
A/T .......................................................................... 15 Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function ....................... 102
Precaution .............................................................. 16 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis ................ 18 . 104 J
PREPARATION ......................................................... 19 Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor
Special Service Tools ............................................. 19 Mode ..................................................................... 107
Commercial Service Tools ...................................... 19 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE. 109
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM .................................. 21 K
Description ............................................................ 109
System Diagram ..................................................... 21 Testing Condition .................................................. 109
Vacuum Hose Drawing ........................................... 22 Inspection Procedure ............................................ 109
System Chart ......................................................... 23 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 110 L
Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System .................... 23 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCI-
Electronic Ignition (EI) System ............................... 25 DENT ....................................................................... 114
Air Conditioning Cut Control ................................... 26 Description ............................................................ 114 M
Fuel Cut Control (at No Load and High Engine Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 114
Speed) .................................................................... 27 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM ................... 115
CAN Communication Unit ...................................... 28 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 115
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE .............................. 33 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 116
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check .................... 33 DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE. 120
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning ...... 34 Description ............................................................ 120
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning ................ 34 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 120
Idle Air Volume Learning ........................................ 34 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 120
Fuel Pressure Check .............................................. 36 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 121
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM ............ 39 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 122
Introduction ............................................................ 39 DTC P0011 IVT CONTROL ..................................... 123
Two Trip Detection Logic ........................................ 39 Description ............................................................ 123
Emission-related Diagnostic Information ................ 40 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
NATS (Nissan Anti-theft System) ........................... 52 . 123
Malfunction Indicator (MI) ....................................... 52 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 123
OBD System Operation Chart ................................ 55

EC-1
 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 124 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 125 .157
DTC P0031, P0032 HO2S1 HEATER ..................... 126 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 157
Description ............................................................ 126 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 158
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode Overall Function Check ......................................... 159
. 126 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 160
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 126 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 161
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 126 Component Inspection .......................................... 164
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 128 Removal and Installation ....................................... 166
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 129 DTC P0134 HO2S1 ................................................. 167
Component Inspection .......................................... 130 Component Description ........................................ 167
Removal and Installation ...................................... 130 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
DTC P0037, P0038 HO2S2 HEATER ..................... 131 .167
Description ............................................................ 131 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 167
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 168
. 131 Overall Function Check ......................................... 168
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 131 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 170
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 131 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 171
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 133 Component Inspection .......................................... 172
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 134 Removal and Installation ....................................... 173
Component Inspection .......................................... 135 DTC P0138 HO2S2 ................................................. 174
Removal and Installation ...................................... 135 Component Description ........................................ 174
DTC P0107, P0108 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRES- CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
SURE SENSOR ....................................................... 136 .174
Component Description ........................................ 136 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 174
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 136 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 174
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 136 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 176
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 137 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 177
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 138 Component Inspection .......................................... 178
Component Inspection .......................................... 139 Removal and Installation ....................................... 179
Removal and Installation ...................................... 140 DTC P0139 HO2S2 ................................................. 180
DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR ........................... 141 Component Description ........................................ 180
Component Description ........................................ 141 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 141 .180
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 141 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 180
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 143 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 181
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 144 Overall Function Check ......................................... 182
Component Inspection .......................................... 145 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 183
Removal and Installation ...................................... 145 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 184
DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR .......................... 146 Component Inspection .......................................... 186
Component Description ........................................ 146 Removal and Installation ....................................... 187
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 146 DTC P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION.188
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 147 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 188
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 148 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 188
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 149 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 190
Component Inspection .......................................... 150 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 191
Removal and Installation ...................................... 150 DTC P0172 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION.195
DTC P0132 HO2S1 ................................................. 151 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 195
Component Description ........................................ 151 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 195
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 197
. 151 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 198
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 151 DTC P0221 TP SENSOR ........................................ 201
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 152 Component Description ........................................ 201
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 153 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 154 .201
Component Inspection .......................................... 155 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 201
Removal and Installation ...................................... 156 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 201
DTC P0133 HO2S1 ................................................. 157 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 203
Component Description ........................................ 157 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 204

EC-2
 Component Inspection ......................................... 206 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 248
Remove and Installation ....................................... 206 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 249 A
DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR ........................... 207 Component Inspection .......................................... 251
Component Description ........................................ 207 Removal and Installation ...................................... 252
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode DTC P0420 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION . 253 EC
. 207 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 253
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 207 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 253
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 207 Overall Function Check ........................................ 254
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 209 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 255 C
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 210 DTC P0444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME
Component Inspection ......................................... 212 CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE ............................... 257
Remove and Installation ....................................... 212 Description ............................................................ 257 D
DTC P0226 APP SENSOR ..................................... 213 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
Component Description ........................................ 213 . 257
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 257 E
. 213 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 258
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 213 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 259
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 213 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 260
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 215 Component Inspection .......................................... 262 F
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 218 Removal and Installation ...................................... 262
Component Inspection ......................................... 221 DTC P0500 VSS ...................................................... 263
Remove and Installation ....................................... 221 Description ............................................................ 263 G
DTC P0227, P0228 APP SENSOR ........................ 222 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 263
Component Description ........................................ 222 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 263
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode Overall Function Check ........................................ 263 H
. 222 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 264
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 222 DTC P0605 ECM ..................................................... 265
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 222 Component Description ........................................ 265
I
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 224 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 265
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 227 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 265
Component Inspection ......................................... 229 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 266
Remove and Installation ....................................... 230 DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY ....................... 268 J
DTC P0300 - P0304 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MIS- Component Description ........................................ 268
FIRE, NO. 1 - 4 CYLINDER MISFIRE ..................... 231 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 268
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 231 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 268 K
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 231 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 269
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 232 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 270
DTC P0327, P0328 KS ........................................... 237 DTC P1111 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE ..... 272 L
Component Description ........................................ 237 Component Description ........................................ 272
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 237 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 237 . 272
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 238 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 272 M
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 239 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 272
Component Inspection ......................................... 240 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 273
Removal and Installation ...................................... 240 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 274
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) .......................... 241 Component Inspection .......................................... 275
Component Description ........................................ 241 Removal and Installation ...................................... 275
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL
. 241 ACTUATOR ............................................................. 276
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 241 Component Description ........................................ 276
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 241 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 276
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 242 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 276
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 243 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 277
Component Inspection ......................................... 245 DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL
Removal and Installation ...................................... 246 FUNCTION .............................................................. 278
DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) ..................... 247 Description ............................................................ 278
Component Description ........................................ 247 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 278
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 247 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 278
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 247 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 279

EC-3
 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 280 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 318
Component Inspection .......................................... 283 Component Inspection .......................................... 320
Remove and Installation ....................................... 283 Removal and Installation ....................................... 321
DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR DTC P1171 INTAKE ERROR .................................. 322
RELAY ..................................................................... 284 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 322
Component Description ........................................ 284 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 322
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 323
. 284 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 324
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 284 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE ........ 326
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 284 System Description ............................................... 326
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 286 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 287 .328
DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR ......... 289 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 328
Component Description ........................................ 289 Overall Function Check ......................................... 328
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 289 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 331
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 289 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 333
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 290 Main 12 Causes of Overheating ........................... 340
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 291 Component Inspection .......................................... 340
Component Inspection .......................................... 292 DTC P1223, P1224 TP SENSOR ............................ 341
Remove and Installation ....................................... 293 Component Description ........................................ 341
DTC P1143 HO2S1 ................................................. 294 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
Component Description ........................................ 294 .341
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 341
. 294 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 341
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 294 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 343
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 295 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 344
Overall Function Check ........................................ 295 Component Inspection .......................................... 346
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 296 Remove and Installation ....................................... 346
Component Inspection .......................................... 298 DTC P1225 TP SENSOR ........................................ 347
Removal and Installation ...................................... 299 Component Description ........................................ 347
DTC P1144 HO2S1 ................................................. 300 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 347
Component Description ........................................ 300 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 347
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 348
. 300 Remove and Installation ....................................... 348
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 300 DTC P1226 TP SENSOR ........................................ 349
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 301 Component Description ........................................ 349
Overall Function Check ........................................ 301 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 349
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 302 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 349
Component Inspection .......................................... 304 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 350
Removal and Installation ...................................... 305 Remove and Installation ....................................... 350
DTC P1146 HO2S2 ................................................. 306 DTC P1227, P1228 APP SENSOR ......................... 351
Component Description ........................................ 306 Component Description ........................................ 351
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 306 .351
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 306 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 351
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 307 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 351
Overall Function Check ........................................ 308 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 353
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 309 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 356
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 310 Component Inspection .......................................... 358
Component Inspection .......................................... 312 Remove and Installation ....................................... 359
Removal and Installation ...................................... 313 DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY ................ 360
DTC P1147 HO2S2 ................................................. 314 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 360
Component Description ........................................ 314 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 360
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 361
. 314 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 362
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 314 DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH ....................................... 364
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 315 Component Description ........................................ 364
Overall Function Check ........................................ 316 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 317 .364

EC-4
 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 364 Calculated Load Value .......................................... 411
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 364 Manifold absolute pressure sensor ....................... 411 A
Overall Function Check ........................................ 365 Intake Air Temperature Sensor ............................. 411
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 366 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor ................... 411
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 367 Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 Heater ......................... 411 EC
DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH ................................ 370 Heated Oxygen sensor 2 Heater .......................... 411
Description ........................................................... 370 Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS) ....................... 411
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) .................... 411
. 370 Throttle Control Motor ........................................... 411 C
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 370 Injector .................................................................. 412
FAIL-SAFE MODE ............................................... 370 Fuel Pump ............................................................ 412
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 370 D
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 372 CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 373
Component Inspection ......................................... 375 INDEX FOR DTC ..................................................... 413 E
IGNITION SIGNAL .................................................. 376 Alphabetical Index ................................................ 413
Component Description ........................................ 376 DTC No. Index ...................................................... 414
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 377 PRECAUTIONS ...................................................... 416
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 380 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System F
Component Inspection ......................................... 383 (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-
Removal and Installation ...................................... 384 SIONER” ............................................................... 416
INJECTOR CIRCUIT ............................................... 385 Maintenance Information ...................................... 416 G
Component Description ........................................ 385 On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of Engine and
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode A/T ........................................................................ 416
. 385 Precaution ............................................................ 417 H
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 386 Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis .............. 419
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 387 PREPARATION ....................................................... 420
Component Inspection ......................................... 390 Special Service Tools ........................................... 420
Commercial Service Tools .................................... 420 I
Removal and Installation ...................................... 390
FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT ............................................ 391 ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM ................................ 422
Description ........................................................... 391 System Diagram ................................................... 422
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode Vacuum Hose Drawing ......................................... 423 J
. 391 System Chart ........................................................ 424
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 392 Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System ................... 424
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 393 Electronic Ignition (EI) System ............................. 426 K
Component Inspection ......................................... 395 Air Conditioning Cut Control ................................. 427
Removal and Installation ...................................... 395 Fuel Cut Control (at No Load and High Engine
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR ................. 396 Speed) .................................................................. 428
L
Component Description ........................................ 396 CAN Communication Unit ..................................... 429
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 397 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE ............................. 434
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 398 Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check .................. 434
Removal and Installation ...................................... 400 Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning .... 435 M
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL ................................ 401 Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning ............... 435
Description ........................................................... 401 Idle Air Volume Learning ...................................... 435
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode Fuel Pressure Check ............................................ 437
. 401 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM .......... 440
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 401 Introduction ........................................................... 440
MI & DATA LINK CONNECTORS .......................... 403 Two Trip Detection Logic ...................................... 440
Wiring Diagram (LHD Models) ............................. 403 Emission-related Diagnostic Information .............. 440
Wiring Diagram (RHD Models) ............................. 404 NATS (Nissan Anti-theft System) ......................... 443
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM ..................... 405 Malfunction Indicator (MI) ..................................... 443
Description ........................................................... 405 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS .......................................... 447
Component Inspection ......................................... 408 Trouble Diagnosis Introduction ............................. 447
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION ............... 409 DTC Inspection Priority Chart ............................... 451
Description ........................................................... 409 Fail-safe Chart ...................................................... 452
Component Inspection ......................................... 409 Basic Inspection ................................................... 454
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .....411 Symptom Matrix Chart .......................................... 458
Fuel Pressure ........................................................411 Engine Control Component Parts Location .......... 463
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing ..............................411 Circuit Diagram ..................................................... 468

EC-5
 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout ........... 470 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 527
ECM Terminals and Reference Value ................... 470 Component Inspection .......................................... 528
CONSULT-II Function ........................................... 477 Removal and Installation ....................................... 529
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode DTC P0138 HO2S2 ................................................. 530
. 488 Component Description ........................................ 530
Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
Mode ..................................................................... 491 .530
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE. 494 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 530
Description ............................................................ 494 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 530
Testing Condition .................................................. 494 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 532
Inspection Procedure ............................................ 494 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 533
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 495 Component Inspection .......................................... 534
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCI- Removal and Installation ....................................... 535
DENT ....................................................................... 499 DTC P0221 TP SENSOR ........................................ 536
Description ............................................................ 499 Component Description ........................................ 536
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 499 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM ................... 500 .536
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 500 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 536
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 501 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 536
DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE. 505 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 538
Description ............................................................ 505 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 539
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 505 Component Inspection .......................................... 541
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 505 Remove and Installation ....................................... 541
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 506 DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR ............................ 542
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 507 Component Description ........................................ 542
DTC P0107, P0108 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRES- CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
SURE SENSOR ....................................................... 508 .542
Component Description ........................................ 508 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 542
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 508 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 542
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 508 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 544
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 509 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 545
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 510 Component Inspection .......................................... 547
Component Inspection .......................................... 511 Remove and Installation ....................................... 547
Removal and Installation ...................................... 512 DTC P0226 APP SENSOR ...................................... 548
DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR .......................... 513 Component Description ........................................ 548
Component Description ........................................ 513 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 513 .548
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 514 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 548
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 515 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 548
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 516 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 550
Component Inspection .......................................... 517 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 553
Removal and Installation ...................................... 517 Component Inspection .......................................... 556
DTC P0132 HO2S1 ................................................. 518 Remove and Installation ....................................... 556
Component Description ........................................ 518 DTC P0227, P0228 APP SENSOR ......................... 557
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode Component Description ........................................ 557
. 518 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 518 .557
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 519 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 557
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 520 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 557
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 521 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 559
Component Inspection .......................................... 522 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 562
Removal and Installation ...................................... 523 Component Inspection .......................................... 564
DTC P0134 HO2S1 ................................................. 524 Remove and Installation ....................................... 565
Component Description ........................................ 524 DTC P0327, P0328 KS ............................................ 566
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode Component Description ........................................ 566
. 524 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 566
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 524 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 566
Overall Function Check ........................................ 525 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 567
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 526 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 568

EC-6
 Component Inspection ......................................... 569 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 605
Removal and Installation ...................................... 569 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 606 A
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) .......................... 570 Component Inspection .......................................... 607
Component Description ........................................ 570 Remove and Installation ....................................... 608
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode DTC P1171 INTAKE ERROR .................................. 609 EC
. 570 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 609
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 570 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 609
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 570 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 610
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 572 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 611 C
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 573 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE ........ 613
Component Inspection ......................................... 575 System Description ............................................... 613
Removal and Installation ...................................... 576 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode D
DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) ..................... 577 . 615
Component Description ........................................ 577 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 615
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 577 Overall Function Check ........................................ 615 E
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 577 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 618
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 579 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 620
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 580 Main 12 Causes of Overheating ........................... 627
Component Inspection ......................................... 582 Component Inspection .......................................... 627 F
Removal and Installation ...................................... 583 DTC P1223, P1224 TP SENSOR ............................ 628
DTC P0605 ECM .................................................... 584 Component Description ........................................ 628
Component Description ........................................ 584 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode G
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 584 . 628
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 584 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 628
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 586 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 628 H
DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY ....................... 587 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 630
Component Description ........................................ 587 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 631
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 587 Component Inspection .......................................... 633
I
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 587 Remove and Installation ....................................... 633
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 588 DTC P1225 TP SENSOR ........................................ 634
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 589 Component Description ........................................ 634
DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 634 J
ACTUATOR ............................................................ 591 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 634
Component Description ........................................ 591 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 635
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 591 Remove and Installation ....................................... 635 K
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 591 DTC P1226 TP SENSOR ........................................ 636
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 592 Component Description ........................................ 636
DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 636 L
FUNCTION .............................................................. 593 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 636
Description ........................................................... 593 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 637
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 593 Remove and Installation ....................................... 637
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 593 DTC P1227, P1228 APP SENSOR ......................... 638 M
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 594 Component Description ........................................ 638
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 595 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
Component Inspection ......................................... 598 . 638
Remove and Installation ....................................... 598 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 638
DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 638
RELAY .................................................................... 599 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 640
Component Description ........................................ 599 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 643
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode Component Inspection .......................................... 645
. 599 Remove and Installation ....................................... 646
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 599 DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY ................ 647
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 599 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 647
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 601 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 647
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 602 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 648
DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR ........ 604 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 649
Component Description ........................................ 604 DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH ................................. 651
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 604 Description ............................................................ 651
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 604 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

EC-7
 . 651 Component Inspection .......................................... 697
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 651 Removal and Installation ....................................... 698
FAIL-SAFE MODE ................................................ 651 VSS .......................................................................... 699
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 651 Description ............................................................ 699
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 653 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 699
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 654 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE ........................ 700
Component Inspection .......................................... 656 Description ............................................................ 700
HO2S1 HEATER ..................................................... 657 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
Description ............................................................ 657 .701
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 702
. 657 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 703
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 658 Component Inspection .......................................... 705
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 659 Removal and Installation ....................................... 705
Component Inspection .......................................... 661 PNP SWITCH .......................................................... 706
Removal and Installation ...................................... 661 Component Description ........................................ 706
HO2S2 HEATER ..................................................... 662 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
Description ............................................................ 662 .706
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 707
. 662 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 708
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 663 INJECTOR CIRCUIT ............................................... 711
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 664 Component Description ........................................ 711
Component Inspection .......................................... 666 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
Removal and Installation ...................................... 666 . 711
IAT SENSOR ........................................................... 667 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 712
Component Description ........................................ 667 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 713
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 668 Component Inspection .......................................... 716
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 669 Removal and Installation ....................................... 716
Component Inspection .......................................... 670 FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT ............................................. 717
Removal and Installation ...................................... 670 Description ............................................................ 717
HO2S1 ..................................................................... 671 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
Component Description ........................................ 671 .717
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 718
. 671 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 719
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 672 Component Inspection .......................................... 721
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 673 Removal and Installation ....................................... 721
Component Inspection .......................................... 675 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR .................. 722
Removal and Installation ...................................... 676 Component Description ........................................ 722
HO2S2 ..................................................................... 677 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 723
Component Description ........................................ 677 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 724
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode Removal and Installation ....................................... 726
. 677 ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL ................................ 727
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 678 Description ............................................................ 727
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 679 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
Component Inspection .......................................... 681 .727
Removal and Installation ...................................... 682 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 727
IGNITION SIGNAL .................................................. 683 MI & DATA LINK CONNECTORS ........................... 729
Component Description ........................................ 683 Wiring Diagram (LHD Models) .............................. 729
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 684 Wiring Diagram (RHD Models) ............................. 730
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 687 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM ..................... 731
Component Inspection .......................................... 690 Description ............................................................ 731
Removal and Installation ...................................... 691 Component Inspection .......................................... 734
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION ................ 735
SOLENOID VALVE ................................................. 692 Description ............................................................ 735
Description ............................................................ 692 Component Inspection .......................................... 735
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .... 737
. 692 Fuel Pressure ........................................................ 737
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 693 Idle Speed and Ignition Timing .............................. 737
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 695 Calculated Load Value .......................................... 737
Manifold absolute pressure sensor ....................... 737

EC-8
Intake Air Temperature Sensor ............................ 737 Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) .................... 737
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor ................... 737 Throttle Control Motor ........................................... 737 A
Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 Heater ......................... 737 Injector .................................................................. 738
Heated Oxygen sensor 2 Heater .......................... 737 Fuel Pump ............................................................ 738
Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS) ....................... 737 EC

EC-9
 INDEX FOR DTC
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
INDEX FOR DTC
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)] PFP:00024

Alphabetical Index EBS00O2P

Check if the vehicle is a model with Euro-OBD (E-OBD) system or not by the “Type approval number” on the
identification plate. Refer to GI-46, "IDENTIFICATION PLATE" .
NOTE:
If DTC U1000 or U1001 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000,
U1001. Refer to EC-120, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
DTC*1
Items MI lighting
CONSULT-II Trip Reference page
(CONSULT-II screen terms) up
2 ECM*3
GST*
ABSL PRES SEN/CIRC P0107 0107 2 × EC-136
ABSL PRES SEN/CIRC P0108 0108 2 × EC-136
APP SEN 1/CIRC P0227 0227 1 × EC-222
APP SEN 1/CIRC P0228 0228 1 × EC-222
APP SEN 2/CIRC P1227 1227 1 × EC-351
APP SEN 2/CIRC P1228 1228 1 × EC-351
APP SENSOR P0226 0226 1 × EC-213
ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC P0710 0710 2 × AT-117
A/T 1ST GR FNCTN P0731 0731 2 × AT-132
A/T 2ND GR FNCTN P0732 0732 2 × AT-138
A/T 3RD GR FNCTN P0733 0733 2 × AT-144
A/T 4TH GR FNCTN P0734 0734 2 × AT-150
BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT P1805 1805 2 — EC-370
CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1000 1000* 5 1 × EC-120

CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1001 1001*5 2 — EC-120

CKP SEN/CIRCUIT P0335 0335 2 × EC-241
CMP SEN/CIRC-B1 P0340 0340 2 × EC-247
CTP LEARNING P1225 1225 2 — EC-347
CTP LEARNING P1226 1226 2 — EC-349
CYL 1 MISFIRE P0301 0301 2 × EC-231
CYL 2 MISFIRE P0302 0302 2 × EC-231
CYL 3 MISFIRE P0303 0303 2 × EC-231
CYL 4 MISFIRE P0304 0304 2 × EC-231
ECM P0605 0605 1 or 2 × or — EC-265
ECM BACK UP/CIRC P1065 1065 2 × EC-268
ECT SEN/CIRCUIT P0117 0117 1 × EC-146
ECT SEN/CIRCUIT P0118 0118 1 × EC-146
ENGINE SPEED SIG P0725 0725 2 × AT-128
ENG OVER TEMP P1217 1217 1 × EC-326
ETC ACTR P1121 1121 1 or 2 × EC-276
ETC FUNCTION/CIRC P1122 1122 1 × EC-278
ETC MOT P1128 1128 1 × EC-289
ETC MOT PWR P1124 1124 1 × EC-284
ETC MOT PWR P1126 1126 1 × EC-284
FUEL SYS-LEAN-B1 P0171 0171 2 × EC-188

EC-10
 INDEX FOR DTC
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
DTC*1
Items MI lighting A
CONSULT-II Trip Reference page
(CONSULT-II screen terms) 3 up
ECM*
GST*2
FUEL SYS-RICH-B1 P0172 0172 2 × EC-195 EC
HO2S1 (B1) P0132 0132 2 × EC-151
HO2S1 (B1) P0133 0133 2 × EC-157
HO2S1 (B1) P0134 0134 2 × EC-167 C
HO2S1 (B1) P1143 1143 2 × EC-294
HO2S1 (B1) P1144 1144 2 × EC-300
D
HO2S1 HTR (B1) P0031 0031 2 × EC-126
HO2S1 HTR (B1) P0032 0032 2 × EC-126
HO2S2 (B1) P0138 0138 2 × EC-174 E
HO2S2 (B1) P0139 0139 2 × EC-180
HO2S2 (B1) P1146 1146 2 × EC-306
F
HO2S2 (B1) P1147 1147 2 × EC-314
HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0037 0037 2 × EC-131
HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0038 0038 2 × EC-131 G
IAT SEN/CIRCUIT P0112 0112 2 × EC-141
IAT SEN/CIRCUIT P0113 0113 2 × EC-141
H
INTAKE ERROR P1171 1171 1 × EC-322
INT/V TIM CONT-B1 P0011 0011 2 — EC-123
INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1 P1111 1111 2 × EC-272 I
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0327 0327 2 — EC-237
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0328 0328 2 — EC-237
L/PRESS SOL/CIRC P0745 0745 2 × AT-163 J
MULTI CYL MISFIRE P0300 0300 2 × EC-231
NATS MALFUNCTION P1610 - P1615 1610 - 1615 2 — EC-52
K
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING No DTC Flashing*4 — Flashing*4 EC-53
MAY BE REQUIRED.
L
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING P0000 0000 — — —
MAY BE REQUIRED.
O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC P1760 1760 2 × AT-185
M
PNP SW/CIRC P0705 0705 2 × AT-111

P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT* 9 P1706 1706 2 × EC-364

PURG VOLUME CONT/V P0444 0444 2 × EC-257
SFT SOL A/CIRC P0750 0750 1 × AT-170
SFT SOL B/CIRC P0755 0755 1 × AT-175
SENSOR POWER/CIRC P1229 1229 1 × EC-360
TCC SOLENOID/CIRC P0740 0740 2 × AT-158
TP SEN/CIRC A/T P1705 1705 1 × AT-180
TP SEN 1/CIRC P0222 0222 1 × EC-207
TP SEN 1/CIRC P0223 0223 1 × EC-207
TP SEN 2/CIRC P1223 1223 1 × EC-341
TP SEN 2/CIRC P1224 1224 1 × EC-341

EC-11
 INDEX FOR DTC
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
DTC*1
Items MI lighting
CONSULT-II Trip Reference page
(CONSULT-II screen terms) 3 up
2 ECM*
GST*
TP SENSOR P0221 0221 1 × EC-201
TW CATALYST SYS-B1 P0420 0420 2 × EC-253
VEH SPD SEN/CIRC P0720 0720 2 × AT-123
VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC P0500 0500 2 × EC-263
*1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
*2: These numbers are prescribed by ISO 15031-5.
*3: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results), these numbers are controlled by NISSAN.
*4: When engine is running.
*5: The troubleshooting for these DTCs needs CONSULT-II.

DTC No. Index EBS00O2Q

NOTE:
If DTC U1000 or U1001 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000,
U1001. Refer to EC-120, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
DTC*1
Items MI lighting
CONSULT-II Trip Reference page
(CONSULT-II screen terms) up
ECM*3
GST*2
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
No DTC Flashing*4 FURTHER TESTING — Flashing*4 EC-53
MAY BE REQUIRED.
U1000 1000*5 CAN COMM CIRCUIT 1 × EC-120

U1001 1001*5 CAN COMM CIRCUIT 2 — EC-120

NO DTC IS DETECTED.
P0000 0000 FURTHER TESTING — — —
MAY BE REQUIRED.
P0011 0011 INT/V TIM CONT-B1 2 — EC-123
P0031 0031 HO2S1 HTR (B1) 2 × EC-126
P0032 0032 HO2S1 HTR (B1) 2 × EC-126
P0037 0037 HO2S2 HTR (B1) 2 × EC-131
P0038 0038 HO2S2 HTR (B1) 2 × EC-131
P0107 0107 ABSL PRES SEN/CIRC 2 × EC-136
P0108 0108 ABSL PRES SEN/CIRC 2 × EC-136
P0112 0112 IAT SEN/CIRCUIT 2 × EC-141
P0113 0113 IAT SEN/CIRCUIT 2 × EC-141
P0117 0117 ECT SEN/CIRCUIT 1 × EC-146
P0118 0118 ECT SEN/CIRCUIT 1 × EC-146
P0132 0132 HO2S1 (B1) 2 × EC-151
P0133 0133 HO2S1 (B1) 2 × EC-157
P0134 0134 HO2S1 (B1) 2 × EC-167
P0138 0138 HO2S2 (B1) 2 × EC-174
P0139 0139 HO2S2 (B1) 2 × EC-180
P0171 0171 FUEL SYS-LEAN-B1 2 × EC-188
P0172 0172 FUEL SYS-RICH-B1 2 × EC-195
P0221 0221 TP SENSOR 1 × EC-201
P0222 0222 TP SEN 1/CIRC 1 × EC-207
P0223 0223 TP SEN 1/CIRC 1 × EC-207

EC-12
 INDEX FOR DTC
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
DTC*1
Items MI lighting A
CONSULT-II Trip Reference page
3 (CONSULT-II screen terms) up
ECM*
GST*2
P0226 0226 APP SENSOR 1 × EC-213 EC
P0227 0227 APP SEN 1/CIRC 1 × EC-222
P0228 0228 APP SEN 1/CIRC 1 × EC-222
P0300 0300 MULTI CYL MISFIRE 2 × EC-231 C
P0301 0301 CYL 1 MISFIRE 2 × EC-231
P0302 0302 CYL 2 MISFIRE 2 × EC-231
D
P0303 0303 CYL 3 MISFIRE 2 × EC-231
P0304 0304 CYL 4 MISFIRE 2 × EC-231
P0327 0327 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 2 — EC-237 E
P0328 0328 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 2 — EC-237
P0335 0335 CKP SEN/CIRCUIT 2 × EC-241
F
P0340 0340 CMP SEN/CIRC-B1 2 × EC-247
P0420 0420 TW CATALYST SYS-B1 2 × EC-253
P0444 0444 PURG VOLUME CONT/V 2 × EC-257 G
P0500 0500 VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC 2 × EC-263
P0605 0605 ECM 1 or 2 × or — EC-265
H
P0705 0705 PNP SW/CIRC 2 × AT-111
P0710 0710 ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC 2 × AT-117
P0720 0720 VEH SPD SEN/CIRC 2 × AT-123 I
P0725 0725 ENGINE SPEED SIG 2 × AT-128
P0731 0731 A/T 1ST GR FNCTN 2 × AT-132
P0732 0732 A/T 2ND GR FNCTN 2 × AT-138 J
P0733 0733 A/T 3RD GR FNCTN 2 × AT-144
P0734 0734 A/T 4TH GR FNCTN 2 × AT-150
K
P0740 0740 TCC SOLENOID/CIRC 2 × AT-158
P0745 0745 L/PRESS SOL/CIRC 2 × AT-163
P0750 0750 SFT SOL A/CIRC 1 × AT-170 L
P0755 0755 SFT SOL B/CIRC 1 × AT-175
P1065 1065 ECM BACK UP/CIRC 2 × EC-268
M
P1111 1111 INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1 2 × EC-272
P1121 1121 ETC ACTR 1 or 2 × EC-276
P1122 1122 ETC FUNCTION/CIRC 1 × EC-278
P1124 1124 ETC MOT PWR 1 × EC-284
P1126 1126 ETC MOT PWR 1 × EC-284
P1128 1128 ETC MOT 1 × EC-289
P1143 1143 HO2S1 (B1) 2 × EC-294
P1144 1144 HO2S1 (B1) 2 × EC-300
P1146 1146 HO2S2 (B1) 2 × EC-306
P1147 1147 HO2S2 (B1) 2 × EC-314
P1171 1171 INTAKE ERROR 1 × EC-322
P1217 1217 ENG OVER TEMP 1 × EC-326
P1223 1223 TP SEN 2/CIRC 1 × EC-341

EC-13
 INDEX FOR DTC
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
DTC*1
Items MI lighting
CONSULT-II Trip Reference page
3 (CONSULT-II screen terms) up
2 ECM*
GST*
P1224 1224 TP SEN 2/CIRC 1 × EC-341
P1225 1225 CTP LEARNING 2 — EC-347
P1226 1226 CTP LEARNING 2 — EC-349
P1227 1227 APP SEN 2/CIRC 1 × EC-351
P1228 1228 APP SEN 2/CIRC 1 × EC-351
P1229 1229 SENSOR POWER/CIRC 1 × EC-360
P1610 - P1615 1610 - 1615 NATS MALFUNCTION 2 — EC-52
P1705 1705 TP SEN/CIRC A/T 1 × AT-180
P1706 1706 P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT*9 2 × EC-364
P1760 1760 O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC 2 × AT-185
P1805 1805 BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT 2 — EC-370
*1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
*2: These numbers are prescribed by ISO 15031-5.
*3: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results), these numbers are controlled by NISSAN.
*4: When engine is running.
*5: The troubleshooting for these DTCs needs CONSULT-II.

EC-14
 PRECAUTIONS
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001
A
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER” EBS00OS5

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along EC
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of
this Service Manual. C
WARNING:
● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be per-
formed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. D
● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to per-
sonal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the SRS section. E
● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harness connec-
tors. F
Maintenance Information EBS00R4X

If any of following part is replaced, always replace with new* one. G

If it's not (or fail to do so), the electrical system may not be operated properly.
*: New one means a virgin control unit that has never been energized on-board.
RHD MODELS H
● BCM (Models without Intelligent Key system)
● Intelligent Key unit (Models with Intelligent Key system)
● ECM I
● IPDM E/R
● Combination meter
J
● EPS control unit
LHD MODELS
● BCM (Models without Intelligent Key system) K
● Intelligent Key unit (Models with Intelligent Key system)
● ECM
L
On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of Engine and A/T EBS00O2S

The ECM has an on board diagnostic system. It will light up the malfunction indicator (MI) to warn the driver of
a malfunction causing emission deterioration. M
CAUTION:
● Be sure to turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery ground cable before any repair
or inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, solenoid valves, etc. will
cause the MI to light up.
● Be sure to connect and lock the connectors securely after work. A loose (unlocked) connector will
cause the MI to light up due to the open circuit. (Be sure the connector is free from water, grease,
dirt, bent terminals, etc.)
● Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-
locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to PG-81, "HAR-
NESS CONNECTOR" .
● Be sure to route and secure the harnesses properly after work. The interference of the harness
with a bracket, etc. may cause the MI to light up due to the short circuit.
● Be sure to connect rubber tubes properly after work. A misconnected or disconnected rubber tube
may cause the MI to light up due to the malfunction of the fuel injection system, etc.
● Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the ECM and
TCM (Transmission control module) before returning the vehicle to the customer.

EC-15
 PRECAUTIONS
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Precaution EBS00O2T

● Always use a 12 volt battery as power source.

● Do not attempt to disconnect battery cables while engine is
running.
● Before connecting or disconnecting the ECM harness con-
nector, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect battery
ground cable. Failure to do so may damage the ECM
because battery voltage is applied to ECM even if ignition
switch is turned off.
● Before removing parts, turn ignition switch OFF and then
disconnect battery ground cable.
SEF289H

● Do not disassemble ECM.

● If battery cable is disconnected, the memory will return to
the initial ECM values.
The ECM will now start to self-control at its initial values.
Engine operation can vary slightly when the cable is dis-
connected. However, this is not an indication of a malfunc-
tion. Do not replace parts because of a slight variation.

SEF707Y

● When connecting ECM harness connector, fasten it

securely with levers as far as they will go as shown at right.

MBIB0145E

● When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or

from ECM, take care not to damage pin terminals (bend or
break).
Make sure that there are not any bends or breaks on ECM
pin terminal, when connecting pin connectors.
● Securely connect ECM harness connectors.
A poor connection can cause an extremely high (surge)
voltage to develop in coil and condenser, thus resulting in
damage to ICs.
● Keep engine control system harness at least 10 cm (4 in)
away from adjacent harness, to prevent engine control sys- PBIB0090E

tem malfunctions due to receiving external noise, degraded

operation of ICs, etc.
● Keep engine control system parts and harness dry.

EC-16
 PRECAUTIONS
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
● Before replacing ECM, perform “ECM Terminals and Refer-
ence Value” inspection and make sure ECM functions prop- A
erly. Refer to EC-84, "ECM Terminals and Reference Value" .
● Handle manifold absolute pressure sensor carefully to
avoid damage. EC
● Do not clean air clear element with any type of detergent.
● Do not disassemble electric throttle control actuator.
● Even a slight leak in the air intake system can cause seri- C
ous incidents.
● Do not shock or jar the camshaft position sensor (PHASE), MEF040D
crankshaft position sensor (POS). D
● After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform
“DTC Confirmation Procedure” or “Overall Function
Check”. E
The DTC should not be displayed in the “DTC Confirmation
Procedure” if the repair is completed. The “Overall Func-
tion Check” should be a good result if the repair is com-
pleted. F

G
SAT652J

● When measuring ECM signals with a circuit tester, connect H

a break-out box (SST) and Y-cable adapter (SST) between
the ECM and ECM harness connector.
● When measuring ECM signals with a circuit tester, never I
allow the two tester probes to contact.
Accidental contact of probes will cause a short circuit and
damage the ECM power transistor.
J
● Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/
output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's
transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as
the ground. K

SEF348N

● Do not operate fuel pump when there is no fuel in lines.

● Tighten fuel hose clamps to the specified torque.

MBIB0291E

EC-17
 PRECAUTIONS
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]

● Do not depress accelerator pedal when starting.

● Immediately after starting, do not rev up engine unneces-
sarily.
● Do not rev up engine just prior to shutdown.

SEF709Y

● When installing C.B. ham radio or a mobile phone, be sure

to observe the following as it may adversely affect elec-
tronic control systems depending on installation location.
– Keep the antenna as far as possible from the electronic
control units.
– Keep the antenna feeder line more than 20 cm (8 in) away
from the harness of electronic controls.
Do not let them run parallel for a long distance.
– Adjust the antenna and feeder line so that the standing-
wave radio can be kept smaller.
SEF708Y
– Be sure to ground the radio to vehicle body.
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis EBS00O2U

When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following:

● GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams"
● PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING" for power distribution circuit
When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following:
● GI-11, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES"
● GI-24, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident"

EC-18
 PREPARATION
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
PREPARATION PFP:00002
A
Special Service Tools EBS00O2V

Tool number
Description
Tool name EC
KV10117100 Loosening or tightening heated oxygen sensors
Heated oxygen with 22 mm (0.87 in) hexagon nut
sensor wrench C

D
S-NT379

KV10114400 Loosening or tightening heated oxygen sensors

Heated oxygen a: 22 mm (0.87 in) E
sensor wrench

S-NT636

KV109E0010 Measuring ECM signals with a circuit tester G

Break-out box

NT825
I
KV109E0080 Measuring ECM signals with a circuit tester
Y-cable adapter

NT826 K

Commercial Service Tools EBS00O2W

Tool name Description L

Quick connector Removing fuel tube quick connectors in engine

release room
(Available in SEC. 164 of PARTS CATALOG: M
Part No. 16441 6N210)

PBIC0198E

Fuel filler cap adapter Checking fuel tank vacuum relief valve opening
pressure

S-NT653

EC-19
 PREPARATION
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Tool name Description

Socket wrench Removing and installing engine coolant

temperature sensor

S-NT705

Oxygen sensor thread Reconditioning the exhaust system threads

cleaner before installing a new oxygen sensor. Use with
ie: (J-43897-18) anti-seize lubricant shown below.
(J-43897-12) a: 18 mm diameter with pitch 1.5 mm for
Zirconia Oxygen Sensor
b: 12 mm diameter with pitch 1.25 mm for
Titania Oxygen Sensor
AEM488

Anti-seize lubricant Lubricating oxygen sensor thread cleaning tool

i.e.: (PermatexTM when reconditioning exhaust system threads.
133AR or equivalent
meeting MIL
specification MIL-A-
907)

S-NT779

EC-20
 ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM PFP:23710
A
System Diagram EBS00O2X

EC

MBIB0266E

EC-21
 ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Vacuum Hose Drawing EBS00O2Y

MBIB0265E

Refer to EC-21, "System Diagram" for Vacuum Control System.

EC-22
 ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
System Chart EBS00O2Z

A
Input (Sensor) ECM Function Output (Actuator)
● Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Fuel injection & mixture ratio control Fuel injectors
● Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Electronic ignition system Power transistor EC
● Manifold absolute pressure sensor Fuel pump control Fuel pump relay
● Engine coolant temperature sensor
Idle speed control Electric throttle control actuator
● Heated oxygen sensor 1 C
On board diagnostic system MI (On the instrument panel)
● Throttle position sensor
Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater control Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater
● Accelerator pedal position sensor
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater control Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater D
● Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
● Intake air temperature sensor EVAP canister purge volume control
EVAP canister purge flow control
solenoid valve
● Ignition switch
Air conditioning cut control Air conditioner relay *3 E
● Battery voltage
● Knock sensor
● Refrigerant pressure sensor
F
● Stop lamp switch
● Heated oxygen sensor 2 *1
● TCM (Transmission control module) Cooling fan control Cooling fan relays *3
G
● ABS control unit*2
● Air conditioner switch*2
● Vehicle speed signal*2 H
● Electrical load signal*2
*1: This sensor is not used to control the engine system under normal conditions.
*2: These input signals are sent to the ECM through CAN communication line. I
*3: These output signals are sent from the ECM through CAN communication line.

Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System EBS00O30

INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART J

ECM
Sensor Input Signal to ECM Actuator
function
K
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed *3 and piston position

Manifold absolute pressure sensor Amount of intake air

L
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature
Heated oxygen sensor 1 Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
Throttle position sensor Throttle position M
Fuel injec-
Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position tion & mix-
Fuel injectors
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Gear position ture ratio
control
Knock sensor Engine knocking condition
Battery Battery voltage *3

Heated oxygen sensor 2 *1 Density of oxygen in exhaust gas

Vehicle speed signal *2 Vehicle speed

Air conditioner switch *2 Air conditioner operation

*1: Under normal conditions, this sensor is not for engine control operation.
*2: These signals are sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
*3: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The amount of fuel injected from the fuel injector is determined by the ECM. The ECM controls the length of
time the valve remains open (injection pulse duration). The amount of fuel injected is a program value in the

EC-23
 ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
ECM memory. The program value is preset by engine operating conditions. These conditions are determined
by input signals (for engine speed and intake air volume) from the crankshaft position sensor, the manifold
absolute pressure sensor and intake air temperature sensor.
VARIOUS FUEL INJECTION INCREASE/DECREASE COMPENSATION
In addition, the amount of fuel injected is compensated to improve engine performance under various operat-
ing conditions as listed below.
<Fuel increase>
● During warm-up
● When starting the engine
● During acceleration
● Hot-engine operation
● When selector lever is changed from “N” to “D” (A/T models)
● High-load, high-speed operation
<Fuel decrease>
● During deceleration
● During high engine speed operation
MIXTURE RATIO FEEDBACK CONTROL (CLOSED LOOP CONTROL)

PBIB0121E

The mixture ratio feedback system provides the best air-fuel mixture ratio for driveability and emission control.
The three way catalyst (manifold) can then better reduce CO, HC and NOx emissions. This system uses
heated oxygen sensor 1 in the exhaust manifold to monitor if the engine operation is rich or lean. The ECM
adjusts the injection pulse width according to the sensor voltage signal. For more information about heated
oxygen sensor 1, refer to EC-151 . This maintains the mixture ratio within the range of stoichiometric (ideal air-
fuel mixture).
This stage is referred to as the closed loop control condition.
Heated oxygen sensor 2 is located downstream of the three way catalyst (manifold). Even if the switching
characteristics of heated oxygen sensor 1 shift, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric by the signal
from heated oxygen sensor 2.
Open Loop Control
The open loop system condition refers to when the ECM detects any of the following conditions. Feedback
control stops in order to maintain stabilized fuel combustion.
● Deceleration and acceleration
● High-load, high-speed operation
● Malfunction of heated oxygen sensor 1 or its circuit
● Insufficient activation of heated oxygen sensor 1 at low engine coolant temperature
● High engine coolant temperature
● During warm-up
● After shifting from “N” to “D” (A/T models)
● When starting the engine
MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING CONTROL
The mixture ratio feedback control system monitors the mixture ratio signal transmitted from heated oxygen
sensor 1. This feedback signal is then sent to the ECM. The ECM controls the basic mixture ratio as close to
the theoretical mixture ratio as possible. However, the basic mixture ratio is not necessarily controlled as orig-

EC-24
 ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
inally designed. Both manufacturing differences (i.e., manifold absolute pressure sensor silicon diaghram) and
characteristic changes during operation (i.e., injector clogging) directly affect mixture ratio. A
Accordingly, the difference between the basic and theoretical mixture ratios is monitored in this system. This is
then computed in terms of “injection pulse duration” to automatically compensate for the difference between
the two ratios.
EC
“Fuel trim” refers to the feedback compensation value compared against the basic injection duration. Fuel trim
includes short term fuel trim and long term fuel trim.
“Short term fuel trim” is the short-term fuel compensation used to maintain the mixture ratio at its theoretical
value. The signal from heated oxygen sensor 1 indicates whether the mixture ratio is RICH or LEAN compared C
to the theoretical value. The signal then triggers a reduction in fuel volume if the mixture ratio is rich, and an
increase in fuel volume if it is lean.
“Long term fuel trim” is overall fuel compensation carried out long-term to compensate for continual deviation D
of the short term fuel trim from the central value. Such deviation will occur due to individual engine differences,
wear over time and changes in the usage environment.
FUEL INJECTION TIMING E

H
SEF337W

Two types of systems are used.

Sequential Multiport Fuel Injection System I
Fuel is injected into each cylinder during each engine cycle according to the firing order. This system is used
when the engine is running.
Simultaneous Multiport Fuel Injection System J
Fuel is injected simultaneously into all four cylinders twice each engine cycle. In other words, pulse signals of
the same width are simultaneously transmitted from the ECM.
The four injectors will then receive the signals two times for each engine cycle. K
This system is used when the engine is being started and/or if the fail-safe system (CPU) is operating.
FUEL SHUT-OFF
L
Fuel to each cylinder is cut off during deceleration or operation of the engine at excessively high speeds.
Electronic Ignition (EI) System EBS00O31

INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART M

ECM func-
Sensor Input Signal to ECM Actuator
tion
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed *2 and piston position

manifold absolute pressure sensor Amount of intake air

Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature
Throttle position sensor Throttle position Ignition
Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position timing con- Power transistor
trol
Knock sensor Engine knocking
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Gear position
Battery Battery voltage *2

Vehicle speed signal *1 Vehicle speed

*1: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
*2: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.

EC-25
 ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The ignition timing is controlled by the ECM to maintain the best air-
fuel ratio for every running condition of the engine. The ignition tim-
ing data is stored in the ECM. This data forms the map shown.
The ECM receives information such as the injection pulse width and
camshaft position sensor signal. Computing this information, ignition
signals are transmitted to the power transistor.
e.g., N: 1,800 rpm, Tp: 1.50 msec
A °BTDC
During the following conditions, the ignition timing is revised by the
ECM according to the other data stored in the ECM.
● At starting SEF742M

● During warm-up
● At idle
● At low battery voltage
● During acceleration
The knock sensor retard system is designed only for emergencies. The basic ignition timing is programmed
within the anti-knocking zone, if recommended fuel is used under dry conditions. The retard system does not
operate under normal driving conditions. If engine knocking occurs, the knock sensor monitors the condition.
The signal is transmitted to the ECM. The ECM retards the ignition timing to eliminate the knocking condition.
Air Conditioning Cut Control EBS00O32

INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator
1 Air conditioner “ON” signal
Air conditioner switch *
Throttle position sensor Throttle valve opening angle
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Engine speed *2
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Air conditioner
Air conditioner relay
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature cut control
Refrigerant pressure sensor Refrigerant pressure

Vehicle speed signal *1 Vehicle speed

Battery Battery voltage
*1: These signals are sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
*2: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
This system improves engine operation when the air conditioner is used.
Under the following conditions, the air conditioner is turned off.
● When the accelerator pedal is fully depressed.
● When cranking the engine.
● At high engine speeds.
● When the engine coolant temperature becomes excessively high.
● When engine speed is excessively low.
● When refrigerant pressure is excessively low or high.

EC-26
 ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Fuel Cut Control (at No Load and High Engine Speed) EBS00O33

INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART A

ECM func-
Sensor Input Signal to ECM Actuator
tion
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Neutral position EC
Throttle position sensor Throttle position
Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position
Fuel cut C
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Fuel injectors
control
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Engine speed
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) D
Vehicle speed signal*1 Vehicle speed
*1: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
E
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
If the engine speed is above 1,800 rpm with no load (for example, in neutral and engine speed over 1,800
rpm) fuel will be cut off after some time. The exact time when the fuel is cut off varies based on engine speed. F
Fuel cut will operate until the engine speed reaches 1,500 rpm, then fuel cut is cancelled.
NOTE:
This function is different from deceleration control listed under “Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System”, EC-23 .
G

EC-27
 ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
CAN Communication Unit EBS00O34

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle mul-
tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many elec-
tronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other
control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2
communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring.
Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
A/T MODELS
System diagram
● Models with Intelligent Key system

MKIB0273E

● Models without Intelligent Key system

MKIB0274E

Input/output signal chart

T: Transmit R: Receive

EC-28
 ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
ABS
actuator A
Combi- Intelli- Drive EPS and
IPDM E/
Signals ECM nation gent Key com- control BCM electric TCM
R
meter. unit puter unit unit
(control EC
unit)
Engine speed signal T R R R
Engine coolant temperature sig-
C
T R
nal
A/T self-diagnosis signal R T
D
Output shaft revolution signal R T
Accelerator pedal position signal T R
Closed throttle position signal T R E
Wide open throttle position sig-
T R
nal
A/T shift position signal R T F
Stop lamp switch signal T R
O/D OFF indicator lamp signal R T
G
Engine and A/T integrated con- T R
trol signal R T
Fuel consumption monitor signal T R H
Oil pressure switch signal R R T
A/C compressor request signal T R
Heater fan switch signal R T I
Cooling fan speed request signal T R
Cooling fan speed status signal R T
J
Position lights request signal R R T R
Position light status signal R T
Low beam request signal T R K
Low beam status signal R T
High beam request signal R T R
L
High beam status signal R T
Day time light request signal T R
R R R T M
Vehicle speed signal
R T R R R R
Sleep/wake up signal R R T R
Door switch signal R R R T R
Turn indicator signal R T
R T
Buzzer output signal
R T
MI signal T R R
Front wiper request signal T R
Front wiper stop position signal R T
Rear window defogger switch
T R
signal
Rear window defogger control
R T
signal
Drive computer signal T R

EC-29
 ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
ABS
actuator
Combi- Intelli- Drive EPS and
IPDM E/
Signals ECM nation gent Key com- control BCM electric TCM
R
meter. unit puter unit unit
(control
unit)
EPS warning lamp signal R R T
ABS warning lamp signal R R T
ABS operation signal R T
Brake warning lamp signal R R T
Buck-up lamp signal R T
Fuel low warning signal T R
Battery charge malfunction sig-
T R
nal
Air bag system warning signal T R
Brake fluid level warning signal T R
Engine coolant temperature
T R
warning signal
Front fog lamp request signal R T R
Rear fog lamp status signal R T
Headlamp washer request signal T R
Door lock/unlock request signal R T
Door lock/unlock status signal R T
KEY indicator signal R T
LOCK indicator signal R T

EC-30
 ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
M/T MODELS
System diagram A
● Models with Intelligent Key system

EC

MKIB0275E

● Models without Intelligent Key system G

L
MKIB0276E

Input/output signal chart

T: Transmit R: Receive M
ABS
actuator
Combina- Intelli-
Drive EPS con- and elec- IPDM E/
Signals ECM tion gent Key BCM
computer trol unit tric unit R
meter. unit
(control
unit)
Engine speed signal T R R R
Engine coolant temperature signal T R
Fuel consumption monitor signal T R
Oil pressure switch signal R R T
A/C compressor request signal T R
Heater fan switch signal R T
Cooling fan speed request signal T R
Cooling fan speed status signal R T
Position lights request signal R R T R

EC-31
 ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
ABS
actuator
Combina- Intelli-
Drive EPS con- and elec- IPDM E/
Signals ECM tion gent Key BCM
computer trol unit tric unit R
meter. unit
(control
unit)
Position light status signal R T
Low beam request signal T R
Low beam status signal R T
High beam request signal R T R
High beam status signal R T
Day time light request signal T R
R R R T
Vehicle speed signal
R T R R R R
Sleep/wake up signal R R T R
Door switch signal R R R T R
Turn indicator signal R T
R T
Buzzer output signal
R T
MI signal T R R
Front wiper request signal T R
Front wiper stop position signal R T
Rear window defogger switch signal T R
Rear window defogger control sig-
R T
nal
Drive computer signal T R
EPS warning indicator signal R R T
ABS warning lamp signal R R T
ABS operation signal R R T
Brake warning lamp signal R T
Buck-up lamp signal R T
Fuel low warning signal T R
Battery charge malfunction signal T R
Air bag system warning signal T R
Brake fluid level warning signal T R
Engine coolant temperature warn-
T R
ing signal
Front fog lamp request signal R T R
Rear fog lamp status signal R T
Headlamp washer request signal T R
Door lock/unlock request signal R T
Door lock/unlock status signal R T
KEY indicator signal R T
LOCK indicator signal R T

EC-32
 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE PFP:00018
A
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check EBS00O35

IDLE SPEED
With CONSULT-II EC
Check idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.

E
SEF058Y

With GST
Check idle speed in “MODE 1" with GST. F

IGNITION TIMING
1. Slide the harness protector of ignition coil No.1 to clear the G
wires.
2. Attach timing light to the wires as shown in the figure.
H

MBIB0287E J

3. Check ignition timing.

K

MBIB0313E

MBIB0314E

EC-33
 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning EBS00O36

DESCRIPTION
“Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning” is an operation to learn the fully released position of the accel-
erator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time
harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is disconnected.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released.
2. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 2 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch “OFF” wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 2 seconds.
5. Turn ignition switch “OFF” wait at least 10 seconds.
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning EBS00O37

DESCRIPTION
“Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning” is an operation to learn the fully closed position of the throttle valve
by monitoring the throttle position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connector of
electric throttle control actuator or ECM is disconnected.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released.
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
3. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
Make sure that throttle valve moves during above 10 seconds by confirming the operating sound.
Idle Air Volume Learning EBS00O38

DESCRIPTION
“Idle Air Volume Learning” is an operation to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine within the spe-
cific range. It must be performed under any of the following conditions:
● Each time electric throttle control actuator or ECM is replaced.
● Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification.
PREPARATION
Before performing “Idle Air Volume Learning”, make sure that all of the following conditions are satisfied.
Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a moment.
● Battery voltage: More than 12.9V (At idle)
● Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 95°C (158 - 203°F)
● PNP switch: ON
● Electric load switch: OFF
(Air conditioner, headlamp, rear window defogger)
On vehicles equipped with daytime light systems, set lighting switch to the 1st position to light
only small lamps.
● Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position)
● Vehicle speed: Stopped
● Transmission: Warmed-up
For A/T models with CONSULT-II, drive vehicle until “FLUID TEMP SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode of “A/
T” system indicates less than 0.9V.
For A/T models without CONSULT-II and M/T models, drive vehicle for 10 minutes.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-II
1. Perform EC-34, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
2. Perform EC-34, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
4. Check that all items listed under the topic “PREPARATION” (previously mentioned) are in good order.

EC-34
 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
5. Select “IDLE AIR VOL LEARN” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
A

EC

SEF217Z

D
6. Touch “START” and wait 20 seconds.

G
SEF454Y

7. Make sure that “CMPLT” is not displayed on CONSULT-II H

screen. If “INCMP” is displayed, “Idle Air Volume Learning” will
not be carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the
incident by referring to the “Diagnostic Procedure” below. I
8. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle
speed and ignition timing are within the specifications.
J
ITEM SPECIFICATION
Idle speed M/T: 650±50 rpm
A/T: 700±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
K
Ignition timing M/T: 5±5° BTDC MBIB0238E

A/T: 5±5° BTDC (in “P” or “N” position)

Without CONSULT-II L
NOTE:
● It is better to count the time accurately with a clock.
● It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit M
has a malfunction.
1. Perform EC-34, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
2. Perform EC-34, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
4. Check that all items listed under the topic “PREPARATION” (previously mentioned) are in good order.
5. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
6. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, turn ignition switch “ON” and wait 3 seconds.
7. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds.
a. Fully depress the accelerator pedal.
b. Fully release the accelerator pedal.
8. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 20 seconds until the MI stops
blinking and turned ON.
9. Fully release the accelerator pedal within 3 seconds after the MI goes off.
10. Start engine and let it idle.

EC-35
 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
11. Wait 20 seconds.

PBIB0665E

12. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the
specifications.
ITEM SPECIFICATION
Idle speed M/T: 650±50 rpm
A/T: 700±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
Ignition timing M/T: 5±5° BTDC
A/T: 5±5° BTDC (in “P” or “N” position)
13. If idle speed and ignition timing are not within the specification, “Idle Air Volume Learning” will not be car-
ried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the “Diagnostic Procedure”
below.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully, proceed as follows:
1. Check that throttle valve is fully closed.
2. Check PCV valve operation.
3. Check that downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage.
4. When the above three items check out OK, engine component parts and their installation condi-
tion are questionable. Check and eliminate the cause of the incident.
It is useful to perform EC-109, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .
5. If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the
incident and perform “Idle air volume learning” all over again:
● Engine stalls.

● Erroneous idle.

Fuel Pressure Check EBS00O39

FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE

Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel line to eliminate danger.
NOTE:
Prepare pans or saucers under the disconnected fuel line because the fuel may spill out. The fuel pres-
sure cannot be completely released because QR engine models do not have fuel return system.
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Perform “FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE” in “WORK SUPPORT”
mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine.
4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel
pressure.
5. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.

SEF214Y

EC-36
 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Without CONSULT-II
1. Remove fuel pump fuse located in IPDM E/R. A
2. Start engine.
3. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel
pressure. EC
4. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
5. Reinstall fuel pump fuse after servicing fuel system.
C

MBIB0277E
D

FUEL PRESSURE CHECK

CAUTION: E
● The fuel hose connection method used when taking fuel pressure check must not be used for
other purposes.
● Be careful not to scratch or put debris around connection area when servicing, so that the quick
connector maintains sealability with O-rings inside. F
● When installing fuel hose quick connector, refer to EM-14, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" .
1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-36, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .
G
2. Prepare fuel hose and fuel hose clamp for fuel pressure check, and connect fuel pressure gauge.
● Use suitable fuel hose for fuel pressure check (genuine NISSAN fuel hose without quick connector).

● To avoid unnecessary force or tension to hose, use moderately long fuel hose for fuel pressure check. H
● Do not use the fuel hose for checking fuel pressure with damage or cracks on it.

● Use Pressure Gauge to check fuel pressure.

3. Remove fuel hose. Refer to EM-14, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" . I
● Do not twist or kink fuel hose because it is plastic hose.

● Do not remove fuel hose from quick connector.

J
● Keep the original fuel hose to be free from intrusion of dust or foreign substances with a suitable cover.

4. Install the fuel pressure gauge as shown in the figure.

● Wipe off oil or dirt from hose insertion part using cloth moist-
K
ened with gasoline.
● Apply proper amount of gasoline between top of the fuel tube
and No.1 spool.
L
● Insert fuel hose for fuel pressure check until it touches the
No.1 spool on fuel tube.
● Use NISSAN genuine hose clamp (part number: 16439
N4710 or 16439 40U00). M
● When reconnecting fuel line, always use new clamps. PBIB0669E

● When reconnecting fuel hose, check the original fuel hose for
damage and abnormality.
● Use a torque driver to tighten clamps.

● Install hose clamp to the position within 1 - 2 mm (0.04 - 0.08

in).
Tightening torque:
1 - 1.5 N·m (0.1 - 0.15 kg-m, 9 - 13 in-lb)
● Make sure that clamp screw does not contact adjacent parts.
5. After connecting fuel hose for fuel pressure check, pull the hose
with a force of approximately 98 N (10 kg, 22 lb) to confirm fuel
tube does not come off.
6. Turn ignition switch “ON”, and check for fuel leakage. MBIB0315E
7. Start engine and check for fuel leakage.

EC-37
 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
8. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge.
● Do not perform fuel pressure check with system operating. Fuel pressure gauge may indicate false
readings.
● During fuel pressure check, confirm for fuel leakage from fuel connection every 3 minutes.

At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.5 bar, 3.57 kg/cm2 , 51 psi)

9. If result is unsatisfactory, go to next step.
10. Check the following.
● Fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging

● Fuel filter for clogging

● Fuel pump

● Fuel pressure regulator for clogging

If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator.

If NG, repair or replace.

EC-38
 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM PFP:00028
A
Introduction EBS00O3A

The ECM has an on board diagnostic system, which detects malfunctions related to engine sensors or actua-
tors. The ECM also records various emission-related diagnostic information including: EC
Emission-related diagnostic information ISO Standard
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Mode 3 of ISO 15031-5
Freeze Frame data Mode 2 of ISO 15031-5
C

System Readiness Test (SRT) code Mode 1 of ISO 15031-5

1st Trip Diagnostic Trouble Code (1st Trip DTC) Mode 7 of ISO 15031-5 D
1st Trip Freeze Frame data
Test values and Test limits Mode 6 of ISO 15031-5
Calibration ID Mode 9 of ISO 15031-5 E

The above information can be checked using procedures listed in the table below.
×: Applicable —: Not applicable
F
Freeze Frame 1st trip Freeze
DTC 1st trip DTC SRT code Test value
data Frame data
CONSULT-II × × × × × —
G
GST × ×*1 × — × ×

ECM × ×*2 — — — —
H
*1: 1st trip DTCs for self-diagnoses concerning SRT items cannot be shown on the GST display.
*2: When DTC and 1st trip DTC simultaneously appear on the display, they cannot be clearly distinguished from each other.

The malfunction indicator (MI) on the instrument panel lights up when the same malfunction is detected in two I
consecutive trips (Two trip detection logic), or when the ECM enters fail-safe mode. (Refer to EC-66 .)
Two Trip Detection Logic EBS00O3B

J
When a malfunction is detected for the first time, 1st trip DTC and 1st trip Freeze Frame data are stored in the
ECM memory. The MI will not light up at this stage. <1st trip>
If the same malfunction is detected again during the next drive, the DTC and Freeze Frame data are stored in
the ECM memory, and the MI lights up. The MI lights up at the same time when the DTC is stored. <2nd trip> K
The “trip” in the “Two Trip Detection Logic” means a driving mode in which self-diagnosis is performed during
vehicle operation. Specific on board diagnostic items will cause the ECM to light up or blink the MI, and store
DTC and Freeze Frame data, even in the 1st trip, as shown below. L
×: Applicable —: Not applicable
MI DTC 1st trip DTC
1st trip 2nd trip 2nd trip M
Items 1st trip 2nd trip 1st trip
Lighting Lighting display-
Blinking Blinking displaying displaying displaying
up up ing

Misfire (Possible three way cata-

lyst damage) — DTC: P0300 - × — — — — — × —
P0304 is being detected
Misfire (Possible three way cata-
lyst damage) — DTC: P0300 - — — × — — × — —
P0304 is being detected
One trip detection diagnoses
— × — — × — — —
(Refer to EC-10 )
Except above — — — × — × × —

When there is an open circuit on MI circuit, the ECM can not warn the driver by lighting MI up when there is a
malfunction on engine control system.
Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related diagnoses are continuously detected as
NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system has malfunction and MI circuit is open by
means of operating fail-safe function.
EC-39
 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
The fail-safe function also operate when above diagnoses except MI circuit and demands the driver to repair
the malfunction.
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode Engine speed will not rise more than 2,500 rpm due to the fuel cut

Emission-related Diagnostic Information EBS00O3C

EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION ITEMS

DTC*1 Test Valve/
Items
CONSULT-II SRT code Test Limit 1st trip DTC Reference page
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
ECM*3 (GST only)
GST*2
CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1000 1000*5 — — — EC-120

CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1001 1001*5 — — × EC-120

NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING P0000 0000 — — — —
MAY BE REQUIRED.
INT/V TIM CONT-B1 P0011 0011 — — × EC-123
HO2S1 HTR (B1) P0031 0031 × × ×*4 EC-126

HO2S1 HTR (B1) P0032 0032 × × ×*4 EC-126

HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0037 0037 × × ×*4 EC-131

HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0038 0038 × × ×*4 EC-131

ABSL PRES SEN/CIRC P0107 0107 — — × EC-136
ABSL PRES SEN/CIRC P0108 0108 — — × EC-136
IAT SEN/CIRCUIT P0112 0112 — — × EC-141
IAT SEN/CIRCUIT P0113 0113 — — × EC-141
ECT SEN/CIRCUIT P0117 0117 — — — EC-146
ECT SEN/CIRCUIT P0118 0118 — — — EC-146
HO2S1 (B1) P0132 0132 × × ×*4 EC-151

HO2S1 (B1) P0133 0133 × × ×*4 EC-157

HO2S1 (B1) P0134 0134 × × ×*4 EC-167

HO2S2 (B1) P0138 0138 × × ×*4 EC-174

HO2S2 (B1) P0139 0139 × × ×*4 EC-180

FUEL SYS-LEAN-B1 P0171 0171 — — × EC-188
FUEL SYS-RICH-B1 P0172 0172 — — × EC-195
TP SENSOR P0221 0221 — — — EC-201
TP SEN 1/CIRC P0222 0222 — — — EC-207
TP SEN 1/CIRC P0223 0223 — — — EC-207
APP SENSOR P0226 0226 — — — EC-213
APP SEN 1/CIRC P0227 0227 — — — EC-222
APP SEN 1/CIRC P0228 0228 — — — EC-222
MULTI CYL MISFIRE P0300 0300 — — × EC-231
CYL 1 MISFIRE P0301 0301 — — × EC-231
CYL 2 MISFIRE P0302 0302 — — × EC-231
CYL 3 MISFIRE P0303 0303 — — × EC-231
CYL 4 MISFIRE P0304 0304 — — × EC-231
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0327 0327 — — × EC-237
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0328 0328 — — × EC-237
CKP SEN/CIRCUIT P0335 0335 — — × EC-241

EC-40
 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
DTC*1 Test Valve/
Items A
CONSULT-II SRT code Test Limit 1st trip DTC Reference page
(CONSULT-II screen terms) 3
ECM* (GST only)
GST*2
CMP SEN/CIRC-B1 P0340 0340 — — × EC-247 EC
TW CATALYST SYS-B1 P0420 0420 × × ×*4 EC-253
PURG VOLUME CONT/V P0444 0444 — — × EC-257
C
VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC P0500 0500 — — × EC-263
ECM P0605 0605 — — — EC-265
PNP SW/CIRC P0705 0705 — — × AT-111 D
ATF TEMP SEN/SIRC P0710 0710 — — × AT-117
VEH SPD SEN/CIRC P0720 0720 — — × AT-123
ENGINE SPEED SIG P0725 0725 — — × AT-128 E
A/T 1ST GR FNCTN P0731 0731 — — × AT-132
A/T 2ND GR FNCTN P0732 0732 — — × AT-138
F
A/T 3RD GR FNCTN P0733 0733 — — × AT-144
A/T 4TH GR FNCTN P0734 0734 — — × AT-150
TCC SOLENOID/CIRC P0740 0740 — — × AT-158 G
L/PRESS SOL/CIRC P0745 0745 — — × AT-163
SFT SOL A/CIRC P0750 0750 — — — AT-170
H
SFT SOL B/CIRC P0755 0755 — — — AT-175
ECM BACK UP/CIRC P1065 1065 — — × EC-268
INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1 P1111 1111 — — × EC-272 I
ETC ACTR P1121 1121 — — × or — EC-276
ETC FUNCTION/CIRC P1122 1122 — — — EC-278
J
ETC MOT PWR P1124 1124 — — — EC-284
ETC MOT PWR P1126 1126 — — — EC-284
ETC MOT P1128 1128 — — — EC-289 K
HO2S1 (B1) P1143 1143 × × ×*4 EC-294

HO2S1 (B1) P1144 1144 × × ×*4 EC-300

L
HO2S2 (B1) P1146 1146 × × ×*4 EC-306

HO2S2 (B1) P1147 1147 × × ×*4 EC-314

INTAKE ERROR P1171 1171 — — — EC-322
M

ENG OVER TEMP P1217 1217 — — — EC-326

TP SEN 2/CIRC P1223 1223 — — — EC-341
TP SEN 2/CIRC P1224 1224 — — — EC-341
CTP LEARNING P1225 1225 — — × EC-347
CTP LEARNING P1226 1226 — — × EC-349
APP SEN 2/CIRC P1227 1227 — — — EC-351
APP SEN 2/CIRC P1228 1228 — — — EC-351
SENSOR POWER/CIRC P1229 1229 — — — EC-360
P1610 -
NATS MALFUNCTION 1610 - 1615 — — × EC-52
P1615
TP SEN/CIRC A/T P1705 1705 — — — AT-180
P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT P1706 1706 — — × EC-364

EC-41
 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
DTC*1 Test Valve/
Items
CONSULT-II SRT code Test Limit 1st trip DTC Reference page
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
2 ECM*3 (GST only)
GST*
O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC P1760 1760 — — × AT-185
BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT P1805 1805 — — × EC-370
*1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
*2: These numbers are prescribed by ISO 15031-5.
*3: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results), these numbers are controlled by NISSAN.
*4: These are not displayed with GST.
*5: The troubleshooting for these DTCs needs CONSULT-II.

DTC AND 1ST TRIP DTC

The 1st trip DTC (whose number is the same as the DTC number) is displayed for the latest self-diagnostic
result obtained. If the ECM memory was cleared previously, and the 1st trip DTC did not reoccur, the 1st trip
DTC will not be displayed.
If a malfunction is detected during the 1st trip, the 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM memory. The MI will not
light up (two trip detection logic). If the same malfunction is not detected in the 2nd trip (meeting the required
driving pattern), the 1st trip DTC is cleared from the ECM memory. If the same malfunction is detected in the
2nd trip, both the 1st trip DTC and DTC are stored in the ECM memory and the MI lights up. In other words,
the DTC is stored in the ECM memory and the MI lights up when the same malfunction occurs in two consec-
utive trips. If a 1st trip DTC is stored and a non-diagnostic operation is performed between the 1st and 2nd
trips, only the 1st trip DTC will continue to be stored. For malfunctions that blink or light up the MI during the
1st trip, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are stored in the ECM memory.
Procedures for clearing the DTC and the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory are described in EC-51, "HOW
TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .
For malfunctions in which 1st trip DTCs are displayed, refer to EC-40, "EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC
INFORMATION ITEMS" . These items are required by legal regulations to continuously monitor the system/
component. In addition, the items monitored non-continuously are also displayed on CONSULT-II.
1st trip DTC is specified in Mode 7 of ISO 15031-5. 1st trip DTC detection occurs without lighting up the MI
and therefore does not warn the driver of a malfunction. However, 1st trip DTC detection will not prevent the
vehicle from being tested, for example during Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) tests.
When a 1st trip DTC is detected, check, print out or write down and erase (1st trip) DTC and Freeze Frame
data as specified in “Work Flow” procedure Step II, refer to EC-62, "WORK FLOW" . Then perform “DTC Con-
firmation Procedure” or “Overall Function Check” to try to duplicate the malfunction. If the malfunction is dupli-
cated, the item requires repair.
How to Read DTC and 1st Trip DTC
DTC and 1st trip DTC can be read by the following methods.
With CONSULT-II
With GST
CONSULT-II or GST (Generic Scan Tool) Examples: P0340, P0740, P0745, etc.
These DTCs are prescribed by ISO 15031-5.
(CONSULT-II also displays the malfunctioning component or system.)
No Tools
The number of blinks of the MI in the Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-Diagnostic Results) indicates the DTC.
Example: 0102, 0340 etc.
These DTCs are controlled by NISSAN.
● 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
● Output of a DTC indicates a malfunction. However, GST or the Diagnostic Test Mode II do not indi-
cate whether the malfunction is still occurring or has occurred in the past and has returned to nor-
mal. CONSULT-II can identify malfunction status as shown below. Therefore, using CONSULT-II (if
available) is recommended.
A sample of CONSULT-II display for DTC and 1st trip DTC is shown below. DTC or 1st trip DTC of a malfunc-
tion is displayed in SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS mode of CONSULT-II. Time data indicates how many times
the vehicle was driven after the last detection of a DTC.
If the DTC is being detected currently, the time data will be “0”.

EC-42
 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
If a 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM, the time data will be “[1t]”.
A

EC

PBIB0911E D
FREEZE FRAME DATA AND 1ST TRIP FREEZE FRAME DATA
The ECM records the driving conditions such as fuel system status, calculated load value, engine coolant tem-
E
perature, short term fuel trim, long term fuel trim, engine speed, vehicle speed, base fuel schedule and intake
air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected.
Data which are stored in the ECM memory, along with the 1st trip DTC, are called 1st trip freeze frame data.
The data, stored together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and displayed on CONSULT-II or F
GST. The 1st trip freeze frame data can only be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, not on the GST. For
details, see EC-95, "Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data" .
Only one set of freeze frame data (either 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data) can be stored in the G
ECM. 1st trip freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory along with the 1st trip DTC. There is no priority
for 1st trip freeze frame data and it is updated each time a different 1st trip DTC is detected. However, once
freeze frame data (2nd trip detection/MI on) is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze frame data is no
longer stored. Remember, only one set of freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM. The ECM has the fol- H
lowing priorities to update the data.
Priority Items
Freeze frame data Misfire — DTC: P0300 - P0304
I
1
Fuel Injection System Function — DTC: P0171, P0172
2 Except the above items (Includes A/T related items)
J
3 1st trip freeze frame data

For example, the EGR malfunction (Priority: 2) was detected and the freeze frame data was stored in the 2nd
trip. After that when the misfire (Priority: 1) is detected in another trip, the freeze frame data will be updated K
from the EGR malfunction to the misfire. The 1st trip freeze frame data is updated each time a different mal-
function is detected. There is no priority for 1st trip freeze frame data. However, once freeze frame data is
stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze data is no longer stored (because only one freeze frame data or 1st
L
trip freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM). If freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory and freeze
frame data with the same priority occurs later, the first (original) freeze frame data remains unchanged in the
ECM memory.
Both 1st trip freeze frame data and freeze frame data (along with the DTCs) are cleared when the ECM mem- M
ory is erased. Procedures for clearing the ECM memory are described in EC-51, "HOW TO ERASE EMIS-
SION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .
SYSTEM READINESS TEST (SRT) CODE
System Readiness Test (SRT) code is specified in Mode 1 of ISO 15031-5.
As part of an enhanced emissions test for Inspection & Maintenance (I/M), certain states require the status of
SRT be used to indicate whether the ECM has completed self-diagnosis of major emission systems and com-
ponents. Completion must be verified in order for the emissions inspection to proceed.
If a vehicle is rejected for a State emissions inspection due to one or more SRT items indicating “INCMP”, use
the information in this Service Manual to set the SRT to “CMPLT”.
In most cases the ECM will automatically complete its self-diagnosis cycle during normal usage, and the SRT
status will indicate “CMPLT” for each application system. Once set as “CMPLT”, the SRT status remains
“CMPLT” until the self-diagnosis memory is erased.
Occasionally, certain portions of the self-diagnostic test may not be completed as a result of the customer's
normal driving pattern; the SRT will indicate “INCMP” for these items.
NOTE:
The SRT will also indicate “INCMP” if the self-diagnosis memory is erased for any reason or if the ECM mem-
ory power supply is interrupted for several hours.
EC-43
 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
If, during the state emissions inspection, the SRT indicates “CMPLT” for all test items, the inspector will con-
tinue with the emissions test. However, if the SRT indicates “INCMP” for one or more of the SRT items the
vehicle is returned to the customer untested.
NOTE:
If MI is “ON” during the state emissions inspection, the vehicle is also returned to the customer untested even
though the SRT indicates “CMPLT” for all test items. Therefore, it is important to check SRT (“CMPLT”) and
DTC (No DTCs) before the inspection.

EC-44
 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
SRT Item
The table below shows required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT”. A
SRT item
Performance
(CONSULT-II Required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT” Corresponding DTC No.
Priority*
indication) EC
CATALYST 2 Three way catalyst function P0420
HO2S 1 Heated oxygen sensor 1 P0132
C
Heated oxygen sensor 1 P0133
Heated oxygen sensor 1 P0134
Heated oxygen sensor 1 P1143 D
Heated oxygen sensor 1 P1144
Heated oxygen sensor 2 P0138
E
Heated oxygen sensor 2 P0139
Heated oxygen sensor 2 P1146
Heated oxygen sensor 2 P1147
F
HO2S HTR 1 Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater P0031, P0032
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater P0037, P0038
*: If completion of several SRTs is required, perform driving patterns (DTC confirmation procedure), one by one based on the priority for G
models with CONSULT-II.

SRT Set Timing

H
SRT is set as “CMPLT” after self-diagnosis has been performed one or more times. Completion of SRT is
done regardless of whether the result is OK or NG. The set timing is different between OK and NG results and
is shown in the table below.
I
Example
Self-diagnosis result Ignition cycle
Diagnosis
← ON → OFF ← ON → OFF ← ON → OFF ← ON →
J
All OK Case 1 P0400 OK (1) — (1) OK (2) — (2)
P0402 OK (1) — (1) — (1) OK (2)
P1402 OK (1) OK (2) — (2) — (2) K
SRT of EGR “CMPLT” “CMPLT” “CMPLT” “CMPLT”
Case 2 P0400 OK (1) — (1) — (1) — (1)
L
P0402 — (0) — (0) OK (1) — (1)
P1402 OK (1) OK (2) — (2) — (2)
SRT of EGR “INCMP” “INCMP” “CMPLT” “CMPLT” M
NG exists Case 3 P0400 OK OK — —
P0402 — — — —
NG
P1402 NG — NG (Consecutive
NG)
(1st trip) DTC
1st trip DTC — 1st trip DTC
DTC (= MI “ON”)
SRT of EGR “INCMP” “INCMP” “INCMP” “CMPLT”
OK: Self-diagnosis is carried out and the result is OK.
NG: Self-diagnosis is carried out and the result is NG.
—: Self-diagnosis is not carried out.

When all SRT related self-diagnoses showed OK results in a single cycle (Ignition OFF-ON-OFF), the SRT will
indicate “CMPLT”. → Case 1 above
When all SRT related self-diagnoses showed OK results through several different cycles, the SRT will indicate
“CMPLT” at the time the respective self-diagnoses have at least one OK result. → Case 2 above

EC-45
 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
If one or more SRT related self-diagnoses showed NG results in 2 consecutive cycles, the SRT will also indi-
cate “CMPLT”. → Case 3 above
The table above shows that the minimum number of cycles for setting SRT as “INCMP” is one (1) for each
self-diagnosis (Case 1 & 2) or two (2) for one of self-diagnoses (Case 3). However, in preparation for the state
emissions inspection, it is unnecessary for each self-diagnosis to be executed twice (Case 3) for the following
reasons:
● The SRT will indicate “CMPLT” at the time the respective self-diagnoses have one (1) OK result.
● The emissions inspection requires “CMPLT” of the SRT only with OK self-diagnosis results.
● When, during SRT driving pattern, 1st trip DTC (NG) is detected prior to “CMPLT” of SRT, the self-diagno-
sis memory must be erased from ECM after repair.
● If the 1st trip DTC is erased, all the SRT will indicate “INCMP”.
NOTE:
SRT can be set as “CMPLT” together with the DTC (s). Therefore, DTC check must always be carried out
prior to the state emission inspection even though the SRT indicates “CMPLT”.
SRT Service Procedure
If a vehicle has failed the state emissions inspection due to one or more SRT items indicating “INCMP”, review
the flowchart diagnostic sequence on the next page.

EC-46
 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]

EC

SEF573XB

*1 EC-42 *2 EC-47 *3 EC-48

How to Display SRT Code

WITH CONSULT-II
Selecting “SRT STATUS” in “DTC CONFIRMATION” mode with
CONSULT-II.
For items whose SRT codes are set, a “CMPLT” is displayed on the
CONSULT-II screen; for items whose SRT codes are not set,
“INCMP” is displayed.
A sample of CONSULT-II display for SRT code is shown at right.
“INCMP” means the self-diagnosis is incomplete and SRT is not set.
“CMPLT” means the self-diagnosis is complete and SRT is set.
WITH GST
Selecting Mode 1 with GST (Generic Scan Tool) PBIB0666E

EC-47
 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
How to Set SRT Code
To set all SRT codes, self-diagnosis for the items indicated above must be performed one or more times. Each
diagnosis may require a long period of actual driving under various conditions.
WITH CONSULT-II
Perform corresponding DTC Confirmation Procedure one by one based on “Performance Priority” in the table
on EC-45 .
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
The most efficient driving pattern in which SRT codes can be properly set is explained on the next page. The
driving pattern should be performed one or more times to set all SRT codes.

EC-48
 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Driving Pattern
A

EC

MBIB0241E

EC-49
 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
● The time required for each diagnosis varies with road surface conditions, weather, altitude, individual driv-
ing habits, etc.
Zone A refers to the range where the time, required for the diagnosis under normal conditions*, is the
shortest.
Zone B refers to the range where the diagnosis can still be performed if the diagnosis is not completed
within zone A.
*: Normal conditions refer to the following:
● Sea level
● Flat road
● Ambient air temperature: 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)
● Diagnosis is performed as quickly as possible under normal conditions.
Under different conditions [For example: ambient air temperature other than 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)], diag-
nosis may also be performed.
Pattern 1:
● The engine is started at the engine coolant temperature of −10 to 35°C (14 to 95°F)
(where the voltage between the ECM terminal 72 and ground is 3.0 - 4.3V).
● The engine must be operated at idle speed until the engine coolant temperature is greater than
70°C (158°F) (where the voltage between the ECM terminal 72 and ground is lower than 1.4V).
Pattern 2:
● When steady-state driving is performed again even after it is interrupted, each diagnosis can be con-
ducted. In this case, the time required for diagnosis may be extended.
*1: Depress the accelerator pedal until vehicle speed is 90 km/h (56 MPH), then release the accelerator pedal
and keep it released for more than 10 seconds. Depress the accelerator pedal until vehicle speed is 90 km/h
(56 MPH) again.
*2: Checking the vehicle speed with GST is advised.
TEST VALUE AND TEST LIMIT (GST ONLY — NOT APPLICABLE TO CONSULT-II)
The following is the information specified in Mode 6 of ISO 15031-5.
The test value is a parameter used to determine whether a system/circuit diagnostic test is “OK” or “NG” while
being monitored by the ECM during self-diagnosis. The test limit is a reference value which is specified as the
maximum or minimum value and is compared with the test value being monitored.
Items for which these data (test value and test limit) are displayed are the same as SRT code items.
These data (test value and test limit) are specified by Test ID (TID) and Component ID (CID) and can be dis-
played on the GST screen.
×: Applicable —: Not applicable
Test value (GST display)
SRT item Self-diagnostic test item Test limit Application
TID CID
CATALYST Three way catalyst function 01H 01H Max. ×
09H 04H Max. ×
0AH 84H Min. ×
Heated oxygen sensor 1 0BH 04H Max. ×
0CH 04H Max. ×
HO2S 0DH 04H Max. ×
19H 86H Min. ×
1AH 86H Min. ×
Heated oxygen sensor 2
1BH 06H Max. ×
1CH 06H Max. ×
29H 08H Max. ×
Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater
2AH 88H Min. ×
HO2S HTR
2DH 0AH Max. ×
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
2EH 8AH Min. ×

EC-50
 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION
How to Erase DTC ( With CONSULT-II) A
The emission related diagnostic information in the ECM can be erased by selecting “ERASE” in the “SELF-
DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II.
If DTCs are displayed for both ECM and TCM (Transmission control module), they need to be erased individu- EC
ally from the ECM and TCM (Transmission control module).
NOTE:
If the DTC is not for A/T related items (see EC-10 ), skip steps 2 through 4. C
1. If the ignition switch stays “ON” after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch “OFF” once. Wait at least
10 seconds and then turn it “ON” (engine stopped) again.
2. Turn CONSULT-II “ON” and touch “A/T”. D
3. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
4. Touch “ERASE”. [The DTC in the TCM (Transmission control module) will be erased.] Then touch “BACK”
twice. E
5. Touch “ENGINE”.
6. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
7. Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the ECM will be erased.) F

SEF966X

How to Erase DTC ( With GST)

The emission related diagnostic information in the ECM can be erased by selecting Mode 4 with GST.
NOTE:
If the DTC is not for A/T related items (see EC-10 ), skip step 2.
1. If the ignition switch stays “ON” after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch “OFF” once. Wait at least
10 seconds and then turn it “ON” (engine stopped) again.

EC-51
 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
2. Perform “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (Without CONSULT-II)” in A/T section titled “TROUBLE
DIAGNOSIS”, “Self-diagnosis”. (The engine warm-up step can be skipped when performing the diagnosis
only to erase the DTC.)
3. Select Mode 4 with GST (Generic Scan Tool).
How to Erase DTC ( No Tools)
1. If the ignition switch stays “ON” after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch “OFF” once.
2. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn it “ON” (engine stopped) again.
3. Change the diagnostic test mode from Mode II to Mode I by depressing the accelerator pedal. Refer to
EC-54, "HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE" .
● If the battery is disconnected, the emission-related diagnostic information will be lost after
approx. 24 hours.
● The following data are cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
– Diagnostic trouble codes
– 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes
– Freeze frame data
– 1st trip freeze frame data
– System readiness test (SRT) codes
– Test values
– Others
Actual work procedures are explained using a DTC as an example. Be careful so that not only the DTC, but all
of the data listed above, are cleared from the ECM memory during work procedures.
NATS (Nissan Anti-theft System) EBS00O3D

● If the security indicator lights up with the ignition switch in

the “ON” position or “NATS MALFUNCTION” is displayed
on “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” screen, perform self-diagnostic
results mode with CONSULT-II using NATS program card.
Refer to BL-201, "NATS(Nissan Anti-Theft System)" .
● Confirm no self-diagnostic results of NATS is displayed
before touching “ERASE” in “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode
with CONSULT-II.
● When replacing ECM, initialization of NATS system and reg-
istration of all NATS ignition key IDs must be carried out
with CONSULT-II using NATS program card. SEF515Y

Therefore, be sure to receive all keys from vehicle owner.

Regarding the procedures of NATS initialization and NATS ignition key ID registration, refer to
CONSULT-II operation manual, NATS.
Malfunction Indicator (MI) EBS00O3E

DESCRIPTION
The MI is located on the instrument panel.
1. The MI will light up when the ignition switch is turned ON without
the engine running. This is a bulb check.
● If the MI does not light up, refer to DI-48, "WARNING LAMPS"
or see EC-403 .
2. When the engine is started, the MI should go off.
If the MI remains on, the on board diagnostic system has
detected an engine system malfunction.

SAT652J

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM FUNCTION

The on board diagnostic system has the following four functions.

EC-52
 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Diagnostic Test KEY and ENG. Function Explanation of Function
Mode Status A
Mode I Ignition switch in BULB CHECK This function checks the MI bulb for damage (blown, open
“ON” position circuit, etc.).
If the MI does not come on, check MI circuit. EC

Engine stopped
C

D
Engine running MALFUNCTION This is a usual driving condition. When a malfunction is
WARNING detected twice in two consecutive driving cycles (two trip
detection logic), the MI will light up to inform the driver that
a malfunction has been detected. E
The following malfunctions will light up or blink the MI in
the 1st trip.
● “Misfire (Possible three way catalyst damage)”
F
● “One trip detection diagnoses”
Mode II Ignition switch in SELF-DIAGNOSTIC This function allows DTCs and 1st trip DTCs to be read.
“ON” position RESULTS
G

Engine stopped H

I
Engine running HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 This function allows the fuel mixture condition (lean or
MONITOR rich), monitored by heated oxygen sensor 1, to be read.

When there is an open circuit on MI circuit, the ECM can not warn the driver by lighting MI up when there is
malfunction on engine control system. K
Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related diagnoses are continuously detected as
NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system has a malfunction and MI circuit is open by
means of operating fail-safe function. L
The fail-safe function also operate when above diagnoses except MI circuit and demands the driver to repair
the a malfunction.
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode Engine speed will not rise more than 2,500 rpm due to the fuel cut
M

MI Flashing without DTC

If the ECM is in Diagnostic Test Mode II, MI may flash when engine is running. In this case, check ECM diag-
nostic test mode. EC-54, "HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE" .
How to switch the diagnostic test (function) modes, and details of the above functions are described later, EC-
54, "HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE" .
The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
● Diagnostic trouble codes
● 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes
● Freeze frame data
● 1st trip freeze frame data
● System readiness test (SRT) codes
● Test values
● Others

EC-53
 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE
NOTE:
● It is better to count the time accurately with a clock.
● It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit
has a malfunction.
● Always ECM returns to Diagnostic Test Mode I after ignition switch is turned “OFF”.
How to Set Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)
1. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, turn ignition switch “ON” and wait 3 seconds.
2. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds.
a. Fully depress the accelerator pedal.
b. Fully release the accelerator pedal.
3. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 10 seconds until the MI starts
blinking.
4. Fully release the accelerator pedal.
ECM has entered to Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results).

PBIB0092E

How to Set Diagnostic Test Mode II (Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 Monitor)

1. Set the ECM in Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results). Refer to EC-54, "How to Set Diagnostic
Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)" .
2. Start Engine.
ECM has entered to Diagnostic Test Mode II (Heated oxygen sensor 1 monitor).
How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)
1. Set ECM in Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results). Refer to EC-54, "How to Erase Diagnostic
Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)" .
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for more than 10 seconds.
The emission-related diagnostic information has been erased from the backup memory in the ECM.
3. Fully release the accelerator pedal, and confirm the DTC 0000 is displayed.
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I — BULB CHECK
In this mode, the MI on the instrument panel should stay ON. If it remains OFF, check the bulb. Refer to DI-48,
"WARNING LAMPS" or see EC-403 .
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I — MALFUNCTION WARNING
MI Condition
ON When the malfunction is detected.
OFF No malfunction.

● These DTC numbers are clarified in Diagnostic Test Mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS)

DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II — SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS

In this mode, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are indicated by the number of blinks of the MI as shown below.
The DTC and 1st trip DTC are displayed at the same time. If the MI does not illuminate in diagnostic test mode
I (Malfunction warning), all displayed items are 1st trip DTCs. If only one code is displayed when the MI illumi-
nates in diagnostic test mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS), it is a DTC; if two or more codes are dis-
played, they may be either DTCs or 1st trip DTCs. DTC No. is same as that of 1st trip DTC. These unidentified

EC-54
 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
codes can be identified by using the CONSULT-II or GST. A DTC will be used as an example for how to read a
code. A

EC

SEF952W
G
A particular trouble code can be identified by the number of four-digit numeral flashes. The “zero” is indicated
by the number of ten flashes. The length of time the 1,000th-digit numeral flashes on and off is 1.2 seconds
consisting of an ON (0.6-second) - OFF (0.6-second) cycle.
H
The 100th-digit numeral and lower digit numerals consist of a 0.3-second ON and 0.3-second OFF cycle.
A change from one digit numeral to another occurs at an interval of 1.0-second OFF. In other words, the later
numeral appears on the display 1.3 seconds after the former numeral has disappeared.
A change from one trouble code to another occurs at an interval of 1.8-second OFF. I
In this way, all the detected malfunctions are classified by their DTC numbers. The DTC “0000” refers to no
malfunction. (See EC-10, "INDEX FOR DTC" )
How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results) J
The DTC can be erased from the back up memory in the ECM by depressing accelerator pedal. Refer to EC-
54, "HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE" .
● If the battery is disconnected, the DTC will be lost from the backup memory after approx 24 hours. K
● Be careful not to erase the stored memory before starting trouble diagnoses.
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II — HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 MONITOR L
In this mode, the MI displays the condition of the fuel mixture (lean or rich) which is monitored by the heated
oxygen sensor 1.
MI Fuel mixture condition in the exhaust gas Air-fuel ratio feedback control condition M
ON Lean
Closed loop system
OFF Rich
*Remains ON or OFF Any condition Open loop system
*: Maintains conditions just before switching to open loop.

To check the heated oxygen sensor 1 function, start engine in the Diagnostic Test Mode II and warm it up until
engine coolant temperature indicator points to the middle of the gauge.
Next run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load conditions. Then make sure that the MI
comes ON more than 5 times within 10 seconds with engine running at 2,000 rpm under no-load.
OBD System Operation Chart EBS00O3F

RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MI, 1ST TRIP DTC, DTC, AND DETECTABLE ITEMS
● When a malfunction is detected for the first time, the 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip freeze frame data are
stored in the ECM memory.
● When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, the DTC and the freeze frame data are
stored in the ECM memory, and the MI will come on. For details, refer to EC-39, "Two Trip Detection
Logic" .
EC-55
 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
● The MI will go off after the vehicle is driven 3 times with no malfunction. The drive is counted only when
the recorded driving pattern is met (as stored in the ECM). If another malfunction occurs while counting,
the counter will reset.
● The DTC and the freeze frame data will be stored until the vehicle is driven 40 times (driving pattern A)
without the same malfunction recurring (except for Misfire and Fuel Injection System). For Misfire and
Fuel Injection System, the DTC and freeze frame data will be stored until the vehicle is driven 80 times
(driving pattern C) without the same malfunction recurring. The “TIME” in “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
RESULTS” mode of CONSULT-II will count the number of times the vehicle is driven.
● The 1st trip DTC is not displayed when the self-diagnosis results in “OK” for the 2nd trip.
SUMMARY CHART
Items Fuel Injection System Misfire Other
MI (goes off) 3 (pattern B) 3 (pattern B) 3 (pattern B)
DTC, Freeze Frame Data (no
80 (pattern C) 80 (pattern C) 40 (pattern A)
display)
1st Trip DTC (clear) 1 (pattern C), *1 1 (pattern C), *1 1 (pattern B)
1st Trip Freeze Frame Data
(clear) *1 , *2 *1 , *2 1 (pattern B)

For details about patterns “B” and “C” under “Fuel Injection System” and “Misfire”, see EC-58 .
For details about patterns “A” and “B” under “Other”, see EC-60 .
*1: Clear timing is at the moment OK is detected.
*2: Clear timing is when the same malfunction is detected in the 2nd trip.

EC-56
 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MI, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE”
<EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORATION>, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM” A

EC

SEF392SA

*1: When the same malfunction is *2: MI will go off after vehicle is driven 3 *3: When the same malfunction is
detected in two consecutive trips, MI times (pattern B) without any mal- detected in two consecutive trips, the
will light up. functions. DTC and the freeze frame data will
be stored in ECM.
*4: The DTC and the freeze frame data *5: When a malfunction is detected for *6: The 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip
will not be displayed any longer after the first time, the 1st trip DTC and freeze frame data will be cleared at
vehicle is driven 80 times (pattern C) the 1st trip freeze frame data will be the moment OK is detected.
without the same malfunction. (The stored in ECM.
DTC and the freeze frame data still
remain in ECM.)
*7: When the same malfunction is *8: 1st trip DTC will be cleared when
detected in the 2nd trip, the 1st trip vehicle is driven once (pattern C)
freeze frame data will be cleared. without the same malfunction after
DTC is stored in ECM.

EC-57
 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORA-
TION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”
<Driving Pattern B>
Driving pattern B means the vehicle operation as follows:
All components and systems should be monitored at least once by the OBD system.
● The B counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected once regardless of the driving pattern.
● The B counter will be counted up when driving pattern B is satisfied without any malfunction.
● The MI will go off when the B counter reaches 3. (*2 in “OBD SYSTEM OPERATION CHART”)
<Driving Pattern C>
Driving pattern C means the vehicle operation as follows:
1. The following conditions should be satisfied at the same time:
Engine speed: (Engine speed in the freeze frame data) ±375 rpm
Calculated load value: (Calculated load value in the freeze frame data) x (1±0.1) [%]
Engine coolant temperature (T) condition:
● When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70°C (158°F), “T” should be lower than 70°C (158°F).
● When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70°C (158°F), “T” should be higher than or
equal to 70°C (158°F).
Example:
If the stored freeze frame data is as follows:
Engine speed: 850 rpm, Calculated load value: 30%, Engine coolant temperature: 80°C (176°F)
To be satisfied with driving pattern C, the vehicle should run under the following conditions:
Engine speed: 475 - 1,225 rpm, Calculated load value: 27 - 33%, Engine coolant temperature: more than 70°C
(158°F)
● The C counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected regardless of vehicle conditions above.
● The C counter will be counted up when vehicle conditions above is satisfied without the same malfunction.
● The DTC will not be displayed after C counter reaches 80.
● The 1st trip DTC will be cleared when C counter is counted once without the same malfunction after DTC
is stored in ECM.

EC-58
 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MI, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS EXCEPT FOR
“MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM” A

EC

SEF393SA

*1: When the same malfunction is *2: MI will go off after vehicle is driven 3 *3: When the same malfunction is
detected in two consecutive trips, MI times (pattern B) without any mal- detected in two consecutive trips, the
will light up. functions. DTC and the freeze frame data will
be stored in ECM.
*4: The DTC and the freeze frame data *5: When a malfunction is detected for *6: 1st trip DTC will be cleared after
will not be displayed any longer after the first time, the 1st trip DTC and vehicle is driven once (pattern B)
vehicle is driven 40 times (pattern A) the 1st trip freeze frame data will be without the same malfunction.
without the same malfunction. stored in ECM.
(The DTC and the freeze frame data
still remain in ECM.)
*7: When the same malfunction is
detected in the 2nd trip, the 1st trip
freeze frame data will be cleared.

EC-59
 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS EXCEPT FOR “MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY
DETERIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”
<Driving Pattern A>

AEC574

● The A counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected regardless of (1) - (4).
● The A counter will be counted up when (1) - (4) are satisfied without the same malfunction.
● The DTC will not be displayed after the A counter reaches 40.
<Driving Pattern B>
Driving pattern B means the vehicle operation as follows:
All components and systems should be monitored at least once by the OBD system.
● The B counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected once regardless of the driving pattern.
● The B counter will be counted up when driving pattern B is satisfied without any malfunctions.
● The MI will go off when the B counter reaches 3 (*2 in “OBD SYSTEM OPERATION CHART”).

EC-60
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PFP:00004
A
Trouble Diagnosis Introduction EBS00O3G

INTRODUCTION
The engine has an ECM to control major systems such as fuel con- EC
trol, ignition control, idle air control system, etc. The ECM accepts
input signals from sensors and instantly drives actuators. It is essen-
tial that both input and output signals are proper and stable. At the
same time, it is important that there are no malfunctions such as vac- C
uum leaks, fouled spark plugs, or other malfunctions with the engine.
It is much more difficult to diagnose a incident that occurs intermit-
tently rather than continuously. Most intermittent incidents are D
caused by poor electric connections or improper wiring. In this case,
careful checking of suspected circuits may help prevent the replace-
ment of good parts.
A visual check only may not find the cause of the incidents. A road
MEF036D
E
test with CONSULT-II (or GST) or a circuit tester connected should
be performed. Follow the “Work Flow” on EC-62 .
Before undertaking actual checks, take a few minutes to talk with a F
customer who approaches with a driveability complaint. The cus-
tomer can supply good information about such incidents, especially
intermittent ones. Find out what symptoms are present and under
what conditions they occur. A “Diagnostic Worksheet” like the exam- G
ple on EC-65 should be used.
Start your diagnosis by looking for “conventional” malfunctions first.
This will help troubleshoot driveability malfunctions on an electroni- H
cally controlled engine vehicle.
SEF233G

SEF234G
L

EC-61
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
WORK FLOW
Flow Chart

MBIB0159E

*1 If time data of “SELF-DIAG *2 If the incident cannot be verified, per- *3 If the on board diagnostic system
RESULTS” is other than “0” or “[1t]”, form EC-114, "TROUBLE DIAGNO- cannot be performed, check main
perform EC-114, "TROUBLE DIAG- SIS FOR INTERMITTENT power supply and ground circuit.
NOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCI- INCIDENT" . Refer to EC-115, "POWER SUPPLY
DENT" . CIRCUIT FOR ECM" .
*4 If malfunctioning part cannot be *5 EC-49 *6 EC-109
detected, perform EC-114, "TROU-
BLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMIT-
TENT INCIDENT" .

EC-62
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Description for Work Flow
STEP DESCRIPTION
A

Get detailed information about the conditions and the environment when the incident/symptom occurred using the
STEP I
“DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEET”, EC-64 .
EC
Before confirming the concern, check and write down (print out using CONSULT-II or GST) the (1st trip) DTC and the
(1st trip) freeze frame data, then erase the DTC and the data. (Refer to EC-51 .) The (1st trip) DTC and the (1st trip)
freeze frame data can be used when duplicating the incident at STEP III & IV.
STEP II If the incident cannot be verified, perform EC-114, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . C
Study the relationship between the cause, specified by (1st trip) DTC, and the symptom described by the customer.
(The “Symptom Matrix Chart” will be useful. See EC-72 .)
Also check related service bulletins for information.
D
Try to confirm the symptom and under what conditions the incident occurs.
The “DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEET” and the freeze frame data are useful to verify the incident. Connect CONSULT-II
STEP III to the vehicle in DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG) mode and check real time diagnosis results.
If the incident cannot be verified, perform EC-114, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . E
If the malfunction code is detected, skip STEP IV and perform STEP V.
Try to detect the (1st trip) DTC by driving in (or performing) the “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Check and read the
(1st trip) DTC and (1st trip) freeze frame data by using CONSULT-II or GST.
During the (1st trip) DTC verification, be sure to connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle in DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG) F
mode and check real time diagnosis results.
STEP IV
If the incident cannot be verified, perform EC-114, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
In case the “DTC Confirmation Procedure” is not available, perform the “Overall Function Check” instead. The (1st
G
trip) DTC cannot be displayed by this check, however, this simplified “check” is an effective alternative.
The “NG” result of the “Overall Function Check” is the same as the (1st trip) DTC detection.
Take the appropriate action based on the results of STEP I through IV.
If the malfunction code is indicated, proceed to TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC PXXXX. H
If the normal code is indicated, proceed to the BASIC INSPECTION. (Refer to EC-68 .) If COSULT-II is available, per-
STEP V
form “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode with CONSULT-II and proceed to the “TOROUBLE DIAGNOSIS – SPECIFI-
CATION VALUE”. (Refer to EC-109 .) (If malfunction is detected, proceed to “PERAIR/REPLACE”.) Then perform
I
inspections according to the Symptom Matrix Chart. (Refer to EC-72 .)
Identify where to begin diagnosis based on the relationship study between symptom and possible causes. Inspect the
system for mechanical binding, loose connectors or wiring damage using (tracing) “Harness Layouts”.
Gently shake the related connectors, components or wiring harness with CONSULT-II set in “DATA MONITOR J
(AUTO TRIG)” mode.
Check the voltage of the related ECM terminals or monitor the output data from the related sensors with CONSULT-II.
Refer to EC-84 , EC-104 .
STEP VI
The “Diagnostic Procedure” in EC section contains a description based on open circuit inspection. A short circuit
K
inspection is also required for the circuit check in the Diagnostic Procedure. For details, refer to “Circuit Inspection” in
GI-24, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" .
Repair or replace the malfunction parts. L
If malfunctioning part cannot be detected, perform EC-114, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCI-
DENT" .
Once you have repaired the circuit or replaced a component, you need to run the engine in the same conditions and
circumstances which resulted in the customer's initial complaint. M
Perform the “DTC Confirmation Procedure” and confirm the normal code [DTC No. P0000] is detected. If the incident
STEP VII is still detected in the final check, perform STEP VI by using a method different from the previous one.
Before returning the vehicle to the customer, be sure to erase the unnecessary (already fixed) (1st trip) DTC in ECM
and TCM (Transmission control module). (Refer to EC-51, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC
INFORMATION" and AT-37, "HOW TO ERASE DTC" .)

EC-63
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET
Description
There are many operating conditions that lead to the malfunction of
engine components. A good grasp of such conditions can make trou-
bleshooting faster and more accurate.
In general, each customer feels differently about a incident. It is
important to fully understand the symptoms or conditions for a cus-
tomer complaint.
Utilize a diagnostic worksheet like the one on the next page in order
to organize all the information for troubleshooting.
Some conditions may cause the MI to come on steady or blink and
DTC to be detected. Examples:
● Vehicle ran out of fuel, which caused the engine to misfire. SEF907L

● Fuel filler cap was left off or incorrectly screwed on, allowing fuel
to evaporate into the atmosphere.

EC-64
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Worksheet Sample
A

EC

MTBL0017

DTC Inspection Priority Chart EBS00O3H

If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the following priority
chart.
NOTE:
If DTC U1000 and/or U1001 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC
U1000 and U1001. Refer to EC-120, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .

EC-65
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Priority Detected items (DTC)
1 ● U1000 U1001 CAN communication line
● P0107 P0108 Manifold absolute pressure sensor
● P0112 P0113 Intake air temperature sensor
● P0117 P0118 Engine coolant temperature sensor
● P0221 P0222 P0223 P1223 P1224 P1225 P1226 Throttle position sensor
● P0226 P0227 P0228 P1227 P1228 Accelerator pedal position sensor
● P0327 P0328 Knock sensor
● P0335 Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
● P0340 Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
● P0500 Vehicle speed sensor
● P0605 ECM
● P0705 Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch
● P1171 Intake error
● P1229 Sensor power supply
● P1610-P1615 NATS
● P1706 Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch
2 ● P0031 P0032 Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater
● P0037 P0038 Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
● P0132 P0133 P0134 P1143 P1144 Heated oxygen sensor 1
● P0138 P0139 P1146 P1147 Heated oxygen sensor 2
● P0444 EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
● P0710 P0720 P0725 P0731 P0732 P0733 P0734 P0740 P0745 P0750 P0755 P1705 P1760 A/T related sensors,
solenoid valves and switches
● P1065 ECM power supply
● P1111 Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
● P1122 Electric throttle control function
● P1124 P1126 Throttle control motor relay
● P1128 Throttle control mother
● P1805 Brake switch
3 ● P0011 Intake valve timing control
● P0171 P0172 Fuel injection system function
● P0300 - P0304 Misfire
● P0420 Three way catalyst function
● P1121 Electric throttle control actuator
● P1217 Engine over temperature (OVERHEAT)

Fail-safe Chart EBS00O3I

● When the DTC listed bellow is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MI lights up.
DTC No. Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
P0107 Manifold absolute pressure Engine speed will not rise more than 2,500 rpm due to the fuel cut.
P0108 sensor circuit
P0112 Intake air temperature sen-
Intake air temperature is deter mined as 30° (86°F).
P0113 sor circuit

EC-66
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
DTC No. Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
A
P0117 Engine coolant tempera- Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the time after turning
P0118 ture sensor circuit ignition switch “ON” or “START”.
CONSULT-II displays the engine coolant temperature decided by ECM.
Engine coolant temperature decided (CONSULT- EC
Condition
II display)
Just as ignition switch is turned
40°C (104°F)
ON or Start C
More than approx. 4 minutes after
80°C (176°F)
ignition ON or Start
40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F) D
Except as shown above
(Depends on the time)
When the fail-safe system for engine coolant temperature sensor is activated, the cool-
ing fan operates while engine is running. E
P0221 Throttle position sensor The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening
P0222 in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees.
P0223 The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the nor-
P1223 mal condition.
F
P1224 So, the acceleration will be poor.
P0226 Accelerator pedal position The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening
P0227 sensor in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees. G
P0228 The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the nor-
P1227 mal condition.
P1228 So, the acceleration will be poor.
H
P1121 Electric throttle control actu- While the vehicle is driving, it slows down gradually by fuel cut. After the vehicle stops,
ator the engine stalls.
(ECM detect the throttle The engine can restart in “N” or “P” position, and engine speed will not exceed 1,000
valve is stuck open.) rpm or more. I
P1122 Electric throttle control func- ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
tion fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
P1124 Throttle control motor relay ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a J
P1126 fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
P1128 Throttle control motor ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring. K
When accelerator pedal is depressed, engine speed will not rise more than 2,500 rpm
P1171 Intake air
due to fuel cut.
P1229 Sensor power supply ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a L
fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
● When there is an open circuit on MI circuit, the ECM can not warn the driver by lighting MI up when there
is a malfunction on engine control system. M
Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related diagnoses is continuously detected
as NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system has a malfunction and MI circuit is
open by means of operating fail-safe function.
The fail-safe function also operate when above diagnoses except MI circuit and demands the driver to
repair the malfunction.
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode Engine speed will not rise more than 2,500 rpm due to the fuel cut

EC-67
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Basic Inspection EBS00O3J

1. INSPECTION START
1. Check service records for any recent repairs that may indicate a related malfunction, or a current need for
scheduled maintenance.
2. Open engine hood and check the following:
– Harness connectors for improper connections
– Wiring harness for improper connections, pinches and cut
– Vacuum hoses for splits, kinks and improper connections
– Hoses and ducts for leaks
– Air cleaner clogging
– Gasket
3. Confirm that electrical or mechanical loads are not applied.
– Headlamp switch is OFF. SEF983U

– Air conditioner switch is OFF.

– Rear window defogger switch is OFF.
– Steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position, etc.
4. Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature
indicator points the middle of gauge.
Ensure engine stays below 1,000 rpm.

SEF976U

5. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-
load.
6. Make sure that no DTC is displayed with CONSULT-II or GST.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.

SEF977U

2. REPAIR OR REPLACE
Repair or replace components as necessary according to corresponding “Diagnostic Procedure”.

>> GO TO 3

EC-68
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
3. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED A
With CONSULT-II
1. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load.
EC
2. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no-
load, then run engine at idle speed for about 1 minute.

E
SEF978U

3. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.

M/T: 650 ± 50 rpm F
A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)

SEF058Y

I
Without CONSULT-II
1. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load.
2. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no-load, then run engine at idle speed for about J
1 minute.
3. Check idle speed.
K
M/T: 650 ± 50 rpm
A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
OK or NG L
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 4.

4. PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING M

1. Stop engine.
2. Perform EC-34, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .

>> GO TO 5.

5. PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING

Perform EC-34, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .

>> GO TO 6.

EC-69
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
6. PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING
Refer to EC-34, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 7.
No >> 1. Follow the instruction of “Idle Air Volume Learning”.
2. GO TO 4.

7. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
M/T: 650 ± 50 rpm
A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Check idle speed.
M/T: 650 ± 50 rpm
A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 8.

8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-247 .
● Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-241 .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> 1. Repair or replace.
2. GO TO 4.

9. CHECK ECM FUNCTION

1. Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but
this is the rarely the case.)
2. Perform initialization of NATS system and registration of NATS ignition key IDs. Refer to EC-52 .

>> GO TO 4.

10. CHECK IGNITION TIMING

1. Run engine at idle.
2. Check ignition timing with a timing light.
M/T: 5 ± 5° BTDC
A/T: 5 ± 5° BTDC (in “P” or “N” position)
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 11.

EC-70
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
11. PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING A
1. Stop engine.
2. Perform EC-34, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
EC
>> GO TO 12.

12. PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING C

Perform EC-34, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .

D
>> GO TO 13.

13. PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING E

Refer to EC-34, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully?
Yes or No F
Yes >> GO TO 14.
No >> 1. Follow the instruction of “Idle Air Volume Learning”.
2. GO TO 4. G

14. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN

H
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. I
M/T: 650 ± 50 rpm
A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
J
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Check idle speed. K
M/T: 650 ± 50 rpm
A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 17. M
15. CHECK IGNITION TIMING AGAIN
1. Run engine at idle.
2. Check ignition timing with a timing light.
M/T: 5 ± 5° BTDC
A/T: 5 ± 5° BTDC (in “P” or “N” position)
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 16.

EC-71
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
16. CHECK TIMING CHAIN INSTALLATION
Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-46, "TIMING CHAIN" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG >> 1. Repair the timing chain installation.
2. GO TO 4.

17. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-247 .
● Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-241 .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18.
NG >> 1. Repair or replace.
2. GO TO 4.

18. CHECK ECM FUNCTION

1. Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but
this is the rarely the case.)
2. Perform initialization of NATS system and registration of NATS ignition key IDs. Refer to EC-52 .

>> GO TO 4.
Symptom Matrix Chart EBS00O3K

SYSTEM — BASIC ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM

SYMPTOM
OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH
LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION
HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)

BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)

HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT

EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION

EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION

SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION

SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE

Reference
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE

page
IDLING VIBRATION
ENGINE STALL

Warranty symptom code AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA

Fuel Fuel pump circuit 1 1 2 3 2 2 2 3 2 EC-391
Fuel pressure regulator system 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 EC-37
Injector circuit 1 1 2 3 2 2 2 2 EC-385
Evaporative emission system 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 EC-405

EC-72
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
SYMPTOM
A

OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH

LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION
HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)

BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)

EC

HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT

EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION

EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION

SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION

SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE

Reference C

ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
page

IDLING VIBRATION
D

ENGINE STALL E

Warranty symptom code AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA

Air Positive crankcase ventilation sys- F
3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 1 EC-409
tem
Incorrect idle speed adjustment 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 EC-68
G
EC-276,
EC-278 ,
Electric throttle control actuator 1 1 2 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2
EC-284 ,
EC-289 H
Ignition Incorrect ignition timing adjustment 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 EC-68
Ignition circuit 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 EC-376
Main power supply and ground circuit 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 EC-115
I

Manifold absolute pressure sensor circuit 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 EC-136

Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit 1 1 2 2 2 3 2 2 3 1 2 EC-146 J
EC-201,
EC-207 ,
EC-341 ,
Throttle position sensor circuit 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 K
EC-347 ,
EC-349 ,
EC-360
EC-213, L
Accelerator pedal position sensor circuit 3 2 1 2 2 EC-222 ,
EC-351
EC-151, M
EC-157 ,
Heated oxygen sensor 1 circuit 1 2 3 2 2 2 2 EC-167 ,
EC-294 ,
EC-300
Knock sensor circuit 2 2 3 EC-237
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) circuit 2 2 EC-241
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) circuit 2 2 EC-247
Vehicle speed signal circuit 2 3 3 3 EC-263
EC-265,
ECM 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
EC-268
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cir-
3 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 3 EC-272
cuit
PNP switch circuit 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 EC-364
Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit 2 3 3 3 3 4 EC-396
Electrical load signal circuit 3 3 3 3 EC-401

EC-73
 Fuel
Air conditioner circuit

Fuel tank

Vapor lock
(continued on next page)

Fuel piping
Warranty symptom code
Warranty symptom code

Valve deposit

line, Low octane)

Poor fuel (Heavy weight gaso-
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection.
HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)

2
HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)

5
5
AA

AA
ENGINE STALL

2
ENGINE STALL

5
AB

AB
HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT

4
HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT

5
5
AC

AC
SYSTEM — ENGINE MECHANICAL & OTHER
SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION
3
SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION

5
5
AD

AD

EC-74
LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION
3
LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION

5
5
AE

AE
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
3

HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE

AF

AF
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
3

ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING

5
5
AG

AG
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

SYMPTOM

SYMPTOM
IDLING VIBRATION
3

IDLING VIBRATION

5
5
AH

AH
SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE
3

SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE

AJ

AJ
OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH
AK

AK
EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION
3

EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION

5
5
AL

AL
EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION
AM

AM
BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)
2

BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)

HA

HA

28
FL-8
page

page
BRC-6

—
—
—
ATC-11,
MTC-17

FL-3, EM-
Reference

Reference
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
SYMPTOM
A

OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH

LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION
HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)

BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)

EC

HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT

EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION

EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION

SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION

SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE

Reference C

ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
page

IDLING VIBRATION
D

ENGINE STALL E

Warranty symptom code AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA

Air Air duct F
Air cleaner
Air leakage from air duct EM-14 G
(Manifold absolute pressure sen-
sor —electric throttle control 5 5 5 5 5 5
actuator)
5 5 5 5
Electric throttle control actuator H
Air leakage from intake manifold/
EM-18
Collector/Gasket
Cranking Battery SC-4
I
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Alternator circuit SC-14
Starter circuit 3 SC-27 J
Signal plate/Flywheel/Drive plate 6 EM-69
PNP switch MT-8 or
4
AT-111 K
Engine Cylinder head
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 EM-57
Cylinder head gasket 4 3
L
Cylinder block
Piston 4
Piston ring M
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 EM-69
Connecting rod
Bearing
Crankshaft
Valve Timing chain EM-46
mecha-
Camshaft EM-34
nism
Intake valve timing control 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 EM-46
Intake valve
3 EM-57
Exhaust valve
Exhaust Exhaust manifold/Tube/Muffler/
Gasket EM-20, EX-
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
3
Three way catalyst

EC-75
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
SYMPTOM

OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH

LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION
HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)

BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)

HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT

EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION

EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION

SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION

SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE

Reference

ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
page

IDLING VIBRATION
ENGINE STALL

Warranty symptom code AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA

Lubrica- Oil pan/Oil strainer/Oil pump/Oil EM-22, LU-
tion filter/Oil gallery 6 , LU-7 ,
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 2 LU-3
Oil level (Low)/Filthy oil LU-4
Cooling Radiator/Hose/Radiator filler cap CO-10
Thermostat 5 CO-22
Water pump CO-20
Water gallery 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 2 5 CO-6
Cooling fan 5 CO-10
Coolant level (low)/Contaminated
CO-7
coolant
EC-52 or
NATS (Nissan Anti-theft System) 1 1
BL-201
1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection.

EC-76
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Engine Control Component Parts Location EBS00O3L

EC

MBIB0267E

EC-77
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]

MBIB0316E

EC-78
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]

EC

MBIB0317E

EC-79
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]

MBIB0318E

EC-80
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]

EC

F
MBIB0320E

MBIB0319E J

MBIB0282E

EC-81
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Circuit Diagram EBS00O3M

MBWA0265E

EC-82
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]

EC

MBWA0266E

EC-83
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout EBS00O3N

MBIB0045E

ECM Terminals and Reference Value EBS00O3O

PREPARATION
1. ECM is located left hand side of the engine room.
2. Remove ECM harness protector.

MBIB0274E

3. When disconnecting ECM harness connector, loosen it with

levers as far as they will go as shown at right.
4. Connect a break-out box (SST) and Y-cable adapter (SST)
between the ECM and ECM harness connector.
● Use extreme care not to touch 2 pins at one time.

● Data is for comparison and may not be exact.

MBIB0145E

ECM INSPECTION TABLE

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMI-
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
1 B ECM ground Engine ground
● Idle speed

EC-84
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
TERMI-
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) A
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
● Engine speed is below 3,800 rpm after the EC
following conditions are met.
– Engine: After warming up 0 - 1.0V
– Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 C
Heated oxygen sensor 2 and 4,000 rpm for one minute and at idle for
2 GY
heater one minute under no load.
[Ignition switch “ON”] D
● Engine stopped BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Engine is running] (11 - 14V)
● Engine speed is above 3,800 rpm E
Throttle control motor BATTERY VOLTAGE
3 LG [Ignition switch “ON”]
relay power supply (11 - 14V)

0 - 14V F
[Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped
Throttle control motor G
4 L ● Shift lever position is “D” (A/T model)
(Close)
● Shift lever position is “1st” (M/T model)
● Accelerator pedal is releasing
PBIB0534E
H

0 - 14V
[Ignition switch “ON”]
I
● Engine stopped
Throttle control motor
5 P ● Shift lever position is “D” (A/T model)
(Open)
● Shift lever position is “1st” (M/T model)
J
● Accelerator pedal is depressing
PBIB0533E

Approximately 3.0V K

[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition L
● Idle speed

Crankshaft position PBIB0527E M

13 Y
sensor (POS)
Approximately 3.0V

[Engine is running]
● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm

PBIB0528E

EC-85
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
TERMI-
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.

1.0 - 4.0V

[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
● Idle speed

PBIB0525E
Camshaft position sen-
14 R
sor (PHASE)
1.0 - 4.0V

[Engine is running]
● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.

PBIB0526E

[Engine is running]
15 W Knock sensor Approximately 2.5V
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
● Engine speed is Below 3,600 rpm after the
16 LG Heated oxygen sensor 2 following conditions are met. 0 - Approximately 1.0V
● Keeping the engine speed between 3,500
and 4,000 rpm for one minute and at idle for
one minute under no load.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)

[Engine is running]
● Idle speed

EVAP canister purge

PBIB0050E
19 LG volume control solenoid
valve
Approximately 10V

[Engine is running]
● Engine speed is about 2,000 rpm (More than
100 seconds after starting engine)

PBIB0520E

EC-86
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
TERMI-
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) A
COLOR
NO.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V) EC
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
C
● Idle speed

22 OR Injector No. 3
23 L Injector No. 1 PBIB0529E D
41 R Injector No. 4 BATTERY VOLTAGE
42 GY Injector No. 2
(11 - 14V)
E
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm
F

PBIB0530E

G
Approximately 7.0V

[Engine is running]
H
● Warm-up condition
Heated oxygen sensor 1
24 Y ● Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm.
heater
I
PBIB0519E

[Engine is running] BATTERY VOLTAGE

● Engine speed is above 3,600 rpm. (11 - 14V)
J
Sensors' ground [Engine is running]
29 B (Camshaft position sen- ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
sor) ● Idle speed K
Sensors' ground [Engine is running]
30 B (Crankshaft position ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
sensor) ● Idle speed L
Approximately 0 - 4.8V
Intake air temperature
34 OR [Engine is running] Output voltage varies with
sensor
intake air temperature. M
[Engine is running]
0 - Approximately 1.0V
35 BR Heated oxygen sensor 1 ● Warm-up condition
(Periodically change)
● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
45 L Sensor's power supply [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 5V
Sensor's power supply
46 W (Refrigerant pressure [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 5V
sensor)
Sensor's power supply
47 L (Throttle position sen- [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 5V
sor)

EC-87
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
TERMI-
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped
● Shift lever position is “D” (A/T model) More than 0.36V
● Shift lever position is “1st” (M/T model)
Throttle position ● Accelerator pedal fully released
49 Y
sensor 1 [Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped
● Shift lever position is “D” (A/T model) Less than 4.75V
● Shift lever position is “1st” (M/T model)
● Accelerator pedal fully depressed
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition Approximately 1.5V
Manifold absolute pres- ● Idle speed
51 W
sure sensor [Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition Approximately 1.2V
● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
[Engine is running]
Sensors' ground
54 — ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
(Knock sensor)
● Idle speed

Sensors' ground [Engine is running]

56 B (Manifold absolute pres- ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
sure sensor) ● Idle speed

Sensors' ground [Engine is running]

57 Y (Refrigerant pressure ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
sensor) ● Idle speed

0 - 0.1V

[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
● Idle speed

60 Y Ignition signal No. 3

61 PU Ignition signal No. 1 PBIB0521E

79 G Ignition signal No. 4

0 - 0.2V
80 BR Ignition signal No. 2

[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.

PBIB0522E

EC-88
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
TERMI-
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) A
COLOR
NO.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V) EC
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
C
● Idle speed

Intake valve timing MBIB0052E D

62 LG
control solenoid valve Approximately 4V - BATTERY
VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)
[Engine is running] E
● Warm-up condition
● When revving engine up to 2,000 rpm
quickly F

PBIB0532E

[Engine is running]
G
Sensors' ground
66 B (Throttle position sen- ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
sor) ● Idle speed
H
[Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped
● Shift lever position is “D” (A/T model) Less than 4.75V
I
● Shift lever position is “1st” (M/T model)
Throttle position ● Accelerator pedal fully released
68 R
sensor 2 [Ignition switch “ON”] J
● Engine stopped
● Shift lever position is “D” (A/T model) More than 0.36V
● Shift lever position is “1st” (M/T model) K
● Accelerator pedal fully depressed
[Engine is running]
L
Refrigerant pressure ● Warm-up condition
69 BR 1.0 - 4.0V
sensor ● Both A/C switch and blower switch are “ON”
(Compressor operates.)
M
Approximately 0 - 4.8V
Engine coolant tempera-
72 P [Engine is running] Output voltage varies with
ture sensor
engine coolant temperature.

Sensors' ground [Engine is running]

73 B (Engine coolant temper- ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
ature sensor) ● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
Sensors' ground
74 B ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
(Heated oxygen sensor)
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
Sensor's ground
82 B ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
(APP sensor 1)
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
Sensor's ground
83 B ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
(APP sensor 2)
● Idle speed

EC-89
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
TERMI-
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Ignition switch “ON”] BATTERY VOLTAGE
85 LG DATA link connector
● CONSULT-II or GST is disconnected. (11 - 14V)

86 W CAN communication line [Ignition switch “ON”] 1.0 - 2.5V

Sensor's power supply
90 OR [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 5V
(APP sensor 1)
Sensor's power supply
91 BR [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 5V
(APP sensor 2)
[Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped
Approximately 0.5V
● Shift lever position is “D” (A/T models)
Throttle position sensor ● Accelerator pedal fully released
92 GY signal output
(A/T models) [Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped
Approximately 4.2V
● Shift lever position is “D” (A/T models)
● Accelerator pedal fully depressed
94 R CAN communication line [Ignition switch “ON”] 2.5 - 4.0V
[Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped 0.3 - 0.6V
Accelerator pedal ● Accelerator pedal fully released
98 GY
position sensor 2 [Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped 1.95 - 2.4V
● Accelerator pedal fully depressed
[Ignition switch “ON”]
Approximately 0V
● Brake pedal fully released
101 W Stop lamp switch
[Ignition switch “ON”] BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Brake pedal depressed (11 - 14V)

[Ignition switch “ON”]

● Gear position is “P” or “N” (A/T models), Approximately 0V
102 GY PNP switch “Neutral” (M/T models)
[Ignition switch “ON”] BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Except the above gear position (11 - 14V)

10 - 11V

[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
● Idle speed

Tachometer signal MBIB0053E

103 L/OR output
(A/T models) 10 - 11V

[Engine is running]
● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm

MBIB0054E

EC-90
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
TERMI-
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) A
COLOR
NO.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
Throttle control motor [Ignition switch “OFF”]
104 G (11 - 14V) EC
relay
[Ignition switch “ON”] 0 - 1.0V
[Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped 0.6 - 0.9V C
Accelerator pedal posi- ● Accelerator pedal fully released
106 W
tion sensor 1 [Ignition switch “ON”]
D
● Engine stopped 3.9 - 4.7V
● Accelerator pedal fully depressed
[Ignition switch “OFF”] 0V
E
109 PU Ignition switch BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Ignition switch “ON”]
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running] F
[Ignition switch “OFF”]
0 - 1.0V
● For 5 seconds after turning ignition switch
ECM relay “OFF”
111 P
(Self shut-off) G
[Ignition switch “OFF”]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● 5 seconds passed after turning ignition (11 - 14V)
switch “OFF”
H
[Ignition switch “ON”]
● For 1 seconds after turning ignition switch
0 - 1.0V
“ON”
I
113 R Fuel pump relay [Engine is running]
[Ignition switch “ON”]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● More than 1 seconds after turning ignition (11 - 14V) J
switch “ON”.

115 B [Engine is running]

ECM ground Engine ground
116 B ● Idle speed K
119 BATTERY VOLTAGE
G Power supply for ECM [Ignition switch “ON”]
120 (11 - 14V)
Power supply for ECM BATTERY VOLTAGE L
121 BR [Ignition switch “OFF”]
(Back-up) (11 - 14V)

: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
M
CONSULT-II Function EBS00O3P

FUNCTION
Diagnostic test mode Function
This mode enables a technician to adjust some devices faster and more accurately by following the
Work support
indications on the CONSULT-II unit.
Self-diagnostic results such as 1st trip DTC, DTCs and 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data
Self-diagnostic results
can be read and erased quickly.*
Data monitor Input/Output data in the ECM can be read.
Input/Output of the specification for Basic fuel schedule, A/F feedback control value and the other data
Data monitor (SPEC)
monitor items can be read.
Diagnostic Test Mode in which CONSULT-II drives some actuators apart from the ECMs and also
Active test
shifts some parameters in a specified range.
Function test This mode is used to inform customers when their vehicle condition requires periodic maintenance.
DTC & SRT confirmation The status of system monitoring tests and the self-diagnosis status/result can be confirmed.
ECM part number ECM part number can be read.

EC-91
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
*: The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
● Diagnostic trouble codes
● 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes
● Freeze frame data
● 1st trip freeze frame data
● System readiness test (SRT) codes
● Test values
● Others

ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS/CONTROL SYSTEMS APPLICATION

DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC DTC & SRT
RESULTS DATA CONFIRMATION
Item WORK DATA
MONI- ACTIVE DTC
SUP- FREEZE MONI-
TOR TEST SRT WORK
PORT DTC*1 FRAME TOR
(SPEC) STATUS SUP-
DATA*2
PORT
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) × × × ×
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) × × ×
Manifold absolute pressure sensor × × ×
Engine coolant temperature sensor × × × × ×
Heated oxygen sensor 1 × × × × ×
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS

Heated oxygen sensor 2 × × × × ×

Vehicle speed signal × × × ×
Accelerator pedal position sensor × × ×
Throttle position sensor × × ×
INPUT

Intake air temperature sensor × × ×

Knock sensor ×
Refrigerant pressure sensor × ×
Closed throttle position switch
(accelerator pedal position sensor × ×
signal)
Air conditioner switch × ×
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch × × ×
Stop lamp switch × × ×
Battery voltage × ×
Electrical load signal × ×

EC-92
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE
A
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC DTC & SRT
RESULTS DATA CONFIRMATION
Item WORK DATA
MONI- ACTIVE DTC
SUP- FREEZE MONI-
TOR TEST SRT WORK EC
PORT DTC*1 FRAME TOR
(SPEC) STATUS SUP-
DATA*2
PORT
Injectors × × × C
Power transistor (Ignition timing) × × ×
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS

Throttle control motor relay × × × D

Throttle control motor ×
EVAP canister purge volume con-
× × × × E
trol solenoid valve
OUTPUT

Air conditioner relay × ×

Fuel pump relay × × × ×
F
Cooling fan relay × × × ×
Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater × × × ×
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater × × × × G
Intake valve timing control solenoid
× × × ×
valve
Calculated load value × × × H
X: Applicable
*1: This item includes 1st trip DTCs.
*2: This mode includes 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data. The items appear on CONSULT-II screen in freeze frame data I
mode only if a 1st trip DTC or DTC is detected. For details, refer to EC-43 .

EC-93
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection to CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carry out CAN communication.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Connect “CONSULT-II” and “CONSULT-II CONVERTER” to
data link connector, which is located under drivers side dash
panel.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.

MBIB0275E

4. Touch “START(NISSAN BASED VHCL)”.

MBIB0233E

5. Touch “ENGINE”.
If “ENGINE” is not indicated, go to GI-36 “CONSULT-II Data
Link Connector (DLC) Circuit”.

SEF995X

6. Perform each diagnostic test mode according to each service

procedure.
For further information, see the CONSULT-II Operation Manual.

SEF824Y

EC-94
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
WORK SUPPORT MODE
Work Item A
WORK ITEM CONDITION USAGE
FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE ● FUEL PUMP WILL STOP BY TOUCHING “START” DUR- When releasing fuel pressure
EC
ING IDLING. from fuel line
CRANK A FEW TIMES AFTER ENGINE STALLS.
IDLE AIR VOL LEARN ● THE IDLE AIR VOLUME THAT KEEPS THE ENGINE When learning the idle air volume
WITHIN THE SPECIFIED RANGE IS MEMORIZED IN C
ECM.
SELF-LEARNING CONT ● THE COEFFICIENT OF SELF-LEARNING CONTROL When clearing the coefficient of
MIXTURE RATIO RETURNS TO THE ORIGINAL COEF- self-learning control value D
FICIENT.
TARGET IGN TIM ADJ* ● IDLE CONDITION When adjusting target ignition tim-
ing E
TARGET IDLE RPM ADJ* ● IDLE CONDITION When setting target idle speed
*: This function is not necessary in the usual service procedure.
F
SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE
Self Diagnostic Item
Regarding items of “DTC and 1st trip DTC”, refer to EC-10, "INDEX FOR DTC" . G
Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data
Freeze frame data
item*
Description H

DIAG TROUBLE
● The engine control component part/control system has a trouble code, it is displayed as “PXXXX”. (Refer
CODE
to EC-10, "INDEX FOR DTC" .)
[PXXXX] I
● “Fuel injection system status” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
● One mode in the following is displayed.
“MODE 2”: Open loop due to detected system malfunction J
FUEL SYS-B1
“MODE 3”: Open loop due to driving conditions (power enrichment, deceleration enrichment)
“MODE 4”: Closed loop - using oxygen sensor(s) as feedback for fuel control
“MODE 5”: Open loop - has not yet satisfied condition to go to closed loop
K
CAL/LD VALUE [%] ● The calculated load value at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
COOLANT TEMP [°C]
● The engine coolant temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
or [°F] L
● “Long-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
L-FUEL TRIM-B1 [%] ● The long-term fuel trim indicates much more gradual feedback compensation to the base fuel schedule
than short-term fuel trim. M
● “Short-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
S-FUEL TRIM-B1 [%] ● The short-term fuel trim indicates dynamic or instantaneous feedback compensation to the base fuel
schedule.
ENGINE SPEED
● The engine speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[rpm]
VHCL SPEED [km/h]
● The vehicle speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
or [mph]
B/FUEL SCHDL
● The base fuel schedule at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[msec]
INT/A TEMP SE [°C]
● The intake air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
or [°F]
*: The items are the same as those of 1st trip freeze frame data.

EC-95
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
DATA MONITOR MODE
Monitored Item
×: Applicable
CAN
ECM
MAIN DIAG
Monitored item INPUT
SIG- SUP- Description Remarks
[Unit] SIG-
NALS PORT
NALS
MNTR
● Accuracy becomes poor if engine
● Indicates the engine speed computed speed drops below the idle rpm.
from the signals of the crankshaft posi-
ENG SPEED [rpm] × × ● If the signal is interrupted while the
tion sensor (POS) and camshaft posi-
tion sensor (PHASE). engine is running, an abnormal
value may be indicated.
● When the engine coolant tempera-
● The engine coolant temperature (deter- ture sensor is open or short-cir-
COOLAN TEMP/S mined by the signal voltage of the cuited, ECM enters fail-safe mode.
× ×
[°C] or [°F] engine coolant temperature sensor) is The engine coolant temperature
displayed. determined by the ECM is dis-
played.
● The signal voltage of the heated oxygen
HO2S1 (B1) [V] × ×
sensor 1 is displayed.
● The signal voltage of the heated oxygen
HO2S2 (B1) [V] ×
sensor 2 is displayed.

● Display of heated oxygen sensor 1 sig- ● After turning ON the ignition

nal during air-fuel ratio feedback control: switch, “RICH” is displayed until
RICH ... means the mixture became air-fuel mixture ratio feedback
HO2S1 MNTR (B1) “rich”, and control is being affected control begins.
× ×
[RICH/LEAN] toward a leaner mixture. ● When the air-fuel ratio feedback is
LEAN ... means the mixture became clamped, the value just before the
“lean”, and control is being affected clamping is displayed continu-
toward a rich mixture. ously.
● Display of heated oxygen sensor 2 sig-
nal:
RICH ... means the amount of oxygen
HO2S2 MNTR (B1) after three way catalyst is relatively ● When the engine is stopped, a
×
[RICH/LEAN] small. certain value is indicated.
LEAN ... means the amount of oxygen
after three way catalyst is relatively
large.
● When the engine is stopped, a
● The mean value of the air-fuel ratio certain value is indicated.
A/F ALPHA-B1 [%] × feedback correction factor per cycle is ● This data also includes the data
indicated. for the air-fuel ratio learning con-
trol.
VHCL SPEED SE ● The vehicle speed computed from the
× ×
[km/h] or [mph] vehicle speed signal is displayed.
BATTERY VOLT ● The power supply voltage of ECM is dis-
× ×
[V] played.
● “Base fuel schedule” indicates the fuel
B/FUEL SCHDL injection pulse width programmed into
×
[msec] ECM, prior to any learned on board cor-
rection.
ACCEL SEN 1 [V] × × ● The accelerator pedal position sensor
ACCEL SEN 2 [V] × signal voltage is displayed.

THRTL SEN 1 [V] × × ● The throttle position sensor signal volt-

THRTL SEN 2 [V] × age is displayed.

EC-96
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
CAN
ECM
MAIN DIAG A
Monitored item INPUT
SIG- SUP- Description Remarks
[Unit] SIG-
NALS PORT
NALS
MNTR
EC
● The intake air temperature (determined
INT/A TEMP SE
× × by the signal voltage of the intake air
[°C] or [°F]
temperature sensor) is indicated.
C
● The signal voltage of the manifold abso-
TURBO BST SEN ×
lute pressure sensor is displayed.
● Indicates start signal status [ON/OFF]
● After starting the engine, [OFF] is D
START SIGNAL computed by the ECM according to the
× × displayed regardless of the starter
[ON/OFF] signals of engine speed and battery volt-
signal.
age.
● Indicates idle position [ON/OFF] com- E
CLSD THL POS
× × puted by the ECM according to the
[ON/OFF]
accelerator pedal position sensor signal.
● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of the air F
AIR COND SIG
× × conditioner switch as determined by the
[ON/OFF]
air conditioner signal.
● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the G
P/N POSI SW
× × park/neutral position (PNP) switch sig-
[ON/OFF]
nal.
● [ON/OFF] condition of the power steer-
H
PW/ST SIGNAL ing oil pressure switch as determined by
× ×
[ON/OFF] the power steering oil pressure signal is
indicated.
● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the I
electrical load signal.
ON ... Rear window defogger switch is
LOAD SIGNAL
× × ON and/or lighting switch is in 2nd posi- J
[ON/OFF]
tion.
OFF ... Both rear window defogger
switch and lighting switch are OFF.
K
IGNITION SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from igni-
×
[ON/OFF] tion switch.
HEATER FAN SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the
× L
[ON/OFF] heater fan switch signal.
BRAKE SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the
×
[ON/OFF] stop lamp switch signal.
M
● Indicates the actual fuel injection pulse ● When the engine is stopped, a
INJ PULSE-B1
× width compensated by ECM according certain computed value is indi-
[msec]
to the input signals. cated.
IGN TIMING ● Indicates the ignition timing computed ● When the engine is stopped, a
×
[BTDC] by ECM according to the input signals. certain value is indicated.
● “Calculated load value” indicates the
CAL/LD VALUE [%] value of the current airflow divided by
peak airflow.
● Indicates the EVAP canister purge vol-
ume control solenoid valve control value
PURG VOL C/V computed by the ECM according to the
[%] input signals.
● The opening becomes larger as the
value increases.
INT/V TIM (B1) ● Indicates [°CA] of intake camshaft
[°CA] advanced angle.

EC-97
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
CAN
ECM
MAIN DIAG
Monitored item INPUT
SIG- SUP- Description Remarks
[Unit] SIG-
NALS PORT
NALS
MNTR
● The control condition of the intake valve
timing control solenoid valve (deter-
mined by ECM according to the input
signals) is indicated.
INT/V SOL (B1) [%]
ON ... intake valve timing control is oper-
ating.
OFF ... Intake valve timing control is not
operating.
● The air conditioner relay control condi-
AIR COND RLY
× tion (determined by ECM according to
[ON/OFF]
the input signals) is indicated.
● Indicates the fuel pump relay control
FUEL PUMP RLY
× condition determined by ECM according
[ON/OFF]
to the input signals.
● Indicates the throttle control motor relay
THRTL RELAY
× control condition determined by the
[ON/OFF]
ECM according to the input signals.
● Indicates the condition of the cooling fan
(determined by ECM according to the
COOLING FAN input signals).
[HI/LOW/OFF] HI ... High speed operation
LOW ... Low speed operation
OFF ... Stop
● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of heated
HO2S1 HTR (B1)
oxygen sensor 1 heater determined by
[ON/OFF]
ECM according to the input signals.
● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of heated
HO2S2 HTR (B1)
oxygen sensor 2 heater determined by
[ON/OFF]
ECM according to the input signals.
● Indicates the vehicle speed computed
VEHICLE SPEED
× from the secondary speed sensor sig-
[km/h] or [mph]
nal.
● Display the condition of idle air volume
learning
IDL A/V LEARN YET ... Idle air volume learning has not
[YET/CMPLT] been performed yet.
CMPLT ... Idle air volume learning has
already been performed successfully.
TRVL AFTER MIL
● Distance traveled while MI is activated.
[km] or [mile]
● Indicates the heated oxygen sensor 1
O2 SEN HTR DTY
heater control valve computed by the
[%]
ECM according to the input signals.
AC PRESS SEN ● The signal voltage from the refrigerant
×
[V] pressure sensor is displayed.
● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of
CRUISE LAMP
CRUISE lamp determined by the ECM
[ON/OFF]
according to the input signals.

EC-98
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
CAN
ECM
MAIN DIAG A
Monitored item INPUT
SIG- SUP- Description Remarks
[Unit] SIG-
NALS PORT
NALS
MNTR
EC
Voltage [V]
Frequency ● Only “#” is displayed if item is
[msec], [Hz] or [%] unable to be measured.
C
DUTY-HI ● Voltage, frequency, duty cycle or pulse ● Figures with “#”s are temporary
width measured by the probe. ones. They are the same figures
DUTY-LOW
as an actual piece of data which
PLS WIDTH-HI was just previously measured. D
PLS WIDTH-LOW
CAN COMM
× E
[OK/NG]
CAN CIRC 1
×
[OK/UNKWN]
CAN CIRC 2 F
×
[OK/UNKWN]
CAN CIRC 3
×
[OK/UNKWN] G
CAN CIRC 4
× ● These items are not displayed in
[OK/UNKWN] ● Indicates the communication condition
“SELECTION FROM MENU”
CAN CIRC 5 of CAN communication line. H
× mode.
[OK/UNKWN]
CAN CIRC 6
×
[OK/UNKWN] I
CAN CIRC 7
×
[OK/UNKWN]
CAN CIRC 8 J
×
[OK/UNKWN]
CAN CIRC 9
×
[OK/UNKWN] K
NOTE:
● Any monitored item that does not match the vehicle being diagnosed is deleted from the display automatically.

DATA MONITOR (SPEC) MODE L

Monitored Item
ECM
Main M
Monitored item [Unit] input Description Remarks
signals
signals
● Indicates the engine speed computed
ENG SPEED [rpm] × from the signal of the crankshaft position
sensor (POS).
● “Base fuel schedule” indicates the fuel
B/FUEL SCHDL injection pulse width programmed into ● When engine is running specification
[msec] ECM, prior to any learned on board cor- range is indicated.
rection.
● When engine is running specification
● The mean value of the air-fuel ratio feed- range is indicated.
A/F ALPHA-B1 [%] × back correction factor per cycle is indi-
cated. ● This data also includes the data for the
air-fuel ratio learning control.
NOTE:
● Any monitored item that does not match the vehicle being diagnosed is deleted from the display automatically.

EC-99
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
ACTIVE TEST MODE
Test Item
TEST ITEM CONDITION JUDGEMENT CHECK ITEM (REMEDY)
● Engine: Return to the original ● Harness and connectors
FUEL INJEC- trouble condition If trouble symptom disappears, see
● Fuel injectors
TION ● Change the amount of fuel injec- CHECK ITEM.
tion using CONSULT-II. ● Heated oxygen sensor 1

● Engine: Return to the original

trouble condition
IGNITION TIM- If trouble symptom disappears, see ● Perform “Idle Air Volume Learn-
● Timing light: Set
ING CHECK ITEM. ing”.
● Retard the ignition timing using
CONSULT-II.

● Engine: After warming up, idle ● Harness and connectors

the engine. ● Compression
POWER BAL- ● A/C switch “OFF” ● Fuel injectors
Engine runs rough or dies.
ANCE ● Shift lever “N” ● Power transistor
● Cut off each injector signal one at ● Spark plugs
a time using CONSULT-II. ● Ignition coils

● Ignition switch: ON ● Harness and connectors

1 Cooling fan moves and stops. ● Cooling fan relay
COOLING FAN* ● Turn the cooling fan “ON” and
“OFF” with CONSULT-II. ● Cooling fan motor

● Engine: Return to the original ● Harness and connectors

ENG COOLANT trouble condition If trouble symptom disappears, see ● Engine coolant temperature sen-
TEMP ● Change the engine coolant tem- CHECK ITEM. sor
perature using CONSULT-II. ● Fuel injectors
● Ignition switch: ON (Engine
stopped)
FUEL PUMP Fuel pump relay makes the operat- ● Harness and connectors
RELAY ● Turn the fuel pump relay “ON” ing sound. ● Fuel pump relay
and “OFF” using CONSULT-II
and listen to operating sound.
● Engine: After warming up, run
engine at 1,500 rpm.
PURG VOL ● Change the EVAP canister purge Engine speed changes according to ● Harness and connectors
CONT/V volume control solenoid valve the opening percent. ● Solenoid valve
opening percent using CON-
SULT-II.
● Engine: Return to the original
● Harness and connectors
V/T ASSIGN trouble condition If trouble symptom disappears, see
ANGLE CHECK ITEM. ● Intake valve timing control sole-
● Change intake valve timing using
noid valve
CONSULT-II.
*1:Leaving cooling fan “OFF” with CONSULT-II while engine is running may cause the engine to overheat.

DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION MODE

SRT STATUS Mode
For details, refer to EC-43, "SYSTEM READINESS TEST (SRT) CODE" .
SRT Work Support Mode
This mode enables a technician to drive a vehicle to set the SRT while monitoring the SRT status.

EC-100
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
DTC Work Support Mode
Test mode Test item Condition Reference page
A

HO2S1 (B1) P0133 EC-157

HO2S1 (B1) P0134 EC-167 EC
HO2S1
HO2S1 (B1) P1143 EC-294
Refer to corresponding
HO2S1 (B1) P1144 trouble diagnosis for EC-300
DTC. C
HO2S2 (B1) P0139 EC-180
H02S2 HO2S2 (B1) P1146 EC-306
HO2S2 (B1) P1147 EC-314
D
REAL TIME DIAGNOSIS IN DATA MONITOR MODE (RECORDING VEHICLE DATA)
Description
CONSULT-II has two kinds of triggers and they can be selected by touching “SETTING” in “DATA MONITOR” E
mode.
1. “AUTO TRIG” (Automatic trigger):
● The malfunction will be identified on the CONSULT-II screen
F
in real time.
In other words, DTC/1st trip DTC and malfunction item will be
displayed if the malfunction is detected by ECM. G
At the moment a malfunction is detected by ECM, “MONI-
TOR” in “DATA MONITOR” screen is changed to “Recording
Data ... xx%” as shown at right, and the data after the mal-
H
function detection is recorded. Then when the percentage
reached 100%, “REAL-TIME DIAG” screen is displayed. If
“STOP” is touched on the screen during “Recording Data ...
xx%”, “REAL-TIME DIAG” screen is also displayed. I
MBIB0295E
The recording time after the malfunction detection and the
recording speed can be changed by “TRIGGER POINT” and
“Recording Speed”. Refer to CONSULT-II OPERATION MAN- J
UAL.
2. “MANU TRIG” (Manual trigger):
● DTC/1st trip DTC and malfunction item will not be displayed
K
automatically on CONSULT-II screen even though a malfunc-
tion is detected by ECM.
DATA MONITOR can be performed continuously even though
a malfunction is detected. L

SEF707X

Operation M
1. “AUTO TRIG”
● While trying to detect the DTC/1st trip DTC by performing the “DTC Confirmation Procedure”, be sure
to select to “DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)” mode. You can confirm the malfunction at the moment it is
detected.
● While narrowing down the possible causes, CONSULT-II should be set in “DATA MONITOR (AUTO
TRIG)” mode, especially in case the incident is intermittent.
When you are inspecting the circuit by gently shaking (or twisting) the suspicious connectors, compo-
nents and harness in the “DTC Confirmation Procedure”, the moment a malfunction is found the DTC/
1st trip DTC will be displayed. (Refer to “Incident Simulation Tests” in GI-24, "How to Perform Efficient
Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" .)
2. “MANU TRIG”
● If the malfunction is displayed as soon as “DATA MONITOR” is selected, reset CONSULT-II to “MANU
TRIG”. By selecting “MANU TRIG” you can monitor and store the data. The data can be utilized for fur-
ther diagnosis, such as a comparison with the value for the normal operating condition.

EC-101
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]

PBIB0197E

Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function EBS00O3Q

DESCRIPTION
Generic Scan Tool (OBDII scan tool) complying with SAE J1978 has
8 different functions explained below.
ISO9141 is used as the protocol.
The name “GST” or “Generic Scan Tool” is used in this service man-
ual.

SEF139P

FUNCTION
Diagnostic test mode Function
This mode gains access to current emission-related data values, including analog inputs
MODE 1 READINESS TESTS
and outputs, digital inputs and outputs, and system status information.
This mode gains access to emission-related data value which were stored by ECM during
MODE 2 (FREEZE DATA) the freeze frame. For details, refer to EC-43, "FREEZE FRAME DATA AND 1ST TRIP
FREEZE FRAME DATA" .
This mode gains access to emission-related power train trouble codes which were stored
MODE 3 DTCs
by ECM.

EC-102
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Diagnostic test mode Function
A
This mode can clear all emission-related diagnostic information. This includes:
● Clear number of diagnostic trouble codes (MODE 1)
● Clear diagnostic trouble codes (MODE 3)
EC
MODE 4 CLEAR DIAG INFO ● Clear trouble code for freeze frame data (MODE 1)
● Clear freeze frame data (MODE 2)
● Reset status of system monitoring test (MODE 1)
C
● Clear on board monitoring test results (MODE 6 and 7)
This mode accesses the results of on board diagnostic monitoring tests of specific com-
MODE 6 (ON BOARD TESTS)
ponents/systems that are not continuously monitored. D
This mode enables the off board test drive to obtain test results for emission-related pow-
MODE 7 (ON BOARD TESTS) ertrain components/systems that are continuously monitored during normal driving condi-
tions.
E
MODE 8 — This mode is not applicable on this vehicle.
This mode enables the off-board test device to request specific vehicle information such
MODE 9 (CALIBRATION ID)
as Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) and Calibration IDs.
F
GST INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Connect “GST” to data link connector, which is located under G
drivers side dash panel near the fuse box cover.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
H

MBIB0275E
J

4. Enter the program according to instruction on the screen or in

the operation manual. K
(*: Regarding GST screens in this section, sample screens are
shown.)
L

SEF398S

5. Perform each diagnostic mode according to each service proce-

dure.
For further information, see the GST Operation Manual of the
tool maker.

SEF416S

EC-103
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00O3R

Remarks:
● Specification data are reference values.
● Specification data are output/input values which are detected or supplied by the ECM at the connector.
* Specification data may not be directly related to their components signals/values/operations.
i.e. Adjust ignition timing with a timing light before monitoring IGN TIMING, because the monitor may show the specification data in
spite of the ignition timing not being adjusted to the specification data. This IGN TIMING monitors the data calculated by the ECM
according to the signals input from the camshaft position sensor and other ignition timing related sensors.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
● Tachometer: Connect
Almost the same speed as the
ENG SPEED ● Run engine and compare CONSULT-II value with the tachometer indica- tachometer indication.
tion.
● Engine: After warming up Idle 2.5 - 3.5 msec
● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/
B/FUEL SCHDL T)
2,000 rpm 2.5 - 3.5 msec
● Air conditioner switch: OFF
● No-load
Maintaining engine speed at 2,000
A/F ALPHA-B1 ● Engine: After warming up 54% - 155%
rpm
COOLAN TEMP/S ● Engine: After warming up More than 70°C (158°F)
Maintaining engine speed at 2,000
HO2S1 (B1) ● Engine: After warming up 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
rpm
● Engine: After warming up
● Keeping the engine speed Revving engine from idle to 3,000
HO2S2 (B1) between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
rpm quickly.
for one minute and at idle for
one minute under no load.
LEAN ←→ RICH
Maintaining engine speed at 2,000
HO2S1 MNTR (B1) ● Engine: After warming up Changes more than 5 times dur-
rpm
ing 10 seconds.
● Engine: After warming up
● Keeping the engine speed
Revving engine from idle to 3,000
HO2S2 MNTR (B1) between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm LEAN ←→ RICH
rpm quickly.
for one minute and at idle for
one minute under no load.
● Turn drive wheels and compare CONSULT-II value with the speedometer Almost the same speed as the
VEH SPEED SE
indication. speedometer indication.
BATTERY VOLT ● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) 11 - 14V

● Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.6 - 0.9V

ACCEL SEN1
(Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed 4.0 - 4.8V

● Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.6 - 0.9V

ACCEL SEN2*1
(Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed 3.9 - 4.8V
● Ignition switch: ON
Accelerator pedal: Fully released More than 0.36V
(Engine stopped)
THRTL SEN1
THRTL SEN2*1 ● Shift lever:
D (A/T model) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V
1st (M/T model)
● Engine: After warming up At idle Approximately 1.5V
● Air conditioner switch: OFF
TURBO BST SEN
● Shift lever: N At 2,500 rpm Approximately 1.2V
● No-load
START SIGNAL ● Ignition switch: ON → START → ON OFF → ON → OFF

● Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released ON

CLSD THL POS
(Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed OFF

EC-104
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
A
Air conditioner switch: OFF OFF
● Engine: After warming up, idle
AIR COND SIG Air conditioner switch: ON
the engine ON
(Compressor operates.)
EC
Shift lever:
ON
P/N POSI SW ● Ignition switch: ON P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T)
Shift lever: Except above OFF
C
Steering wheel is in neutral position.
● Engine: After warming up, idle OFF
PW/ST SIGNAL (Forward direction)
the engine
Steering wheel is turned. ON
D
Rear window defogger switch is ON
ON
and/or lighting switch is in 2nd.
LOAD SIGNAL ● Ignition switch: ON
Rear window defogger switch is OFF E
OFF
and lighting switch is OFF.
IGNITION SW ● Ignition switch: ON → OFF → ON ON → OFF → ON

● Engine: After warming up, idle Heater fan is operating. ON F

HEATER FAN SW
the engine Heater fan is not operating OFF
Brake pedal: Fully released OFF
BRAKE SW ● Ignition switch: ON G
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON
● Engine: After warming up Idle 2.0 - 3.0 msec
● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/
H
INJ PULSE-B1 T)
2,000 rpm 1.9 - 2.9 msec
● Air conditioner switch: OFF
● No-load
I
● Engine: After warming up Idle 0° - 10° BTDC
● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/
IGN TIMING T)
J
2,000 rpm 25° - 45° BTDC
● Air conditioner switch: OFF
● No-load
● Engine: After warming up Idle 10% - 35% K
● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/
CAL/LD VALUE T)
2,500 rpm 10% - 35%
● Air conditioner switch: OFF L
● No-load
● Engine: After warming up Idle 1.0 - 4.0 g·m/s
● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/ M
MASS AIRFLOW T)
2,500 rpm 4.0 - 10.0 g·m/s
● Air conditioner switch: OFF
● No-load
● Engine: After warming up Idle 0%
● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/
PURG VOL C/V T)
2,000 rpm 20 - 30%
● Air conditioner switch: OFF
● No-load
● Engine: After warming up Idle −5° - 5°CA
● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/
INT/V TIM (B1) T)
When revving up to 2,000 rpm quickly Approx. 0° - 20°CA
● Air conditioner switch: OFF
● No-load

EC-105
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
● Engine: After warming up Idle 0% - 2%
● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/
INT/V SOL (B1) T)
When revving up to 2,000 rpm quickly Approx. 0% - 50%
● Air conditioner switch: OFF
● No-load
Air conditioner switch: OFF OFF
● Engine: After warming up, idle
AIR COND RLY Air conditioner switch: ON
the engine ON
(Compressor operates)
● For 1 seconds after turning ignition switch ON
ON
FUEL PUMP RLY ● Engine running or cranking
● Except above conditions OFF
THRTL RELAY ● Ignition switch: ON ON
Engine coolant temperature is 94°C
OFF
(201°F) or less
● Engine: After warming up, idle Engine coolant temperature is
COOLING FAN the engine between 95°C (203°F) and 104°C LOW*2
● Air conditioner switch: OFF (210°F)
Engine coolant temperature is 105°C
(212°F) or more HIGH*2

● Engine: After warming up

ON
HO2S1 HTR (B1) ● Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm
● Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm OFF
● Engine speed is below 3,800 rpm after the following conditions are met.
– Engine: After warming up
ON
HO2S2 HTR (B1) – Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for one minute
and at idle for one minute under no load.
● Engine speed: Above 3,800 rpm OFF
Vehicle has traveled after MI has 0 - 65,535 km
TRVL AFTER MIL ● Ignition switch: ON
turned ON. (0 - 40,723 mile)
● Engine coolant temperature when engine started: More than 80°C
O2SEN HTR DTY (176°F) Approx. 50%
● Engine speed: below 3,600 rpm
● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Approx. 0V
AC PRESS SEN ● Engine: Idle
1.0 - 4.0V
● Air conditioner switch: OFF
CAN COMM OK
CAN CIRC 1 OK
CAN CIRC 2 OK or UNKWN
CAN CIRC 3 OK
CAN CIRC 4 OK
● Ignition switch: ON
CAN CIRC 5 UNKWN
CAN CIRC 6 OK
CAN CIRC 7 OK
CAN CIRC 8 UNKWN
CAN CIRC 9 OK or UNKWN

*1 : Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal and throttle position sensor 2 signal are converted by ECM internally. Thus, they differ
from ECM terminals voltage signal.
*2: Models without air conditioner, cooling fan operates only ON and OFF operation, but CONSULT-II display will change OFF, LOW and
HI depends on engine coolant temperature.

EC-106
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor Mode EBS00O3S

A
The following are the major sensor reference graphs in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
CLSD THL POS, ACCEL SEN 1, THRTL SEN 1
Below is the data for “CLSD THL POS”, “ACCEL SEN 1” and “THRTL SEN 1” when depressing the accelera- EC
tor pedal with the ignition switch “ON” and with selector lever in “D” position (A/T models) or with shift lever in
“1st” position (M/T models).
The signal of “ACCEL SEN 1” and “THRTL SEN 1” should rise gradually without any intermittent drop or rise
C
after “CLSD THL POS” is changed from “ON” to “OFF”.

PBIB0198E

ENG SPEED, THRTL SEN 1, HO2S2 (B1), HO2S1 (B1), INJ PULSE-B1 G
Below is the data for “ENG SPEED”, “THRTL SEN 1”, “HO2S2 (B1)”, “HO2S1 (B1)” and “INJ PULSE-B1”
when revving engine quickly up to 4,800 rpm under no load after warming up engine sufficiently.
Each value is for reference, the exact value may vary. H

K
MBIB0545E

EC-107
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]

PBIB0668E

EC-108
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE PFP:00031
A
Description EBS00O3T

The specification (SP) value indicates the tolerance of the value that is displayed in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)”
mode of CONSULT-II during normal operation of the Engine Control System. When the value in “DATA MONI- EC
TOR (SPEC)” mode is within the SP value, the Engine Control System is confirmed OK. When the value in
“DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode is NOT within the SP value, the Engine Control System may have one or
more malfunctions.
The SP value is used to detect malfunctions that may affect the Engine Control System, but will not light the C
MI.
The SP value will be displayed for the following three items:
● B/FUEL SCHDL (The fuel injection pulse width programmed into ECM prior to any learned on board cor- D
rection)
● A/F ALPHA-B1 (The mean value of air-fuel ratio feedback correction factor per cycle)
E
Testing Condition EBS00O3U

● Vehicle driven distance: More than 5,000 km (3,017 miles)

● Barometric pressure: 98.3 - 104.3 kPa (0.983 - 1.043 bar, 1.003 - 1.064 kg/cm2 , 14.25 - 15.12 psi) F
● Atmospheric temperature: 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)
● Engine coolant temperature: 75 - 95°C (167 - 203°F)
G
● Transmission: Warmed-up*1
● Electrical load: Not applied*2
● Engine speed: Idle H
*1: For A/T models, after the engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature, drive vehicle until “FLUID
TEMP SE” (A/T fluid temperature sensor signal) indicates more than 60°C (140°F).
For M/T models, after the engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature, drive vehicle for 5 minutes. I
*2: Rear window defogger switch, air conditioner switch, lighting switch are “OFF”. Steering wheel is straight
ahead.
Inspection Procedure EBS00O3V J
NOTE:
Perform “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode in maximum scale display.
K
1. Perform EC-68, "Basic Inspection" .
2. Confirm that the testing conditions indicated above are met.
3. Select “B/FUEL SCHDL” and “A/F ALPHA-B1” in “DATA MONI- L
TOR (SPEC)” mode with CONSULT-II.
4. Make sure that monitor items are within the SP value.
5. If NG, go to EC-110, "Diagnostic Procedure" . M

SEF601Z

EC-109
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00O3W

CHECK A/F ALPHA–B1

SEF613ZD

EC-110
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]

EC

SEF768Z

EC-111
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
CHECK B/FUEL SCHDL

PBIA1516E

EC-112
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]

EC

MBIB0658E

EC-113
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT PFP:00006

Description EBS00O3X

Intermittent incidents (I/I) may occur. In many cases, the malfunction resolves itself (the part or circuit function
returns to normal without intervention). It is important to realize that the symptoms described in the customer's
complaint often do not recur on (1st trip) DTC visits. Realize also that the most frequent cause of I/I occur-
rences is poor electrical connections. Because of this, the conditions under which the incident occurred may
not be clear. Therefore, circuit checks made as part of the standard diagnostic procedure may not indicate the
specific malfunctioning area.
Common I/I Report Situations
STEP in Work Flow Situation
II The CONSULT-II is used. The SELF-DIAG RESULTS screen shows time data other than “0” or “[1t]”.
III The symptom described by the customer does not recur.
IV (1st trip) DTC does not appear during the DTC Confirmation Procedure.
VI The Diagnostic Procedure for PXXXX does not indicate the malfunctioning area.

Diagnostic Procedure EBS00O3Y

1. INSPECTION START
Erase (1st trip) DTCs. Refer to EC-51, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMA-
TION" .

>> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK GROUND TERMINALS

Check ground terminals for corroding or loose connection.
Refer to GI-24, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" , “Incident Simulation Tests”,
“Ground Inspection”.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace.

3. SEARCH FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT

Perform GI-24, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" , “Incident Simulation Tests”.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace.

EC-114
 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM PFP:24110
A
Wiring Diagram EBS00O3Z

EC

MBWA0267E

EC-115
 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
1 B [Engine is running]
115 B ECM ground Engine ground
116 B ● Idle speed

[Ignition switch “OFF”] 0V

109 PU Ignition switch BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Ignition switch “ON”]
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch “OFF”] 0 - 1.0V
ECM relay ● For 5 seconds after turning ignition switch “OFF”
111 P
(Self shut-off) [Ignition switch “OFF”]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● 5 seconds passed after turning ignition switch (11 - 14V)
“OFF”
119 Power supply for BATTERY VOLTAGE
G [Ignition switch “ON”]
120 ECM (11 - 14V)

Diagnostic Procedure EBS00O40

1. INSPECTION START
Start engine.
Is engine running?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 8.
No >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and then “ON”.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 109 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.

MBIB0015E

3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Harness connectors M1, E101
● Fuse block (J/B) connector M16
● 10A fuse
● Harness for open or short between ECM and fuse

>> Repair harness or connectors.

EC-116
 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
4. CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I A
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 1, 115, 116 and engine ground. EC
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
C
4. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. D
NG >> GO TO 5.

5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART E

Check the following.
● Harness connectors F1, E50
F
● Harness for open or short between ECM and engine ground

>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. G

6. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1. Reconnect ECM harness connector. H
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
3. Check voltage between IPDE E/R harness connector E14 termi-
nal 33 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. I

Voltage: Battery voltage

OK or NG J
OK >> Go to EC-376, "IGNITION SIGNAL" .
NG >> GO TO 7.
K

MBIB0601E
L
7. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and then “OFF”. M
2. Check voltage between ECM terminals 119, 120 and ground
with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: After turning ignition switch “OFF”, battery
voltage will exist for a few seconds, then
drop approximately 0V.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG (Battery voltage does not exist.)>>GO TO 8.
NG (Battery voltage exists for more than a few seconds.)>>GO TO
13. MBIB0016E

EC-117
 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
8. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 111 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 10.

PBIB1191E

9. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-V

1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 119, 120 and IPDM E/R terminal 32.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

10. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-VI

1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 111 and IPDM E/R terminal 29.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

11. CHECK 20A FUSE

1. Disconnect 20A fuse from IPDM E/R.
2. Check 20A fuse.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> Replace 20A fuse.

EC-118
 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
12. CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II A
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 1, 115, 116 and engine ground. EC
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
C
4. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13. D
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.

13. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT E

Refer to EC-114, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
F
OK >> Replace IPDM E/R.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.

EC-119
 DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE PFP:23710

Description EBS00O42

CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle mul-
tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many elec-
tronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other
control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2
communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring.
Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00O43

Trouble diagnosis
DTC No. DTC detecting condition Possible cause
name

U1000*1 ● ECM cannot communicate to other control

1000*1 units. ● Harness or connectors
CAN communication
(CAN communication line is open or
line ECM cannot communicate for more than the
U1001*2 ●
shorted.)
specified time.
1001*2
*1:These self-diagnosis have the one trip detection logic.
*2:The MI will not light up for this self-diagnosis.

DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00O44

1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 3 seconds.

2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. If 1st trip DTC or DTC is detected, go to EC-122, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

EC-120
 DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Wiring Diagram EBS00O45

EC

MBWA0268E

EC-121
 DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00O46

1. INSPECTION START
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Print out the CONSULT-II screen.
A/T Models with EPS

MBIB0296E

A/T Models without EPS

MBIB0297E

M/T Models with EPS

MBIB0298E

M/T Models without EPS

MBIB0299E

>> Go to LAN-3, "Precautions When Using CONSULT-II" .

EC-122
 DTC P0011 IVT CONTROL
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
DTC P0011 IVT CONTROL PFP:23796
A
Description EBS00O47

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor Input signal to ECM ECM function Actuator EC
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Engine speed
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Intake valve Intake valve timing control
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature timing control solenoid valve C
Vehicle speed signal* Vehicle speed
*: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
D

PBIB0540E
J
This mechanism hydraulically controls cam phases continuously with the fixed operating angle of the intake
valve.
The ECM receives signals such as crankshaft position, camshaft position, engine speed, and engine coolant
temperature. Then, the ECM sends ON/OFF pulse duty signals to the intake valve timing control solenoid K
valve depending on driving status. This makes it possible to control the shut/open timing of the intake valve to
increase engine torque in low/mid speed range and output in high-speed range.
L
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00O48

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION M
● Engine: After warming up Idle −5° - 5°CA
● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/
INT/V TIM (B1) T)
When revving up to 2,000 rpm quickly Approx. 0° - 20°CA
● Air conditioner switch: OFF
● No-load
● Engine: After warming up Idle 0% - 2%
● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/
INT/V SOL (B1) T)
When revving up to 2,000 rpm quickly Approx. 0% - 50%
● Air conditioner switch: OFF
● No-load

On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00O49

The MI will not light up for this self-diagnosis.

EC-123
 DTC P0011 IVT CONTROL
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]

Trouble diagnosis
DTC No. Detecting condition Possible cause
name
● Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
P0011 Intake valve timing There is a gap between angle of target and ● Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
0011 control performance phase-control angle degree. ● Accumulation of debris to the signal pick-up
portion of the camshaft

FAIL-SAFE MODE
ECM enters fail-safe mode when the malfunction is detected.
Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
Intake valve timing control The signal is not energized to the solenoid valve and the valve control does not function

DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00O4A

CAUTION:
Always drive at a safe speed.
NOTE:
● If DTC P0011 is displayed with DTC P1111, first perform trouble diagnosis for “DTC P1111”. See
EC-272 .
● If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and
wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 10V and 16V at
idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Maintain the following conditions for at least 20 consecutive sec-
onds.
ENG SPEED 1,700 - 3,175 rpm (A constant rotation is maintained.)
COOLANT TEMPS 70 - 105°C (148 - 221°F)
Selector lever 1st or 2nd position
Driving vehicle uphill
Driving location uphill (Increased engine load will help maintain the driving
conditions required for this test.)
SEF174Y
4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-125, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.

EC-124
 DTC P0011 IVT CONTROL
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00O4B

1. CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS) A

Refer to EC-245, "Component Inspection" .

OK or NG EC
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS).
C
2. CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)
Refer to EC-251, "Component Inspection" .
D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Replace camshaft position sensor (PHASE).
E
3. CHECK CAMSHAFT (INTAKE)
Check the following. F
● Accumulation of debris to the signal plate of camshaft rear end
● Chipping signal plate of camshaft rear end
OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Remove debris and clean the signal plate of camshaft
rear end or replace camshaft. H

PBIB0565E I

4. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-114, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . J
For wiring diagram refer to CKP sensor (POS) EC-242 and CMP sensor (PHASE) EC-248 .

>> INSPECTION END K

EC-125
 DTC P0031, P0032 HO2S1 HEATER
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
DTC P0031, P0032 HO2S1 HEATER PFP:22690

Description EBS00O4C

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Engine speed Heated oxygen sensor 1 Heated oxygen sensor 1
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
heater control heater
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature

The ECM performs ON/OFF duty control of the heated oxygen sensor 1 heater corresponding to the engine
speed and engine coolant temperature. The duty percent varies with engine coolant temperature when engine
is started.
OPERATION
Engine speed rpm Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater
Above 3,600 OFF
Below 3,600 after warming up ON

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00O4D

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
● Engine: After warming up
ON
HO2S1 HTR (B1) ● Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm
● Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm OFF

On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00O4E

Trouble diagnosis
DTC No. DTC detecting condition Possible cause
name
The current amperage in the heated oxygen
sensor 1 heater circuit is out of the normal ● Harness or connectors
Heated oxygen (The heated oxygen sensor 1 heater circuit is
P0031 range.
sensor 1 heater open or shorted.)
0031 (An excessively low voltage signal is sent to
control circuit low
ECM through the heated oxygen sensor 1 ● Heater oxygen sensor 1 heater
heater.)
The current amperage in the heated oxygen
sensor 1 heater circuit is out of the normal ● Harness or connectors
Heated oxygen (The heated oxygen sensor 1 heater circuit is
P0032 range.
sensor 1 heater shorted.)
0032 (An excessively high voltage signal is sent to
control circuit high
ECM through the heated oxygen sensor 1 ● Heater oxygen sensor 1 heater
heater.)

DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00O4F

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 10.5V and 16V at
idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.

EC-126
 DTC P0031, P0032 HO2S1 HEATER
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
3. Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT-II. A
4. Start engine and run it for at least 6 seconds at idle speed.
5. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-129, "Diagnostic Procedure"
. EC

SEF058Y

D
WITH GST
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds. E
3. Start engine and run it for at least 6 seconds at idle speed.
4. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
5. Start engine and run it for at least 6 seconds at idle speed. F
6. Select “MODE 3” with GST.
7. If DTC is detected, go to EC-129, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
● When using GST, “DTC Confirmation Procedure” should be performed twice as much as when G
using CONSULT-II because GST cannot display MODE 7 (1st trip DTC) concerning this diagnosis.
Therefore, using CONSULT-II is recommended.
H

EC-127
 DTC P0031, P0032 HO2S1 HEATER
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Wiring Diagram EBS00O4G

MBWA0269E

EC-128
 DTC P0031, P0032 HO2S1 HEATER
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: A
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER- EC
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.

Approximately 7.0V C

[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition. D
Heated oxygen sen-
24 Y ● Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm.
sor 1 heater

PBIB0519E E
[Engine is running] BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Engine speed is above 3,600 rpm. (11 - 14V)
F
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)

Diagnostic Procedure EBS00O4H

1. CHECK HO2S1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT G

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.

2. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 harness connector. H
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.

MBIB0280E
K

4. Check voltage between HO2S1 terminal 4 and ground with

CONSULT-II or tester. L

Voltage: Battery voltage

OK or NG M
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.

PBIB0541E

2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Harness connectors E50, F1
● IPDM E/R connector E13
● 10A fuse
● Harness for open or short between heated oxygen sensor 1 and fuse

>> Repair harness or connectors.

EC-129
 DTC P0031, P0032 HO2S1 HEATER
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
3. CHECK HO2S1 OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 24 and HO2S1 terminal 1.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER

Refer to EC-130, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 1.

5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-114, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00O4I

HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER

1. Check resistance between HO2S1 terminals as follows.
Terminal No. Resistance
1 and 4 3.3 - 4.0 Ω at 25°C (77°F)
2 and 1, 3, 4 ∞Ω
3 and 1, 2, 4 (Continuity should not exist)

2. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 1.

CAUTION:
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped
from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard sur-
face such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system
threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-
18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.

PBIB0542E

Removal and Installation EBS00O4J

HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1

Refer to EM-20, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" .

EC-130
 DTC P0037, P0038 HO2S2 HEATER
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
DTC P0037, P0038 HO2S2 HEATER PFP:226A0
A
Description EBS00O4K

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator EC
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Engine speed
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Heated oxygen sensor 2 C
Engine coolant tempera- Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
Engine coolant temperature sensor heater control
ture
Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor Amount of intake air
D
OPERATION
Engine speed rpm Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
Above 3,600 OFF E
Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met.
● Engine: After warming up
ON F
● Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for
one minute and at idle for one minute under no load

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00O4L

G
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
H
● Engine speed is Below 3,800 rpm after the following conditions are met.
– Engine: After warming up
ON
HO2S2 HTR (B1) – Keeping the engine speed at between 3,500 to 4,000 rpm for one minute
I
and at idle for one minute under no load
● Engine speed: Above 3,800 rpm OFF

On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00O4M

J

Trouble diagnosis
DTC No. DTC detecting condition Possible cause
name
K
The current amperage in the heated oxygen sen- ● Harness or connectors
Heated oxygen (The heated oxygen sensor 2 heater circuit is
P0037 sor 2 heater circuit is out of the normal range.
sensor 2 heater open or shorted.)
0037 (An excessively low voltage signal is sent to ECM
control circuit low L
through the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater.) ● Heater oxygen sensor 2 heater
The current amperage in the heated oxygen sen- ● Harness or connectors
Heated oxygen sor 2 heater circuit is out of the normal range. (The heated oxygen sensor 2 heater circuit is
P0038 M
sensor 2 heater (An excessively high voltage signal is sent to shorted.)
0038
control circuit high ECM through the heated oxygen sensor 2
heater.) ● Heater oxygen sensor 2 heater

DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00O4N

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 10.5V and 16V at
idle.

EC-131
 DTC P0037, P0038 HO2S2 HEATER
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT-II.
2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating tempera-
ture.
3. Turn ignition switch ″OFF″ and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for at least one minute under no load.
5. Let engine idle for one minute.
6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-134, "Diagnostic Procedure"
. SEF058Y

WITH GST
1. Start engine and warm it up the normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch ″OFF″ and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least one minute under no
load.
4. Let engine idle for one minute.
5. Turn ignition switch ″OFF″ and wait at least 10 seconds.
6. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least one minute under no
load.
7. Let engine idle for one minute.
8. Select “MODE 3” with GST.
9. If DTC is detected, go to EC-134, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
● When using GST, “DTC Confirmation Procedure” should be performed twice as much as when
using CONSULT-II because GST cannot display MODE 7 (1st trip DTC) concerning this diagnosis.
Therefore, using CONSULT-II is recommended.

EC-132
 DTC P0037, P0038 HO2S2 HEATER
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Wiring Diagram EBS00O4O

EC

MBWA0270E

EC-133
 DTC P0037, P0038 HO2S2 HEATER
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
● Engine speed is Below 3,800 rpm after the follow-
ing conditions are met.
– Engine: After warming up 0 - 1.0V
– Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and
Heated oxygen sensor 2 4,000 rpm for one minute and at idle for one
2 GY
heater minute under no load.
[Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Engine is running] (11 - 14V)
● Engine speed is above 3,800 rpm.

Diagnostic Procedure EBS00O4P

1. CHECK HO2S2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.

MBIB0282E

4. Check voltage between HO2S2 terminal 4 and ground with

CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.

PBIB0541E

2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Harness connectors E50, F1
● IPDM E/R connector E13
● 10A fuse
● Harness for open or short between heated oxygen sensor 2 and fuse

>> Repair harness or connectors.

EC-134
 DTC P0037, P0038 HO2S2 HEATER
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
3. CHECK HO2S2 OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 2 and HO2S2 terminal 1. EC
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
C
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. D
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER E

Refer to EC-135, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
F
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2.

5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT G

Refer to EC-114, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

H
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection EBS00O4Q

HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER I

1. Check resistance between HO2S2 terminals as follows.
Terminal No. Resistance J
1 and 4 3.3 - 4.0 Ω at 25°C (77°F)
2 and 1, 3, 4 ∞Ω
3 and 1, 2, 4 (Continuity should not exist) K

2. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2.

CAUTION: L
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped
from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard sur-
face such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
M
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system
threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-
18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.

PBIB0542E

Removal and Installation EBS00O4R

HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2

Refer to EX-3, "EXHAUST SYSTEM" .

EC-135
 DTC P0107, P0108 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
DTC P0107, P0108 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR PFP:22365

Component Description EBS00OE1

The manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor is placed intake man-

ifold corrector. It detects intake manifold pressure and sends the
voltage signal to the ECM, ECM uses the signal to compute intake
air volume value.
The sensor uses a silicon diaphragm which is sensitive to the
change in pressure. As the pressure increase, the voltage rises.

MBIB0278E

On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00OE2

Trouble diagnosis
DTC No. DTC detecting condition Possible cause
name

Manifold absolute ● Harness or connectors

P0107 An excessively low voltage from the sensor is (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
pressure sensor
0107 sent to ECM.
circuit low input ● Manifold absolute pressure sensor
● Harness or connectors
Manifold absolute (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
P0108 An excessively high voltage from the sensor is
pressure sensor
0108 sent to ECM. ● Manifold absolute pressure sensor
circuit high input
● Intake air leaks

FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and MI lights up.
Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
Manifold absolute pressure sensor circuit Engine speed will not rise more than 2,500 rpm due to the fuel cut.

DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00OE3

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Wait at least 5 seconds.
4. If the 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-138, "Diagnostic Proce-
dure" .

SEF058Y

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.

EC-136
 DTC P0107, P0108 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Wiring Diagram EBS00OE4

EC

MBWA0304E

EC-137
 DTC P0107, P0108 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition Approximately 1.5V
Manifold absolute pres- ● Idle speed
51 W
sure sensor [Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition Approximately 1.2V
● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.

Diagnostic Procedure EBS00OE5

1. CHECK MAP SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect manifold absolute pressure sensor harness connec-
tor.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.

MBIB0278E

4. Check voltage between MAP sensor terminal 2 and ground.

Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair harness or connectors.

MBIB0602E

2. CHECK MAP SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check harness continuity between MAP sensor terminal 4 and ECM terminal 56
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair harness or connectors.

EC-138
 DTC P0107, P0108 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
3. CHECK MAP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A
1. Check harness continuity between MAP sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal 51.
Refer to Wiring Diagram
EC
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG C
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair harness or connectors.
D
4. CHECK MAP SENSOR
Refer to EC-139, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG E
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace manifold absolute pressure sensor.
F
5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-114, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
G

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00OE6
H
MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. I
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 51(manifold absolute
pressure sensor signal) and ground.
NOTE: J
● To avoid the affection of intake manifold vacuum, Check the
voltage 1 or more minutes past after engine is stopped.
● Because the sensor is absolute pressure sensor, output value K
may differ depends on atmospheric pressure and altitude.
4. Measure the atmospheric pressure.
NOTE: L
As atmospheric pressure describe on synoptic chart is value at SEF006P
sea level, please compensate the actual pressure with the fol-
lowing chart. M
Altitude Compensated pressure
0m 0hPa
200m -24hPa
400m -47hPa
600m -70hPa
800m -92hPa
1,000m -114hPa
1,500m -168hPa
2,000m -218hPa
5. Check the manifold absolute pressure sensor value corresponds to the atmospheric pressure.

EC-139
 DTC P0107, P0108 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]

Atmospheric pressure Voltage

800hPa 3.2 - 3.6v
850hPa 3.4 - 3.8v
900hPa 3.7 - 4.1v
960hPa 3.9 - 4.3v
1,000hPa 4.1 - 4.5v
1,050hPa 4.3 - 4.7v

MBIB0655E

6. Check the voltage between ECM terminal 51 and ground at

idling and confirm the voltage difference between engine is
stopped and at idling is within following chart.
Intake manifold vacuum Voltage difference
-40kPa (-300mmHg) 1.6 - 2.0v
-53.3kPa (-400mmHg) 2.2 - 2.6v
-66.7kPa (-500mm) 2.8 - 3.2v
-80kPa (-600mmHg) 3.4 - 3.8v
SEF487R

Removal and Installation EBS00OE7

MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR

Refer to EM-14, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" .

EC-140
 DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR PFP:22630
A
Component Description EBS00O50

The intake air temperature sensor is built into manifold absolute

pressure sensor. The sensor detects intake air temperature and EC
transmits a signal to the ECM.
The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive to
the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the thermistor
decreases in response to the temperature rise. C

MBIB0276E

E
<Reference data>
Intake air
Voltage* V Resistance kΩ F
temperature °C (°F)
−10 (14) 4.43 7.9 - 9.3
25 (77) 3.32 1.9 - 2.1 G
80 (176) 1.23 0.31 - 0.37
*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 34
(Intake air temperature sensor) and ground. H
CAUTION: SEF012P

Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output

voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM termi- I
nals, such as the ground.
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00O51
J
Trouble diagnosis
DTC No. DTC detecting condition Possible cause
name
Intake air tempera- K
P0112 An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
ture sensor circuit
0112 sent to ECM. ● Harness or connectors
low input
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
Intake air tempera-
P0113 An excessively high voltage from the sensor is ● Intake air temperature sensor L
ture sensor circuit
0113 sent to ECM.
high input

FAIL-SAFE MODE M
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and MI lights up.
Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
Intake air temperature sensor circuit Intake air temperature is determined as 30°C (86°F).

DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00O52

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.

EC-141
 DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Wait at least 5 seconds.
4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-144, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.

SEF058Y

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.

EC-142
 DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Wiring Diagram EBS00O53

EC

MBWA0462E

EC-143
 DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00O54

1. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect manifold absolute pressure sensor (intake air tem-
perature sensor is built-into) harness connector.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.

MBIB0276E

4. Check voltage between MAP sensor terminal 3 and ground.

Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair harness or connectors.

MBIB0300E

2. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check harness continuity between MAP sensor terminal 4 and ECM terminal 56.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair harness or connectors.

3. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR

Refer to EC-145, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Replace manifold absolute pressure sensor (with intake air temperature sensor).

4. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-114, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

EC-144
 DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Component Inspection EBS00O55

INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR A

1. Check resistance between manifold absolute pressure sensor
terminals 3 and 4 under the following conditions.
EC
Intake air temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ
25 (77) 1.9 - 2.1

2. If NG, replace manifold absolute pressure sensor (with intake air C

temperature sensor).

D
MBIB0276E

SEF012P
H

Removal and Installation EBS00O56

MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR I

Refer to EM-14, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" .

EC-145
 DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR PFP:22630

Component Description EBS00O57

The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine

coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the
ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant
temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to
the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the ther-
mistor decreases as temperature increases.

SEF594K

<Reference data>
Engine coolant
Voltage* V Resistance kΩ
temperature °C (°F)
−10 (14) 4.4 7.0 - 11.4
20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260
*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 72
(Engine coolant temperature sensor) and ground. SEF012P

CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00O58

These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.

Trouble Diagnosis
DTC No. DTC Detecting Condition Possible Cause
Name
Engine coolant
P0117 An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
temperature sen-
0117 sent to ECM.
sor circuit low input ● Harness or connectors
Engine coolant (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
P0118 temperature sen- An excessively high voltage from the sensor is ● Engine coolant temperature sensor
0118 sor circuit high sent to ECM.
input

FAIL-SAFE MODE
When this malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MI lights up.

EC-146
 DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
A
Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the time after turning ignition switch “ON”
or “START”. CONSULT-II displays the engine coolant temperature decided by ECM.
Engine coolant temperature decided
Condition
(CONSULT-II display)
EC

Just as ignition switch is turned ON or Start 40°C (104°F)

Engine coolant temper-
ature sensor circuit More than approx. 4 minutes after ignition ON or
80°C (176°F) C
Start
40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F)
Except as shown above
(Depends on the time)
D
When the fail-safe system for engine coolant temperature sensor is activated, the cooling fan operates
while engine is running.

DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00O59 E

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. F
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
G
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Wait at least 5 seconds.
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-149, "Diagnostic Procedure" . H

J
SEF058Y

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. K

EC-147
 DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Wiring Diagram EBS00O5A

MBWA0271E

EC-148
 DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00O5B

1. CHECK ECT SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.

2. Disconnect engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor harness EC
connector.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
C

MBIB0279E
E

4. Check voltage between ECT sensor terminal 1 and ground with

CONSULT-II or tester. F

Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors. H

PBIB0080E
I
2. CHECK ECT SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. J
2. Check harness continuity between ECT sensor terminal 2 and engine ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist. K
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG L
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.

3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART M

Check the following.

● Harness connectors E50, F1
● Harness for open or short between engine coolant temperature sensor and ECM
● Harness for open or short between engine coolant temperature sensor and TCM

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4. CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR

Refer to EC-150, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor.

EC-149
 DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-114, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00O5C

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR

1. Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor
terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure.

PBIB0081E

<Reference data>
Engine coolant
Voltage* V Resistance kΩ
temperature °C (°F)
−10 (14) 4.4 7.0 - 11.4
20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260
*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal
72 (Engine coolant temperature sensor) and ground. SEF012P

2. If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor.

Removal and Installation EBS00O5D

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR

Refer to CO-22, "THERMOSTAT" .

EC-150
 DTC P0132 HO2S1
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
DTC P0132 HO2S1 PFP:22690
A
Component Description EBS00O5E

The heated oxygen sensor 1 is placed into the exhaust manifold. It

detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas compared to the EC
outside air. The heated oxygen sensor 1 has a closed-end tube
made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from
approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions. The
heated oxygen sensor 1 signal is sent to the ECM. The ECM adjusts C
the injection pulse duration to achieve the ideal air-fuel ratio. The
ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical change from 1V to 0V.
D

SEF463R

H
SEF288D

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00O5F I

Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION J
HO2S1 (B1) ● Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
LEAN ←→ RICH
HO2S1 MNTR (B1) ● Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm Changes more than 5 times during K
10 seconds.

On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00O5G

L
To judge the malfunction, the diagnosis checks that the heated oxy-
gen sensor 1 output is not inordinately high.

SEF301UA

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
● Harness or connectors
P0132 Heated oxygen sensor 1 An excessively high voltage from the sensor (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
0132 circuit high voltage is sent to ECM.
● Heated oxygen sensor 1

EC-151
 DTC P0132 HO2S1
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00O5H

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
5. Restart engine and let it idle for 2 minutes.
6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-154, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.

SEF174Y

WITH GST
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Restart engine and let it idle for 2 minutes.
4. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
5. Restart engine and let it idle for 2 minutes.
6. Select “MODE 3” with GST.
7. If DTC is detected, go to EC-154, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
● When using GST, “DTC Confirmation Procedure” should be performed twice as much as when
using CONSULT-II because GST cannot display MODE 7 (1st trip DTC) concerning this diagnosis.
Therefore, using CONSULT-II is recommended.

EC-152
 DTC P0132 HO2S1
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Wiring Diagram EBS00O5I

EC

MBWA0272E

EC-153
 DTC P0132 HO2S1
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMI-
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
0 - Approximately 1.0V
35 BR Heated oxygen sensor 1 ● Warm-up condition
(Periodically change)
● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
[Engine is running]
Sensors' ground
74 B ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
(Heated oxygen sensor)
● Idle speed

Diagnostic Procedure EBS00O5J

1. RETIGHTEN HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten heated oxygen sensor 1.
Tightening torque: 40 - 60 N·m (4.1 - 6.2 kg-m, 30 - 44 ft-lb)

>> GO TO 2.

MBIB0281E

2. CHECK HO2S1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 harness connector.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 74 and HO2S1
terminal 3.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. MBIB0280E
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors.

EC-154
 DTC P0132 HO2S1
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
3. CHECK HO2S1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 35 and HO2S1 terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC

Continuity should exist.

3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 35 or HO2S1 terminal 2 and ground. C
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should not exist.
D
4. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. E
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4. CHECK HO2S1 CONNECTOR FOR WATER

F
1. Turn ignition switch ″OFF″.
2. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 harness connector
3. Check connectors for water G

Water should not exist.

OK or NG H
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
I
5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1
Refer to EC-155, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG J
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 1.
K
6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-114, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . L

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00O5K
M
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “MANU TRIG” and adjust “TRIGGER POINT” to 100% in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-
II.
3. Select “HO2S1 (B1)” and “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)”.
4. Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during the follow-
ing steps.
5. Touch “RECORD” on CONSULT-II screen.

MBIB0301E

EC-155
 DTC P0132 HO2S1
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]

6. Check the following.

● “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode changes
from “RICH” to “LEAN” to “RICH” 5 times in 10 seconds.
5 times (cycles) are counted as shown at right.
● “HO2S1 (B1)” voltage goes above 0.6V at least once.

● “HO2S1 (B1)” voltage goes below 0.3V at least once.

● “HO2S1 (B1)” voltage never exceeds 1.0V.

SEF217YA

SEF648Y

CAUTION:
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 35 (HO2S1 signal) and engine ground.
3. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm con-
stant under no load.
● The voltage fluctuates between 0 to 0.3V and 0.6 to 1.0V
more than 5 times within 10 seconds.
● The maximum voltage is over 0.6V at least one time.

● The minimum voltage is below 0.3V at least one time.

● The voltage never exceeds 1.0V.

1 time: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V

2 times: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V
CAUTION: MBIB0018E

● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped

from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new
one.
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Removal and Installation EBS00O5L

HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1

Refer to EM-20, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" .

EC-156
 DTC P0133 HO2S1
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
DTC P0133 HO2S1 PFP:22690
A
Component Description EBS00O5M

The heated oxygen sensor 1 is placed into the exhaust manifold. It

detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas compared to the EC
outside air. The heated oxygen sensor 1 has a closed-end tube
made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from
approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions. The
heated oxygen sensor 1 signal is sent to the ECM. The ECM adjusts C
the injection pulse duration to achieve the ideal air-fuel ratio. The
ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical change from 1V to 0V.
D

SEF463R

H
SEF288D

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00O5N I

Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION J
Maintaining engine speed at 2,000
HO2S1 (B1) ● Engine: After warming up 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
rpm
LEAN ←→ RICH K
Maintaining engine speed at 2,000
HO2S1 MNTR (B1) ● Engine: After warming up Changes more than 5 times dur-
rpm
ing 10 seconds.

On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00O5O L

To judge the malfunction of heated oxygen sensor 1, this diagnosis
measures response time of heated oxygen sensor 1 signal. The time
is compensated by engine operating (speed and load), fuel feedback M
control constant, and heated oxygen sensor 1 temperature index.
Judgment is based on whether the compensated time (heated oxy-
gen sensor 1 cycling time index) is inordinately long or not.

SEF010V

EC-157
 DTC P0133 HO2S1
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
● Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
● Heated oxygen sensor 1
● Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater
P0133 Heated oxygen sensor 1 The response of the voltage signal from the ● Fuel pressure
0133 circuit slow response sensor takes more than the specified time.
● Injectors
● Intake air leaks
● Exhaust gas leaks
● Manifold absolute pressure sensor

DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00O5P

CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
● Always perform at a temperature above −10°C (14°F).
● Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Stop engine and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “HO2S1 (B1) P0133” of “HO2S1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode
with CONSULT-II.
4. Touch “START”.
5. Start engine and let it idle for at least 3 minutes.
NOTE:
Never raise engine speed above 3,600 rpm after this step. If
the engine speed limit is exceeded, return to step 5.

SEF338Z

6. When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be dis-

played on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain the conditions con-
tinuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will
take approximately 40 to 60 seconds.)
ENG SPEED 2,450 - 3,950 rpm
Vehicle speed More than 80 km/h (50 MPH)
B/FUEL SCHDL 2.5 - 6.5 msec
Selector lever Suitable position

If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from SEF339Z

step 2.

EC-158
 DTC P0133 HO2S1
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
7. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG
RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-161, "Diagnostic A
Procedure" .

EC

SEF658Y

D
Overall Function Check EBS00O5Q

Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 1 circuit. During this check, a
DTC might not be confirmed. E
WITH GST
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 35 (HO2S1 signal) and engine ground. F
3. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm con-
stant under no load.
● The voltage fluctuates between 0 to 0.3V and 0.6 to 1.0V more G
than 5 times within 10 seconds.
1 time: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V H
2 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V
times: → 0 - 0.3V
4. If NG, go to EC-161, "Diagnostic Procedure" . I
MBIB0018E

EC-159
 DTC P0133 HO2S1
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Wiring Diagram EBS00O5R

MBWA0272E

EC-160
 DTC P0133 HO2S1
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: A
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMI- EC
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running] C
0 - Approximately 1.0V
35 BR Heated oxygen sensor 1 ● Warm-up condition
(Periodically change)
● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
[Engine is running] D
Sensors' ground
74 B ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
(Heated oxygen sensor)
● Idle speed
E
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00O5S

1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS

F
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten body ground screws.
G
>> GO TO 2.

MBIB0290E

J
2. RETIGHTEN HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1
Loosen and retighten heated oxygen sensor 1.
K
Tightening torque: 40 - 60 N·m (4.1 - 6.2 kg-m, 30 - 44 ft-lb)

>> GO TO 3. L

MBIB0281E

EC-161
 DTC P0133 HO2S1
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
3. CHECK FOR EXHAUST GAS LEAK
1. Start engine and run it at idle.
2. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst (Manifold).

MBIB0649E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair or replace.

4. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK

Listen for an intake air leak after the manifold absolute pressure sensor.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair or replace.

EC-162
 DTC P0133 HO2S1
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
5. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA A
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
EC
2. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
C
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0172 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?

SEF215Z

Without CONSULT-II F
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
G
3. Disconnect manifold absolute pressure sensor harness connec-
tor, and restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle
speed.
H
4. Stop engine and reconnect manifold absolute pressure sensor
harness connector.
5. Make sure that DTC P0107 is displayed.
I
6. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-51, "HOW TO ERASE
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .
7. Make sure that DTC P0000 is displayed.
J
8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. MBIB0276E
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0172 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
K
Yes or No
Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171 or DTC P0172 (Refer to EC-188 or EC-195 ).
No >> GO TO 6.
L
6. CHECK HO2S1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. M
2. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between HO2S1 terminal 3 and
engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors.
MBIB0280E

EC-163
 DTC P0133 HO2S1
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
7. CHECK HO2S1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 35 and HO2S1 terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 35 or HO2S1 terminal 2 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should not exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

8. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER

Refer to EC-130, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 1.

9. CHECK MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR

Refer to EC-139, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Replace manifold absolute pressure sensor.

10. CHECK PCV VALVE

Refer to EC-409, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> Replace PCV valve.

11. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1

Refer to EC-164, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> Replace heated oxygen sensor 1.

12. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-114, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00O5T

HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “MANU TRIG” and adjust “TRIGGER POINT” to 100% in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-
II.

EC-164
 DTC P0133 HO2S1
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
3. Select “HO2S1 (B1)” and “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)”.
4. Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during the follow- A
ing steps.
5. Touch “RECORD” on CONSULT-II screen.
EC

SEF646Y

D
6. Check the following.
● “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode changes
from “RICH” to “LEAN” to “RICH” 5 times in 10 seconds. E
5 times (cycles) are counted as shown at right.
● “HO2S1 (B1)” voltage goes above 0.6V at least once.

● “HO2S1 (B1)” voltage goes below 0.3V at least once. F

● “HO2S1 (B1)” voltage never exceeds 1.0V.

G
SEF217YA

SEF648Y K
CAUTION:
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. L
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
M

EC-165
 DTC P0133 HO2S1
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 35 (HO2S1 signal) and engine ground.
3. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm con-
stant under no load.
● The voltage fluctuates between 0 to 0.3V and 0.6 to 1.0V
more than 5 times within 10 seconds.
● The maximum voltage is over 0.6V at least one time.

● The minimum voltage is below 0.3V at least one time.

● The voltage never exceeds 1.0V.

1 time: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V

2 times: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V
CAUTION: MBIB0018E

● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped

from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new
one.
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Removal and Installation EBS00O5U

HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1

Refer to EM-20, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" .

EC-166
 DTC P0134 HO2S1
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
DTC P0134 HO2S1 PFP:22690
A
Component Description EBS00O5V

The heated oxygen sensor 1 is placed into the exhaust manifold. It

detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas compared to the EC
outside air. The heated oxygen sensor 1 has a closed-end tube
made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from
approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions. The
heated oxygen sensor 1 signal is sent to the ECM. The ECM adjusts C
the injection pulse duration to achieve the ideal air-fuel ratio. The
ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical change from 1V to 0V.
D

SEF463R

H
SEF288D

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00O5W I

Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION J
Maintaining engine speed at 2,000
HO2S1 (B1) ● Engine: After warming up 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
rpm
LEAN ←→ RICH K
Maintaining engine speed at 2,000
HO2S1 MNTR (B1) ● Engine: After warming up Changes more than 5 times dur-
rpm
ing 10 seconds.

On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00O5X L

Under the condition in which the heated oxygen sensor 1 signal is
not input, the ECM circuits will read a continuous approximately
0.3V. Therefore, for this diagnosis, the time that output voltage is M
within 200 to 400 mV range is monitored, and the diagnosis checks
that this time is not inordinately long.

SEF237U

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
● Harness or connectors
P0134 Heated oxygen sensor 1 The voltage from the sensor is constantly (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
0134 circuit no activity detected approx. 0.3V.
● Heated oxygen sensor 1

EC-167
 DTC P0134 HO2S1
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00O5Y

CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “HO2S1 (B1) P0134” of “HO2S1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “START”.
4. Let it idle for at least 3 minutes.
NOTE:
Never raise engine speed above 3,600 rpm after this step. If
the engine speed limit is exceeded, return to step 4.

PBIB0544E

5. When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be dis-

played on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain the conditions con-
tinuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will
take approximately 10 to 60 seconds.)
ENG SPEED 2,150 - 4,250 rpm
Vehicle speed More than 64 km/h (40 MPH)
B/FUEL SCHDL 1.9 - 7.2 msec
Selector lever Suitable position

If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from PBIB0545E

step 2.
6. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG
RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-171, "Diagnostic
Procedure" .

SEC750C

Overall Function Check EBS00O5Z

Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 1 circuit. During this check, a
DTC might not be confirmed.

EC-168
 DTC P0134 HO2S1
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
WITH GST
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. A
2. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 35 (HO2S1 signal) and engine ground.
3. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm con-
stant under no load. EC
● The voltage does not remain in the range of 0.2 to 0.4V.
4. If NG, go to EC-171, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
C

MBIB0018E
E

EC-169
 DTC P0134 HO2S1
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Wiring Diagram EBS00O60

MBWA0272E

EC-170
 DTC P0134 HO2S1
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: A
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMI- EC
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running] C
0 - Approximately 1.0V
35 BR Heated oxygen sensor 1 ● Warm-up condition
(Periodically change)
● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
[Engine is running] D
Sensors' ground
74 B ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
(Heated oxygen sensor)
● Idle speed
E
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00O61

1. INSPECTION START
F
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten body ground screws.
G
>> GO TO 2.

MBIB0290E

J
2. CHECK HO2S1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 harness connector.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. K
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 74 and HO2S1
terminal 3. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
L
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG M
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power MBIB0280E
in harness or connectors.

EC-171
 DTC P0134 HO2S1
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
3. CHECK HO2S1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 35 and HO2S1 terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.

2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 35 or HO2S1 terminal 2 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should not exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1

Refer to EC-172, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace heated oxygen sensor 1.

5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-114, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00O62

HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “MANU TRIG” and adjust “TRIGGER POINT” to 100% in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-
II.
3. Select “HO2S1 (B1)” and “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)”.
4. Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during the follow-
ing steps.
5. Touch “RECORD” on CONSULT-II screen.

MBIB0301E

6. Check the following.

● “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode changes
from “RICH” to “LEAN” to “RICH” 5 times in 10 seconds.
5 times (cycles) are counted as shown at right.
● “HO2S1 (B1)” voltage goes above 0.6V at least once.

● “HO2S1 (B1)” voltage goes below 0.3V at least once.

● “HO2S1 (B1)” voltage never exceeds 1.0V.

SEF217YA

EC-172
 DTC P0134 HO2S1
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]

EC

SEF648Y

CAUTION: D
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread E
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Without CONSULT-II
F
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 35 (HO2S1 signal) and engine ground.
3. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm con- G
stant under no load.
● The voltage fluctuates between 0 to 0.3V and 0.6 to 1.0V
more than 5 times within 10 seconds.
H
● The maximum voltage is over 0.6V at least one time.

● The minimum voltage is below 0.3V at least one time.

● The voltage never exceeds 1.0V. I

1 time: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V
2 times: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V
CAUTION: MBIB0018E
J
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped
from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new
one.
K
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Removal and Installation EBS00O63 L
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1
Refer to EM-20, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" .
M

EC-173
 DTC P0138 HO2S2
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
DTC P0138 HO2S2 PFP:226A0

Component Description EBS00O64

The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold),

monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas.
Even if switching characteristics of the heated oxygen sensor 1 are
shifted, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal
from the heated oxygen sensor 2.
This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates volt-
age from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner condi-
tions.
Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for
engine control operation.
SEF327R

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00O65

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
HO2S2 (B1) ● Engine: After warming up 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
● Keeping the engine speed
Revving engine from idle to 3,000
between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm rpm quickly.
HO2S2 MNTR (B1) LEAN ←→ RICH
for one minute and at idle for
one minute under no load.

On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00O66

The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time

between rich and lean than the heated oxygen sensor 1. The oxygen
storage capacity before the three way catalyst (manifold) causes the
longer switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen
sensor 2, ECM monitors whether the voltage is unusually high during
the various driving condition such as fuel-cut.

SEF305UA

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
● Harness or connectors
P0138 Heated oxygen sensor 2 An excessively high voltage from the sensor (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
0138 circuit high voltage is sent to ECM.
● Heated oxygen sensor 2

DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00O67

CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

EC-174
 DTC P0138 HO2S2
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode A
with CONSULT-II.
2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating tempera-
ture. EC
3. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for at least one minute under no load. C
5. Let engine idle for two minutes.
6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-177, "Diagnostic Procedure"
. SEF189Y
D

WITH GST
1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
E
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least one minute under no
load.
F
4. Let engine idle for two minutes.
5. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
6. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least one minute under no G
load.
7. Let engine idle for two minutes.
8. Select “Mode3” with GST. H
9. If NG, go to EC-177, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
● When using GST, “DTC Confirmation Procedure” should be performed twice as much as when
using CONSULT-II because GST cannot display MODE 7 (1st trip DTC) concerning this diagnosis. I
Therefore, using CONSULT-II is recommended.

EC-175
 DTC P0138 HO2S2
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Wiring Diagram EBS00O69

MBWA0273E

EC-176
 DTC P0138 HO2S2
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: A
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER- EC
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running] C
● Warm-up condition
● Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly
16 LG Heated oxygen sensor 2 after the following conditions are met. 0 - Approximately 1.0V
D
● Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for one minute and at idle for one
minute under no load.
E
[Engine is running]
Sensors' ground
74 B ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
(Heated oxygen sensor)
● Idle speed F
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00O6A

1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS G

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten body ground screws.
H
>> GO TO 2.
I

MBIB0290E
K
2. CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. L
2. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector.
3. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 74 and HO2S2 M
terminal 3.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. MBIB0282E
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors.

EC-177
 DTC P0138 HO2S2
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
3. CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 16 and HO2S2 terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 16 or HO2S2 terminal 2 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should not exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2

Refer to EC-178, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace heated oxygen sensor 2.

5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-114, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00O6B

HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ″ON″ and select ″DATA MONITOR″ mode
with CONSULT-II.
2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating tempera-
ture.
3. Turn ignition switch ″OFF″ and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for at least one minute under no load.
5. Let engine idle for one minute.

SEF174Y

6. Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select

“HO2S2(B1)” as the monitor item with CONSULT-II.

SEF662Y

EC-178
 DTC P0138 HO2S2
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
7. Check “HO2S2 (B1)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%.
A

EC

MBIB0662E D
“HO2S2 (B1)” should be above 0.68V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%.
“HO2S2 (B1)” should be below 0.60V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%.
CAUTION: E
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread F
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. G
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least one minute under no
load. H
4. Let engine idle for one minute.
5. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 16 (HO2S2 signal) and engine ground.
I
6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load
at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
The voltage should be above 0.68V at least once during this J
procedure.
If the voltage is above 0.68V at step 6, step 7 is not neces-
sary. K
7. Keep vehicle idling for 10 minutes, then check voltage. Or check
the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in “D” posi-
tion (A/T), 3rd gear position (M/T). L
The voltage should be below 0.60V at least once during this MBIB0020E
procedure.
8. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2.
M
CAUTION:
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Removal and Installation EBS00O6C

HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2

Refer to EX-3, "EXHAUST SYSTEM" .

EC-179
 DTC P0139 HO2S2
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
DTC P0139 HO2S2 PFP:226A0

Component Description EBS00O6D

The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold),

monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas.
Even if switching characteristics of the heated oxygen sensor 1 are
shifted, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal
from the heated oxygen sensor 2.
This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates volt-
age from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner condi-
tions.
Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for
engine control operation.
SEF327R

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00O6E

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
HO2S2 (B1) ● Engine: After warming up 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
● Keeping the engine speed
Revving engine from idle to 3,000
between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm rpm quickly.
HO2S2 MNTR (B1) LEAN ←→ RICH
for one minute and at idle for
one minute under no load.

On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00O6F

The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time

between rich and lean than the heated oxygen sensor 1. The oxygen
storage capacity before the three way catalyst (manifold) causes the
longer switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen
sensor 2, ECM monitors whether the switching response of the sen-
sor's voltage is faster than specified during the various driving condi-
tion such as fuel-cut.

SEF302U

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
● Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)

P0139 Heated oxygen sensor 2 It takes more time for the sensor to respond ● Heated oxygen sensor 2
0139 circuit slow response between rich and lean than the specified time. ● Fuel pressure
● Injectors
● Intake air leaks

EC-180
 DTC P0139 HO2S2
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00O6G

A
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
● “COMPLETED” will appear on CONSULT-II screen when all tests “COND1”, “COND2” and EC
“COND3” are completed.
● If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and
wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. C
TESTING CONDITION:
Never stop engine during this procedure. If the engine is stopped, retry this procedure from step 2 in
“Procedure for COND1”. D
WITH CONSULT-II
Procedure for COND1
E
For the best results, perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” at a temperature of 0 to 30°(32 to 86°F).
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds. F
3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least one minute under no
load.
4. Let engine idle one minute. G
5. Select “HO2S2 (B1) P0139” of “HO2S2” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
6. Touch “START”.
7. Start engine and let it idle for at least 30 seconds. H
8. Rev engine up to 2,000 rpm 2 or 3 times quickly under no load.
If “COMPLETED” appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to step 2 in “Procedure for COND3”.
If “COMPLETED” does not appear on CONSULT-II screen, go to the following step. I
9. When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed at “COND1” on the CONSULT-II
screen. Maintain the conditions continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take
approximately 60 seconds.) J
ENG SPEED More than 1,000 rpm
B/FUEL SCHDL More than 1.0 msec
K
COOLANT TEMP/S 70 - 105 °C (158 - 221°F)
Selector level Suitable position
L

PBIB0552E

NOTE:
● If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from step 2 in “Procedure for COND1”.

● If “COMPLETED” already appears at “COND2” on CONSULT-II screen before “Procedure for

COND2” is conducted, it is unnecessary to conduct step 1 in “Procedure for COND2”.

EC-181
 DTC P0139 HO2S2
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Procedure for COND2
1. While driving, release accelerator pedal completely from the
above condition [step 9] until “INCOMPLETE” at “COND2” on
CONSULT-II screen has turned to “COMPLETED”. (It will take
approximately 4 seconds.)
NOTE:
If “COMPLETED” already appears at “COND3” on CONSULT-II
screen before “Procedure for COND3” is conducted, it is unnec-
essary to conduct step 1 in “Procedure for COND3”.

PBIB0553E

Procedure for COND3

1. Stop vehicle and let it idle until “INCOMPLETE” of “COND3” on
CONSULT-II screen has turned to “COMPLETED”. (It will take a
maximum of approximately 6 minutes.)
2. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG
RESULTS”.
If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-184, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If “CAN NOT BE DIAGNOSED” is displayed, perform the follow-
ing.
a. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and leave the vehicle in a cool place
(soak the vehicle).
b. Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “COOLANTEMP/S” in SEF668Y

“DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.

c. Start engine and warm it up while monitoring “COOLANTEMP/S” indication on CONSULT-II.
d. When “COOLANTEMP/S” indication reaches to 70°(158°F), go to procedure for COND1 step 3.
Overall Function Check EBS00O6H

Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit. During this check, a
DTC might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Start engine and keep the engine between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least one minute under no load.
4. Let engine idle for one minute.
5. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 16 (HO2S2 signal) and engine ground.
6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load
at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
The voltage should change at more than 0.06V for 1 second
during this procedure.
If the voltage can be confirmed in step 6, step 7 is not nec-
essary.
7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage. Or
check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in “D”
position (A/T), 3rd gear position (M/T).
The voltage should change at more than 0.06V for 1 second MBIB0020E
during this procedure.
8. If NG, go to EC-184, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

EC-182
 DTC P0139 HO2S2
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Wiring Diagram EBS00O6I

EC

MBWA0273E

EC-183
 DTC P0139 HO2S2
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
● Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly
16 LG Heated oxygen sensor 2 after the following conditions are met. 0 - Approximately 1.0V
● Keeping the engine speed at between 3,500 to
4,000 rpm for one minute and at idle for one
minute under no load.
[Engine is running]
Sensors' ground
74 B ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
(Heated oxygen sensor)
● Idle speed

Diagnostic Procedure EBS00O6J

1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten body ground screws.

>> GO TO 2.

MBIB0290E

EC-184
 DTC P0139 HO2S2
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
2. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA A
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
EC
2. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode
with CONSULT-II.
3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
C
4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0172 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
D

E
SEF215Z

Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. F
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
3. Disconnect manifold absolute pressure sensor harness connec-
G
tor, and restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle
speed.
4. Stop engine and reconnect manifold absolute pressure sensor
harness connector. H
5. Make sure that DTC P0107 is displayed.
6. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-51, "HOW TO ERASE
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . I
7. Make sure that DTC P0000 is displayed.
8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. MBIB0276E
J
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0172 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
Yes or No
K
Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171 or P0172. Refer to EC-188 or EC-195 .
No >> GO TO 3.

3. CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT L

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.

2. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector. M
3. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 74 and HO2S2
terminal 3.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. MBIB0282E
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors.

EC-185
 DTC P0139 HO2S2
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
4. CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 16 and HO2S2 terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 16 or HO2S2 terminal 2 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should not exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2

Refer to EC-186, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace heated oxygen sensor 2.

6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-114, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00O6K

HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT-II.
2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating tempera-
ture.
3. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for at least one minute under no load.
5. Let engine idle for one minute.

SEF174Y

6. Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select

“HO2S2 (B1)” as the monitor item with CONSULT-II.

SEF662Y

EC-186
 DTC P0139 HO2S2
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
7. Check “HO2S2 (B1)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%.
A

EC

MBIB0662E D
“HO2S2 (B1)” should be above 0.68V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%.
“HO2S2 (B1)” should be below 0.60V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%.
CAUTION: E
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread F
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. G
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least one minute under no
load. H
4. Let engine idle for one minute.
5. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 16 (HO2S2 signal) and engine ground.
I
6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load
at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
The voltage should be above 0.68V at least once during this J
procedure.
If the voltage is above 0.68V at step 6, step 7 is not neces-
sary. K
7. Keep vehicle idling for 10 minutes, then check voltage. Or check
the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in “D” posi-
tion (A/T), 3rd gear position (M/T). L
The voltage should be below 0.60V at least once during this MBIB0020E
procedure.
8. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2.
M
CAUTION:
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Removal and Installation EBS00O6L

HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2

Refer to EX-3, "EXHAUST SYSTEM" .

EC-187
 DTC P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
DTC P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION PFP:16600

On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00O6M

With the Air/Fuel Mixture Ratio Self-Learning Control, the actual mixture ratio can be brought closely to the
theoretical mixture ratio based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the heated oxygen sensor 1. The
ECM calculates the necessary compensation to correct the offset between the actual and the theoretical
ratios.
In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large (The actual mixture ratio is too lean.), the
ECM judges the condition as the fuel injection system malfunction and light up the MI (2 trip detection logic).
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator
Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
Heated oxygen sensors 1 Fuel injection control Fuel injectors
(Mixture ratio feedback signal)

Trouble diagnosis
DTC No. DTC detecting condition Possible cause
name
● Intake air leaks
● Heated oxygen sensor 1

● Fuel injection system does not operate properly. ● Injectors

P0171 Fuel injection system ● The amount of mixture ratio compensation is too ● Exhaust gas leaks
0171 too lean large. ● Incorrect fuel pressure
(The mixture ratio is too lean.) ● Lack of fuel
● Manifold absolute pressure sensor
● Incorrect PCV hose connection

DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00O6N

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CON-
SULT-II.
4. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
5. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
6. Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes.
The 1st trip DTC P0171 should be detected at this stage, if a
malfunction exists. If so, go to EC-191, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
7. If it is difficult to start engine at step 6, the fuel injection system
has a malfunction, too.
8. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If engine
starts, go to EC-191, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If engine does not
start, check exhaust and intake air leak visually. SEF215Z

EC-188
 DTC P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
WITH GST
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. A
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Disconnect manifold absolute pressure sensor harness connec-
tor. Then restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle EC
speed.
4. Stop engine and reconnect manifold absolute pressure sensor
harness connector. C
5. Select “MODE 3” with GST. Make sure DTC P0107 is detected.
6. Select “MODE 4” with GST and erase the DTC P0107.
7. Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes. D
8. Select “MODE 7” with GST. The 1st trip DTC P0171 should be
detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to EC- MBIB0276E
191, "Diagnostic Procedure" . E
9. If it is difficult to start engine at step 7, the fuel injection system has a malfunction.
10. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If engine starts, go to EC-191, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If engine does not start, check exhaust and intake air leak visually. F

EC-189
 DTC P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Wiring Diagram EBS00O6O

MBWA0274E

EC-190
 DTC P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00O6P

1. CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK A

1. Start engine and run it at idle.

2. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst (manifold). EC

E
MBIB0649E

OK or NG
F
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair or replace.

2. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK AND PCV HOSE G

1. Listen for an intake air leak after the manifold absolute pressure sensor.
2. Check PCV hose connection. H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace. I
3. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. J
2. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 (HO2S1) harness connec-
tor.
3. Disconnect ECM harness connector. K
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 35 and HO2S1
terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. L

Continuity should exist.

5. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 35 or HO2S1 M
terminal 2 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. MBIB0280E

Continuity should not exist.

6. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

EC-191
 DTC P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
4. CHECK FUEL PRESSURE
1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-36, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .
2. Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. Refer to EC-37, "FUEL PRESSURE CHECK" .

At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.5 bar, 3.57 kg/cm2 , 51 psi)

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Follow the construction of “FUEL PRESSURE CHECK” (EC-36 ).

5. CHECK MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSUR SENSOR

With CONSULT-II
1. Install all removed parts.
2. Check manifold absolute pressure sensor signal with CONSULT-II.
Approximately at idling
1.5V:
Approximately at 2,500 rpm
1.2V:
With GST
1. Install all removed parts.
2. Check manifold absolute pressure sensor signal in MODE 1 with GST.
Approximately at idling
1.5V:
Approximately at 2,500 rpm
1.2V:
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the manifold absolute pressure
sensor circuit or engine grounds. Refer to EC-136, "DTC P0107, P0108 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE
PRESSURE SENSOR" .

EC-192
 DTC P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
6. CHECK FUNCTION OF INJECTORS A
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
EC
2. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT-II.
3. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine
speed drop. C

E
MBIB0302E

Without CONSULT-II F
1. Start engine.
2. Listen to each injector operating sound.
Clicking noise should be heard. G

MEC703B

J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for “INJECTORS”, EC-385, "INJECTOR CIRCUIT" . K
7. CHECK INJECTOR
1. Confirm that the engine is cooled down and there are no fire hazards near the vehicle. L
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
3. Disconnect injector harness connectors.
4. Remove injector gallery assembly. Refer to EM-28, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" . M
Keep fuel hose and all injectors connected to injector gallery.
The injector harness connectors should remain connected.
5. Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors.
6. Prepare pans or saucers under each injector.
7. Crank engine for about 3 seconds. Make sure that fuel sprays
out from injectors.
Fuel should be sprayed evenly for each injector.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Replace injectors from which fuel does not spray out.
Always replace O-ring with new ones.

SEF595Q

EC-193
 DTC P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-114, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

EC-194
 DTC P0172 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
DTC P0172 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION PFP:16600
A
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00O6Q

With the Air/Fuel Mixture Ratio Self-Learning Control, the actual mixture ratio can be brought closely to the
theoretical mixture ratio based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the heated oxygen sensors 1. The EC
ECM calculates the necessary compensation to correct the offset between the actual and the theoretical
ratios.
In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large (The actual mixture ratio is too rich.), the
ECM judges the condition as the fuel injection system malfunction and light up the MI (2 trip detection logic). C

Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator

Density of oxygen in exhaust gas D
Heated oxygen sensors 1 Fuel injection control Fuel injectors
(Mixture ratio feedback signal)

Trouble diagnosis
DTC No. DTC detecting condition Possible cause E
name
● Heated oxygen sensor 1
● Fuel injection system does not operate properly. ● Injectors
P0172 Fuel injection system ● The amount of mixture ratio compensation is too F
● Exhaust gas leaks
0172 too rich large.
(The mixture ratio is too rich.) ● Incorrect fuel pressure
● Manifold absolute pressure sensor G
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00O6R

NOTE: H
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II I
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CON- J
SULT-II.
4. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
5. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. K
6. Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes.
The 1st trip DTC P0172 should be detected at this stage, if a
malfunction exists. If so, go to EC-198, "Diagnostic Procedure" . L
7. If it is difficult to start engine at step 6, the fuel injection system
has a malfunction, too.
8. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. M
If engine starts, go to EC-198, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If engine
does not start, remove ignition plugs and check for fouling, etc. SEF215Z

EC-195
 DTC P0172 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
WITH GST
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Disconnect manifold absolute pressure sensor harness connec-
tor. Then restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle
speed.
4. Stop engine and reconnect manifold absolute pressure sensor
harness connector.
5. Select “MODE 3” with GST. Make sure DTC P0107 is detected.
6. Select “MODE 4” with GST and erase the DTC P0107.
7. Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes.
8. Select “MODE 7” with GST. The 1st trip DTC P0172 should be
detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to EC- MBIB0276E
198, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
9. If it is difficult to start engine at step 7, the fuel injection system has a malfunction.
10. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal.
If engine starts, go to EC-198, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If engine does not start, check exhaust and intake
air leak visually.

EC-196
 DTC P0172 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Wiring Diagram EBS00O6S

EC

MBWA0274E

EC-197
 DTC P0172 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00O6T

1. CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK

1. Start engine and run it at idle.
2. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst (manifold).

MBIB0649E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair or replace.

2. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK

Listen for an intake air leak after the manifold absolute pressure sensor.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace.

3. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 (HO2S1) harness connec-
tor.
3. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 35 and HO2S1
terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
5. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 35 or HO2S1
terminal 2 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. MBIB0280E

Continuity should not exist.

6. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4. CHECK FUEL PRESSURE

1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-36, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .
2. Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. Refer to EC-37, "FUEL PRESSURE CHECK" .
At idling: 350 kPa (3.5 bar, 3.57 kg/cm2, 51 psi)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Follow the construction of “FUEL PRESSURE CHECK”.

EC-198
 DTC P0172 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
5. CHECK MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSUR SENSOR A
With CONSULT-II
1. Install all removed parts.
EC
2. Check manifold absolute pressure sensor signal with CONSULT-II.
Approximately at idling
1.5V: C
Approximately at 2,500 rpm
1.2V:
With GST D
1. Install all removed parts.
2. Check manifold absolute pressure sensor signal in MODE 1 with GST.
E
Approximately at idling
1.5V:
Approximately at 2,500 rpm F
1.2V:
OK or NG
G
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the manifold absolute pressure
sensor circuit or engine grounds. Refer to EC-136, "DTC P0107, P0108 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE
PRESSURE SENSOR" . H

EC-199
 DTC P0172 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
6. CHECK FUNCTION OF INJECTORS
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT-II.
3. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine
speed drop.

MBIB0302E

Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Listen to each injector operating sound.
Clicking noise should be heard.

MEC703B

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for “INJECTORS”, EC-385, "INJECTOR CIRCUIT" .

7. CHECK INJECTOR
1. Remove injector assembly. Refer to EM-28, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" .
Keep fuel hose and all injectors connected to injector gallery.
2. Confirm that the engine is cooled down and there are no fire hazards near the vehicle.
3. Disconnect injector harness connectors.
The injector harness connectors should remain connected.
4. Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors.
5. Prepare pans or saucers under each injectors.
6. Crank engine for about 3 seconds.
Make sure fuel does not drip from injector.
OK or NG
OK (Does not drip.)>>GO TO 8.
NG (Drips.)>>Replace the injectors from which fuel is dripping. Always replace O-ring with new one.

8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-114, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

EC-200
 DTC P0221 TP SENSOR
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
DTC P0221 TP SENSOR PFP:16119
A
Component Description EBS00O6U

Electric Throttle Control Actuator consists of throttle control motor,

throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to EC
the throttle valve movement.
The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are
a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position
into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addi- C
tion, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the
throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM
judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these sig- D
nals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the
throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condi-
PBIB0145E
tion.
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00O6V

Specification data are reference values.

F
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
● Ignition switch: ON
Accelerator pedal: Fully released More than 0.36V
(Engine stopped)
THRTL SEN1 G
THRTL SEN2* ● Shift lever:
D (A/T model) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V
1st (M/T model)
H
*: Throttle position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal.

On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00O6W

This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. I

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
● Harness or connector J
Throttle position sensor Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM (The TP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is open or
P0221 shorted.)
circuit range/performance compared with the signals from TP sensor 1
0221
problem and TP sensor 2. ● Electric throttle control actuator K
(TP sensor 1 and 2)

FAIL-SAFE MODE L
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MI lights up.
Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10
M
degrees.
The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition.
So, the acceleration will be poor.

DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00O6X

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.

EC-201
 DTC P0221 TP SENSOR
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-204, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SEF058Y

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.

EC-202
 DTC P0221 TP SENSOR
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Wiring Diagram EBS00O6Y

EC

MBWA0275E

EC-203
 DTC P0221 TP SENSOR
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMI- WIRE
ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
NAL NO. COLOR
Sensor's power supply
47 L [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 5V
(Throttle position sensor)
[Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped
● Shift lever position is “D” (A/T model) More than 0.36V
● Shift lever position is “1st” (M/T model)
● Accelerator pedal fully released
49 Y Throttle position sensor 1
[Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped
● Shift lever position is “D” (A/T model) Less than 4.75V
● Shift lever position is “1st” (M/T model)
● Accelerator pedal fully depressed
[Engine is running]
Sensors′ ground
66 B ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
(Throttle position sensor)
● Idle speed
[Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped
● Shift lever position is “D” (A/T model) Less than 4.75V
● Shift lever position is “1st” (M/T model)
● Accelerator pedal fully released
68 R Throttle position sensor 2
[Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped
● Shift lever position is “D” (A/T model) More than 0.36V
● Shift lever position is “1st” (M/T model)
● Accelerator pedal fully depressed

Diagnostic Procedure EBS00O6Z

1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten body ground screws.

>> GO TO 2.

MBIB0290E

EC-204
 DTC P0221 TP SENSOR
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A
1. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
EC

D
MBIB0308E

3. Check voltage between electric throttle control actuator terminal E

1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors. G

PBIB0082E H

3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. I
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 66 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 5.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. J

Continuity should exist.

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. L

4. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
M
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 49 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 4, ECM
terminal 68 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

5. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

Refer to EC-206, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.

EC-205
 DTC P0221 TP SENSOR
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
6. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
1. Replace the electric throttle control actuator.
2. Perform EC-34, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
3. Perform EC-34, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .

>> INSPECTION END

7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-114, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00O70

THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
2. Perform EC-34, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Set selector lever to “D” position (A/T models) or “1st” position (M/T models).
5. Check voltage between ECM terminals 49 (TP sensor 1 signal),
68 (TP sensor 2 signal) and engine ground under the following
conditions.
Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage

49 Fully released More than 0.36V

(Throttle position sensor 1) Fully depressed Less than 4.75V

68 Fully released Less than 4.75V

(Throttle position sensor 2) Fully depressed More than 0.36V
6. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to the next MBIB0022E

step.
7. Perform EC-34, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
8. Perform EC-34, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Remove and Installation EBS00O71

ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR

Refer to EM-14, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" .

EC-206
 DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR PFP:16119
A
Component Description EBS00O72

Electric Throttle Control Actuator consists of throttle control motor,

throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to EC
the throttle valve movement.
The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are
a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position
into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addi- C
tion, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the
throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM
judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these sig- D
nals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the
throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condi-
PBIB0145E
tion.
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00O73

Specification data are reference values.

F
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
● Ignition switch: ON
Accelerator pedal: Fully released More than 0.36V
(Engine stopped)
THRTL SEN1 G
THRTL SEN2* ● Shift lever:
D (A/T model) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V
1st (M/T model)
H
*: Throttle position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal.

On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00O74

These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic. I

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P0222 Throttle position sensor 1 An excessively low voltage from the TP sensor 1 ● Harness or connectors J
0222 circuit low input is sent to ECM. (The TP sensor 1 circuit is open or
shorted.)
P0223 Throttle position sensor 1 An excessively high voltage from the TP sensor
● Electric throttle control actuator K
0223 circuit high input 1 is sent to ECM.
(TP sensor 1)

FAIL-SAFE MODE L
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MI lights up.
Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10
M
degrees.
The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition.
So, the acceleration will be poor.

DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00O75

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.

EC-207
 DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-210, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SEF058Y

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.

EC-208
 DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Wiring Diagram EBS00O76

EC

MBWA0276E

EC-209
 DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMI-
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
Sensor's power supply
47 L [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 5V
(Throttle position sensor)
[Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped
● Shift lever position is “D” (A/T model) More than 0.36V
● Shift lever position is “1st” (M/T model)
● Accelerator pedal fully released
49 Y Throttle position sensor 1
[Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped
● Shift lever position is “D” (A/T model) Less than 4.75V
● Shift lever position is “1st” (M/T model)
● Accelerator pedal fully depressed
[Engine is running]
Sensors′ ground
66 B ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
(Throttle position sensor)
● Idle speed
[Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped
● Shift lever position is “D” (A/T model) Less than 4.75V
● Shift lever position is “1st” (M/T model)
● Accelerator pedal fully released
68 R Throttle position sensor 2
[Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped
● Shift lever position is “D” (A/T model) More than 0.36V
● Shift lever position is “1st” (M/T model)
● Accelerator pedal fully depressed

Diagnostic Procedure EBS00O77

1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten body ground screws.

>> GO TO 2.

MBIB0290E

EC-210
 DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A
1. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
EC

D
MBIB0308E

3. Check voltage between electric throttle control actuator terminal E

1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors. G

PBIB0082E H

3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. I
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 66 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 5.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. J

Continuity should exist.

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. L

4. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
M
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 49 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 4.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

5. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

Refer to EC-212, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.

EC-211
 DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
6. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
1. Replace the electric throttle control actuator.
2. Perform EC-34, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
3. Perform EC-34, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .

>> INSPECTION END

7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-114, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00O78

THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
2. Perform EC-34, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Set selector lever to “D” position (A/T models) or “1st” position (M/T models).
5. Check voltage between ECM terminals 49 (TP sensor 1 signal),
68 (TP sensor 2 signal) and engine ground under the following
conditions.
Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage

49 Fully released More than 0.36V

(Throttle position sensor 1) Fully depressed Less than 4.75V

68 Fully released Less than 4.75V

(Throttle position sensor 2) Fully depressed More than 0.36V
6. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to the next MBIB0022E

step.
7. Perform EC-34, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
8. Perform EC-34, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Remove and Installation EBS00O79

ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR

Refer to EM-14, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" .

EC-212
 DTC P0226 APP SENSOR
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
DTC P0226 APP SENSOR PFP:18002
A
Component Description EBS00O7A

The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end

of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelera- EC
tor position and sends a signal to the ECM.
Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors
are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal
position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. C
In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of
the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The
ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from D
these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these
signals.
PBIB0146E
Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM
E
receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine oper-
ation such as fuel cut.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00O7B
F
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
G
● Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.6 - 0.9V
ACCEL SEN1
(Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed 4.0 - 4.8V

● Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.6 - 0.9V H

ACCEL SEN2*
(Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed 3.9 - 4.8V

● Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released ON

CLSD THL POS
(Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed OFF I
*: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage.

On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00O7C J

This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause K
● Harness or connector
Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM (The APP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is
P0226 Accelerator pedal position sensor open or shorted.)
compared with the signals from APP sensor L
0226 circuit range/performance problem
1 and APP sensor 2. ● Accelerator pedal position sensor 1
and 2

M
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MI lights up.
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10
degrees.
The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition.
So, the acceleration will be poor.

DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00O7D

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.

EC-213
 DTC P0226 APP SENSOR
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-218, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SEF058Y

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.

EC-214
 DTC P0226 APP SENSOR
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Wiring Diagram EBS00O7E

LHD MODELS A

EC

MBWA0277E

EC-215
 DTC P0226 APP SENSOR
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMI-
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
Sensor′s ground
82 B ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
(APP sensor 1)
● Idle speed
[Ignition switch “ON”]
Sensor′s ground
83 B ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
(APP sensor 2)
● Idle speed
Sensors′ power supply
90 OR [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 5V
(APP sensor 1)
Sensors′ power supply
91 BR [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 5V
(APP sensor 2)
[Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped 0.3 - 0.6V
Accelerator pedal position ● Accelerator pedal fully released
98 GY
sensor 2 [Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped 1.95 - 2.4V
● Accelerator pedal fully depressed
[Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped 0.6 - 0.9V
Accelerator pedal position ● Accelerator pedal fully released
106 W
sensor 1 [Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped 3.9 - 4.7V
● Accelerator pedal fully depressed

EC-216
 DTC P0226 APP SENSOR
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
RHD MODELS
A

EC

MBWA0278E

EC-217
 DTC P0226 APP SENSOR
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMI-
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
Sensor′s ground
82 B ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
(APP sensor 1)
● Idle speed
[Ignition switch “ON”]
Sensor′s ground
83 B ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
(APP sensor 2)
● Idle speed
Sensors′ power supply
90 OR [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 5V
(APP sensor 1)
Sensors′ power supply
91 BR [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 5V
(APP sensor 2)
[Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped 0.3 - 0.6V
Accelerator pedal position ● Accelerator pedal fully released
98 GY
sensor 2 [Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped 1.95 - 2.4V
● Accelerator pedal fully depressed
[Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped 0.6 - 0.9V
Accelerator pedal position ● Accelerator pedal fully released
106 W
sensor 1 [Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped 3.9 - 4.7V
● Accelerator pedal fully depressed

Diagnostic Procedure EBS00O7F

1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten body ground screws.

>> GO TO 2.

MBIB0290E

EC-218
 DTC P0226 APP SENSOR
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
2. CHECK APP SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A
1. Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness
connector.
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”. EC

D
MBIB0285E

3. Check voltage between APP sensor terminals 4, 5 and ground E

with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
G

MBIB0303E H

3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following. I
● Harness connectors M1, E101 (RHD models)
● Harness connectors M71, M201 (RHD models)
J
● Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. K
4. CHECK APP SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. L
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 82 and APP sensor terminal 2, ECM terminal 83 and
APP sensor terminal 1. M
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.

EC-219
 DTC P0226 APP SENSOR
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
● Harness connectors M1, E101 (RHD models)
● Harness connectors M71, M201 (RHD models)
● Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor
● Harness for open or short between TCM and accelerator pedal position sensor

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

6. CHECK APP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 106 and APP sensor terminal 3, ECM terminal 98 and
APP sensor terminal 6.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.

7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Harness connectors M1, E101 (RHD models)
● Harness connectors M71, M201 (RHD models)
● Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

8. CHECK APP SENSOR

Refer to EC-221, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 9.

9. REPLACE APP SENSOR

1. Replace the accelerator pedal position sensor.
2. Perform EC-34, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
3. Perform EC-34, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
4. Perform EC-34, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .

>> INSPECTION END

10. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-114, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

EC-220
 DTC P0226 APP SENSOR
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Component Inspection EBS00O7G

ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR A

1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminals 106 (APP sensor 1 sig- EC
nal), 98 (APP sensor 2 signal) and engine ground under the fol-
lowing conditions.
C
Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage
106 Fully released 0.6 - 0.9V
(Accelerator pedal position
sensor 1) Fully depressed 3.9 - 4.7V D
98 Fully released 0.3 - 0.6V
(Accelerator pedal position
sensor 2) Fully depressed 1.95 - 2.4V E
MBIB0023E

4. If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly and go to the next

step.
5. Perform EC-34, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . F
6. Perform EC-34, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
7. Perform EC-34, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
G
Remove and Installation EBS00O7H

ACCELERATOR PEDAL
Refer to ACC-2, "ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM" . H

EC-221
 DTC P0227, P0228 APP SENSOR
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
DTC P0227, P0228 APP SENSOR PFP:18002

Component Description EBS00O7I

The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end

of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelera-
tor position and sends a signal to the ECM.
Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors
are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal
position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM.
In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of
the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The
ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from
these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these
signals.
PBIB0146E
Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM
receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine oper-
ation such as fuel cut.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00O7J

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION

● Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.6 - 0.9V

ACCEL SEN1
(Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed 4.0 - 4.8V

● Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.6 - 0.9V

ACCEL SEN2*
(Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed 3.9 - 4.8V

● Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released ON

CLSD THL POS
(Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed OFF
*: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage.

On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00O7K

These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P0227 Accelerator pedal position An excessively low voltage from the APP sensor 1 ● Harness or connectors
0227 sensor 1 circuit low input is sent to ECM. (The APP sensor 1 circuit is open or
shorted.)
P0228 Accelerator pedal position An excessively high voltage from the APP sensor 1
● Accelerator pedal position sensor
0228 sensor 1 circuit high input is sent to ECM.
(Accelerator pedal position sensor 1)

FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MI lights up.
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10
degrees.
The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition.
So, the acceleration will be poor.

DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00O7L

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.

EC-222
 DTC P0227, P0228 APP SENSOR
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. A
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
EC
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-227, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

D
SEF058Y

WITH GST E
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.

EC-223
 DTC P0227, P0228 APP SENSOR
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Wiring Diagram EBS00O7M

LHD MODELS

MBWA0279E

EC-224
 DTC P0227, P0228 APP SENSOR
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: A
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMI- EC
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running] C
Sensor′s ground
82 B ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
(APP sensor 1)
● Idle speed
[Ignition switch “ON”] D
Sensor′s ground
83 B ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
(APP sensor 2)
● Idle speed
E
Sensors′ power supply
90 OR [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 5V
(APP sensor 1)
Sensors′ power supply
91 BR [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 5V
(APP sensor 2) F
[Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped 0.3 - 0.6V
● Accelerator pedal fully released
G
Accelerator pedal position
98 GY
sensor 2 [Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped 1.95 - 2.4V
H
● Accelerator pedal fully depressed
[Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped 0.6 - 0.9V I
Accelerator pedal position ● Accelerator pedal fully released
106 W
sensor 1 [Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped 3.9 - 4.7V J
● Accelerator pedal fully depressed

EC-225
 DTC P0227, P0228 APP SENSOR
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
RHD MODELS

MBWA0280E

EC-226
 DTC P0227, P0228 APP SENSOR
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: A
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMI- EC
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running] C
Sensor′s ground
82 B ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
(APP sensor 1)
● Idle speed
[Ignition switch “ON”] D
Sensor′s ground
83 B ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
(APP sensor 2)
● Idle speed
E
Sensors′ power supply
90 OR [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 5V
(APP sensor 1)
Sensors′ power supply
91 BR [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 5V
(APP sensor 2) F
[Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped 0.3 - 0.6V
● Accelerator pedal fully released
G
Accelerator pedal position
98 GY
sensor 2 [Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped 1.95 - 2.4V
H
● Accelerator pedal fully depressed
[Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped 0.6 - 0.9V I
Accelerator pedal position ● Accelerator pedal fully released
106 W
sensor 1 [Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped 3.9 - 4.7V J
● Accelerator pedal fully depressed

Diagnostic Procedure EBS00O7N

K
1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
L
2. Loosen and retighten body ground screws.

>> GO TO 2. M

MBIB0290E

EC-227
 DTC P0227, P0228 APP SENSOR
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
2. CHECK APP SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness
connector.
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”.

MBIB0285E

3. Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 4 and ground with

CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.

MBIB0304E

3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Harness connectors M1, E101 (RHD models)
● Harness connectors M71, M201 (RHD models)
● Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4. CHECK APP SENSOR 1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 82 and APP sensor terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.

5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Harness connectors M1, E101 (RHD models)
● Harness connectors M71, M201 (RHD models)
● Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

EC-228
 DTC P0227, P0228 APP SENSOR
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
6. CHECK APP SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 106 and APP sensor terminal 3.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
EC
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG C
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.
D
7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
● Harness connectors M1, E101 (RHD models) E
● Harness connectors M71, M201 (RHD models)
● Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor
F

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

8. CHECK APP SENSOR G

Refer to EC-229, "Component Inspection" .

OK or NG H
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 9.
I
9. REPLACE APP SENSOR
1. Replace the accelerator pedal position sensor.
J
2. Perform EC-34, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
3. Perform EC-34, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
4. Perform EC-34, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . K

>> INSPECTION END

L
10. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-114, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
M
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection EBS00O7O

ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR

1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”.

EC-229
 DTC P0227, P0228 APP SENSOR
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
3. Check voltage between ECM terminals 106 (APP sensor 1 sig-
nal), 98 (APP sensor 2 signal) and engine ground under the fol-
lowing conditions.
Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage
106 Fully released 0.6 - 0.9V
(Accelerator pedal position
sensor 1) Fully depressed 3.9 - 4.7V

98 Fully released 0.3 - 0.6V

(Accelerator pedal position
sensor 2) Fully depressed 1.95 - 2.4V
MBIB0023E

4. If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly and go to the next

step.
5. Perform EC-34, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
6. Perform EC-34, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
7. Perform EC-34, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Remove and Installation EBS00O7P

ACCELERATOR PEDAL
Refer to ACC-2, "ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM" .

EC-230
 DTC P0300 - P0304 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 4 CYLINDER MIS-
FIRE
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
DTC P0300 - P0304 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 4 CYLINDER MIS-
FIRE PFP:00000 A

On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00O7Q

When a misfire occurs, engine speed will fluctuate. If the engine speed fluctuates enough to cause the crank- EC
shaft position (CKP) sensor (POS) signal to vary, ECM can determine that a misfire is occurring.
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed On board diagnosis of misfire C

The misfire detection logic consists of the following two conditions.

1. One Trip Detection Logic (Three Way Catalyst Damage) D
On the first trip that a misfire condition occurs that can damage the three way catalyst (TWC) due to over-
heating, the MI will blink.
When a misfire condition occurs, the ECM monitors the CKP sensor (POS) signal every 200 engine revo-
lutions for a change. E
When the misfire condition decreases to a level that will not damage the TWC, the MI will turn off.
If another misfire condition occurs that can damage the TWC on a second trip, the MI will blink.
When the misfire condition decreases to a level that will not damage the TWC, the MI will remain on. F
If another misfire condition occurs that can damage the TWC, the MI will begin to blink again.
2. Two Trip Detection Logic (Exhaust quality deterioration)
For misfire conditions that will not damage the TWC (but will affect vehicle emissions), the MI will only light G
when the misfire is detected on a second trip. During this condition, the ECM monitors the CKP sensor
signal every 1,000 engine revolutions.
A misfire malfunction can be detected on any one cylinder or on multiple cylinders.
H
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P0300 Multiple cylinder misfire ● Improper spark plug
Multiple cylinder misfire. I
0300 detected ● Insufficient compression
P0301 No.1 cylinder misfire ● Incorrect fuel pressure
No. 1 cylinder misfires.
0301 detected
● The injector circuit is open or shorted
P0302 No. 2 cylinder misfire J
No. 2 cylinder misfires. ● Fuel injectors
0302 detected
● Intake air leak
P0303 No. 3 cylinder misfire
No. 3 cylinder misfires. ● The ignition signal circuit is open or
0303 detected K
shorted
● Lack of fuel
P0304 No. 4 cylinder misfire ● Drive plate or flywheel
No. 4 cylinder misfires. L
0304 detected
● Heated oxygen sensor 1
● Incorrect PCV hose connection

DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00O7R

M

CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

EC-231
 DTC P0300 - P0304 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 4 CYLINDER MIS-
FIRE
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”, and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
3. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Start engine again and drive at 1,500 to 3,000 rpm for at least 3
minutes.
Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible.
NOTE:
Refer to the freeze frame data for the test driving condi-
tions.
5. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-232, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.

PBIB0164E

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00O7S

1. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK AND PCV HOSE

1. Start engine and run it at idle speed.
2. Listen for the sound of the intake air leak.
3. Check PCV hose connection.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair or replace.

2. CHECK FOR EXHAUST SYSTEM CLOGGING

Stop engine and visually check exhaust tube, three way catalyst and muffler for dents.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace.

EC-232
 DTC P0300 - P0304 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 4 CYLINDER MIS-
FIRE
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
3. PERFORM POWER BALANCE TEST A
With CONSULT-II
1. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
EC
2. Is there any cylinder which does not produce a momentary
engine speed drop?

MBIB0302E
E
Without CONSULT-II
When disconnecting each injector harness connector one at a time,
is there any cylinder which does not produce a momentary engine F
speed drop?

MBIB0305E

I
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 4.
No >> GO TO 7. J

4. CHECK INJECTOR
K
Does each injector make an operating sound at idle?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 5. L
No >> Check injector(s) and circuit(s). Refer to EC-385,
"INJECTOR CIRCUIT" .
M

MEC703B

EC-233
 DTC P0300 - P0304 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 4 CYLINDER MIS-
FIRE
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
5. CHECK IGNITION SPARK
1. Disconnect ignition coil assembly from rocker cover.
2. Connect a known-good spark plug to the ignition coil assembly.
3. Place end of spark plug against a suitable ground and crank engine.
4. Check for spark.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Check ignition coil, power transistor and their circuits.
Refer to EC-376, "IGNITION SIGNAL" .

SEF575Q

6. CHECK SPARK PLUGS

Remove the spark plugs and check for fouling, etc.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace spark plug(s) with standard type
one(s). For spark plug type, refer to MA-21, "Changing
Spark Plugs (Platinum-Tipped Type)" .

SEF156I

7. CHECK COMPRESSION PRESSURE

Check compression pressure. Refer to EM-57, "COMPRESSION PRESSURE INSPECTION" .
[kPa (bar, kg/cm2 , psi)/350rpm]
Engine type CR10DE CR12DE, CR14DE
Standard 1,432 (14.32, 14.6, 208) 1,383 (13.83, 14.1, 201)
minimum 1,236 (12.36, 12.6, 179) 1,187 (11.87, 12.1, 172)
Difference limit among cylinders 98 (0.98, 1.0, 14) 98 (0.98, 1.0, 14)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Check pistons, piston rings, valves, valve seats and cylinder head gaskets.

8. CHECK FUEL PRESSURE

1. Install all removed parts.
2. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-36, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .
3. Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. Refer to EC-37, "FUEL PRESSURE CHECK" .

At idle: Approx. 350 kPa (3.5 bar, 3.57 kg/cm2 , 51 psi)

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Follow the construction of “FUEL PRESSURE CHECK”.

EC-234
 DTC P0300 - P0304 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 4 CYLINDER MIS-
FIRE
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
9. CHECK IGNITION TIMING A
Check the following items. Refer to EC-68, "Basic Inspection" .
Items Specifications
EC
A/T 700 ± 50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
Target idle speed
M/T 650 ± 50 rpm
A/T 5 ± 5° BTDC (in “P” or “N” position) C
Ignition timing
M/T 5 ± 5° BTDC

OK or NG
D
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Follow the “Basic Inspection”.

10. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 E

Refer to EC-155, "Component Inspection" .

OK or NG F
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 11.
G
11. CHECK MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSUR SENSOR
With CONSULT-II
Check manifold absolute pressure sensor signal in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. H

Approximately at idling
1.5V:
I
Approximately at 2,500 rpm
1.2V:
With GST J
Check manifold absolute pressure sensor signal in MODE 1 with GST.
Approximately at idling
1.5V: K
Approximately at 2,500 rpm
1.2V:
L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the manifold absolute pressure
sensor circuit or engine grounds. Refer to EC-136, "DTC P0107, P0108 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE M
PRESSURE SENSOR" .

12. CHECK SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART

Check items on the rough idle symptom in EC-72, "Symptom Matrix Chart" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> Repair or replace.

13. ERASE THE 1ST TRIP DTC

Some tests may cause a 1st trip DTC to be set.
Erase the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory after performing the tests. Refer to EC-51, "HOW TO ERASE
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .

>> GO TO 14.

EC-235
 DTC P0300 - P0304 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 4 CYLINDER MIS-
FIRE
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
14. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-114, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

EC-236
 DTC P0327, P0328 KS
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
DTC P0327, P0328 KS PFP:22060
A
Component Description EBS00O7T

The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine

knocking using a piezoelectric element. A knocking vibration from EC
the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This pressure is
converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM.
C

MBIB0306E

E
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00O7U

The MI will not light up for these self-diagnoses.

DTC No. Trouble Diagnosis Name DTC Detected Condition Possible Cause F
P0327 Knock sensor circuit low An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
● Harness or connectors
0327 input sent to ECM.
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
P0328 Knock sensor circuit high An excessively high voltage from the sensor is G
● Knock sensor
0328 input sent to ECM.

DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00O7V

H
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
I
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II J
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
2. Start engine and run it for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
3. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-239, "Diagnostic Procedure" K
.

SEF058Y

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.

EC-237
 DTC P0327, P0328 KS
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Wiring Diagram EBS00O7W

MBWA0281E

EC-238
 DTC P0327, P0328 KS
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: A
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMI- EC
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running] C
15 W Knock sensor Approximately 2.5V
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
Sensors' ground D
54 — ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
(Knock sensor)
● Idle speed

Diagnostic Procedure EBS00O7X

E
1. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-I
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
F
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check resistance between ECM terminal 15 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
NOTE: G
It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more than 10 MΩ.
Resistance: Approximately 530 - 590kΩ [at 20°C (68°F)]
H
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. I
NG >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-II

J
1. Disconnect knock sensor harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 15 and knock
sensor terminal 1. K
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
L
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. M
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
MBIB0306E
in harness or connectors.

3. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR

Refer to EC-240, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace knock sensor.

EC-239
 DTC P0327, P0328 KS
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
4. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 54 and engine ground.
Continuity should exist
2. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.

5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-114, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00O7Y

KNOCK SENSOR
Check resistance between knock sensor terminal 1 and ground.
NOTE:
It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more
than 10 MΩ.
Resistance: Approximately 530 - 590kΩ [at 20°C (68°F)]
CAUTION:
Do not use any knock sensors that have been dropped or phys-
ically damaged. Use only new ones.

SEF546P

Removal and Installation EBS00O7Z

KNOCK SENSOR
Refer to EM-69, "CYLINDER BLOCK" .

EC-240
 DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) PFP:23731
A
Component Description EBS00O80

The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the cylinder

block rear housing facing the gear teeth (cogs) of the signal plate at EC
the end of the crankshaft. It detects the fluctuation of the engine rev-
olution.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC.
When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth C
cause the gap with the sensor change.
The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to
change. D
Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor
changes.
PBIB0562E
The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the fluctuation of
E
the engine revolution.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00O81

Specification data are reference values. F

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
● Tachometer: Connect
Almost the same speed as the G
ENG SPEED ● Run engine and compare CONSULT-II value with the tachometer indica- tachometer indication.
tion.

On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00O82 H

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
● The crankshaft position sensor (POS) signal is not I
detected by the ECM during the first few seconds of
● Harness or connectors
engine cranking.
(The sensor circuit is open or
P0335 Crankshaft position ● The proper pulse signal from the crankshaft position shorted.) J
0335 sensor (POS) circuit sensor (POS) is not sent to ECM while the engine is
● Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
running.
● Signal plate
● The crankshaft position sensor (POS) signal is not in
the normal pattern during engine running. K

DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00O83

NOTE: L
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION: M
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V with igni-
tion switch ON”.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT-II.
2. Crank engine for at least 2 seconds and run it for at least 5 sec-
onds at idle speed.
3. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-243, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.

SEF058Y

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.

EC-241
 DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Wiring Diagram EBS00O84

MBWA0282E

EC-242
 DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: A
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER- EC
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.

Approximately 3.0V C

[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition D
● Idle speed

Crankshaft position PBIB0527E E

13 Y
sensor (POS)
Approximately 3.0V

F
[Engine is running]
● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm
G
PBIB0528E

Sensors' ground [Engine is running]

H
30 B (Crankshaft position ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
sensor) ● Idle speed

: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) I

Diagnostic Procedure EBS00O85

1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS J

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.

2. Loosen and retighten body ground screws.
K

>> GO TO 2.
L

MBIB0290E

EC-243
 DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
2. CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR (POS) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect crankshaft position (CKP) sensor (POS) harness
connector.
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”.

MBIB0283E

3. Check voltage between CKP sensor (POS) terminal 3 and

ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.

SEF479Y

3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Harness connectors F1, E50
● Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (POS) and ECM
● Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (POS) and IPDM E/R

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4. CHECK CKP SENSOR (POS) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between CKP sensor (POS) terminal 1 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

EC-244
 DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
5. CHECK CKP SENSOR (POS) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 13 and CKP sensor (POS) terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
EC
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG C
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
D
6. CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)
Refer to EC-245, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG E
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS).
F
7. CHECK GEAR TOOTH
Visually check for chipping signal plate gear tooth.
G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Replace the signal plate. H
8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-114, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . I

>> INSPECTION END

J
Component Inspection EBS00O86

CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)

1. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor.
K
2. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (POS) harness connector.
3. Remove the sensor.
4. Visually check the sensor for chipping. L

PBIB0563E

EC-245
 DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
5. Check resistance as shown in the figure.
Terminal No. (Polarity) Resistance Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
3 (+) - 1 (-)
3 (+) - 2 (-) Except 0 or ∞
2 (+) - 1 (-)
6. If NG, replace crankshaft position sensor (POS).

MBIB0024E

Removal and Installation EBS00O87

CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)

Refer to EM-69, "CYLINDER BLOCK" .

EC-246
 DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) PFP:23731
A
Component Description EBS00O88

The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the retraction with

intake valve camshaft to identify a particular cylinder. The camshaft EC
position sensor (PHASE) senses the piston position.
When the crankshaft position sensor (POS) system becomes inoper-
ative, the camshaft position sensor (PHASE) provides various con-
trols of engine parts instead, utilizing timing of cylinder identification C
signals.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC.
When engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause D
the gap with the sensor to change.
The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to
PBIB0562E
change.
E
Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes.
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00O89

F
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
● Harness or connectors
● The cylinder No. signal is not sent to ECM
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
for the first few seconds during engine G
cranking. ● Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
P0340 Camshaft position sensor ● Camshaft (Intake)
● The cylinder No. signal is not set to ECM
0340 (PHASE) circuit
during engine running. ● Starter motor (Refer to SC-27 .) H
● The cylinder No. signal is not in the normal ● Starting system circuit (Refer to SC-27 .)
pattern during engine running.
● Dead (Weak) battery
I
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00O8A

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at J
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V with igni-
tion switch “ON”. K
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
L
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Crank engine for at least 2 seconds and run it for at least 5 sec-
onds at idle speed.
M
4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-249, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to next step.
5. Maintain engine speed at more than 800 rpm for at least 5 sec-
onds.
6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-249, "Diagnostic Procedure"
. SEF013Y

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.

EC-247
 DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Wiring Diagram EBS00O8B

MBWA0283E

EC-248
 DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: A
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMI- EC
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.

1.0 - 4.0V C

[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition D
● Idle speed

Camshaft position PBIB0525E E

14 R
sensor (PHASE)
1.0 - 4.0V

F
[Engine is running]
● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
G
PBIB0526E

Sensors' ground [Engine is running]

H
29 B (Camshaft position ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
sensor) ● Idle speed

: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) I

Diagnostic Procedure EBS00O8C

1. CHECK STARTING SYSTEM J

Turn ignition switch to “START” position.

Does the engine turn over? K
Does the starter motor operate?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2. L
No >> Check starting system. (Refer to SC-27, "STARTING SYSTEM" .)

2. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS M

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.

2. Loosen and retighten body ground screws.

>> GO TO 3.

MBIB0290E

EC-249
 DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
3. CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR (PHASE) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect camshaft position (CMP) sensor (PHASE) harness
connector.
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”.

MBIB0279E

3. Check voltage between CMP sensor (PHASE) terminal 3 and

ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.

SEF479Y

4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Harness connectors F1, E50
● Harness for open or short between camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and ECM
● Harness for open or short between camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and IPDM E/R

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

5. CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between CMP sensor (PHASE) terminal 1 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

EC-250
 DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
6. CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 14 and CMP sensor (PHASE) terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
EC
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground or short to power.
OK or NG C
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
D
7. CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)
Refer to EC-251, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG E
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Replace camshaft position sensor (PHASE).
F
8. CHECK CAMSHAFT (INTAKE)
Check the following.
G
● Accumulation of debris to the signal plate of camshaft rear end
● Chipping signal plate of camshaft rear end
OK or NG H
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Remove debris and clean the signal plate of camshaft
rear end or replace camshaft. I

PBIB0565E
J
9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-114, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . K

>> INSPECTION END

L
Component Inspection EBS00O8D

CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)

1. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor.
M
2. Disconnect camshaft position sensor (PHASE) harness connector.
3. Remove the sensor.
4. Visually check the sensor for chipping.

PBIB0563E

EC-251
 DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
5. Check resistance as shown in the figure.
Terminal No. (Polarity) Resistance Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
3 (+) - 1 (-)
3 (+) - 2 (-) Except 0 or ∞
2 (+) - 1 (-)

MBIB0024E

Removal and Installation EBS00O8E

CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)

Refer to EM-34, "CAMSHAFT" .

EC-252
 DTC P0420 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
DTC P0420 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION PFP:20905
A
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00O8F

The ECM monitors the switching frequency ratio of heated oxygen

sensors 1 and 2. EC
A three way catalyst (Manifold) with high oxygen storage capacity
will indicate a low switching frequency of heated oxygen sensor 2.
As oxygen storage capacity decreases, the heated oxygen sensor 2
switching frequency will increase. C
When the frequency ratio of heated oxygen sensors 1 and 2
approaches a specified limit value, the three way catalyst (Manifold)
malfunction is diagnosed. D

SEF484YF

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
● Three way catalyst (Manifold) F
● Exhaust tube
● Three way catalyst (Manifold) does not operate ● Intake air leaks
P0420 Catalyst system efficiency properly.
● Fuel injectors G
0420 below threshold ● Three way catalyst (Manifold) does not have
enough oxygen storage capacity. ● Fuel injector leaks
● Spark plug
● Improper ignition timing H

DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00O8G

NOTE: I
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II J
TESTING CONDITION:
● Open engine hood before conducting the following procedure.
K
● Do not hold engine speed for more than the specified minutes below.
1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds. L
3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least one minute under no
load.
4. Let engine idle for one minute. M
5. Select “DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION” then “SRT WORK SUP-
PORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
6. Start engine.
7. Rev engine up to 2,000 to 3,000 rpm and hold it for 3 consecu-
tive minutes then release the accelerator pedal completely.
If “INCMP” of “CATALYST” changed to “COMPLT”, go to step 10
8. Wait 5 seconds at idle.

PBIB0566E

EC-253
 DTC P0420 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
9. Rev engine up to 2,000 to 3,000 rpm and maintain it until
“INCMP” of “CATALYST” changes to “CMPLT” (It will take
approximately 5 minutes).
If not “CMPLT”, stop engine and cool it down to less than 70°C
(158°F) and then retest from step 1.

PBIB0567E

a. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and leave the vehicle in a cool place
(soak the vehicle)
b. Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “COOLAN TEMP/S” in
“DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
c. Start engine and warm it up while monitoring “COOLAN TEMP/
S” indication on CONSULT-II.
d. When “COOLANTEMP/S” indication reaches to 70°(158°F), go
to step 3.

SEF013Y

10. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II.

11. Confirm that the 1st trip DTC is not detected.
If the 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-255, "Diagnostic Proce-
dure" .

SEF535Z

Overall Function Check EBS00O8H

Use this procedure to check the overall function of the three way catalyst (Manifold). During this check, a 1st
trip DTC might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,00 rpm for at least one minute under no
load.
4. Let engine idle for one minute.
5. Open engine hood.
6. Set voltmeters probes between ECM terminal 35 (HO2S1 sig-
nal) and engine ground, and ECM terminal 16 (HO2S2 signal)
and engine ground.
7. Keep engine speed at 2,000 rpm constant under no load.

MBIB0018E

EC-254
 DTC P0420 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
8. Make sure that the voltage switching frequency (high & low)
between ECM terminal 16 and engine ground is very less than A
that of ECM terminal 35 and engine ground.
Switching frequency ratio = A/B
A: Heated oxygen sensor 2 voltage switching frequency EC
B: Heated oxygen sensor 1 voltage switching frequency
This ratio should be less than 0.75.
If the ratio is greater than above, it means three way catalyst
(manifold) does not operate properly. Go to EC-255, "Diagnostic C
Procedure" .
NOTE: MBIB0124E
If the voltage at terminal 35 does not switch periodically more than 5 D
times within 10 seconds at step 8, perform trouble diagnosis for “DTC P0133” first. (See EC-161 .)
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00O8I
E
1. CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM
Visually check exhaust tubes and muffler for dent.
OK or NG F
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair or replace.
G
2. CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK
1. Start engine and run it at idle. H
2. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before the three way catalyst (Manifold).

MBIB0649E

OK or NG L
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace.
M
3. CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAK
Listen for an intake air leak after the manifold absolute pressure sensor.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair or replace.

4. CHECK IGNITION TIMING

Check the following items. Refer to EC-68, "Basic Inspection" .
Items Specifications
A/T 5° ± 5° BTDC (in “P” or “N” position)
Ignition timing
M/T 5° ± 5° BTDC
A/T 700 ± 50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
Target idle speed
M/T 650 ± 50 rpm

EC-255
 DTC P0420 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Follow the EC-68, "Basic Inspection" .

5. CHECK INJECTORS
1. Refer to Wiring Diagram for Injectors, EC-386 .
2. Stop engine and then turn ignition switch “ON”.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminals 22, 23, 41, 42 and
ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Battery voltage should exist.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Perform EC-387, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

MBIB0030E

6. CHECK IGNITION SPARK

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ignition coil assembly from rocker cover.
3. Connect a known-good spark plug to the ignition coil assembly.
4. Place end of spark plug against a suitable ground and crank engine.
5. Check for spark.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Check ignition coil with power transistor and their circuit.
Refer to EC-376, "IGNITION SIGNAL" .

SEF575Q

7. CHECK INJECTOR
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Remove injector assembly.
Refer to EM-28, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" .
Keep fuel hose and all injectors connected to injector gallery.
3. Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors.
4. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Make sure fuel does not drip from injector.
OK or NG
OK (Does not drip.)>>GO TO 8.
NG (Drips.)>>Replace the injector(s) from which fuel is dripping.

8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-114, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

Trouble is fixed.>>INSPECTION END

Trouble is not fixed.>>Replace three way catalyst (Manifold).

EC-256
 DTC P0444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
DTC P0444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
PFP:14920 A
Description EBS00O8J

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
EC
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed*1
C
Manifold absolute pressure sensor Amount of intake air
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature
Battery Battery voltage*1 EVAP canister EVAP canister purge volume D
Throttle position sensor Throttle position purge flow control control solenoid valve

Accelerator pedal position sensor Closed throttle position

E
Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
Heated oxygen sensors 1
(Mixture ratio feedback signal)

Vehicle speed signal*2 Vehicle speed

F
*1: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
*2: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.

This system controls flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The opening of the vapor by-pass pas- G
sage in the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve changes to control the flow rate. The EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve repeats ON/OFF operation according to the signal sent from the
ECM. The opening of the valve varies for optimum engine control. The optimum value stored in the ECM is H
determined by considering various engine conditions. When the engine is operating, the flow rate of fuel vapor
from the EVAP canister is regulated as the air flow changes.
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION I
The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve uses a ON/
OFF duty to control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canis-
ter. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is J
moved by ON/OFF pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON pulse,
the greater the amount of fuel vapor that will flow through the valve.
K

L
SEF337U

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00O8K

M
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
● Engine: After warming up Idle 0%
● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/
PURG VOL C/V T)
2,000 rpm 20 - 30%
● Air conditioner switch: OFF
● No-load

On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00O8L

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
● Harness or connectors
EVAP canister purge volume (The solenoid valve circuit is open or
P0444 An excessively low voltage signal is sent shorted.)
control solenoid valve circuit
0444 to ECM through the valve
open ● EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve

EC-257
 DTC P0444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00O8M

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and let it idle for at least 13 seconds.
4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-260, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.

SEF058Y

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.

EC-258
 DTC P0444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Wiring Diagram EBS00O8N

EC

MBWA0284E

EC-259
 DTC P0444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)

[Engine is running]
● Idle speed

EVAP canister purge

PBIB0050E
19 LG volume control solenoid
valve
Approximately 10V

[Engine is running]
● Engine speed is about 2,000 rpm
(More than 100 seconds after starting engine)

PBIB0520E

: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)

Diagnostic Procedure EBS00O8O

1. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIR-
CUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
harness connector.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.

MBIB0273E

4. Check voltage between EVAP canister purge volume control

solenoid valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.

PBIB0148E

EC-260
 DTC P0444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A
Check the following.
● Harness connectors E50, F1
● IPDM E/R harness connector E14 EC
● Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and E/R
● Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and ECM
C

>> Repair harness or connectors.

3. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIR- D
CUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. E
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 19 and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. F
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. G
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 4.
OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 5. H
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground and short to power in harness or connectors.

4. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION I

With CONSULT-II
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
2. Start engine. J
3. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according to the
valve opening. K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5. L

PBIB0569E

5. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

Refer to EC-262, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.

6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-114, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

EC-261
 DTC P0444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Component Inspection EBS00O8P

EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

With CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve under the following conditions.
Condition Air passage continuity
(PURG VOL CONT/V value) between A and B
100.0% Yes
0.0% No

PBIB0149E

Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve under the following conditions.
Air passage continuity
Condition
between A and B
12V direct current supply between termi-
Yes
nals 1 and 2
No supply No

PBIB0150E

Removal and Installation EBS00O8Q

EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

Refer to EM-14, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" .

EC-262
 DTC P0500 VSS
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
DTC P0500 VSS PFP:32702
A
Description EBS00O8R

NOTE:
If DTC P0500 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, EC
U1001. Refer to EC-120, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
The vehicle speed signal is sent to the combination meter from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
through CAN communication line. The combination meter then sends a signal to the ECM through CAN com-
munication line. C

On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00O8S

D
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
● Harness or connectors
(The CAN communication line is open or
E
shorted.)
The almost 0 km/h (0 MPH) signal from
P0500 ● ABS control unit
Vehicle speed sensor vehicle speed sensor is sent to ECM
0500
even when vehicle is being driven. ● ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
F
● Wheel sensor
● Combination meter

DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00O8T G

CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
H
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION: I
Steps 1 and 2 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a
road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
WITH CONSULT-II J
1. Start engine.
2. Read “VHCL SPEED SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. The vehicle speed on CONSULT-
II should exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with suitable gear position. K
If NG, go to EC-264, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If OK, go to following step.
3. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. L
4. Warm engine up to normal operating temperature.
5. Maintain the following conditions for at least 60 consecutive sec-
onds. M

ENG SPEED More than 2,300 rpm

COOLAN TEMP/S More than 70°C (158°F)
B/FUEL SCHDL 3.8 - 31.8 msec
Selector lever Suitable position
PW/ST SIGNAL OFF
6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-264, "Diagnostic Procedure"
. SEF196Y

Overall Function Check EBS00O8U

Use this procedure to check the overall function of the vehicle speed signal circuit. During this check, a 1st trip
DTC might not be confirmed.

EC-263
 DTC P0500 VSS
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
WITH GST
1. Lift up drive wheels.
2. Start engine.
3. Read vehicle speed signal in “MODE 1” with GST.
The vehicle speed signal on GST should be able to exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with
suitable gear position.
4. If NG, go to EC-264, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00O8V

1. CHECK DTC
Refer to BRC-6, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair or replace.

2. CHECK COMBINATION METER

Check combination meter function.
Refer to DI-5, "COMBINATION METERS" .

>> INSPECTION END

EC-264
 DTC P0605 ECM
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
DTC P0605 ECM PFP:23710
A
Component Description EBS00O8W

The ECM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal

input and output and for power supply. The ECM controls the engine. EC

PBIB1164E

E
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00O8X

This self-diagnosis has one or two trip detection logic.

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause F
A) ECM calculation function is malfunctioning.
P0605
Engine control module B) ECM EEP-ROM system is malfunctioning. ● ECM
0605 G
C) ECM self shut-off function is malfunctioning.

FAIL-SAFE MODE H
ECM enters fail-safe mode when malfunction A is detected.
Detected items Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode
I
ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5
Malfunction A
degrees) by the return spring.

DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00O8Y J

Perform “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A” first. If the DTC cannot be confirmed, perform “PRO-
CEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B”. If there is no malfunction on “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B”,
perform “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C”. K
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. L
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. M
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. If DTC is detected, go to EC-266, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SEF058Y

With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.

EC-265
 DTC P0605 ECM
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 1 second.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds, and then
turn “ON”.
4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-266, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.

SEF058Y

With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 1 second.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds, and then
turn “ON”.
4. Repeat step 3 for 32 times.
5. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-266, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.

SEF058Y

With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00O8Z

1. INSPECTION START
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select “SELF DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “ERASE”.
4. Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.
See EC-265 .
5. Is the 1st trip DTC P0605 displayed again?
With GST
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select MODE 4 with GST.
3. Touch “ERASE”.
4. Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.
See EC-265 .
5. Is the 1st trip DTC P0605 displayed again?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> INSPECTION END

EC-266
 DTC P0605 ECM
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
2. REPLACE ECM A
1. Replace ECM.
2. Perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition key IDs. Refer to EC-52, "NATS
(Nissan Anti-theft System)" . EC
3. Perform EC-34, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
4. Perform EC-34, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
5. Perform EC-34, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . C

>> INSPECTION END

D

EC-267
 DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY PFP:23710

Component Description EBS00O90

Battery voltage is supplied to the ECM even when the ignition switch
is turned OFF for the ECM memory function of the DTC memory, the
air-fuel ratio feedback compensation value memory, the idle air vol-
ume learning value memory, etc.

PBIB1164E

On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00O91

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
● Harness or connectors
P1065 ECM back-up RAM system does not function [ECM power supply (back-up) circuit is
ECM power supply circuit open or shorted.]
1065 properly.
● ECM

DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00O92

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 1 second.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
4. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds, and then
turn “ON”.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 four times.
6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-270, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.

SEF058Y

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.

EC-268
 DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Wiring Diagram EBS00O93

EC

MBWA0285E

EC-269
 DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
Power supply for ECM BATTERY VOLTAGE
121 BR [Ignition switch “OFF”]
(Buck-up) (11 - 14V)

Diagnostic Procedure EBS00O94

1. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 121 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.

MBIB0026E

2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● 20A fuse
● IPDM E/R harness connector E14
● Harness for open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R

>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

3. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-114, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

EC-270
 DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
4. PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE A
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
EC
2. Select “SELF DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “ERASE”.
4. Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.
C
See EC-268 .
5. Is the 1st trip DTC P1065 displayed again?
With GST D
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select MODE 4 with GST.
3. Touch “ERASE”. E
4. Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.
See EC-268 .
5. Is the 1st trip DTC P1065 displayed again? F
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 5.
No >> INSPECTION END G

5. REPLACE ECM
H
1. Replace ECM.
2. Perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition key IDs. Refer to EC-52, "NATS
(Nissan Anti-theft System)" .
I
3. Perform EC-34, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
4. Perform EC-34, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
5. Perform EC-34, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . J

>> INSPECTION END

K

EC-271
 DTC P1111 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
DTC P1111 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE PFP:23796

Component Description EBS00O95

Intake valve timing control solenoid valve is activated by ON/OFF

pulse duty (ratio) signals from the ECM.
The intake valve timing control solenoid valve changes the oil
amount and direction of flow through intake valve timing control unit
or stops oil flow.
The longer pulse width advances valve angle.
The shorter pulse width retards valve angle.
When ON and OFF pulse widths become equal, the solenoid valve
stops oil pressure flow to fix the intake valve angle at the control
position.
PBIB0195E

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00O96

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
● Engine: After warming up Idle 0% - 2%
● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/
INT/V SOL (B1) T) When revving engine up to 2,000 rpm
Approx. 0% - 50%
● Air conditioner switch: OFF quickly
● No-load

On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00O97

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
● Harness or connectors
An improper voltage is sent to the ECM (Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
P1111 Intake valve timing control
through intake valve timing control solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
1111 solenoid valve circuit
valve.
● Intake valve timing control solenoid valve

DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00O98

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds.
4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-274, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.

SEF058Y

WITH GST
Following the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.

EC-272
 DTC P1111 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Wiring Diagram EBS00O99

EC

MBWA0303E

EC-273
 DTC P1111 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)

[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
● Idle speed

MBIB0052E
Intake valve timing
62 LG
control solenoid valve Approximately 4V - BATTERY
VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)

[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
● When revving engine up to 2,000 rpm quickly

PBIB0532E

: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)

Diagnostic Procedure EBS00O9A

1. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness
connector.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.

MBIB0284E

4. Check voltage between intake valve timing control solenoid

valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.

PBIB0285E

EC-274
 DTC P1111 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
2. DETECT MALFUNCTION PART A
Check the following.
● Harness connectors E50, F1
● IPDM E/R harness connector E14 EC
● Harness for open or short between intake valve timing control solenoid valve and IPDM E/R

C
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

3. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR
OPEN AND SHORT D

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.

2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. E
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 62 and intake valve timing control solenoid valve termi-
nal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist. F

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.

OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE H

Refer to EC-275, "Component Inspection" .

OK or NG I
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve.
J
5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-114, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
K

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00O9B L
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
1. Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector.
2. Check resistance between intake valve timing control solenoid M
valve terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions.
Terminals Resistance
1 and 2 Approximately 7.2Ω at 20°C (68°F)
∞Ω
1 or 2 and ground
(Continuity should not exist)

MBIB0027E

Removal and Installation EBS00O9C

INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

Refer to EM-31, "ROCKER COVER" .

EC-275
 DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR PFP:16119

Component Description EBS00O9D

Electric Throttle Control Actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc.
The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve.
The throttle position sensor detects the throttle valve position, and the opening and closing speed of the throt-
tle valve and feeds the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle
valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening
angle properly in response to driving condition.
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00O9E

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
Electric throttle control actuator does not function
A)
properly due to the return spring malfunction.
Throttle valve opening angle in fail-safe mode is
P1121 Electric throttle control B)
not in specified range. ● Electric throttle control actuator
1121 actuator
ECM detect the throttle valve is stuck open.
C) This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection
logic.

FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction A or B is detected in the two consecutive trips, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the
MIL lights up.
When the malfunction C is detected even in the 1st trip, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
The ECM controls the electric throttle actuator by regulating the throttle opening around the idle position.
Malfunction A
The engine speed will not rise more than 2,000 rpm.
Malfunction B ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to 20 degrees or less.
While the vehicle is driving, it slows down gradually by fuel cut. After the vehicle stops, the engine stalls.
Malfunction C
The engine can restart in “N” or “P” position, and engine speed will not exceed 1,000 rpm or more.

DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00O9F

NOTE:
● Perform “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B” first. If the 1st trip DTC cannot be con-
firmed, perform “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C”.
● If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and
wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition witch “ON” and wait at least 1 second.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Shift selector lever to “D” position (A/T), “1st” position (M/T) and
wait at least 2 seconds.
4. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds, and then
turn “ON”.
5. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-277, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.

SEF058Y

EC-276
 DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. A

PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C

With CONSULT-II EC
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 1 second.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Shift selector lever to “D” position (A/T), “1st” position (M/T) and C
wait at least 2 seconds.
4. Shift selector lever to “N” or “P” position (A/T) or “Neutral” posi-
tion (M/T). D
5. Start engine and let it idle for 3 seconds.
6. If DTC is detected, go to EC-277, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
E

SEF058Y

With GST F
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00O9G
G
1. CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY
1. Remove the intake air duct. H
2. Check if a foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve
and the housing.
OK or NG I
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle
control actuator inside. J

K
MBIB0307E

2. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR L

1. Replace the electric throttle control actuator.
2. Perform EC-34, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
M
3. Perform EC-34, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .

>> INSPECTION END

EC-277
 DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION PFP:16119

Description EBS00O9I

NOTE:
If DTC P1122 is displayed with DTC P1121 or 1126, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1121 or
P1126. Refer to EC-276 or EC-284 .
Electric Throttle Control Actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc.
The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve.
The current opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor and it provides feed-
back to the ECM to control the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in
response to driving condition.
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00O9J

This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
● Harness or connectors
P1122 Electric throttle control Electric throttle control function does not (Throttle control motor circuit is open or
1122 performance problem operate properly. shorted.)
● Electric throttle control actuator

FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MI lights up.
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return
spring.

DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00O9K

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 2 seconds.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds.
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-280, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SEF058Y

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.

EC-278
 DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Wiring Diagram EBS00O9L

EC

MBWA0286E

EC-279
 DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
Throttle control motor relay BATTERY VOLTAGE
3 LG [Ignition switch “ON”]
power supply (11 - 14V)

0 - 14V
[Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped
Throttle control motor
4 L ● Shift lever position is “D” (A/T model)
(Close)
● Shift lever position is “1st” (M/T model)
● Accelerator pedal is releasing
PBIB0534E

0 - 14V
[Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped
Throttle control motor
5 P ● Shift lever position is “D” (A/T model)
(Open)
● Shift lever position is “1st” (M/T model)
● Accelerator pedal is depressing
PBIB0533E

BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Ignition switch “OFF”]
104 G Throttle control motor relay (11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch “ON”] 0 - 1.0V

: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)

Diagnostic Procedure EBS00O9M

1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten body ground screws.

>> GO TO 2.

MBIB0290E

EC-280
 DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
2. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY SIGNAL CIRCUIT-I A
Check voltage between ECM terminal 3 and ground under the fol-
lowing conditions with CONSULT-II or tester.
EC
Ignition switch Voltage
OFF Approximately 0V
Battery voltage C
ON
(11 - 14V)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10. D
NG >> GO TO 3. MBIB0028E

3. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-II E

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.

2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
F
3. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E14.
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 3 and IPDM E/R terminal 28.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. G
Continuity should exist.
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
I
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. J
● Harness connectors E50, F1
● IPDM E/R harness connector E14
● Harness for open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R K

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
L
5. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. M
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 104 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 6.

PBIB1171E

EC-281
 DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
6. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E17.
3. Check continuity between ECM terminal 104 and IPDM E/R terminal 70.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.

7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● IPDM E/R harness connector E17
● Harness for open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

8. CHECK FUSE
1. Disconnect 20A fuse.
2. Check 20A fuse for blown.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace 20A fuse.

9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-114, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-18, "IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MOD-
ULE ENGINE ROOM)" .
NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

10. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
3. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
4. Check harness continuity between the following terminals.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Electric throttle control
ECM terminal Continuity
actuator terminal
5 Should not exist
3
4 Should exist
5 Should exist MBIB0308E
6
4 Should not exist

5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> Repair or replace.

EC-282
 DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
11. CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY A
1. Remove the intake air duct.
2. Check if foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve and
the housing. EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle C
control actuator inside.

MBIB0307E
E
12. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
Refer to EC-283, "Component Inspection" .
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> GO TO 14. G
13. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-114, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. I

14. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR

J
1. Replace the electric throttle control actuator.
2. Perform EC-34, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
3. Perform EC-34, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . K

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00O9N
L
THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
1. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
2. Check resistance between terminals 3 and 6. M

Resistance: Approximately 1 - 15 Ω [at 25 °C (77°F)]

3. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to next
step.
4. Perform EC-34, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
5. Perform EC-34, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .

PBIB0095E

Remove and Installation EBS00O9O

ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR

Refer to EM-14, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" .

EC-283
 DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY PFP:16119

Component Description EBS00O9P

Power supply for the Throttle Control motor is provided to the ECM via throttle control motor relay. The throttle
control motor relay is ON/OFF controlled by the ECM. When the ignition switch is turned ON, the ECM sends
an ON signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is provided to the ECM. When the ignition
switch is turned OFF, the ECM sends an OFF signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is not
provided to the ECM.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00O9Q

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
THRTL RELAY ● Ignition switch: ON ON

On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00O9R

These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
● Harness or connectors
P1124 Throttle control motor ECM detects the throttle control motor relay (Throttle control motor relay circuit is shorted.)
1124 relay circuit short is stuck ON.
● Throttle control motor relay
● Harness or connectors
P1126 Throttle control motor ECM detects a voltage of power source for (Throttle control motor relay circuit is open.)
1126 relay circuit open throttle control motor is excessively low.
● Throttle control motor relay

FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MI lights up.
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return
spring.

DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00O9S

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
PROCEDURE FOR DTC P1124
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 1 second.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. If DTC is detected, go to EC-287, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SEF058Y

With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.

EC-284
 DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
PROCEDURE FOR DTC P1126
With CONSULT-II A
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 2 seconds.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
EC
3. Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds.
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-287, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
C

SEF058Y
E
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
F

EC-285
 DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Wiring Diagram EBS00O9T

MBWA0287E

EC-286
 DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: A
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER- EC
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
Throttle control motor relay BATTERY VOLTAGE C
3 LG [Ignition switch “ON”]
power supply (11 - 14V)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Ignition switch “OFF”]
104 G Throttle control motor relay (11 - 14V)
D
[Ignition switch “ON”] 0 - 1.0V

Diagnostic Procedure EBS00O9U

E
1. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 104 and ground with F
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage. G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2. H

I
PBIB1171E

2. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-II

J
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E17.
3. Check continuity between ECM terminal 104 and IPDM E/R terminal 70. K
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3. M
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
● IPDM E/R harness connector E17
● Harness for open or shot between ECM and IPDM E/R

>> Repair open circuit of short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4. CHECK FUSE
1. Disconnect 20A fuse.
2. Check 20A fuse for blown.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Replace 20A fuse.

EC-287
 DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
5. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY SIGNAL CIRCUIT-I
1. Reconnect all disconnected connectors.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 3 and ground under the
following conditions with CONSULT-II or tester.
Ignition switch Voltage
OFF Approximately 0V
Battery voltage
ON
(11 - 14V)

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 6. MBIB0028E

6. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-II

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E14.
4. Check continuity between ECM terminal 3 and IPDM E/R terminal 28.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.

7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Harness connectors E50, F1
● IPDM E/R harness connector E14
● Harness for open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-114, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-18, "IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MOD-
ULE ENGINE ROOM)" .
NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

EC-288
 DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR PFP:16119
A
Component Description EBS00O9W

The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve.
The current opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor and it provides feed- EC
back to the ECM to control the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in
response to driving condition.
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00O9X C
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause D
● Harness or connectors
P1128 Throttle control motor ECM detects short in both circuits between (Throttle control motor circuit is shorted.)
1128 circuit short ECM and throttle control motor. ● Electric throttle control actuator E
(Throttle control motor)

FAIL-SAFE MODE F
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MI lights up.
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return G
spring.

DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00O9Y

H
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. I
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 2 seconds.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. J
3. Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds.
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-291, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
K

SEF058Y
M

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.

EC-289
 DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Wiring Diagram EBS00O9Z

MBWA0288E

EC-290
 DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: A
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER- EC
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.

0 - 14V C
[Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped
Throttle control motor
4 L
(Close)
● Shift lever position is “D” (A/T model) D
● Shift lever position is “1st” (M/T model)
● Accelerator pedal is releasing
PBIB0534E E
0 - 14V
[Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped F
Throttle control motor
5 P ● Shift lever position is “D” (A/T model)
(Open)
● Shift lever position is “1st” (M/T model)
G
● Accelerator pedal is depressing
PBIB0533E

: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) H
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00OA0

1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS I

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten body ground screws.
J

>> GO TO 2.
K

MBIB0290E
M

EC-291
 DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
2. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
3. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
4. Check harness continuity between the following terminals.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Electric throttle control
ECM terminal Continuity
actuator terminal
4 Should exist
3
5 Should not exist
4 Should not exist MBIB0308E
6
5 Should exist
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace.

3. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR

Refer to EC-292, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 5.

4. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-114, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

5. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR

1. Replace the electric throttle control actuator.
2. Perform EC-34, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
3. Perform EC-34, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00OA1

THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR

1. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
2. Check resistance between terminals 3 and 6.
Resistance: Approximately 1 - 15 Ω [at 25 °C (77°F)]
3. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to next
step.
4. Perform EC-34, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
5. Perform EC-34, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .

PBIB0095E

EC-292
 DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Remove and Installation EBS00OA2

ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR A

Refer to EM-14, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" .

EC

EC-293
 DTC P1143 HO2S1
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
DTC P1143 HO2S1 PFP:22690

Component Description EBS00OA3

The heated oxygen sensor 1 is placed into the exhaust manifold. It

detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas compared to the
outside air. The heated oxygen sensor 1 has a closed-end tube
made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from
approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions. The
heated oxygen sensor 1 signal is sent to the ECM. The ECM adjusts
the injection pulse duration to achieve the ideal air-fuel ratio. The
ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical change from 1V to 0V.

SEF463R

SEF288D

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00OA4

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
Maintaining engine speed at 2,000
HO2S1 (B1) ● Engine: After warming up 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
rpm
LEAN ←→ RICH
Maintaining engine speed at 2,000
HO2S1 MNTR (B1) ● Engine: After warming up Changes more than 5 times dur-
rpm
ing 10 seconds.

On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00OA5

To judge the malfunction, the output from the heated oxygen sensor
1 is monitored to determine whether the “rich” output is sufficiently
high and whether the “lean” output is sufficiently low. When both the
outputs are shifting to the lean side, the malfunction will be detected.

SEF300U

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
● Heated oxygen sensor 1
● Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater
P1143 Heated oxygen sensor 1 The maximum and minimum voltage from the
● Fuel pressure
1143 lean shift monitoring sensor are not reached to the specified voltages.
● Injectors
● Intake air leaks

EC-294
 DTC P1143 HO2S1
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00OA6

A
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at EC
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
C
● Always perform at a temperature above −10°C (14°F).
● Before performing following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II D
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Stop engine and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “HO2S1 (B1) P1143” of “HO2S1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode E
with CONSULT-II.
4. Touch “START”.
5. Start engine and let it idle for at least 3 minutes. F
NOTE:
Never raise engine speed above 3,600 rpm after this step. If
the engine speed limit is exceeded, return to step 5. G

PBIB0546E

I
6. When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be dis-
played on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain the conditions con-
tinuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will J
take approximately 50 seconds or more.)
ENG SPEED 1,500 - 3,350 rpm
K
Vehicle speed 50 - 100 km/h (31 - 62 MPH)
B/FUEL SCHDL 1.7 - 5.1 msec
Selector lever Suitable position L
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from PBIB0547E

step 2.
7. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG M
RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-296, "Diagnostic
Procedure" .

SEC769C

Overall Function Check EBS00OA7

Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 1 circuit. During this check, a
DTC might not be confirmed.

EC-295
 DTC P1143 HO2S1
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
WITH GST
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 35 (HO2S1 signal) and engine ground.
3. Check one of the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm
constant under no load.
● The maximum voltage is over 0.6V at least one time.
● The minimum voltage is over 0.1V at least one time.
4. If NG, go to EC-296, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

MBIB0018E

Diagnostic Procedure EBS00OA8

1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten body ground screws.

>> GO TO 2.

MBIB0290E

2. RETIGHTEN HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1

Loosen and retighten heated oxygen sensor 1.
Tightening torque: 40 - 60 N·m (4.1 - 6.2 kg-m, 30 - 44 ft-lb)

>> GO TO 3.

MBIB0281E

EC-296
 DTC P1143 HO2S1
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
3. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA A
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
EC
2. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
C
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?

SEF215Z

Without CONSULT-II F
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
G
3. Disconnect manifold absolute pressure sensor harness connec-
tor, and restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle
speed.
H
4. Stop engine and reconnect manifold absolute pressure sensor
harness connector.
5. Make sure that DTC P0107 is displayed.
I
6. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-51, "HOW TO ERASE
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .
7. Make sure that DTC P0000 is displayed.
J
8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. MBIB0276E
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
K
Yes or No
Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171. Refer to EC-188 .
No >> GO TO 4.
L
4. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER
Refer to EC-130, "Component Inspection" . M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace heated oxygen sensor 1.

5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1

Refer to EC-298, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace heated oxygen sensor 1.

6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-114, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
For circuit, refer to EC-153, "Wiring Diagram" .

>> INSPECTION END

EC-297
 DTC P1143 HO2S1
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Component Inspection EBS00OA9

HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “MANU TRIG” and adjust “TRIGGER POINT” to 100% in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-
II.
3. Select “HO2S1 (B1)” and “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)”.
4. Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during the follow-
ing steps.
5. Touch “RECORD” on CONSULT-II screen.

MBIB0301E

6. Check the following.

● “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode changes
from “RICH” to “LEAN” to “RICH” 5 times in 10 seconds.
5 times (cycles) are counted as shown at right.
● “HO2S1 (B1)” voltage goes above 0.6V at least once.

● “HO2S1 (B1)” voltage goes below 0.3V at least once.

● “HO2S1 (B1)” voltage never exceeds 1.0V.

SEF217YA

SEF648Y

CAUTION:
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.

EC-298
 DTC P1143 HO2S1
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. A
2. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 35 (HO2S1 signal) and engine ground.
3. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm con-
stant under no load. EC
● The voltage fluctuates between 0 to 0.3V and 0.6 to 1.0V
more than 5 times within 10 seconds.
● The maximum voltage is over 0.6V at least one time. C
● The minimum voltage is below 0.3V at least one time.

● The voltage never exceeds 1.0V.

D
1 time: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V
2 times: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V
CAUTION: MBIB0018E
E
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped
from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new
one.
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread F
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Removal and Installation EBS00OAA
G
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1
Refer to EM-20, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" .
H

EC-299
 DTC P1144 HO2S1
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
DTC P1144 HO2S1 PFP:22690

Component Description EBS00OAB

The heated oxygen sensor 1 is placed into the exhaust manifold. It

detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas compared to the
outside air. The heated oxygen sensor 1 has a closed-end tube
made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from
approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions. The
heated oxygen sensor 1 signal is sent to the ECM. The ECM adjusts
the injection pulse duration to achieve the ideal air-fuel ratio. The
ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical change from 1V to 0V.

SEF463R

SEF288D

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00OAC

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
Maintaining engine speed at 2,000
HO2S1 (B1) ● Engine: After warming up 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
rpm
LEAN ←→ RICH
Maintaining engine speed at 2,000
HO2S1 MNTR (B1) ● Engine: After warming up Changes more than 5 times dur-
rpm
ing 10 seconds.

On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00OAD

To judge the malfunction, the output from the heated oxygen sensor
1 is monitored to determine whether the “rich” output is sufficiently
high. The “lean” output is sufficiently low. When both the outputs are
shifting to the rich side, the malfunction will be detected.

SEF299U

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
● Heated oxygen sensor 1
P1144 Heated oxygen sensor 1 The maximum and minimum voltages from the ● Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater
1144 rich shift monitoring sensor are beyond the specified voltages. ● Fuel pressure
● Injectors

EC-300
 DTC P1144 HO2S1
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00OAE

A
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at EC
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
C
● Always perform at a temperature above −10°C (14°F).
● Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II D
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Stop engine and wait at least 5 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “HO2S1 (B1) P1144” of “HO2S1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode E
with CONSULT-II.
4. Touch “START”.
5. Start engine and let it idle for at least 3 minutes. F
NOTE:
Never raise engine speed above 3,600 rpm after this step. If
the engine speed limit is exceeded, return to step 5. G

PBIB0548E

I
6. When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be dis-
played on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain the conditions con-
tinuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will J
take approximately 50 seconds or more.)
ENG SPEED 1,500 - 3,350 rpm
K
Vehicle speed 50 - 100 km/h (31 - 62 MPH)
B/FUEL SCHDL 1.7 - 5.1 msec
Selector lever Suitable position L
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from PBIB0549E

step 2.
7. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG M
RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-302, "Diagnostic
Procedure" .

SEC772C

Overall Function Check EBS00OAF

Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 1 circuit. During this check, a
DTC might not be confirmed.

EC-301
 DTC P1144 HO2S1
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
WITH GST
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 35 (HO2S1 signal) and engine ground.
3. Check one of the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm
constant under no load.
● The maximum voltage is below 0.8V at least one time.
● The minimum voltage is below 0.35V at least one time.
4. If NG, go to EC-302, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

MBIB0018E

Diagnostic Procedure EBS00OAG

1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten body ground screws.

>> GO TO 2.

MBIB0290E

2. RETIGHTEN HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1

Loosen and retighten heated oxygen sensor 1.
Tightening torque: 40 - 60 N·m (4.1 - 6.2 kg-m, 30 - 44 ft-lb)

>> GO TO 3.

MBIB0281E

EC-302
 DTC P1144 HO2S1
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
3. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA A
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
EC
2. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
C
Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?

SEF215Z

Without CONSULT-II F
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
G
3. Disconnect manifold absolute pressure sensor harness connec-
tor, and restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle
speed.
H
4. Stop engine and reconnect manifold absolute pressure sensor
harness connector.
5. Make sure that DTC P0107 is displayed.
I
6. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-51, "HOW TO ERASE
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .
7. Make sure that DTC P0000 is displayed.
J
8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. MBIB0276E
Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
K
Yes or No
Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0172. Refer to EC-195 .
No >> GO TO 4.
L
4. CHECK HO2S1 CONNECTOR FOR WATER
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. M
2. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 harness connector.
3. Check connectors for water.
Water should not exist.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

MBIB0280E

EC-303
 DTC P1144 HO2S1
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER
Refer to EC-130, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace heated oxygen sensor 1.

6. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1

Refer to EC-304, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace heated oxygen sensor 1.

7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-114, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
For circuit, refer to EC-153, "Wiring Diagram" .

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00OAH

HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “MANU TRIG” and adjust “TRIGGER POINT” to 100% in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-
II.
3. Select “HO2S1 (B1)” and “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)”.
4. Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during the follow-
ing steps.
5. Touch “RECORD” on CONSULT-II screen.

MBIB0301E

6. Check the following.

● “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode changes
from “RICH” to “LEAN” to “RICH” 5 times in 10 seconds.
5 times (cycles) are counted as shown at right.
● “HO2S1 (B1)” voltage goes above 0.6V at least once.

● “HO2S1 (B1)” voltage goes below 0.3V at least once.

● “HO2S1 (B1)” voltage never exceeds 1.0V.

SEF217YA

EC-304
 DTC P1144 HO2S1
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]

EC

SEF648Y

CAUTION: D
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread E
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Without CONSULT-II
F
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 35 (HO2S1 signal) and engine ground.
3. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm con- G
stant under no load.
● The voltage fluctuates between 0 to 0.3V and 0.6 to 1.0V
more than 5 times within 10 seconds.
H
● The maximum voltage is over 0.6V at least one time.

● The minimum voltage is below 0.3V at least one time.

● The voltage never exceeds 1.0V. I

1 time: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V
2 times: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V
CAUTION: MBIB0018E
J
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped
from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new
one.
K
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Removal and Installation EBS00OAI L
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1
Refer to EM-20, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" .
M

EC-305
 DTC P1146 HO2S2
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
DTC P1146 HO2S2 PFP:226A0

Component Description EBS00OAJ

The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold),

monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank.
Even if switching characteristics of the heated oxygen sensor 1 are
shifted, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal
from the heated oxygen sensor 2.
This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates volt-
age from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner condi-
tions.
Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for
engine control operation.
SEF327R

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00OAK

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
HO2S2 (B1) ● Engine: After warming up 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
● Keeping the engine speed
Revving engine from idle to 3,000
between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm rpm quickly.
HO2S2 MNTR (B1) LEAN ←→ RICH
for one minute and at idle for
one minute under no load.

On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00OAL

The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time

between rich and lean than the heated oxygen sensor 1. The oxygen
storage capacity before the three way catalyst causes the longer
switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen sensor
2, ECM monitors whether the minimum voltage of sensor is suffi-
ciently low during the various driving condition such as fuel-cut.

MBIB0661E

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
● Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
P1146 Heated oxygen sensor 2 The minimum voltage from the sensor is not ● Heated oxygen sensor 2
1146 minimum voltage monitoring reached to the specified voltage.
● Fuel pressure
● Injectors

EC-306
 DTC P1146 HO2S2
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00OAM

A
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
● “COMPLETED” will appear on CONSULT-II screen when all tests “COND1”, “COND2” and EC
“COND3” are completed.
● If “DTC confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and
wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. C
TESTING CONDITION:
Never stop engine during this procedure. If the engine is stopped, retry procedure from step 2 in “Pro-
cedure for COND1” D
WITH CONSULT-II
Procedure for COND1
E
For the Best results, perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” at a temperature of 0 to 30°C(32 to 86°F).
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds. F
3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least one minute under no
load.
4. Let engine idle one minute. G
5. Select “HO2S2 (B1) P1146” of “HO2S2” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
6. Touch “START”.
7. Start engine and let it idle for at least 30 seconds. H
8. Rev engine up to 2,000 rpm 2 or 3 times quickly under no load.
If “COMPLETED” appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to step 2 in Procedure for COND3”.
If “COMPLETED” does not appear on CONSULT-II screen, go to the following step. I
9. When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed at “COND1” on the CONSULT-II
screen. Maintain the conditions continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take
approximately 60 seconds.) J
ENG SPEED More than 1,500 rpm
B/FUEL SCHDL More than 1.0 msec
K
COOLANT TEMP/S 70 - 105°C
Selector lever Suitable position
L

PBIB0555E

NOTE:
● If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from step 2 in “Procedure for COND1”.

● If “COMPLETED” already appears at “COND2” on CONSULT-II screen before “Procedure for

COND2” is conducted, it is unnecessary to conduct step 1 in “Procedure for COND2”.

EC-307
 DTC P1146 HO2S2
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Procedure for COND2
1. While driving, release accelerator pedal completed from the
above condition [step 9] until “INCOMPLETE” at “COND2” on
CONSULT-II screen has turned to “COMPLETED” (It will take
approximately 4 seconds.)
NOTE:
If “COMPLETE” already appears at “COND3” on CONSULT-
II screen before “Procedure for COND3” is conducted, it is
unnecessary to conduct step 1 in “Procedure for COND3”.

PBIB0556E

Procedure for COND3

1. Stop vehicle and let it idle until “INCOMPLETE” of “COND3” on
CONSULT-II screen has turned to “COMPLETED”. (It will take a
maximum of approximately 6 minutes.)
2. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG
RESULTS”.
If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-310, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If “CAN NOT BE DIAGNOSED” is displayed, performed the fol-
lowing.
a. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and leave the vehicle in a cool place
(soak the vehicle).
b. Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “COOLANTEMP/S” in SEC775C

“DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.

c. Start engine and warm it up while monitoring “COOLANTEMP/S” indication on CONSULT-II.
d. When “COOLANTEMP/S” indication reaches to 70°C(158°F), go to procedure for COND1 step 3.
Overall Function Check EBS00OAN

Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit. During this check, a
DTC might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
1. Start engine and warm it up to the operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least one minute under no
load.
4. Let engine idle for one minute.
5. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 16 (HO2S2 signal) and engine ground.
6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load
at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
The voltage should be below 0.60V at least once during this
procedure.
If the voltage can be confirmed in step 6, step 7 is not nec-
essary.
7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage. Or
check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in “D”
position (A/T), 3rd gear position (M/T).
The voltage should be below 0.60V at least once during this MBIB0020E
procedure.
8. If NG, go to EC-310, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

EC-308
 DTC P1146 HO2S2
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Wiring Diagram EBS00OAO

EC

MBWA0273E

EC-309
 DTC P1146 HO2S2
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
● Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly
after the following conditions are met.
16 LG Heated oxygen sensor 2 – Engine: After warming up 0 - Approximately 1.0V
– Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for one minute and at idle for one
minute under no load.
[Engine is running]
Sensors' ground
74 B ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
(Heated oxygen sensor)
● Idle speed

Diagnostic Procedure EBS00OAP

1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten body ground screws.

>> GO TO 2.

MBIB0290E

EC-310
 DTC P1146 HO2S2
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
2. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA A
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
EC
2. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode
with CONSULT-II.
3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
C
4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
D

E
SEF215Z

Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. F
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
3. Disconnect manifold absolute pressure sensor harness connec-
G
tor, and restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle
speed.
4. Stop engine and reconnect manifold absolute pressure sensor
harness connector. H
5. Make sure that DTC P0107 is displayed.
6. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-51, "HOW TO ERASE
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . I
7. Make sure that DTC P0000 is displayed.
8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. MBIB0276E
J
Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
Yes or No
K
Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0172. Refer to EC-195 .
No >> GO TO 3.

3. CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT L

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.

2. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector. M
3. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 74 and HO2S2
terminal 3.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. MBIB0282E
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors.

EC-311
 DTC P1146 HO2S2
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
4. CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 16 and HO2S2 terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 16 or HO2S2 terminal 2 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should not exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2

Refer to EC-312, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace heated oxygen sensor 2.

6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-114, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00OAQ

HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT-II.
2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating tempera-
ture.
3. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for at least one minute under no load.
5. Let engine idle for one minute.

SEF174Y

6. Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select

“HO2S2 (B1)” as the monitor item with CONSULT-II.

SEF662Y

EC-312
 DTC P1146 HO2S2
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
7. Check “HO2S2 (B1)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%.
A

EC

MBIB0662E D
“HO2S2 (B1)” should be above 0.68V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%.
“HO2S2 (B1)” should be below 0.60V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%.
CAUTION: E
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread F
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. G
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least one minute under no
load. H
4. Let engine idle for one minute.
5. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 16 (HO2S2 signal) and engine ground.
I
6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load
at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
The voltage should be above 0.68V at least once during this J
procedure.
If the voltage is above 0.68V at step 6, step 7 is not neces-
sary. K
7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check voltage. Or
check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in “D”
position (A/T), 3rd gear position (M/T). L
The voltage should be below 0.60V at least once during this MBIB0020E
procedure.
8. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2.
M
CAUTION:
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Removal and Installation EBS00OAR

HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2

Refer to EX-3, "EXHAUST SYSTEM" .

EC-313
 DTC P1147 HO2S2
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
DTC P1147 HO2S2 PFP:226A0

Component Description EBS00OAS

The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold),

monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank.
Even if switching characteristics of the heated oxygen sensor 1 are
shifted, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal
from the heated oxygen sensor 2.
This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates volt-
age from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner condi-
tions.
Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for
engine control operation.
SEF327R

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00OAT

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
HO2S2 (B1) ● Engine: After warming up 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
● Keeping the engine speed
Revving engine from idle to 3,000
between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm rpm quickly.
HO2S2 MNTR (B1) LEAN ←→ RICH
for one minute and at idle for
one minute under no load.

On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00OAU

The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time

between rich and lean than the heated oxygen sensor 1. The oxygen
storage capacity before the three way catalyst causes the longer
switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen sensor
2, ECM monitors whether the maximum voltage of the sensor is suf-
ficiently high during the various driving condition such as fuel-cut.

SEF259VA

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
● Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit open or shorted.)

P1147 Heated oxygen sensor 2 The maximum voltage from the sensor is ● Heated oxygen sensor 2
1147 maximum voltage monitoring not reached to the specified voltage. ● Fuel pressure
● Injectors
● Intake air leaks

EC-314
 DTC P1147 HO2S2
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00OAV

A
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
● “COMPLETED” will appear on CONSULT-II screen when all tests “COND1”, “COND2” and EC
“COND3” are completed.
● If “DTC confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and
wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. C
TESTING CONDITION:
Never stop engine during this procedure. If the engine is stopped, retry procedure from step 2 in “Pro-
cedure for COND1” D
WITH CONSULT-II
Procedure for COND1
E
For the best results, perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” at a temperature of 0 to 30°C(32 to 86°F).
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds. F
3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least one minute under no
load.
4. Let engine idle one minute. G
5. Select “HO2S2 (B1) P1147” of “HO2S2” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
6. Touch “START”.
7. Start engine and let it idle for at least 30 seconds. H
8. Rev engine up to 2,000 rpm 2 or 3 times quickly under no load.
If “COMPLETED” appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to step 2 in “Procedure for COND3”.
If “COMPLETED” does not appear on CONSULT-II screen, go to the following step. I
9. When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed at COND1” on the CONSULT-II
screen. Maintain the conditions continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take
approximately 60 seconds.) J
ENG SPEED More than 1,500 rpm
B/FUEL SCHDL More than 1.0 msec
K
COOLANT TEMP/S 70 - 105°C
Selector lever Suitable position
L

PBIB0557E

NOTE:
● If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from step 2 in “Procedure for COND1”.

● If “COMPLETED” already appears at “COND2” on CONSULT-II screen before “Procedure for

COND2” is conducted, it is unnecessary to conduct step 1 in “Procedure for COND2”.

EC-315
 DTC P1147 HO2S2
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Procedure for COND2
1. While driving, release accelerator pedal completed from the
above condition [step 9] until “INCOMPLETE” at “COND2” on
CONSULT-II screen has turned to “COMPLETED” (It will take
approximately 4 seconds.)
NOTE:
If “COMPLETE” already appears at “COND3” on CONSULT-
II screen before “Procedure for COND3” is conducted, it is
unnecessary to conduct step 1 in “Procedure for COND3”.

PBIB0558E

Procedure for COND3

1. Stop vehicle and let it idle until “INCOMPLETE” of “COND3” on
CONSULT-II screen has turned to “COMPLETED”. (It will take a
maximum of approximately 6 minutes.)
2. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG
RESULTS”.
If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-318, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If “CAN NOT BE DIAGNOSED” is displayed, perform the follow-
ing.
a. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and leave the vehicle in a cool place
(soak the vehicle).
b. Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “COOLAN TEMP/S” in SEC778C

“DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.

c. Start engine and warm it up while monitoring “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication on CONSULT-II.
d. When “COOLANTEMP/S” indication reaches to 70°C(158°F), go to procedure for COND1 step 3.
Overall Function Check EBS00OAW

Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit. During this check, a
DTC might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least one minute under no
load.
4. Let engine idle for one minute.
5. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 16 (HO2S2 signal) and engine ground.
6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load
at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
The voltage should be above 0.68V at least once during this
procedure.
If the voltage can be confirmed in step 6, step 7 is not nec-
essary.
7. Keep vehicle idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage. Or
check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in “D”
position (A/T), 3rd gear position (M/T).
The voltage should be above 0.68V at least once during this MBIB0020E
procedure.
8. If NG, go to EC-318, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

EC-316
 DTC P1147 HO2S2
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Wiring Diagram EBS00OAX

EC

MBWA0273E

EC-317
 DTC P1147 HO2S2
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
● Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly
after the following conditions are met.
16 LG Heated oxygen sensor 2 – Engine: After warming up 0 - Approximately 1.0V
– Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for one minute and at idle for one
minute under no load.
[Engine is running]
Sensors' ground
74 B ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
(Heated oxygen sensor)
● Idle speed

Diagnostic Procedure EBS00OAY

1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten body ground screws.

>> GO TO 2.

MBIB0290E

EC-318
 DTC P1147 HO2S2
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
2. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA A
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
EC
2. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode
with CONSULT-II.
3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
C
4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
D

E
SEF215Z

Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. F
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
3. Disconnect manifold absolute pressure sensor harness connec-
G
tor, and restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle
speed.
4. Stop engine and reconnect manifold absolute pressure sensor
harness connector. H
5. Make sure that DTC P0107 is displayed.
6. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-51, "HOW TO ERASE
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . I
7. Make sure that DTC P0000 is displayed.
8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. MBIB0276E
J
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
Yes or No
K
Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171. Refer to EC-188 .
No >> GO TO 3.

3. CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT L

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.

2. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector. M
3. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 74 and HO2S2
terminal 3.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. MBIB0282E
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors.

EC-319
 DTC P1147 HO2S2
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
4. CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 16 and HO2S2 terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 16 or HO2S2 terminal 2 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should not exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2

Refer to EC-320, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace heated oxygen sensor 2.

6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-114, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00OAZ

HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT-II.
2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating tempera-
ture.
3. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for at least one minute under no load.
5. Let engine idle for one minute.

SEF174Y

6. Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select

“HO2S2 (B1)” as the monitor item with CONSULT-II.

SEF662Y

EC-320
 DTC P1147 HO2S2
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
7. Check “HO2S2 (B1)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%.
A

EC

MBIB0662E D
“HO2S2 (B1)” should be above 0.68V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%.
“HO2S2 (B1)” should be below 0.60V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%.
CAUTION: E
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread F
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. G
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least one minute under no
load. H
4. Let engine idle for one minute.
5. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 16 (HO2S2 signal) and engine ground.
I
6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load
at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
The voltage should be above 0.68V at least once during this J
procedure.
If the voltage is above 0.68V at step 6, step 7 is not neces-
sary. K
7. Keep vehicle idling for 10 minutes, then check voltage. Or check
the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in “D” posi-
tion (A/T), 3rd gear position (M/T). L
The voltage should be below 0.60V at least once during this MBIB0020E
procedure.
8. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2.
M
CAUTION:
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Removal and Installation EBS00OB0

HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2

Refer to EX-3, "EXHAUST SYSTEM" .

EC-321
 DTC P1171 INTAKE ERROR
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
DTC P1171 INTAKE ERROR PFP:22365

On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00OSO

NOTE:
If DTC 1171 is displayed with DTC P0108, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0108.
Refer toEC-138
ECM computes two intake air volume values.
1: Computed from manifold absolute pressure signal and intake air temperature signal.
2: Computed from engine revolution signal and throttle position signal.

In normal condition, value 1 is used for engine control.

If intake air leak occurred between throttle valve and intake air port, manifold absolute pressure sensor signal
might increase, and then ECM increases amount of fuel injected. In this case, ECM uses value 2 for engine
control instead of value1.
ECM monitors the difference between value 1 and value 2. If the difference is extremely large, ECM judges
intake air leak occurs and light up the MI

This diagnosis has one trip detection logic.

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
● Harness or connectors
(The manifold absolute pressure sensor
circuit is open or shorted.)
P1171 An excessively high voltage from manifold
Intake error ● Manifold absolute pressure
1171 absolute pressure sensor is sent to ECM.
● Intake air leaks
● Vacuum hoses

FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and MI lights up.
Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
When accelerator pedal is depressed, engine speed will not rise more than 2,500 rpm
Intake air system problem
due to fuel cut.

DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00OSP

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and wait at least 5 seconds.
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-324, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SEF174Y

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.

EC-322
 DTC P1171 INTAKE ERROR
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Wiring Diagram EBS00OSQ

EC

MBWA0304E

EC-323
 DTC P1171 INTAKE ERROR
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition Approximately 1.5V
Manifold absolute pres- ● Idle speed
51 W
sure sensor [Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition Approximately 1.2V
● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.

Diagnostic Procedure EBS00OSR

1. CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAK

Listen for an intake air leak after the air cleaner element.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair or replace.

2. CHECK VACUUM HOSE

1. Check intake manifold vacuum hoses for clogging or disconnection. Refer to EC-22, "Vacuum Hose Draw-
ing" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace.

3. CHECK MAP SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect manifold absolute pressure sensor harness connec-
tor.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.

MBIB0276E

4. Check voltage between manifold absolute pressure sensor ter-

minal 2 and ground.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair harness or connectors.

MBIB0602E

EC-324
 DTC P1171 INTAKE ERROR
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
4. CHECK MAP SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check harness continuity between manifold absolute pressure sensor terminal 4 and ECM terminal 56.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC

Continuity should exist.

3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair harness or connectors. D

5. CHECK MAP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between manifold absolute pressure sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal 51. E

Continuity should exist.

2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Repair harness or connectors. G

6. CHECK MAP SENSOR

H
Refer to EC-139, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. I
NG >> Repair or replace sensor.

7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

J
Refer to EC-114, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END K

EC-325
 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE PFP:00000

System Description EBS00OB1

NOTE:
If DTC P1217 is displayed with DTC U1000, U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000,
U1001. Refer to EC-120, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
COOLING FAN CONTROL
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed*1

Battery Battery voltage*1

Vehicle speed signal Vehicle speed*2 Cooling fan IPDM E/R
control (Cooling fan relay)
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature

Air conditioner switch*3 Air conditioner “ON” signal*2

Refrigerant pressure sensor*3 Refrigerant pressure

*1: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
*2: These signals are sent to ECM through CAN communication line.
*3: Models with air conditioner.

The ECM controls the cooling fan corresponding to the vehicle speed, engine coolant temperature, refrigerant
pressure, and air conditioner ON signal. The control system has 3-step control [HIGH/LOW/OFF] (models with
A/C) or 2 step control [ON/OFF] (models without A/T).
The ECM controls cooling fan relays through CAN communication line.
OPERATION
(Models with A/C)

MBIB0650E

EC-326
 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
(Models without A/C)
A

EC

MBIB0656E D

EC-327
 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00OB2

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
Air conditioner switch: OFF OFF
● Engine: After warming up, idle
AIR COND SIG Air conditioner switch: ON
the engine ON
(Compressor operates.)
Engine coolant temperature is 94°C
OFF
(201°F) or less
(Models with A/C)
Engine coolant temperature is
● Engine: After warming up, idle
COOLING FAN between 95°C (203°F) and 104°C LOW*
the engine
(210°F)
● Air conditioner switch: OFF
Engine coolant temperature is 105°C
HI*
(212°F) or more
*:Models without air conditioner, cooling fan operates only ON and OFF operation, but CONSULT-II display will change OFF, LOW and
HI depends on engine coolant temperature.

On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00OB3

If the cooling fan or another component in the cooling system malfunctions, engine coolant temperature will
rise. When the engine coolant temperature reaches an abnormally high temperature condition, a malfunction
is indicated.
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
● Harness or connectors
(The cooling fan circuit is open or
shorted.)
● Cooling fan does not operate properly (Over- ● Cooling fan
heat).
● Radiator hose
P1217 Engine over tempera- ● Cooling fan system does not operate prop- ● Radiator
1217 ture (Overheat) erly (Overheat).
● Radiator cap
● Engine coolant was not added to the system
using the proper filling method. ● Water pump
● Thermostat
For more information, refer to EC-340,
"Main 12 Causes of Overheating" .

CAUTION:
When a malfunction is indicated, be sure to replace the coolant. Refer to CO-7, "Changing Engine
coolant" . Also, replace the engine oil. Refer to LU-5, "Changing Engine Oil" .
1. Fill radiator with coolant up to specified level with a filling speed of 2 liters per minute. Be sure to
use coolant with the proper mixture ratio. Refer to MA-13, "Engine Coolant Mixture Ratio" .
2. After refilling coolant, run engine to ensure that no water-flow noise is emitted.
Overall Function Check EBS00OB4

Use this procedure to check the overall function of the cooling fan. During this check, a DTC might not be con-
firmed.
WARNING:
Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pres-
sure fluid escaping from the radiator.
Wrap a thick cloth around cap. Carefully remove the cap by turning it a quarter turn to allow built-up
pressure to escape. Then turn the cap all the way off.

EC-328
 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank and radiator. A
Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level.
If the coolant level in the reservoir tank and/or radiator is below
the proper range, skip the following steps and go to EC-333, EC
"Diagnostic Procedure" .
2. Confirm whether customer filled the coolant or not. If customer
filled the coolant, skip the following steps and go to EC-333,
C
"Diagnostic Procedure" .
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.

SEF621W
D

4. Perform “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CON-

SULT-II. E
5. If the results are NG, go to EC-333, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SEF784Z
H
WITH GST
(Models with air conditioner)
1. Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank and radiator. I
Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level.
If the coolant level in the reservoir tank and/or radiator is below
the proper range, skip the following steps and go to EC-333,
"Diagnostic Procedure" . J
2. Confirm whether customer filled the coolant or not. If customer
filled the coolant, skip the following steps and go to EC-333,
"Diagnostic Procedure" . K
3. Start engine.
Be careful not to overheat engine.
4. Set temperature control lever to full cold position. SEF621W L
5. Turn air conditioner switch “ON”.
6. Turn blower fan switch “ON”.
M
7. Run engine at idle for a few minutes with air conditioner operating.
Be careful not to overheat engine.
8. Make sure that cooling fans operates at low speed.
If NG, go to EC-333, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If OK, go to the following step.
9. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
10. Turn air conditioner switch and blower fan switch “OFF”.
11. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connec-
tor.
12. Connect 150Ω resistor to engine coolant temperature sensor
harness connector.
MBIB0651E

EC-329
 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
13. Restart engine and make sure that cooling fan operates at
higher speed than low speed.
Be careful not to overheat engine.
14. If NG, go to EC-333, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SEF023R

(Models without air conditioner)

1. Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank and radiator.
Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level.
If the coolant level in the reservoir tank and/or radiator is below
the proper range, skip the following steps and go to EC-333,
"Diagnostic Procedure" .
2. Confirm whether customer filled the coolant or not. If customer
filled the coolant, skip the following steps and go to EC-333,
"Diagnostic Procedure" .
3. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connec-
tor.
4. Connect 150Ω resistor to engine coolant temperature sensor SEF621W

harness connector.
5. Start engine and make that cooling fan operates. Be careful not
to overheat engine.
6. If NG, go to EC-333, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SEF023R

EC-330
 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Wiring Diagram EBS00OB5

WITH AIR CONDITIONER A

EC

MBWA0289E

EC-331
 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
WITHOUT AIR CONDITIONER

MBWA0290E

EC-332
 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00OB6

PROCEDURE FOR MODELS WITH AIR CONDITIONER A

1. INSPECTION START
Do you have CONSULT-II? EC
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> GO TO 4. C

2. CHECK COOLING FAN LOW SPEED OPERATION

D
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Perform “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CON- E
SULT-II and touch “LOW” on the CONSULT-II screen.
3. Make sure that cooling fan operates at low speed.
OK or NG F
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Check cooling fan low speed control circuit. (Go to EC-
338, "PROCEDURE A" .) G

SEF784Z
H

3. CHECK COOLING FAN HIGH SPEED OPERATION

I
With CONSULT-II
1. Touch “HIGH”on the CONSULT-II screen.
2. Make sure that cooling fan operates at higher speed than low J
speed.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. K
NG >> Check cooling fan high speed control circuit. (Go to EC-
338, "PROCEDURE A" .)
L

SEF785Z

EC-333
 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
4. CHECK COOLING FAN LOW SPEED OPERATION
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and let it idle.
2. Turn air conditioner switch “ON”.
3. Turn blower fan switch “ON”.
4. Make sure that cooling fan operates at low speed.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Check cooling fan low speed control circuit. (Go to EC-
338, "PROCEDURE A" .)

MBIB0651E

5. CHECK COOLING FAN HIGH SPEED OPERATION

Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Turn air conditioner switch and blower fan switch “OFF”.
3. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector.
4. Connect 150Ω resistor to engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector.
5. Restart engine and make sure that cooling fan operates at
higher speed than low speed.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Check cooling fan high speed control circuit. (Go to EC-
338, "PROCEDURE A" .)

SEF023R

6. CHECK COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAK

Apply pressure to the cooling system with a tester, and check if the pressure drops.
Testing pressure: 157 kPa (1.57 bar, 1.6 kg/cm2 , 23psi)
CAUTION:
Higher than the specified pressure may cause radiator damage.
Pressure should not drop.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.

SLC754A

EC-334
 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A
Check the following for leak.
● Hose
● Radiator EC
● Water pump (Refer toCO-20, "WATER PUMP" .)

C
>> Repair or replace.

8. CHECK RADIATOR CAP

D
Apply pressure to cap with a tester and check radiator cap relief
pressure.
Radiator cap relief pressure: E
59 - 98 kPa (0.59 - 0.98 bar, 0.6 - 1.0 kg/cm2 , 9 - 14 psi)
OK or NG F
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace radiator cap.
G
SLC755A

9. CHECK THERMOSTAT H
1. Remove thermostat.
2. Check valve seating condition at normal room temperatures.
It should seat tightly. I
3. Check valve opening temperature and valve lift.
Valve opening temperature: J
80.5 - 83.5 °C (177 - 182 °F)
Valve lift:
More than 8 mm/95 °C (0.31 in/203 °F) K

4. Check if valve is closed at 5°C (9°F) below valve opening tem-

perature. For details, refer to CO-22, "THERMOSTAT" .
L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10. SLC343

NG >> Replace thermostat. M

10. CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-150, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor.

11. CHECK MAIN 12 CAUSES

If the cause cannot be isolated, go to EC-340, "Main 12 Causes of Overheating" .

>> INSPECTION END

EC-335
 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
PROCEDURE FOR MODELS WITHOUT AIR CONDITIONER
1. INSPECTION START
Do you have CONSULT-II?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> GO TO 3.

2. CHECK COOLING FAN OPERATION

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Perform “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CON-
SULT-II and touch “ON” on the CONSULT-II screen.
3. Make sure that cooling fan operates.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO4.
NG >> Check cooling fan low speed control circuit. (Go to EC-
338, "PROCEDURE A" .)

SEF784Z

3. CHECK COOLING FAN OPERATION

Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector.
3. Connect 150Ω resistor to engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector.
4. Restart engine and make sure that cooling fan operates.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Check cooling fan high speed control circuit-1. (Go to
EC-338, "PROCEDURE A" .)

SEF023R

EC-336
 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
4. CHECK COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAK A
Apply pressure to the cooling system with a tester, and check if the pressure drops.
Testing pressure: 157 kPa (1.57 bar, 1.6 kg/cm2 , 23psi)
EC
CAUTION:
Higher than the specified pressure may cause radiator damage.
Pressure should not drop. C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5. D

SLC754A

F
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following for leak.
● Hose G
● Radiator
● Water pump (Refer toCO-20, "WATER PUMP" .)
H

>> Repair or replace.

6. CHECK RADIATOR CAP I

Apply pressure to cap with a tester and check radiator cap relief
pressure. J
Radiator cap relief pressure:
59 - 98 kPa (0.59 - 0.98 bar, 0.6 - 1.0 kg/cm2 , 9 - 14 psi)
K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace radiator cap. L

SLC755A

M
7. CHECK THERMOSTAT
1. Remove thermostat.
2. Check valve seating condition at normal room temperatures.
It should seat tightly.
3. Check valve opening temperature and valve lift.
Valve opening temperature:
80.5 - 83.5 °C (177 - 182 °F)
Valve lift:
More than 8 mm/95 °C (0.31 in/203 °F)
4. Check if valve is closed at 5°C (9°F) below valve opening tem-
perature. For details, refer to CO-22, "THERMOSTAT" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. SLC343

NG >> Replace thermostat.

EC-337
 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
8. CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-150, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor.

9. CHECK MAIN 12 CAUSES

If the cause cannot be isolated, go to EC-340, "Main 12 Causes of Overheating" .

>> INSPECTION END

PROCEDURE A
1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E12.
3. Check voltage between IPDM E/R terminal 14 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.

MBIB0607E

2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● 40A fusible links
● Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and battery

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

EC-338
 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
3. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTORS CIRCUIT A
1. Disconnect cooling fan motor harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between cooling fan motor terminal 1
and IPDM E/R terminal 12, cooling fan motor terminal 2 and EC
ground.
Refer to wiring diagram.
Continuity should exist. C

3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.

4. For models with air conditioner, check harness continuity D
between IPDM E/R terminal 10, and cooling fan motor terminal
1. MBIB0648E

Refer to wiring diagram.

E
Continuity should exist.
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG F
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
G
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
H
● Harness for open or short between cooling fan motor and IPDM E/R
● Harness for open or short between cooling fan motor and ground
● Harness for open or short between resistor and IPDM E/R (models with A/T) I
● Harness for open or short between resistor and cooling fan motor (models with A/T)
● Resistor E5 (models with A/C)
J
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

5. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTORS K

Refer to EC-340, "Component Inspection" .

OK or NG L
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace cooling fan motors.

6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT M

Perform EC-114, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

OK or NG
OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-18, "IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MOD-
ULE ENGINE ROOM)" .
NG >> Repair or replace harness or connector.

EC-339
 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Main 12 Causes of Overheating EBS00OB7

Engine Step Inspection item Equipment Standard Reference page

OFF 1 ● Blocked radiator ● Visual No blocking —
● Blocked condenser
● Blocked radiator grille
● Blocked bumper
2 ● Coolant mixture ● Coolant tester 50 - 50% coolant mixture See MA-13, "Engine
Coolant Mixture Ratio" .
3 ● Coolant level ● Visual Coolant up to MAX level See CO-7, "LEVEL
in reservoir tank and radi- CHECK" .
ator filler neck
4 ● Radiator cap ● Pressure tester 59 - 98 kPa See CO-14, "Checking
(0.59 - 0.98 bar, 0.6 - 1.0 Radiator Cap" .
kg/cm2 , 9 - 14 psi) (Limit)

ON*2 5 ● Coolant leaks ● Visual No leaks See CO-7, "LEAK

CHECK" .

ON*2 6 ● Thermostat ● Touch the upper and Both hoses should be hot See CO-22, "THERMO-
lower radiator hoses STAT" , and CO-10,
"RADIATOR" .

ON*1 7 ● Cooling fan ● CONSULT-II Operating See trouble diagnosis for

DTC P1217 (EC-333 ).
OFF 8 ● Combustion gas leak ● Color checker chemical Negative —
tester 4 Gas analyzer

ON*3 9 ● Coolant temperature ● Visual Gauge less than 3/4 —

gauge when driving
● Coolant overflow to ● Visual No overflow during driving See CO-7, "Changing
reservoir tank and idling Engine coolant" .

OFF*4 10 ● Coolant return from ● Visual Should be initial level in See CO-7, "LEVEL
reservoir tank to radia- reservoir tank CHECK" .
tor
OFF 11 ● Cylinder head ● Straight gauge feeler 0.1 mm (0.004 in) Maxi- See EM-57, "CYLINDER
gauge mum distortion (warping) HEAD" .
12 ● Cylinder block and pis- ● Visual No scuffing on cylinder See EM-69, "CYLINDER
tons walls or piston BLOCK" .
*1: Turn the ignition switch ON.
*2: Engine running at 3,000 rpm for 10 minutes.
*3: Drive at 90 km/h (55 MPH) for 30 minutes and then let idle for 10 minutes.
*4: After 60 minutes of cool down time.
For more information, refer to CO-4, "OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS" .

Component Inspection EBS00OB8

COOLING FAN MOTOR

1. Disconnect cooling fan motor harness connectors.
2. Supply cooling fan motor terminals with battery voltage and
check operation.

Terminals
(+) (-)
Cooling fan motor 1 2

MBIB0607E

EC-340
 DTC P1223, P1224 TP SENSOR
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
DTC P1223, P1224 TP SENSOR PFP:16119
A
Component Description EBS00OB9

Electric Throttle Control Actuator consists of throttle control motor,

throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to EC
the throttle valve movement.
The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are
a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position
into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addi- C
tion, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the
throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM
judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these sig- D
nals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the
throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condi-
PBIB0145E
tion.
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00OBA

Specification data are reference values.

F
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
● Ignition switch: ON
Accelerator pedal: Fully released More than 0.36V
(Engine stopped)
THRTL SEN1 G
THRTL SEN2* ● Shift lever:
D (A/T model) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V
1st (M/T model)
H
*: Throttle position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal.

On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00OBB

These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic. I

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P1223 Throttle position sensor 2 An excessively low voltage from the TP sensor 2 ● Harness or connectors J
1223 circuit low input is sent to ECM. (The TP sensor 2 circuit is open or
shorted.)
P1224 Throttle position sensor 2 An excessively high voltage from the TP sensor 2
● Electric throttle control actuator K
1224 circuit high input is sent to ECM.
(TP sensor 2)

FAIL-SAFE MODE L
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MI lights up.
Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10
M
degrees.
The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition.
So, the acceleration will be poor.

DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00OBC

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.

EC-341
 DTC P1223, P1224 TP SENSOR
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-344, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SEF058Y

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.

EC-342
 DTC P1223, P1224 TP SENSOR
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Wiring Diagram EBS00OBD

EC

MBWA0291E

EC-343
 DTC P1223, P1224 TP SENSOR
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMI- WIRE
ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
NAL NO. COLOR
Sensors' power supply
47 L [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 5V
(Throttle position sensor)
[Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped
● Shift lever position is “D” (A/T model) More than 0.36V
● Shift lever position is “1st” (M/T model)
● Accelerator pedal fully released
49 Y Throttle position sensor 1
[Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped
● Shift lever position is “D” (A/T model) Less than 4.75V
● Shift lever position is “1st” (M/T model)
● Accelerator pedal fully depressed
[Engine is running]
Sensors' ground
66 B ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
(Throttle position sensor)
● Idle speed
[Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped
● Shift lever position is “D” (A/T model) Less than 4.75V
● Shift lever position is “1st” (M/T model)
● Accelerator pedal fully released
68 R Throttle position sensor 2
[Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped
● Shift lever position is “D” (A/T model) More than 0.36V
● Shift lever position is “1st” (M/T model)
● Accelerator pedal fully depressed

Diagnostic Procedure EBS00OBE

1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten body ground screws.

>> GO TO 2.

MBIB0290E

EC-344
 DTC P1223, P1224 TP SENSOR
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A
1. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
EC

D
MBIB0308E

3. Check voltage between electric throttle control actuator terminal E

1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors. G

PBIB0082E H

3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. I
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 66 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 5.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. J

Continuity should exist.

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. L

4. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
M
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 68 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

5. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

Refer to EC-346, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.

EC-345
 DTC P1223, P1224 TP SENSOR
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
6. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
1. Replace the electric throttle control actuator.
2. Perform EC-34, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
3. Perform EC-34, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .

>> INSPECTION END

7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-114, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00OBF

THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
2. Perform EC-34, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Set selector lever to “D” position (A/T models) or “1st” position (M/T models).
5. Check voltage between ECM terminals 49 (TP sensor 1 signal),
68 (TP sensor 2 signal) and engine ground under the following
conditions.
Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage

49 Fully released More than 0.36V

(Throttle position sensor 1) Fully depressed Less than 4.75V

68 Fully released Less than 4.75V

(Throttle position sensor 2) Fully depressed More than 0.36V
6. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to the next MBIB0022E

step.
7. Perform EC-34, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
8. Perform EC-34, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Remove and Installation EBS00OBG

ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR

Refer to EM-14, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" .

EC-346
 DTC P1225 TP SENSOR
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
DTC P1225 TP SENSOR PFP:16119
A
Component Description EBS00OBH

Electric Throttle Control Actuator consists of throttle control motor,

throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to EC
the throttle valve movement.
The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are
a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position
into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addi- C
tion, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the
throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM
judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these sig- D
nals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the
throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condi-
PBIB0145E
tion.
E
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00OBI

The MI will not light up for this self-diagnosis.

F
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
Closed throttle position
P1225 Closed throttle position learning value is excessively ● Electric throttle control actuator
learning performance G
1225 low. (TP sensor 1 and 2)
problem

DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00OBJ

H
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION: I
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. J
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds.
K
4. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
5. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-348, "Diagnostic Procedure"
. L

SEF058Y

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.

EC-347
 DTC P1225 TP SENSOR
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00OBK

1. CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Remove the intake air duct.
3. Check if foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve and
the housing.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle
control actuator inside.

MBIB0307E

2. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR

1. Replace the electric throttle control actuator.
2. Perform EC-34, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
3. Perform EC-34, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .

>> INSPECTION END

Remove and Installation EBS00OBL

ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR

Refer to EM-14, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" .

EC-348
 DTC P1226 TP SENSOR
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
DTC P1226 TP SENSOR PFP:16119
A
Component Description EBS00OBM

Electric Throttle Control Actuator consists of throttle control motor,

throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to EC
the throttle valve movement.
The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are
a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position
into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addi- C
tion, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the
throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM
judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these sig- D
nals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the
throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condi-
PBIB0145E
tion.
E
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00OBN

The MI will not light up for this self-diagnosis.

F
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
Closed throttle position
P1226 Closed throttle position learning is not performed ● Electric throttle control actuator
learning performance G
1226 successfully, repeatedly. (TP sensor 1 and 2)
problem

DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00OBO

H
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION: I
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. J
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds.
K
4. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4, 32 times.
6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-350, "Diagnostic Procedure" L
.

SEF058Y

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.

EC-349
 DTC P1226 TP SENSOR
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00OBP

1. CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Remove the intake air duct.
3. Check if foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve and
the housing.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle
control actuator inside.

MBIB0307E

2. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR

1. Replace the electric throttle control actuator.
2. Perform EC-34, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
3. Perform EC-34, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .

>> INSPECTION END

Remove and Installation EBS00OBQ

ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR

Refer to EM-14, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" .

EC-350
 DTC P1227, P1228 APP SENSOR
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
DTC P1227, P1228 APP SENSOR PFP:18002
A
Component Description EBS00OBR

The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end

of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelera- EC
tor position and sends a signal to the ECM.
Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors
are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal
position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. C
In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of
the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The
ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from D
these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these
signals.
PBIB0146E
Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM
E
receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine oper-
ation such as fuel cut.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00OBS
F
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
G
● Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.6 - 0.9V
ACCEL SEN1
(Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed 4.0 - 4.8V

● Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.6 - 0.9V H

ACCEL SEN2*
(Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed 3.9 - 4.8V

● Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released ON

CLSD THL POS
(Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed OFF I
*: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differ from ECM terminal voltage signal.

On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00OBT J

These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause K
P1227 Accelerator pedal position An excessively low voltage from the APP sensor 2 ● Harness or connectors
1227 sensor 2 circuit low input is sent to ECM. (The APP sensor 2 circuit is open or
shorted.) L
P1228 Accelerator pedal position An excessively high voltage from the APP sensor 2
● Accelerator pedal position sensor
1228 sensor 2 circuit high input is sent to ECM.
(Accelerator pedal position sensor 2)

M
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MI lights up.
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10
degrees.
The ECM regulates the opening speed of throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition.
So, the acceleration will be poor.

DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00OBU

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.

EC-351
 DTC P1227, P1228 APP SENSOR
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-356, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SEF058Y

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.

EC-352
 DTC P1227, P1228 APP SENSOR
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Wiring Diagram EBS00OBV

LHD MODELS A

EC

MBWA0292E

EC-353
 DTC P1227, P1228 APP SENSOR
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMI-
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
Sensor′s ground
82 B ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
(APP sensor 1)
● Idle speed
[Ignition switch “ON”]
Sensor′s ground
83 B ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
(APP sensor 2)
● Idle speed
Sensors′ power supply
90 OR [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 5V
(APP sensor 1)
Sensors′ power supply
91 BR [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 5V
(APP sensor 2)
[Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped 0.3 - 0.6V
Accelerator pedal position ● Accelerator pedal fully released
98 GY
sensor 2 [Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped 1.95 - 2.4V
● Accelerator pedal fully depressed
[Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped 0.6 - 0.9V
Accelerator pedal position ● Accelerator pedal fully released
106 W
sensor 1 [Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped 3.9 - 4.7V
● Accelerator pedal fully depressed

EC-354
 DTC P1227, P1228 APP SENSOR
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
RHD MODELS
A

EC

MBWA0293E

EC-355
 DTC P1227, P1228 APP SENSOR
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMI-
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
Sensor′s ground
82 B ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
(APP sensor 1)
● Idle speed
[Ignition switch “ON”]
Sensor′s ground
83 B ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
(APP sensor 2)
● Idle speed
Sensors′ power supply
90 OR [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 5V
(APP sensor 1)
Sensors′ power supply
91 BR [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 5V
(APP sensor 2)
[Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped 0.3 - 0.6V
Accelerator pedal position ● Accelerator pedal fully released
98 GY
sensor 2 [Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped 1.95 - 2.4V
● Accelerator pedal fully depressed
[Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped 0.6 - 0.9V
Accelerator pedal position ● Accelerator pedal fully released
106 W
sensor 1 [Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped 3.9 - 4.7V
● Accelerator pedal fully depressed

Diagnostic Procedure EBS00OBW

1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten body ground screws.

>> GO TO 2.

MBIB0290E

EC-356
 DTC P1227, P1228 APP SENSOR
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
2. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A
1. Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness
connector.
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”. EC

D
MBIB0285E

3. Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 5 and ground with E

CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
G

MBIB0309E H

3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following. I
● Harness connectors M71, M201 (RHD models)
● Harness connectors M1, E101 (RHD models)
J
● Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. K
4. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. L
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 83 and APP sensor terminal 1.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. M

Continuity should exist.

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.

5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Harness connectors M71, M201 (RHD models)
● Harness connectors M1, E101 (RHD models)
● Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

EC-357
 DTC P1227, P1228 APP SENSOR
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
6. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 98 and APP sensor terminal 6.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.

7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Harness connectors M71, M201 (RHD models)
● Harness connectors M1, E101 (RHD models)
● Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

8. CHECK APP SENSOR

Refer to EC-358, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 9.

9. REPLACE APP SENSOR

1. Replace the accelerator pedal position sensor.
2. Perform EC-34, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
3. Perform EC-34, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
4. Perform EC-34, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .

>> INSPECTION END

10. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-114, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00OBX

ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR

1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”.

EC-358
 DTC P1227, P1228 APP SENSOR
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
3. Check voltage between ECM terminals 106 (APP sensor 1 sig-
nal), 98 (APP sensor 2 signal) and engine ground under the fol- A
lowing conditions.
Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage
EC
106 Fully released 0.6 - 0.9V
(Accelerator pedal position
sensor 1) Fully depressed 3.9 - 4.7V

98 Fully released 0.3 - 0.6V C

(Accelerator pedal position
sensor 2) Fully depressed 1.95 - 2.4V
MBIB0023E

4. If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly and go to the next D

step.
5. Perform EC-34, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
6. Perform EC-34, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . E
7. Perform EC-34, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Remove and Installation EBS00OBY
F
ACCELERATOR PEDAL
Refer to ACC-2, "ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM" .
G

EC-359
 DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY PFP:16119

On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00OBZ

This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
● Harness or connectors
(The TP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is shorted.)
P1229 Sensor power supply circuit ECM detects a voltage of power source
● Electric throttle control actuator
1229 short for sensor is excessively low or high.
(TP sensor 1 and 2)
● ECM pin terminal

FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MI lights up.
Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode
ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return
spring.

DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00OC0

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-362, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SEF058Y

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.

EC-360
 DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Wiring Diagram EBS00OC1

EC

MBWA0463E

EC-361
 DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
Sensor's power supply
47 L [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 5V
(Throttle position sensor)

Diagnostic Procedure EBS00OC2

1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten body ground screws.

>> GO TO 2.

MBIB0290E

2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”.

MBIB0308E

3. Check voltage between electric throttle control actuator terminal

1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.

PBIB0082E

EC-362
 DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
3. CHECK SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITS FOR SHORT A
Check the following.
● Harness for short to power and short to ground between ECM terminal 47 and electric throttle control
actuator terminal 1. EC
● ECM pin terminal.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. C
NG >> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR D

Refer to EC-206, "Component Inspection" .

OK or NG E
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.

5. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR F

1. Replace electric throttle control actuator.

2. Perform EC-34, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . G
3. Perform EC-34, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .

H
>> INSPECTION END

6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

I
Refer to EC-114, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END J

EC-363
 DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH PFP:32006

Component Description EBS00OC3

When the shift lever position is “P” or “N” (A/T models), “Neutral” (M/T models), park/neutral position (PNP)
switch is “ON”.
ECM detects the position because the continuity of the line (the “ON” signal) exists.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00OC4

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
Shift lever:
P or N (A/T model), Neutral (M/T ON
P/N POSI SW ● Ignition switch: ON model)
Shift lever: Except above OFF

On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00OC5

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
● Harness or connectors
The signal of the park/neutral position (PNP) [The park/neutral position (PNP) switch
P1706
Park/neutral position switch switch is not changed in the process of circuit is open or shorted.]
1706
engine starting and driving.
● Park/neutral position (PNP) switch

DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00OC6

CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select “P/N POSI SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CON-
SULT-II. Then check the “P/N POSI SW” signal under the follow-
ing conditions.
Position (Selector lever) Known-good signal
“N” and “P” position (A/T)
ON
“Neutral” position (M/T)
Except the above position OFF

If NG, go to EC-367, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

If OK, go to following step. SEF212Y
3. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
4. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
5. Maintain the following conditions for at least 60 consecutive sec-
onds.
ENG SPEED 1,500 - 4,200 rpm
COOLAN TEMP/S More than 70°C (158°F)
B/FUEL SCHDL 1.625 - 6.25 msec
VHCL SPEED SE More than 46 km/h (29 MPH)
Selector lever Suitable position
6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-367, "Diagnostic Procedure"
. SEF213Y

EC-364
 DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Overall Function Check EBS00OC7

A
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit. During this
check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.
WITH GST EC
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 102 (PNP switch signal)
and body ground under the following conditions. C
Condition (Gear position) Voltage V (Known-good data)
“N” and “P” position (A/T)
Approx. 0 D
“Neutral” position (M/T)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
Except the above position
(11 - 14V)
E
3. If NG, go to EC-367, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
MBIB0029E

EC-365
 DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Wiring Diagram EBS00OC8

MBWA0294E

EC-366
 DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: A
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER- EC
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Ignition switch “ON”] C
● Shift lever position is “P” or “N” (A/T models), Approximately 0V
102 GY PNP switch “Neutral” (M/T models).
[Ignition switch “ON”] BATTERY VOLTAGE D
● Except the above gear position (11 - 14V)

Diagnostic Procedure EBS00OC9

E
1. CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
F
2. Check voltage between IPDM E/R terminal 31 and ground under
following condition.
Shift lever position Voltage G
“P” or “N” (A/T models)
Battery voltage (11- 14V)
Neutral (M/T models)
Except above position Approximately 0V H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 2. I
MBIB0652E

EC-367
 DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
2. CHECK PNP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Connect IPDM E/R harness connector.
3. Disconnect PNP switch harness connector.
4. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
5. Check voltage between PNP switch terminal 1(A/T models),
2(M/T models) and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.

MBIB0653E

MBIB0654E

Voltage: Battery voltage

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.

3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PARTS

Check the following.
● 10A fuse
● Harness connectors E50, F1
● IPDM E/R connector E14
● Harness for short or open between PNP switch and fuse

>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

EC-368
 DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
4. CHECK HARNESS CONTINUTY BETWEEN PNP SWITCH AND IPDM E/R A
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E14.
3. Check harness continuity between IPDM E/R terminal 31 and PNP switch terminal 2(A/T models), 3(M/T EC
models).
Continuity should exist.
C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5. D

5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PARTS

Check the following. E
● Harness connectors E50,F1
● Harness for short or open between PNP switch and IPDM E/R
F

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

6. CHECK PNP SWITCH G

Refer to AT-116, "Component Inspection" (A/T models) or MT-8, "POSITION SWITCH" (M/T models).
OK or NG H
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Replace PNP switch.
I
7. CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
J
2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E17
3. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 102 and IPDM E/R terminal 64. K
Continuity should exist.
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
L
OK or NG
OK >> GO OT 8.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
M
8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-114, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

EC-369
 DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH PFP:25320

Description EBS00OCA

Brake switch signal is applied to the ECM through the stop lamp
switch when the brake pedal is depressed. This signal is used
mainly to decrease the engine speed when the vehicle is driving.

MBIB0286E

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00OCB

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
Brake pedal: Fully released OFF
BRAKE SW ● Ignition switch: ON
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON

On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00OCC

The MI will not light up for this self-diagnosis.

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause

A brake switch signal is not sent to ECM for ● Harness or connectors

P1805 (Stop lamp switch circuit is open or shorted.)
Brake switch an extremely long time while the vehicle is
1805
driving. ● Stop lamp switch

FAIL-SAFE MODE EBS00OCD

When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode.

Engine operation condition in fail-fail safe mode
ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to a small range.Therefore,acceleration will be
poor.
Vehicle condition Driving condition
When engine is idling Normal
When accelerating Poor acceleration

DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00OCE

WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Fully depress the brake pedal for at least 5 seconds.
3. Erase the DTC with CONSULT-II.
4. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
5. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-373, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.

SEF058Y

EC-370
 DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. A

EC

EC-371
 DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Wiring Diagram EBS00OCF

MBWA0295E

EC-372
 DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: A
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER- EC
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running] C
Approximately 0V
● Brake pedal fully released
101 W Stop lamp switch
[Engine is running] BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Brake pedal depressed (11 - 14V) D

Diagnostic Procedure EBS00OCG

1. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT E

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.

2. Check the stop lamp when depressing and releasing the brake pedal.
F
Brake pedal Stop lamp
Fully released Not illuminated
G
Depressed Illuminated
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. H
NG >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT I

1. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.

L
MBIB0286E

2. Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 1 and ground M

with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.

PBIB0117E

EC-373
 DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
● 10A fuse
● Fuse block (J/B) connector M16
● Harness connectors M1, E101 (LHD models)
● Harness connectors M71, M201 (RHD models)
● Harness for open and short between stop lamp switch and fuse

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 101 and stop lamp switch terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.

5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Harness connectors M71, M201 (RHD models)
● Harness connectors M1, E101 (RHD models)
● Harness for open or short between ECM and stop lamp switch

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

6. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH

Refer to EC-375, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace stop lamp switch.

7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-114, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

EC-374
 DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Component Inspection EBS00OCH

STOP LAMP SWITCH A

1. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.

EC

D
MBIB0286E

2. Check continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2 E

under the following conditions.

MBIB0604E H

MBIB0605E

L
Conditions Continuity
Brake pedal fully released Should not exist.
Brake pedal depressed Should exist.
M

If NG, adjust brake pedal installation, refer to BR-6, "BRAKE PEDAL" , and perform step 2 again.

EC-375
 IGNITION SIGNAL
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
IGNITION SIGNAL PFP:22448

Component Description EBS00OCI

IGNITION COIL & POWER TRANSISTOR

The ignition signal from the ECM is sent to and amplified by the
power transistor. The power transistor turns on and off the ignition
coil primary circuit. This on-off operation induces the proper high
voltage in the coil secondary circuit.

MBIB0272E

EC-376
 IGNITION SIGNAL
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Wiring Diagram EBS00OCJ

EC

MBWA0296E

EC-377
 IGNITION SIGNAL
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMI-
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch “OFF”]
0 - 1.0V
● For 5 seconds after turning ignition switch
ECM relay “OFF”
111 P
(Self shut-off)
[Ignition switch “OFF”]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● 5 seconds passed after turning ignition (11 - 14V)
switch “OFF”
119 BATTERY VOLTAGE
G Power supply for ECM [Ignition switch “ON”]
120 (11 - 14V)

EC-378
IGNITION SIGNAL
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]

EC

MBWA0297E

EC-379
 IGNITION SIGNAL
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMI-
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.

0 - 0.1V

[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
● Idle speed

60 Y Ignition signal No. 3

PBIB0521E
61 PU Ignition signal No. 1
79 G Ignition signal No. 4
0 - 0.2V
80 BR Ignition signal No. 2

[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.

PBIB0522E

: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)

Diagnostic Procedure EBS00OCK

1. CHECK ENGINE START

Turn ignition switch “OFF”, and restart engine.
Is engine running?
Yes or No
Yes (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 2.
Yes (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 3.
No >> GO TO 4.

2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION

With CONSULT-II
1. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
2. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine
speed drop.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 9.

MBIB0302E

EC-380
 IGNITION SIGNAL
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
3. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION A
Without CONSULT-II
1. Let engine idle.
EC
2. Read the voltage signal between ECM terminals 60, 61, 79, 80
and ground with an oscilloscope.
3. Verify that the oscilloscope screen shows the signal wave as
shown below. C

PBIB0521E
E
MBIB0033E

OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 9. F

4. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I

G
1. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminals 119, 120 and ground
with CONSULT-II or tester. H
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
I
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Go to EC-115, "POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM"
.
J

MBIB0034E

K
5. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect condenser harness connector. L
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between condenser terminal 1 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester. M

Voltage: Battery voltage

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.

PBIB0624E

EC-381
 IGNITION SIGNAL
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
6. DETECT MALFUNCTION PART
Check the following.
● IPDM E/R harness connector E14
● Harness connectors E50, F1

>> Repair or replace

7. CHECK CONDENSER GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect condenser harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between condenser terminal 2 and ground.
Refer to Wiring diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connector.

8. CHECK CONDENSER
Refer to EC-383, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace condenser.

9. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-V

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
3. Disconnect ignition coil harness connector.
4. Turn ignition switch “ON”.

MBIB0272E

5. Check voltage between ignition coil terminal 1 and ground with

CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 10.

SEF107S

EC-382
 IGNITION SIGNAL
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
10. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A
Check harness for open or short between ignition coil and IPDM E/R.

>> Repair or replace harness or connectors. EC

11. CHECK IGNITION COIL GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
C
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check harness continuity between ignition coil terminal 2 and engine ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
D
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
F
12. CHECK IGNITION COIL OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. G
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 60, 61, 79, 80 and ignition coil terminal 3.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist. H

3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.

OK or NG I
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

13. CHECK IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR J

Refer to EC-383, "Component Inspection" .

OK or NG K
OK >> GO TO 14.
NG >> Replace ignition coil with power transistor.
L
14. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-114, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
M

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00OCL

CONDENSER
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect condenser harness connector.

EC-383
 IGNITION SIGNAL
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
3. Check resistance between condenser terminals 1 and 2.
Resistance: Above 1 MΩ at 25°C (77°F)

MBIB0031E

IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ignition coil harness connector.
3. Check resistance between ignition coil terminals as follows.
Terminal No. Resistance Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
2 and 3 Except 0 or ∞
1 and 2
Except 0
1 and 3

MBIB0032E

Removal and Installation EBS00OCM

IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR

Refer to EM-25, "IGNITION COIL" .

EC-384
 INJECTOR CIRCUIT
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
INJECTOR CIRCUIT PFP:16600
A
Component Description EBS00OCN

The fuel injector is a small, precise solenoid valve. When the ECM
supplies a ground to the injector circuit, the coil in the injector is EC
energized. The energized coil pulls the needle valve back and allows
fuel to flow through the injector into the intake manifold. The amount
of fuel injected depends upon the injection pulse duration. Pulse
duration is the length of time the injector remains open. The ECM C
controls the injection pulse duration based on engine fuel needs.

SEF375Z

E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00OCO

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION F
● Engine: After warming up Idle 2.5 - 3.5 msec
● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T)
B/FUEL SCHDL G
● Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm 2.5 - 3.5 msec
● No-load
● Engine: After warming up Idle 2.0 - 3.0 msec
H
● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T)
INJ PULSE-B1
● Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm 1.9 - 2.9 msec
● No-load I

EC-385
 INJECTOR CIRCUIT
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Wiring Diagram EBS00OCP

MBWA0298E

EC-386
 INJECTOR CIRCUIT
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: A
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMI- EC
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
BATTERY VOLTAGE C
(11 - 14V)

[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
D
● Idle speed

22 OR Injector No. 3 E
PBIB0529E
23 L Injector No. 1
41 R Injector No. 4 BATTERY VOLTAGE
42 GY Injector No. 2
(11 - 14V) F
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
G
● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm

PBIB0530E H
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)

Diagnostic Procedure EBS00OCQ I

1. INSPECTION START
Turn ignition switch to “START”. J
Is any cylinder ignited?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2. K
No >> GO TO 3.

EC-387
 INJECTOR CIRCUIT
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT-II.
3. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine
speed drop.

MBIB0302E

Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Listen to each injector operating sound.
Clicking noise should be heard.

MEC703B

OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 3.

EC-388
 INJECTOR CIRCUIT
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
3. CHECK INJECTOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect injector harness connector.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”. EC

MBIB0271E
E
4. Check voltage between injector terminal 1 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage F

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. G
NG >> GO TO 4.

H
PBIB0582E

4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART I

Check the following.
● Harness connectors F1, E50
J
● IPDM E/R connector E13
● 10A fuse
● Harness for open or short between injector and fuse K

>> Repair harness or connectors.

L
5. CHECK INJECTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
M
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between injector terminal 2 and ECM terminals 22, 23, 41, 42.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

6. CHECK INJECTOR
Refer to EC-390, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace injector.

EC-389
 INJECTOR CIRCUIT
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-114, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00OCR

INJECTOR
1. Disconnect injector harness connector.
2. Check resistance between terminals as shown in the figure.
Resistance: 12.1 - 12.9Ω [at 20°C (68°F)]

PBIB0181E

Removal and Installation EBS00OCS

INJECTOR
Refer to EM-28, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" .

EC-390
 FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT PFP:17042
A
Description EBS00OCT

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM Function Actuator EC
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Engine speed*
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Fuel pump control Fuel pump relay
Battery Battery voltage* C
*: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.

The ECM activates the fuel pump for several seconds after the ignition switch is turned on to improve engine
D
startability. If the ECM receives a engine speed signal from the crankshaft position sensor (POS) and cam-
shaft position sensor (PHASE), it knows that the engine is rotating, and causes the pump to operate. If the
engine speed signal is not received when the ignition switch is ON, the engine stalls. The ECM stops pump
operation and prevents battery discharging, thereby improving safety. The ECM does not directly drive the fuel E
pump. It controls the ON/OFF fuel pump relay, which in turn controls the fuel pump.
Condition Fuel pump operation
Ignition switch is turned to ON. Operates for 1 second. F
Engine running and cranking Operates.
When engine is stopped Stops in 1.5 seconds.
G
Except as shown above Stops.

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
H
A turbine type design fuel pump is used in the fuel tank.

K
MBIB0291E

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00OCU

Specification data are reference values. L

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION

● For 1 seconds after turning ignition switch ON
ON M
FUEL PUMP RLY ● Engine running or cranking
● Except above conditions OFF

EC-391
 FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Wiring Diagram EBS00OCV

MBWA0299E

EC-392
 FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: A
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER- EC
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Ignition switch “ON”] C
● For 1 seconds after turning ignition switch “ON” 0 - 1.0V
[Engine is running]
113 R Fuel pump relay
[Ignition switch “ON”] D
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● More than 1 seconds after turning ignition switch (11 - 14V)
“ON”.
E
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00OCW

1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION

1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. F
2. Pinch fuel feed hose with two fingers.
Fuel pressure pulsation should be felt on the fuel hose for 1
second after ignition switch is turned “ON”. G
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 2. H

MBIB0310E

2. CHECK FUEL PUMP RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT J

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.

2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. K
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between ECM terminals 113 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester. L

Voltage: Battery voltage

OK or NG M
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 3.

PBIB1187E

EC-393
 FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
3. CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E17.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between IPDM E/R terminal 69 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 9.

MBIB0312E

4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● IPDM E/R connector E17
● Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and ECM

>> Repair harness or connectors.

5. CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump harness con-
nector.
3. Check harness continuity between terminal 20 of IPDM E/R con-
nector E13 and fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump terminal 1,
fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump terminal 3 and body ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
MBIB0288E
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.

6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Harness connectors M1, E101
● Harness connectors B1, M10
● Harness for open or short between fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump and IPDM E/R
● Harness for open or short between fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump and body ground

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

EC-394
 FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
7. CHECK FUEL PUMP RELAY OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 113 and terminal 69 of IPDM E/R connector E17.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC

Continuity should exist.

3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Repair open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R. D

8. CHECK FUEL PUMP

Refer to EC-395, "Component Inspection" . E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace fuel pump. F

9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

G
Refer to EC-114, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK >> Replace IPDM E/R H
NG >> Repair or replace harness or connector
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection EBS00OCX I
FUEL PUMP
1. Disconnect fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump harness connector.
2. Check resistance between fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump J
terminals 1 and 3.
Resistance: Approximately 1.0Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
K

MBIB0311E M

Removal and Installation EBS00OCY

FUEL PUMP
Refer to FL-4, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" .

EC-395
 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR PFP:92136

Component Description EBS00OCZ

The refrigerant pressure sensor is installed at the liquid tank of the

air conditioner system. The sensor uses an electrostatic volume
pressure transducer to convert refrigerant pressure to voltage. The
voltage signal is sent to ECM, and ECM controls cooling fan system.

MBIB0292E

SEF099X

EC-396
 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Wiring Diagram EBS00OD0

EC

MBWA0300E

EC-397
 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMI-
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
Sensor's ground
57 Y ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
(Refrigerant pressure sensor)
● Idle speed
Sensor's power supply
46 W [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 5V
(Refrigerant pressure sensor)
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
69 BR Refrigerant pressure sensor ● Both A/C switch and blower switch are 1.0 - 4.0V
“ON”.
(Compressor operates.)

Diagnostic Procedure EBS00OD1

1. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR OVERALL FUNCTION

1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn A/C switch and blower switch “ON”.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 69 and ground with CON-
SULT-II or tester.
Voltage: 1.0 - 4.0V
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 2.

MBIB0035E

EC-398
 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
2. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A
1. Turn A/C switch and blower switch “OFF”.
2. Stop engine.
3. Disconnect refrigerant pressure sensor harness connector. EC
4. Turn ignition switch “ON”.

E
MBIB0292E

5. Check voltage between refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 3

and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. F

Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
H

SEF479Y
I
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. J
● Harness connectors E50, F1
● Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor
K
>> Repair harness or connectors.

4. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT L

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.

2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. M
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 57 and refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 1.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.

5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Harness connectors E50, F1
● Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

EC-399
 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
6. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 69 and refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.

7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Harness connectors E50, F1
● Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-114, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK >> Replace refrigerant pressure sensor.
NG >> Repair or replace.
Removal and Installation EBS00OD2

REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR

Refer to ATC-68, "REFRIGERANT LINES" (Automatic air conditioner models) or MTC-56, "REFRIGERANT
LINES" (Manual air conditioner models).

EC-400
 ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL PFP:25350
A
Description EBS00OD3

The electrical load signal (Headlamp switch signal, rear window defogger switch signal, etc.) is transferred
through the CAN communication line from IPDM E/R to ECM. EC
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00OD4

Specification data are reference values.

C
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
Rear window defogger switch is ON and/or
ON
lighting switch is 2nd. D
LOAD SIGNAL ● Ignition switch: ON
Rear window defogger switch is OFF and light-
OFF
ing switch is OFF.

Diagnostic Procedure EBS00OD5

E

1. INSECTION START
Do you have CONSULT-II? F
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> GO TO 6. G

2. CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-I

H
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Connect CONSULT-II and select “DATA MONITOR” mode.
3. Select “LOAD SIGNAL” and check indication under the following I
conditions.
Condition Indication
J
Rear window defogger switch “ON” ON
Rear window defogger switch “OFF” OFF
OK or NG K
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIB0103E L

3. CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-II

Check “LOAD SIGNAL” indication under the following conditions. M

Condition Indication
Lighting switch “ON” at 2nd position ON
Lighting switch “OFF” OFF
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 5.

PBIB0103E

4. CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM

Refer to GW-14, "REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER" .

>> INSPECTION END

EC-401
 ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
5. CHECK HEADLAMP SYSTEM
Refer to LT-5, "HEADLAMP -CONVENTIONAL TYPE-" or LT-32, "HEADLAMP - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM -
".

>> INSPECTION END

6. CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM

Refer to GW-14, "REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace

7. CHECK HEADLAMP SYSTEM

Refer to LT-5, "HEADLAMP -CONVENTIONAL TYPE-" or LT-32, "HEADLAMP - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM -
".

>> INSPECTION END

EC-402
 MI & DATA LINK CONNECTORS
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
MI & DATA LINK CONNECTORS PFP:24814
A
Wiring Diagram (LHD Models) EBS00OD6

EC

MBWA0301E

EC-403
 MI & DATA LINK CONNECTORS
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Wiring Diagram (RHD Models) EBS00OD7

MBWA0302E

EC-404
 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM PFP:14950
A
Description EBS00OD8

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
EC

G
PBIB0491E

The evaporative emission system is used to reduce hydrocarbons emitted into the atmosphere from the fuel
system. This reduction of hydrocarbons is accomplished by activated charcoals in the EVAP canister. H
The fuel vapor in the sealed fuel tank is led into the EVAP canister which contains activated carbon and the
vapor is stored there when the engine is not operating or when refueling to the fuel tank.
The vapor in the EVAP canister is purged by the air through the purge line to the intake manifold when the
engine is operating. EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is controlled by ECM. When the I
engine operates, the flow rate of vapor controlled by EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is
proportionally regulated as the air flow increases.
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve also shuts off the vapor purge line during decelerating and J
idling.

EC-405
 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING

MBIB0544E

EC-406
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]

EC

MBIB0541E

EC-407
 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Component Inspection EBS00OD9

EVAP CANISTER
Check EVAP canister as follows:
1. Block port B . Orally blow air through port A .
Check that air flows freely through port C .
2. Block port A . Orally blow air through port B .
Check that air flows freely through port C .

PBIB0663E

FUEL CHECK VALVE

1. Blow air through connector on fuel tank side.
A considerable resistance should be felt and a portion of air flow
should be directed toward the EVAP canister side.
2. Blow air through connector on EVAP canister side.
Air flow should be smoothly directed toward fuel tank side.
3. If fuel check valve is suspected of not properly functioning in
steps 1 and 2 above, replace it.

SEF552Y

FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FILLER CAP)
1. Wipe clean valve housing.

SEF989X

2. Check valve opening pressure and vacuum.

Pres- 15.3 - 20.0 kPa (0.153 - 0.200 bar,
sure: 0.156 - 0.204 kg/cm2 , 2.22 - 2.90 psi)
Vacuum: −6.0 to −3.4 kPa (−0.060 to −0.034 bar,
−0.061 to −0.035 kg/cm2 , −0.87 to −0.49 psi)
3. If out of specification, replace fuel filler cap as an assembly.

SEF943S

EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

Refer to EC-262, "Component Inspection" .

EC-408
 POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION PFP:11810
A
Description EBS00ODA

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
EC

G
PBIB0492E

This system returns blow-by gas to the intake manifold.

The positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve is provided to conduct crankcase blow-by gas to the intake H
manifold. During partial throttle operation of the engine, the intake manifold sucks the blow-by gas through the
PCV valve. Normally, the capacity of the valve is sufficient to handle any blow-by and a small amount of venti-
lating air. The ventilating air is then drawn from the air inlet tubes into the crankcase. In this process the air
passes through the hose connecting air inlet tubes to rocker cover. Under full-throttle condition, the manifold I
vacuum is insufficient to draw the blow-by flow through the valve. The flow goes through the hose connection
in the reverse direction.
On vehicles with an excessively high blow-by, the valve does not J
meet the requirement. This is because some of the flow will go
through the hose connection to the air inlet tubes under all condi-
tions.
K

SEF559A M
Component Inspection EBS00ODB

PCV (POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION) VALVE

With engine running at idle, remove PCV valve from rocker cover. A
properly working valve makes a hissing noise as air passes through
it. A strong vacuum should be felt immediately when a finger is
placed over valve inlet.

SEC137A

EC-409
 POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
PCV VALVE VENTILATION HOSE
1. Check hoses and hose connections for leaks.
2. Disconnect all hoses and clean with compressed air. If any hose
cannot be freed of obstructions, replace.

S-ET277

EC-410
 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) PFP:00030
A
Fuel Pressure EBS00ODC

Fuel pressure at idle Approximately 350 kPa (3.5bar, 3.57kg/cm2 , 51psi)

EC
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing EBS00ODD

M/T: 650±50 rpm

Target idle speed No-load*1 (in “P” or N” position)
A/T: 700±50 rpm C
Ignition timing In “P” or N” position 5°±5° BTDC
*1: Under the following conditions:
D
● Air conditioner switch: OFF
● Electric load: OFF (Lights, heater fan & rear window defogger)
● Steering wheel: Kept in straight-ahead position
E
Calculated Load Value EBS00ODE

Calculated load value% (Using CONSULT-II or GST)

F
At idle 10 - 35
At 2,500 rpm 10 - 35
G
Manifold absolute pressure sensor EBS00ODF

Supply voltage Approximately 5.0V

Output voltage at idle 1.4 - 1.5 V* H
*: Engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature and running under no-load.

Intake Air Temperature Sensor EBS00ODG

I
Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ
25 (77) 1.9 - 2.1
J
80 (176) 0.31 - 0.37

Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EBS00ODH

K
Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ
20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00 L
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260

Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 Heater EBS00ODI

M
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] 3.3 - 4.0Ω

Heated Oxygen sensor 2 Heater EBS00ODJ

Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] 3.3 - 4.0Ω

Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS) EBS00ODK

Refer to EC-245, "Component Inspection" .

Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) EBS00ODL

Refer to EC-251, "Component Inspection" .

Throttle Control Motor EBS00ODM

Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] Approximately 1 - 15Ω

EC-411
 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
Injector EBS00ODN

Resistance [at 20°C (68°F)] 12.1 - 12.9Ω

Fuel Pump EBS00ODO

Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] Approximately 1.0Ω

EC-412
 INDEX FOR DTC
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
INDEX FOR DTC
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)] PFP:00024
A
Alphabetical Index EBS00OJR

Check if the vehicle is a model with Euro-OBD (E-OBD) system or not by the “Type approval number” on the
identification plate. Refer to GI-46, "IDENTIFICATION PLATE" . EC
NOTE:
If DTC U1000 or U1001 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000,
U1001. Refer to EC-505, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . C
Items DTC*1 MI lighting
Trip Reference page
(CONSULT-II screen terms) up
CONSULT-II*2 ECM*3
D
ABSL PRES SEN/CIRC P0107 0107 2 × EC-508
ABSL PRES SEN/CIRC P0108 0108 2 × EC-508
APP SEN 1/CIRC P0227 0227 1 × EC-557 E
APP SEN 1/CIRC P0228 0228 1 × EC-557
APP SEN 2/CIRC P1227 1227 1 × EC-638
F
APP SEN 2/CIRC P1228 1228 1 × EC-638
APP SENSOR P0226 0226 1 × EC-548
BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT P1805 1805 2 — EC-651 G
CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1000 1000* 5 1 × EC-505

CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1001 1001*5 2 — EC-505

H
CKP SEN/CIRCUIT P0335 0335 2 × EC-570
CMP SEN/CIRC-B1 P0340 0340 2 × EC-577
CTP LEARNING P1225 1225 2 — EC-634 I
CTP LEARNING P1226 1226 2 — EC-636
ECM P0605 0605 1 or 2 × or — EC-584
J
ECM BACK UP/CIRC P1065 1065 2 × EC-587
ECT SEN/CIRCUIT P0117 0117 2 × EC-513
ECT SEN/CIRCUIT P0118 0118 2 × EC-513 K
ENG OVER TEMP P1217 1217 1 × EC-613
ETC ACTR P1121 1121 1 or 2 × EC-591
ETC FUNCTION/CIRC P1122 1122 1 × EC-593
L

ETC MOT P1128 1128 1 × EC-604

ETC MOT PWR P1124 1124 1 × EC-599
M
ETC MOT PWR P1126 1126 1 × EC-599
HO2S1 (B1) P0132 0132 2 × EC-518
HO2S1 (B1) P0134 0134 2 × EC-524
HO2S2 (B1) P0138 0138 2 × EC-530
INTAKE ERROR P1171 1171 1 × EC-609
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0327 0327 2 — EC-566
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0328 0328 2 — EC-566
NATS MALFUNCTION P1610 - P1615 1610 - 1615 2 — EC-443
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING No DTC Flashing*4 — Flashing*4 EC-444
MAY BE REQUIRED.
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING P0000 0000 — — —
MAY BE REQUIRED.

EC-413
 INDEX FOR DTC
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]

Items DTC*1 MI lighting

Trip Reference page
(CONSULT-II screen terms) up
CONSULT-II*2 ECM*3
SENSOR POWER/CIRC P1229 1229 1 × EC-647
TP SEN 1/CIRC P0222 0222 1 × EC-542
TP SEN 1/CIRC P0223 0223 1 × EC-542
TP SEN 2/CIRC P1223 1223 1 × EC-628
TP SEN 2/CIRC P1224 1224 1 × EC-628
TP SENSOR P0221 0221 1 × EC-536
*1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
*2: These numbers are prescribed by ISO 15031-5.
*3: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results), these numbers are controlled by NISSAN.
*4: When engine is running.
*5: The troubleshooting for these DTCs needs CONSULT-II.

DTC No. Index EBS00OJS

NOTE:
If DTC U1000 or U1001 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000,
U1001. Refer to EC-505, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
DTC*1 Items MI lighting
Trip Reference page
(CONSULT-II screen terms) up
CONSULT-II*2 ECM*3
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
No DTC Flashing*4 FURTHER TESTING — Flashing*4 EC-444
MAY BE REQUIRED.
U1000 1000*5 CAN COMM CIRCUIT 1 × EC-505

U1001 1001*5 CAN COMM CIRCUIT 2 — EC-505

NO DTC IS DETECTED.
P0000 0000 FURTHER TESTING — — —
MAY BE REQUIRED.
P0107 0107 ABSL PRES SEN/CIRC 2 × EC-508
P0108 0108 ABSL PRES SEN/CIRC 2 × EC-508
P0117 0117 ECT SEN/CIRCUIT 2 × EC-513
P0118 0118 ECT SEN/CIRCUIT 2 × EC-513
P0132 0132 HO2S1 (B1) 2 × EC-518
P0134 0134 HO2S1 (B1) 2 × EC-524
P0138 0138 HO2S2 (B1) 2 × EC-530
P0221 0221 TP SENSOR 1 × EC-536
P0222 0222 TP SEN 1/CIRC 1 × EC-542
P0223 0223 TP SEN 1/CIRC 1 × EC-542
P0226 0226 APP SENSOR 1 × EC-548
P0227 0227 APP SEN 1/CIRC 1 × EC-557
P0228 0228 APP SEN 1/CIRC 1 × EC-557
P0327 0327 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 2 — EC-566
P0328 0328 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 2 — EC-566
P0335 0335 CKP SEN/CIRCUIT 2 × EC-570
P0340 0340 CMP SEN/CIRC-B1 2 × EC-577
P0605 0605 ECM 1 or 2 × or — EC-584
P1065 1065 ECM BACK UP/CIRC 2 × EC-587
P1121 1121 ETC ACTR 1 or 2 × EC-591

EC-414
 INDEX FOR DTC
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
DTC*1 Items MI lighting
Trip Reference page A
(CONSULT-II screen terms) up
CONSULT-II*2 ECM*3
P1122 1122 ETC FUNCTION/CIRC 1 × EC-593
P1124 1124 ETC MOT PWR 1 × EC-599 EC
P1126 1126 ETC MOT PWR 1 × EC-599
P1128 1128 ETC MOT 1 × EC-604
C
P1171 1171 INTAKE ERROR 1 × EC-609
P1217 1217 ENG OVER TEMP 1 × EC-613
P1223 1223 TP SEN 2/CIRC 1 × EC-628 D
P1224 1224 TP SEN 2/CIRC 1 × EC-628
P1225 1225 CTP LEARNING 2 — EC-634
E
P1226 1226 CTP LEARNING 2 — EC-636
P1227 1227 APP SEN 2/CIRC 1 × EC-638
P1228 1228 APP SEN 2/CIRC 1 × EC-638 F
P1229 1229 SENSOR POWER/CIRC 1 × EC-647
P1610 - P1615 1610 - 1615 NATS MALFUNCTION 2 — EC-443
P1805 1805 BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT 2 — EC-651 G
*1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
*2: These numbers are prescribed by ISO 15031-5.
*3: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results), these numbers are controlled by NISSAN. H
*4: When engine is running.
*5: The troubleshooting for these DTCs needs CONSULT-II.
I

EC-415
 PRECAUTIONS
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001

Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER” EBS00OS4

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of
this Service Manual.
WARNING:
● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be per-
formed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to per-
sonal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the SRS section.
● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harness connec-
tors.
Maintenance Information EBS00R4Y

If any of following part is replaced, always replace with new* one.

If it's not (or fail to do so), the electrical system may not be operated properly.
*: New one means a virgin control unit that has never been energized on-board.
RHD MODELS
● BCM (Models without Intelligent Key system)
● Intelligent Key unit (Models with Intelligent Key system)
● ECM
● IPDM E/R
● Combination meter
● EPS control unit
LHD MODELS
● BCM (Models without Intelligent Key system)
● Intelligent Key unit (Models with Intelligent Key system)
● ECM
On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of Engine and A/T EBS00OJU

The ECM has an on board diagnostic system. It will light up the malfunction indicator (MI) to warn the driver of
a malfunction causing emission deterioration.
CAUTION:
● Be sure to turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery ground cable before any repair
or inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, solenoid valves, etc. will
cause the MI to light up.
● Be sure to connect and lock the connectors securely after work. A loose (unlocked) connector will
cause the MI to light up due to the open circuit. (Be sure the connector is free from water, grease,
dirt, bent terminals, etc.)
● Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-
locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to PG-81, "HAR-
NESS CONNECTOR" .
● Be sure to route and secure the harnesses properly after work. The interference of the harness
with a bracket, etc. may cause the MI to light up due to the short circuit.
● Be sure to connect rubber tubes properly after work. A misconnected or disconnected rubber tube
may cause the MI to light up due to the malfunction of the fuel injection system, etc.
● Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the ECM.

EC-416
 PRECAUTIONS
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Precaution EBS00OJV

A
● Always use a 12 volt battery as power source.
● Do not attempt to disconnect battery cables while engine is
running.
EC
● Before connecting or disconnecting the ECM harness con-
nector, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect battery
ground cable. Failure to do so may damage the ECM
because battery voltage is applied to ECM even if ignition C
switch is turned off.
● Before removing parts, turn ignition switch OFF and then
disconnect battery ground cable. D
SEF289H

● Do not disassemble ECM. E

● If battery cable is disconnected, the memory will return to
the initial ECM values.
The ECM will now start to self-control at its initial values.
Engine operation can vary slightly when the cable is dis- F
connected. However, this is not an indication of a malfunc-
tion. Do not replace parts because of a slight variation.
G

SEF707Y
H

● When connecting ECM harness connector, fasten it

securely with levers as far as they will go as shown at right. I

MBIB0145E

L
● When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or
from ECM, take care not to damage pin terminals (bend or
break). M
Make sure that there are not any bends or breaks on ECM
pin terminal, when connecting pin connectors.
● Securely connect ECM harness connectors.
A poor connection can cause an extremely high (surge)
voltage to develop in coil and condenser, thus resulting in
damage to ICs.
● Keep engine control system harness at least 10 cm (4 in)
away from adjacent harness, to prevent engine control sys- PBIB0090E

tem malfunctions due to receiving external noise, degraded

operation of ICs, etc.
● Keep engine control system parts and harness dry.

EC-417
 PRECAUTIONS
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
● Before replacing ECM, perform “ECM Terminals and Refer-
ence Value” inspection and make sure ECM functions prop-
erly. Refer to EC-470, "ECM Terminals and Reference Value"
.
● Handle manifold absolute pressure sensor carefully to
avoid damage.
● Do not clean air clear element with any type of detergent.
● Do not disassemble electric throttle control actuator.
● Even a slight leak in the air intake system can cause seri-
ous incidents. MEF040D
● Do not shock or jar the camshaft position sensor (PHASE),
crankshaft position sensor (POS).
● After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform
“DTC Confirmation Procedure” or “Overall Function
Check”.
The DTC should not be displayed in the “DTC Confirmation
Procedure” if the repair is completed. The “Overall Func-
tion Check” should be a good result if the repair is com-
pleted.

SAT652J

● When measuring ECM signals with a circuit tester, connect

a break-out box (SST) and Y-cable adapter (SST) between
the ECM and ECM harness connector.
● When measuring ECM signals with a circuit tester, never
allow the two tester probes to contact.
Accidental contact of probes will cause a short circuit and
damage the ECM power transistor.
● Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/
output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's
transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as
the ground.

SEF348N

EC-418
 PRECAUTIONS
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
● Do not operate fuel pump when there is no fuel in lines.
● Tighten fuel hose clamps to the specified torque. A

EC

MBIB0291E

D
● Do not depress accelerator pedal when starting.
● Immediately after starting, do not rev up engine unneces-
sarily. E
● Do not rev up engine just prior to shutdown.

G
SEF709Y

● When installing C.B. ham radio or a mobile phone, be sure H

to observe the following as it may adversely affect elec-
tronic control systems depending on installation location.
– Keep the antenna as far as possible from the electronic I
control units.
– Keep the antenna feeder line more than 20 cm (8 in) away
from the harness of electronic controls. J
Do not let them run parallel for a long distance.
– Adjust the antenna and feeder line so that the standing-
wave radio can be kept smaller. K
SEF708Y
– Be sure to ground the radio to vehicle body.
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis EBS00OJW
L
When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following:
● GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams"
● PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING" for power distribution circuit M
When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following:
● GI-11, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES"
● GI-24, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident"

EC-419
 PREPARATION
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
PREPARATION PFP:00002

Special Service Tools EBS00OJX

Tool number
Description
Tool name

KV10117100 Loosening or tightening heated oxygen sensors

Heated oxygen with 22 mm (0.87 in) hexagon nut
sensor wrench

S-NT379

KV10114400 Loosening or tightening heated oxygen sensors

Heated oxygen a: 22 mm (0.87 in)
sensor wrench

S-NT636

KV109E0010 Measuring ECM signals with a circuit tester

Break-out box

NT825

KV109E0080 Measuring ECM signals with a circuit tester

Y-cable adapter

NT826

Commercial Service Tools EBS00OJY

Tool name Description

Quick connector Removing fuel tube quick connectors in engine

release room
(Available in SEC. 164 of PARTS CATALOG:
Part No. 16441 6N210)

PBIC0198E

Fuel filler cap adapter Checking fuel tank vacuum relief valve opening
pressure

S-NT653

EC-420
 PREPARATION
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Tool name Description
A
Socket wrench Removing and installing engine coolant
temperature sensor

EC

S-NT705
C
Oxygen sensor thread Reconditioning the exhaust system threads
cleaner before installing a new oxygen sensor. Use with
ie: (J-43897-18) anti-seize lubricant shown below. D
(J-43897-12) a: 18 mm diameter with pitch 1.5 mm for
Zirconia Oxygen Sensor
b: 12 mm diameter with pitch 1.25 mm for
Titania Oxygen Sensor E
AEM488

Anti-seize lubricant Lubricating oxygen sensor thread cleaning tool

i.e.: (PermatexTM when reconditioning exhaust system threads. F
133AR or equivalent
meeting MIL
specification MIL-A-
907) G

S-NT779

EC-421
 ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM PFP:23710

System Diagram EBS00OJZ

MBIB0266E

EC-422
 ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Vacuum Hose Drawing EBS00OK0

EC

MBIB0265E

Refer to EC-422, "System Diagram" for Vacuum Control System.

EC-423
 ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
System Chart EBS00OK1

Input (Sensor) ECM Function Output (Actuator)

● Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Fuel injection & mixture ratio control Fuel injectors
● Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Electronic ignition system Power transistor
● Manifold absolute pressure sensor Fuel pump control Fuel pump relay
● Engine coolant temperature sensor
Idle speed control Electric throttle control actuator
● Heated oxygen sensor 1
On board diagnostic system MI (On the instrument panel)
● Throttle position sensor
Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater control Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater
● Accelerator pedal position sensor
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater control Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
● Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
● Intake air temperature sensor EVAP canister purge volume control
EVAP canister purge flow control
solenoid valve
● Ignition switch
● Battery voltage
Air conditioning cut control Air conditioner relay *3

● Knock sensor
● Refrigerant pressure sensor
● Stop lamp switch
● Heated oxygen sensor 2 *1
● TCM (Transmission control module) Cooling fan control Cooling fan relays *3
● ABS control unit*2
● Air conditioner switch*2
● Vehicle speed signal*2
● Electrical load signal*2
*1: This sensor is not used to control the engine system under normal conditions.
*2: These input signals are sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
*3: These output signals are sent from the ECM through CAN communication line.

Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System EBS00OK2

INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

ECM
Sensor Input Signal to ECM Actuator
function
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed *3 and piston position

Manifold absolute pressure sensor Amount of intake air

Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature
Heated oxygen sensor 1 Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
Throttle position sensor Throttle position
Fuel injec-
Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position tion & mix-
Fuel injectors
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Gear position ture ratio
control
Knock sensor Engine knocking condition
Battery Battery voltage *3

Heated oxygen sensor 2 *1 Density of oxygen in exhaust gas

Vehicle speed signal *2 Vehicle speed

Air conditioner switch *2 Air conditioner operation

*1: Under normal conditions, this sensor is not for engine control operation.
*2: These signals are sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
*3: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The amount of fuel injected from the fuel injector is determined by the ECM. The ECM controls the length of
time the valve remains open (injection pulse duration). The amount of fuel injected is a program value in the

EC-424
 ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
ECM memory. The program value is preset by engine operating conditions. These conditions are determined
by input signals (for engine speed and intake air volume) from the crankshaft position sensor, the manifold A
absolute pressure sensor and intake air temperature sensor.
VARIOUS FUEL INJECTION INCREASE/DECREASE COMPENSATION
In addition, the amount of fuel injected is compensated to improve engine performance under various operat- EC
ing conditions as listed below.
<Fuel increase>
● During warm-up C
● When starting the engine
● During acceleration
D
● Hot-engine operation
● When selector lever is changed from “N” to “D” (A/T models)
● High-load, high-speed operation E
<Fuel decrease>
● During deceleration
● During high engine speed operation F
MIXTURE RATIO FEEDBACK CONTROL (CLOSED LOOP CONTROL)
G

PBIB0121E

The mixture ratio feedback system provides the best air-fuel mixture ratio for driveability and emission control. J
The three way catalyst (manifold) can then better reduce CO, HC and NOx emissions. This system uses
heated oxygen sensor 1 in the exhaust manifold to monitor if the engine operation is rich or lean. The ECM
adjusts the injection pulse width according to the sensor voltage signal. For more information about heated K
oxygen sensor 1, refer to EC-518 . This maintains the mixture ratio within the range of stoichiometric (ideal air-
fuel mixture).
This stage is referred to as the closed loop control condition.
Heated oxygen sensor 2 is located downstream of the three way catalyst (manifold). Even if the switching L
characteristics of heated oxygen sensor 1 shift, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric by the signal
from heated oxygen sensor 2.
M
Open Loop Control
The open loop system condition refers to when the ECM detects any of the following conditions. Feedback
control stops in order to maintain stabilized fuel combustion.
● Deceleration and acceleration
● High-load, high-speed operation
● Malfunction of heated oxygen sensor 1 or its circuit
● Insufficient activation of heated oxygen sensor 1 at low engine coolant temperature
● High engine coolant temperature
● During warm-up
● After shifting from “N” to “D” (A/T models)
● When starting the engine
MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING CONTROL
The mixture ratio feedback control system monitors the mixture ratio signal transmitted from heated oxygen
sensor 1. This feedback signal is then sent to the ECM. The ECM controls the basic mixture ratio as close to
the theoretical mixture ratio as possible. However, the basic mixture ratio is not necessarily controlled as orig-

EC-425
 ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
inally designed. Both manufacturing differences (i.e., manifold absolute pressure sensor silicon diaghram) and
characteristic changes during operation (i.e., injector clogging) directly affect mixture ratio.
Accordingly, the difference between the basic and theoretical mixture ratios is monitored in this system. This is
then computed in terms of “injection pulse duration” to automatically compensate for the difference between
the two ratios.
“Fuel trim” refers to the feedback compensation value compared against the basic injection duration. Fuel trim
includes short term fuel trim and long term fuel trim.
“Short term fuel trim” is the short-term fuel compensation used to maintain the mixture ratio at its theoretical
value. The signal from heated oxygen sensor 1 indicates whether the mixture ratio is RICH or LEAN compared
to the theoretical value. The signal then triggers a reduction in fuel volume if the mixture ratio is rich, and an
increase in fuel volume if it is lean.
“Long term fuel trim” is overall fuel compensation carried out long-term to compensate for continual deviation
of the short term fuel trim from the central value. Such deviation will occur due to individual engine differences,
wear over time and changes in the usage environment.
FUEL INJECTION TIMING

SEF337W

Two types of systems are used.

Sequential Multiport Fuel Injection System
Fuel is injected into each cylinder during each engine cycle according to the firing order. This system is used
when the engine is running.
Simultaneous Multiport Fuel Injection System
Fuel is injected simultaneously into all four cylinders twice each engine cycle. In other words, pulse signals of
the same width are simultaneously transmitted from the ECM.
The four injectors will then receive the signals two times for each engine cycle.
This system is used when the engine is being started and/or if the fail-safe system (CPU) is operating.
FUEL SHUT-OFF
Fuel to each cylinder is cut off during deceleration or operation of the engine at excessively high speeds.
Electronic Ignition (EI) System EBS00OK3

INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

ECM func-
Sensor Input Signal to ECM Actuator
tion
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed *2 and piston position

manifold absolute pressure sensor Amount of intake air

Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature
Throttle position sensor Throttle position Ignition
Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position timing con- Power transistor
trol
Knock sensor Engine knocking
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Gear position
Battery Battery voltage *2

Vehicle speed signal *1 Vehicle speed

*1: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
*2: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.

EC-426
 ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The ignition timing is controlled by the ECM to maintain the best air- A
fuel ratio for every running condition of the engine. The ignition tim-
ing data is stored in the ECM. This data forms the map shown.
The ECM receives information such as the injection pulse width and EC
camshaft position sensor signal. Computing this information, ignition
signals are transmitted to the power transistor.
e.g., N: 1,800 rpm, Tp: 1.50 msec
A °BTDC C
During the following conditions, the ignition timing is revised by the
ECM according to the other data stored in the ECM.
● At starting SEF742M
D
● During warm-up
● At idle
E
● At low battery voltage
● During acceleration
The knock sensor retard system is designed only for emergencies. The basic ignition timing is programmed
F
within the anti-knocking zone, if recommended fuel is used under dry conditions. The retard system does not
operate under normal driving conditions. If engine knocking occurs, the knock sensor monitors the condition.
The signal is transmitted to the ECM. The ECM retards the ignition timing to eliminate the knocking condition.
G
Air Conditioning Cut Control EBS00OK4

INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator H
1 Air conditioner “ON” signal
Air conditioner switch *
Throttle position sensor Throttle valve opening angle
I
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Engine speed *2
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Air conditioner
Air conditioner relay
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature cut control
J
Refrigerant pressure sensor Refrigerant pressure

Vehicle speed signal *1 Vehicle speed

Battery Battery voltage K
*1: These signals are sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
*2: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
L
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
This system improves engine operation when the air conditioner is used.
Under the following conditions, the air conditioner is turned off.
M
● When the accelerator pedal is fully depressed.
● When cranking the engine.
● At high engine speeds.
● When the engine coolant temperature becomes excessively high.
● When engine speed is excessively low.
● When refrigerant pressure is excessively low or high.

EC-427
 ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Fuel Cut Control (at No Load and High Engine Speed) EBS00OK5

INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

ECM func-
Sensor Input Signal to ECM Actuator
tion
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Neutral position
Throttle position sensor Throttle position
Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position
Fuel cut
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Fuel injectors
control
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Engine speed
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)

Vehicle speed signal*1 Vehicle speed

*1: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
If the engine speed is above 1,800 rpm with no load (for example, in neutral and engine speed over 1,800
rpm) fuel will be cut off after some time. The exact time when the fuel is cut off varies based on engine speed.
Fuel cut will operate until the engine speed reaches 1,500 rpm, then fuel cut is cancelled.
NOTE:
This function is different from deceleration control listed under “Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System”, EC-424
.

EC-428
 ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
CAN Communication Unit EBS00OK6

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle mul-
tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many elec-
tronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other EC
control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2
communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring.
Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
C
A/T MODELS
System diagram
● Models with Intelligent Key system D

I
MKIB0273E

● Models without Intelligent Key system

J

MKIB0274E

Input/output signal chart

T: Transmit R: Receive

EC-429
 ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
ABS
actuator
Combi- Intelli- Drive EPS and
IPDM E/
Signals ECM nation gent Key com- control BCM electric TCM
R
meter. unit puter unit unit
(control
unit)
Engine speed signal T R R R
Engine coolant temperature sig-
T R
nal
A/T self-diagnosis signal R T
Output shaft revolution signal R T
Accelerator pedal position signal T R
Closed throttle position signal T R
Wide open throttle position sig-
T R
nal
A/T shift position signal R T
Stop lamp switch signal T R
O/D OFF indicator lamp signal R T

Engine and A/T integrated con- T R

trol signal R T
Fuel consumption monitor signal T R
Oil pressure switch signal R R T
A/C compressor request signal T R
Heater fan switch signal R T
Cooling fan speed request signal T R
Cooling fan speed status signal R T
Position lights request signal R R T R
Position light status signal R T
Low beam request signal T R
Low beam status signal R T
High beam request signal R T R
High beam status signal R T
Day time light request signal T R
R R R T
Vehicle speed signal
R T R R R R
Sleep/wake up signal R R T R
Door switch signal R R R T R
Turn indicator signal R T
R T
Buzzer output signal
R T
MI signal T R R
Front wiper request signal T R
Front wiper stop position signal R T
Rear window defogger switch
T R
signal
Rear window defogger control
R T
signal
Drive computer signal T R

EC-430
 ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
ABS
actuator A
Combi- Intelli- Drive EPS and
IPDM E/
Signals ECM nation gent Key com- control BCM electric TCM
R
meter. unit puter unit unit
(control EC
unit)
EPS warning lamp signal R R T
ABS warning lamp signal R R T
C
ABS operation signal R T
Brake warning lamp signal R R T
D
Buck-up lamp signal R T
Fuel low warning signal T R
Battery charge malfunction sig- E
T R
nal
Air bag system warning signal T R
Brake fluid level warning signal T R F
Engine coolant temperature
T R
warning signal
G
Front fog lamp request signal R T R
Rear fog lamp status signal R T
Headlamp washer request signal T R H
Door lock/unlock request signal R T
Door lock/unlock status signal R T
KEY indicator signal R T I
LOCK indicator signal R T

EC-431
 ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
M/T MODELS
System diagram
● Models with Intelligent Key system

MKIB0275E

● Models without Intelligent Key system

MKIB0276E

Input/output signal chart

T: Transmit R: Receive
ABS
actuator
Combina- Intelli-
Drive EPS con- and elec- IPDM E/
Signals ECM tion gent Key BCM
computer trol unit tric unit R
meter. unit
(control
unit)
Engine speed signal T R R R
Engine coolant temperature signal T R
Fuel consumption monitor signal T R
Oil pressure switch signal R R T
A/C compressor request signal T R
Heater fan switch signal R T
Cooling fan speed request signal T R
Cooling fan speed status signal R T
Position lights request signal R R T R

EC-432
 ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
ABS
actuator A
Combina- Intelli-
Drive EPS con- and elec- IPDM E/
Signals ECM tion gent Key BCM
computer trol unit tric unit R
meter. unit
(control
unit) EC
Position light status signal R T
Low beam request signal T R
C
Low beam status signal R T
High beam request signal R T R
High beam status signal R T D
Day time light request signal T R
R R R T
Vehicle speed signal E
R T R R R R
Sleep/wake up signal R R T R
Door switch signal R R R T R F
Turn indicator signal R T
R T
Buzzer output signal G
R T
MI signal T R R
Front wiper request signal T R H
Front wiper stop position signal R T
Rear window defogger switch signal T R
Rear window defogger control sig- I
R T
nal
Drive computer signal T R
J
EPS warning indicator signal R R T
ABS warning lamp signal R R T
ABS operation signal R R T K
Brake warning lamp signal R T
Buck-up lamp signal R T
Fuel low warning signal T R L
Battery charge malfunction signal T R
Air bag system warning signal T R
M
Brake fluid level warning signal T R
Engine coolant temperature warn-
T R
ing signal
Front fog lamp request signal R T R
Rear fog lamp status signal R T
Headlamp washer request signal T R
Door lock/unlock request signal R T
Door lock/unlock status signal R T
KEY indicator signal R T
LOCK indicator signal R T

EC-433
 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE PFP:00018

Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check EBS00OK7

IDLE SPEED
With CONSULT-II
Check idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.

SEF058Y

IGNITION TIMING
1. Slide the harness protector of ignition coil No.1 to clear the
wires.
2. Attach timing light to the wires as shown in the figure.

MBIB0287E

3. Check ignition timing.

MBIB0313E

MBIB0314E

EC-434
 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning EBS00OK8

DESCRIPTION A
“Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning” is an operation to learn the fully released position of the accel-
erator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time
harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is disconnected. EC
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released.
C
2. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 2 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch “OFF” wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 2 seconds.
D
5. Turn ignition switch “OFF” wait at least 10 seconds.
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning EBS00OK9

DESCRIPTION E
“Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning” is an operation to learn the fully closed position of the throttle valve
by monitoring the throttle position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connector of
electric throttle control actuator or ECM is disconnected. F
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released.
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”. G
3. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
Make sure that throttle valve moves during above 10 seconds by confirming the operating sound.
H
Idle Air Volume Learning EBS00OKA

DESCRIPTION
“Idle Air Volume Learning” is an operation to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine within the spe- I
cific range. It must be performed under any of the following conditions:
● Each time electric throttle control actuator or ECM is replaced.
● Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification. J
PREPARATION
Before performing “Idle Air Volume Learning”, make sure that all of the following conditions are satisfied.
Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a moment. K
● Battery voltage: More than 12.9V (At idle)
● Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 95°C (158 - 203°F)
L
● PNP switch: ON
● Electric load switch: OFF
(Air conditioner, headlamp, rear window defogger)
On vehicles equipped with daytime light systems, set lighting switch to the 1st position to light M
only small lamps.
● Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position)
● Vehicle speed: Stopped
● Transmission: Warmed-up
For A/T models with CONSULT-II, drive vehicle until “FLUID TEMP SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode of “A/
T” system indicates less than 0.9V.
For A/T models without CONSULT-II and M/T models, drive vehicle for 10 minutes.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-II
1. Perform EC-435, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
2. Perform EC-435, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
4. Check that all items listed under the topic “PREPARATION” (previously mentioned) are in good order.

EC-435
 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
5. Select “IDLE AIR VOL LEARN” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.

SEF217Z

6. Touch “START” and wait 20 seconds.

SEF454Y

7. Make sure that “CMPLT” is not displayed on CONSULT-II

screen. If “INCMP” is displayed, “Idle Air Volume Learning” will
not be carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the
incident by referring to the “Diagnostic Procedure” below.
8. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle
speed and ignition timing are within the specifications.
ITEM SPECIFICATION
Idle speed M/T: 650±50 rpm
A/T: 700±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
Ignition timing M/T: 5±5° BTDC MBIB0238E

A/T: 5±5° BTDC (in “P” or “N” position)

Without CONSULT-II
NOTE:
● It is better to count the time accurately with a clock.
● It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit
has a malfunction.
1. Perform EC-435, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
2. Perform EC-435, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
4. Check that all items listed under the topic “PREPARATION” (previously mentioned) are in good order.
5. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
6. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, turn ignition switch “ON” and wait 3 seconds.
7. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds.
a. Fully depress the accelerator pedal.
b. Fully release the accelerator pedal.
8. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 20 seconds until the MI stops
blinking and turned ON.
9. Fully release the accelerator pedal within 3 seconds after the MI goes off.
10. Start engine and let it idle.

EC-436
 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
11. Wait 20 seconds.
A

EC

PBIB0665E D
12. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the
specifications.
E
ITEM SPECIFICATION
Idle speed M/T: 650±50 rpm
A/T: 700±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
F
Ignition timing M/T: 5±5° BTDC
A/T: 5±5° BTDC (in “P” or “N” position)
13. If idle speed and ignition timing are not within the specification, “Idle Air Volume Learning” will not be car- G
ried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the “Diagnostic Procedure”
below.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE H
If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully, proceed as follows:
1. Check that throttle valve is fully closed.
2. Check PCV valve operation. I
3. Check that downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage.
4. When the above three items check out OK, engine component parts and their installation condi-
tion are questionable. Check and eliminate the cause of the incident. J
It is useful to perform EC-494, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .
5. If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the
incident and perform “Idle air volume learning” all over again: K
● Engine stalls.

● Erroneous idle.
L
Fuel Pressure Check EBS00OKB

FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE

Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel line to eliminate danger. M
NOTE:
Prepare pans or saucers under the disconnected fuel line because the fuel may spill out. The fuel pres-
sure cannot be completely released because QR engine models do not have fuel return system.
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Perform “FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE” in “WORK SUPPORT”
mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine.
4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel
pressure.
5. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.

SEF214Y

EC-437
 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Without CONSULT-II
1. Remove fuel pump fuse located in IPDM E/R.
2. Start engine.
3. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel
pressure.
4. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
5. Reinstall fuel pump fuse after servicing fuel system.

MBIB0277E

FUEL PRESSURE CHECK

CAUTION:
● The fuel hose connection method used when taking fuel pressure check must not be used for
other purposes.
● Be careful not to scratch or put debris around connection area when servicing, so that the quick
connector maintains sealability with O-rings inside.
● When installing fuel hose quick connector, refer to EM-14, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" .
1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-437, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .
2. Prepare fuel hose and fuel hose clamp for fuel pressure check, and connect fuel pressure gauge.
● Use suitable fuel hose for fuel pressure check (genuine NISSAN fuel hose without quick connector).

● To avoid unnecessary force or tension to hose, use moderately long fuel hose for fuel pressure check.

● Do not use the fuel hose for checking fuel pressure with damage or cracks on it.

● Use Pressure Gauge to check fuel pressure.

3. Remove fuel hose. Refer to EM-14, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" .
● Do not twist or kink fuel hose because it is plastic hose.

● Do not remove fuel hose from quick connector.

● Keep the original fuel hose to be free from intrusion of dust or foreign substances with a suitable cover.

4. Install the fuel pressure gauge as shown in the figure.

● Wipe off oil or dirt from hose insertion part using cloth moist-
ened with gasoline.
● Apply proper amount of gasoline between top of the fuel tube
and No.1 spool.
● Insert fuel hose for fuel pressure check until it touches the
No.1 spool on fuel tube.
● Use NISSAN genuine hose clamp (part number: 16439
N4710 or 16439 40U00).
● When reconnecting fuel line, always use new clamps. PBIB0669E

● When reconnecting fuel hose, check the original fuel hose for
damage and abnormality.
● Use a torque driver to tighten clamps.

● Install hose clamp to the position within 1 - 2 mm (0.04 - 0.08

in).
Tightening torque:
1 - 1.5 N·m (0.1 - 0.15 kg-m, 9 - 13 in-lb)
● Make sure that clamp screw does not contact adjacent parts.
5. After connecting fuel hose for fuel pressure check, pull the hose
with a force of approximately 98 N (10 kg, 22 lb) to confirm fuel
tube does not come off.
6. Turn ignition switch “ON”, and check for fuel leakage. MBIB0315E
7. Start engine and check for fuel leakage.

EC-438
 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
8. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge.
● Do not perform fuel pressure check with system operating. Fuel pressure gauge may indicate false A
readings.
● During fuel pressure check, confirm for fuel leakage from fuel connection every 3 minutes.
EC
At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.5 bar, 3.57 kg/cm2 , 51 psi)
9. If result is unsatisfactory, go to next step.
C
10. Check the following.
● Fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging

● Fuel filter for clogging

D
● Fuel pump

● Fuel pressure regulator for clogging

If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator. E

If NG, repair or replace.

EC-439
 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM PFP:00028

Introduction EBS00OKC

The ECM has an on board diagnostic system, which detects malfunctions related to engine sensors or actua-
tors. The ECM also records various emission-related diagnostic information including:
Emission-related diagnostic information
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
Freeze Frame data
1st Trip Diagnostic Trouble Code (1st Trip DTC)
1st Trip Freeze Frame data

The above information can be checked using procedures listed in the table below.
×: Applicable —: Not applicable
DTC 1st trip DTC Freeze Frame data 1st trip Freeze Frame data
CONSULT-II × × × ×
ECM × ×* — —
*: When DTC and 1st trip DTC simultaneously appear on the display, they cannot be clearly distinguished from each other.

The malfunction indicator (MI) on the instrument panel lights up when the same malfunction is detected in two
consecutive trips (Two trip detection logic), or when the ECM enters fail-safe mode. (Refer to EC-452 .)
Two Trip Detection Logic EBS00OKD

When a malfunction is detected for the first time, 1st trip DTC and 1st trip Freeze Frame data are stored in the
ECM memory. The MI will not light up at this stage. <1st trip>
If the same malfunction is detected again during the next drive, the DTC and Freeze Frame data are stored in
the ECM memory, and the MI lights up. The MI lights up at the same time when the DTC is stored. <2nd trip>
The “trip” in the “Two Trip Detection Logic” means a driving mode in which self-diagnosis is performed during
vehicle operation.
When there is an open circuit on MI circuit, the ECM can not warn the driver by lighting MI up when there is a
malfunction on engine control system.
Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related diagnoses are continuously detected as
NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system has malfunction and MI circuit is open by
means of operating fail-safe function.
The fail-safe function also operate when above diagnoses except MI circuit and demands the driver to repair
the malfunction.
Engine speed will not rise more than 2,500 rpm due to the fuel
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
cut

Emission-related Diagnostic Information EBS00OKE

DTC AND 1ST TRIP DTC

The 1st trip DTC (whose number is the same as the DTC number) is displayed for the latest self-diagnostic
result obtained. If the ECM memory was cleared previously, and the 1st trip DTC did not reoccur, the 1st trip
DTC will not be displayed.
If a malfunction is detected during the 1st trip, the 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM memory. The MI will not
light up (two trip detection logic). If the same malfunction is not detected in the 2nd trip (meeting the required
driving pattern), the 1st trip DTC is cleared from the ECM memory. If the same malfunction is detected in the
2nd trip, both the 1st trip DTC and DTC are stored in the ECM memory and the MI lights up. In other words,
the DTC is stored in the ECM memory and the MI lights up when the same malfunction occurs in two consec-
utive trips. If a 1st trip DTC is stored and a non-diagnostic operation is performed between the 1st and 2nd
trips, only the 1st trip DTC will continue to be stored.
For fail-safe items, DTC is stored in the ECM memory even in the 1st trip.
Procedures for clearing the DTC and the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory are described in EC-442, "HOW
TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION"
When a 1st trip DTC is detected, check, print out or write down and erase (1st trip) DTC and Freeze Frame
data as specified in “Work Flow” procedure Step II, refer to EC-448, "WORK FLOW" . Then perform “DTC
Confirmation Procedure” or “Overall Function Check” to try to duplicate the malfunction. If the malfunction is
duplicated, the item requires repair.

EC-440
 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
How to Read DTC and 1st Trip DTC
DTC and 1st trip DTC can be read by the following methods. A
With CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II displays the DTC in “SEFL-DIAG RESULTS” mode. Examples: P0117, P0340, P1065, etc.
(CONSULT-II also displays the malfunctioning component or system.) EC
Without CONSULT-II
The number of blinks of the MI in the Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-Diagnostic Results) indicates the DTC.
Example: 0107, 0340 etc. C
● 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
● Output of a DTC indicates a malfunction. However, the Diagnostic Test Mode II do not indicate
whether the malfunction is still occurring or has occurred in the past and has returned to normal. D
CONSULT-II can identify malfunction status as shown below. Therefore, using CONSULT-II (if avail-
able) is recommended.
A sample of CONSULT-II display for DTC and 1st trip DTC is shown below. DTC or 1st trip DTC of a malfunc-
E
tion is displayed in SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS mode of CONSULT-II. Time data indicates how many times
the vehicle was driven after the last detection of a DTC.
If the DTC is being detected currently, the time data will be “0”.
If a 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM, the time data will be “[1t]”. F

I
PBIB0911E

FREEZE FRAME DATA AND 1ST TRIP FREEZE FRAME DATA

J
The ECM records the driving conditions such as fuel system status, calculated load value, engine coolant tem-
perature, short term fuel trim, long term fuel trim, engine speed, vehicle speed, base fuel schedule and intake
air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected.
Data which are stored in the ECM memory, along with the 1st trip DTC, are called 1st trip freeze frame data. K
The data, stored together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and displayed on CONSULT-II. For
details, see EC-481, "Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data" .
Only one set of freeze frame data (either 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data) can be stored in the L
ECM. 1st trip freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory along with the 1st trip DTC. There is no priority
for 1st trip freeze frame data and it is updated each time a different 1st trip DTC is detected. However, once
freeze frame data (2nd trip detection/MI on) is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze frame data is no
longer stored. Remember, only one set of freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM. Both 1st trip freeze M
frame data and freeze frame data (along with the DTCs) are cleared when the ECM memory is erased. Proce-
dures for clearing the ECM memory are described in EC-442, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAG-
NOSTIC INFORMATION" .

EC-441
 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION
How to Erase DTC ( With CONSULT-II)
The emission related diagnostic information in the ECM can be erased by selecting “ERASE” in the “SELF-
DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II.
1. If the ignition switch stays “ON” after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch “OFF” once. Wait at least
10 seconds and then turn it “ON” (engine stopped) again.
2. Touch “ENGINE”.
3. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
4. Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the ECM will be erased.)

MBIB0657E

How to Erase DTC ( Without CONSULT-II)

1. If the ignition switch stays “ON” after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch “OFF” once.
2. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn it “ON” (engine stopped) again.
3. Change the diagnostic test mode from Mode II to Mode I by depressing the accelerator pedal. Refer to
EC-444, "HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE" .
● If the battery is disconnected, the emission-related diagnostic information will be lost after
approx. 24 hours.
● The following data are cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
– Diagnostic trouble codes
– 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes
– Freeze frame data
– 1st trip freeze frame data
– Others
Actual work procedures are explained using a DTC as an example. Be careful so that not only the DTC, but all
of the data listed above, are cleared from the ECM memory during work procedures.

EC-442
 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
NATS (Nissan Anti-theft System) EBS00OKF

A
● If the security indicator lights up with the ignition switch in
the “ON” position or “NATS MALFUNCTION” is displayed
on “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” screen, perform self-diagnostic
results mode with CONSULT-II using NATS program card. EC
Refer to BL-201, "NATS(Nissan Anti-Theft System)" .
● Confirm no self-diagnostic results of NATS is displayed
before touching “ERASE” in “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode C
with CONSULT-II.
● When replacing ECM, initialization of NATS system and reg-
istration of all NATS ignition key IDs must be carried out D
with CONSULT-II using NATS program card. SEF515Y

Therefore, be sure to receive all keys from vehicle owner.

Regarding the procedures of NATS initialization and NATS ignition key ID registration, refer to
CONSULT-II operation manual, NATS. E

Malfunction Indicator (MI) EBS00OKG

DESCRIPTION F
The MI is located on the instrument panel.
1. The MI will light up when the ignition switch is turned ON without
the engine running. This is a bulb check. G
● If the MI does not light up, refer to DI-48, "WARNING LAMPS"
or see EC-729 .
2. When the engine is started, the MI should go off. H
If the MI remains on, the on board diagnostic system has
detected an engine system malfunction.
I
SAT652J

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM FUNCTION

The on board diagnostic system has the following four functions. J
Diagnostic Test KEY and ENG. Function Explanation of Function
Mode Status
K
Mode I Ignition switch in BULB CHECK This function checks the MI bulb for damage (blown, open
“ON” position circuit, etc.).
If the MI does not come on, check MI circuit.
L

Engine stopped

Engine running MALFUNCTION This is a usual driving condition. When a malfunction is

WARNING detected twice in two consecutive driving cycles (two trip
detection logic), the MI will light up to inform the driver that
a malfunction has been detected.
The following malfunctions will light up or blink the MI in
the 1st trip.
● “One trip detection diagnoses”

EC-443
 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Diagnostic Test KEY and ENG. Function Explanation of Function
Mode Status
Mode II Ignition switch in SELF-DIAGNOSTIC This function allows DTCs and 1st trip DTCs to be read.
“ON” position RESULTS

Engine stopped

Engine running HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 This function allows the fuel mixture condition (lean or
MONITOR rich), monitored by heated oxygen sensor 1, to be read.

When there is an open circuit on MI circuit, the ECM can not warn the driver by lighting MI up when there is
malfunction on engine control system.
Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related diagnoses are continuously detected as
NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system has a malfunction and MI circuit is open by
means of operating fail-safe function.
The fail-safe function also operate when above diagnoses except MI circuit and demands the driver to repair
the a malfunction.
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode Engine speed will not rise more than 2,500 rpm due to the fuel cut

MI Flashing without DTC

If the ECM is in Diagnostic Test Mode II, MI may flash when engine is running. In this case, check ECM diag-
nostic test mode. EC-444, "HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE" .
How to switch the diagnostic test (function) modes, and details of the above functions are described later, EC-
444, "HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE" .
The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
● Diagnostic trouble codes
● 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes
● Freeze frame data
● 1st trip freeze frame data
● Others
HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE
NOTE:
● It is better to count the time accurately with a clock.
● It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit
has a malfunction.
● Always ECM returns to Diagnostic Test Mode I after ignition switch is turned “OFF”.
How to Set Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)
1. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, turn ignition switch “ON” and wait 3 seconds.
2. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds.
a. Fully depress the accelerator pedal.
b. Fully release the accelerator pedal.
3. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 10 seconds until the MI starts
blinking.
4. Fully release the accelerator pedal.

EC-444
 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
ECM has entered to Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results).
A

EC

PBIB0092E D
How to Set Diagnostic Test Mode II (Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 Monitor)
1. Set the ECM in Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results). Refer to EC-444, "How to Set Diagnostic
Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)" . E
2. Start Engine.
ECM has entered to Diagnostic Test Mode II (Heated oxygen sensor 1 monitor).
F
How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)
1. Set ECM in Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results). Refer to EC-444, "How to Set Diagnostic
Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)" .
G
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for more than 10 seconds.
The emission-related diagnostic information has been erased from the backup memory in the ECM.
3. Fully release the accelerator pedal, and confirm the DTC 0000 is displayed. H
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I — BULB CHECK
In this mode, the MI on the instrument panel should stay ON. If it remains OFF, check the bulb. Refer to DI-48,
"WARNING LAMPS" or see EC-729 . I
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I — MALFUNCTION WARNING
MI Condition
J
ON When the malfunction is detected.
OFF No malfunction.

● These DTC numbers are clarified in Diagnostic Test Mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS) K

DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II — SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS

In this mode, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are indicated by the number of blinks of the MI as shown below. L
The DTC and 1st trip DTC are displayed at the same time. If the MI does not illuminate in diagnostic test mode
I (Malfunction warning), all displayed items are 1st trip DTCs. If only one code is displayed when the MI illumi-
nates in diagnostic test mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS), it is a DTC; if two or more codes are dis-
M

EC-445
 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
played, they may be either DTCs or 1st trip DTCs. DTC No. is same as that of 1st trip DTC. These unidentified
codes can be identified by using the CONSULT-II. A DTC will be used as an example for how to read a code.

SEF952W

A particular trouble code can be identified by the number of four-digit numeral flashes. The “zero” is indicated
by the number of ten flashes. The length of time the 1,000th-digit numeral flashes on and off is 1.2 seconds
consisting of an ON (0.6-second) - OFF (0.6-second) cycle.
The 100th-digit numeral and lower digit numerals consist of a 0.3-second ON and 0.3-second OFF cycle.
A change from one digit numeral to another occurs at an interval of 1.0-second OFF. In other words, the later
numeral appears on the display 1.3 seconds after the former numeral has disappeared.
A change from one trouble code to another occurs at an interval of 1.8-second OFF.
In this way, all the detected malfunctions are classified by their DTC numbers. The DTC “0000” refers to no
malfunction. (See EC-413, "INDEX FOR DTC" )
How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)
The DTC can be erased from the back up memory in the ECM by depressing accelerator pedal. Refer to EC-
444, "HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE" .
● If the battery is disconnected, the DTC will be lost from the backup memory after approx 24 hours.
● Be careful not to erase the stored memory before starting trouble diagnoses.
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II — HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 MONITOR
In this mode, the MI displays the condition of the fuel mixture (lean or rich) which is monitored by the heated
oxygen sensor 1.
MI Fuel mixture condition in the exhaust gas Air-fuel ratio feedback control condition
ON Lean
Closed loop system
OFF Rich
*Remains ON or OFF Any condition Open loop system
*: Maintains conditions just before switching to open loop.

To check the heated oxygen sensor 1 function, start engine in the Diagnostic Test Mode II and warm it up until
engine coolant temperature indicator points to the middle of the gauge.
Next run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load conditions. Then make sure that the MI
comes ON more than 5 times within 10 seconds with engine running at 2,000 rpm under no-load.

EC-446
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PFP:00004
A
Trouble Diagnosis Introduction EBS00OKI

INTRODUCTION
The engine has an ECM to control major systems such as fuel con- EC
trol, ignition control, idle air control system, etc. The ECM accepts
input signals from sensors and instantly drives actuators. It is essen-
tial that both input and output signals are proper and stable. At the
same time, it is important that there are no malfunctions such as vac- C
uum leaks, fouled spark plugs, or other malfunctions with the engine.
It is much more difficult to diagnose a incident that occurs intermit-
tently rather than continuously. Most intermittent incidents are D
caused by poor electric connections or improper wiring. In this case,
careful checking of suspected circuits may help prevent the replace-
ment of good parts.
A visual check only may not find the cause of the incidents. A road
MEF036D
E
test with CONSULT-II or a circuit tester connected should be per-
formed. Follow the “Work Flow” on EC-448 .
Before undertaking actual checks, take a few minutes to talk with a F
customer who approaches with a driveability complaint. The cus-
tomer can supply good information about such incidents, especially
intermittent ones. Find out what symptoms are present and under
what conditions they occur. A “Diagnostic Worksheet” like the exam- G
ple on EC-451 should be used.
Start your diagnosis by looking for “conventional” malfunctions first.
This will help troubleshoot driveability malfunctions on an electroni- H
cally controlled engine vehicle.
SEF233G

SEF234G
L

EC-447
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
WORK FLOW
Flow Chart

MBIB0178E

*1 If time data of “SELF-DIAG *2 If the incident cannot be verified, per- *3 If the on board diagnostic system
RESULTS” is other than “0” or “[1t]”, form EC-499, "TROUBLE DIAGNO- cannot be performed, check main
perform EC-499, "TROUBLE DIAG- SIS FOR INTERMITTENT power supply and ground circuit.
NOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCI- INCIDENT" . Refer to EC-500, "POWER SUPPLY
DENT" . CIRCUIT FOR ECM" .
*4 If malfunctioning part cannot be *5 EC-494, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS -
detected, perform EC-499, "TROU- SPECIFICATION VALUE"
BLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMIT-
TENT INCIDENT" .

EC-448
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Description for Work Flow
STEP DESCRIPTION
A

Get detailed information about the conditions and the environment when the incident/symptom occurred using the
STEP I
“DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEET”, EC-450 .
EC
Before confirming the concern, check and write down (print out using CONSULT-II) the (1st trip) DTC and the (1st
trip) freeze frame data, then erase the DTC and the data. (Refer to EC-442 .) The (1st trip) DTC and the (1st trip)
freeze frame data can be used when duplicating the incident at STEP III & IV.
STEP II If the incident cannot be verified, perform EC-499, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . C
Study the relationship between the cause, specified by (1st trip) DTC, and the symptom described by the customer.
(The “Symptom Matrix Chart” will be useful. See EC-458 .)
Also check related service bulletins for information.
D
Try to confirm the symptom and under what conditions the incident occurs.
The “DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEET” and the freeze frame data are useful to verify the incident. Connect CONSULT-II
STEP III to the vehicle in DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG) mode and check real time diagnosis results.
If the incident cannot be verified, perform EC-499, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . E
If the malfunction code is detected, skip STEP IV and perform STEP V.
Try to detect the (1st trip) DTC by driving in (or performing) the “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Check and read the
(1st trip) DTC and (1st trip) freeze frame data by using CONSULT-II.
During the (1st trip) DTC verification, be sure to connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle in DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG) F
mode and check real time diagnosis results.
STEP IV
If the incident cannot be verified, perform EC-499, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
In case the “DTC Confirmation Procedure” is not available, perform the “Overall Function Check” instead. The (1st
G
trip) DTC cannot be displayed by this check, however, this simplified “check” is an effective alternative.
The “NG” result of the “Overall Function Check” is the same as the (1st trip) DTC detection.
Take the appropriate action based on the results of STEP I through IV.
If the malfunction code is indicated, proceed to TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC PXXXX. H
If the normal code is indicated, proceed to the BASIC INSPECTION. (Refer to EC-454 .) If COSULT-II is available,
STEP V
perform “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode with CONSULT-II and proceed to the “TOROUBLE DIAGNOSIS – SPECI-
FICATION VALUE”. (Refer to EC-494 .) (If malfunction is detected, proceed to “PERAIR/REPLACE”.) Then perform
I
inspections according to the Symptom Matrix Chart. (Refer to EC-458 .)
Identify where to begin diagnosis based on the relationship study between symptom and possible causes. Inspect the
system for mechanical binding, loose connectors or wiring damage using (tracing) “Harness Layouts”.
Gently shake the related connectors, components or wiring harness with CONSULT-II set in “DATA MONITOR J
(AUTO TRIG)” mode.
Check the voltage of the related ECM terminals or monitor the output data from the related sensors with CONSULT-II.
Refer to EC-470 , EC-488 .
STEP VI
The “Diagnostic Procedure” in EC section contains a description based on open circuit inspection. A short circuit
K
inspection is also required for the circuit check in the Diagnostic Procedure. For details, refer to “Circuit Inspection” in
GI-24, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" .
Repair or replace the malfunction parts. L
If malfunctioning part cannot be detected, perform EC-499, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCI-
DENT" .
Once you have repaired the circuit or replaced a component, you need to run the engine in the same conditions and
circumstances which resulted in the customer's initial complaint. M
Perform the “DTC Confirmation Procedure” and confirm the normal code [DTC No. P0000] is detected. If the incident
STEP VII is still detected in the final check, perform STEP VI by using a method different from the previous one.
Before returning the vehicle to the customer, be sure to erase the unnecessary (already fixed) (1st trip) DTC in ECM
and TCM (Transmission control module). (Refer to EC-442, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC
INFORMATION" )

EC-449
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET
Description
There are many operating conditions that lead to the malfunction of
engine components. A good grasp of such conditions can make trou-
bleshooting faster and more accurate.
In general, each customer feels differently about a incident. It is
important to fully understand the symptoms or conditions for a cus-
tomer complaint.
Utilize a diagnostic worksheet like the one on the next page in order
to organize all the information for troubleshooting.
Some conditions may cause the MI to come on steady or blink and
DTC to be detected. Examples:
● Vehicle ran out of fuel, which caused the engine to misfire. SEF907L

● Fuel filler cap was left off or incorrectly screwed on, allowing fuel
to evaporate into the atmosphere.

EC-450
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Worksheet Sample
A

EC

MTBL0017

DTC Inspection Priority Chart EBS00OKJ

If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the following priority
chart.
NOTE:
If DTC U1000 and/or U1001 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC
U1000 and U1001. Refer to EC-505, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .

EC-451
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Priority Detected items (DTC)
1 ● U1000 U1001 CAN communication line
● P0107 P0108 Manifold absolute pressure sensor
● P0117 P0118 Engine coolant temperature sensor
● P0221 P0222 P0223 P1223 P1224 P1225 P1226 Throttle position sensor
● P0226 P0227 P0228 P1227 P1228 Accelerator pedal position sensor
● P0327 P0328 Knock sensor
● P0335 Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
● P0340 Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
● P0605 ECM
● P1171 Intake error
● P1229 Sensor power supply
● P1610-P1615 NATS
● P1706 Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch
2 ● P0132 P0134 Heated oxygen sensor 1
● P0138 Heated oxygen sensor 2
● P1065 ECM power supply
● P1122 Electric throttle control function
● P1124 P1126 Throttle control motor relay
● P1128 Throttle control mother
● P1805 Brake switch
3 ● P1121 Electric throttle control actuator
● P1217 Engine over temperature (OVERHEAT)

Fail-safe Chart EBS00OKK

● When the DTC listed bellow is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MI lights up.
DTC No. Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
P0107 Manifold absolute pressure Engine speed will not rise more than 2,500 rpm due to the fuel cut.
P0108 sensor circuit
P0117 Engine coolant tempera- Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the time after turning
P0118 ture sensor circuit ignition switch “ON” or “START”.
CONSULT-II displays the engine coolant temperature decided by ECM.
Engine coolant temperature decided (CONSULT-
Condition
II display)
Just as ignition switch is turned
40°C (104°F)
ON or Start
More than approx. 4 minutes after
80°C (176°F)
ignition ON or Start
40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F)
Except as shown above
(Depends on the time)
When the fail-safe system for engine coolant temperature sensor is activated, the cool-
ing fan operates while engine is running.
P0221 Throttle position sensor The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening
P0222 in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees.
P0223 The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the nor-
P1223 mal condition.
P1224 So, the acceleration will be poor.
P0226 Accelerator pedal position The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening
P0227 sensor in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees.
P0228 The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the nor-
P1227 mal condition.
P1228 So, the acceleration will be poor.

EC-452
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
DTC No. Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
A
P1121 Electric throttle control actu- While the vehicle is driving, it slows down gradually by fuel cut. After the vehicle stops,
ator the engine stalls.
(ECM detect the throttle The engine can restart in “N” or “P” position, and engine speed will not exceed 1,000
valve is stuck open.) rpm or more. EC
P1122 Electric throttle control func- ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
tion fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
P1124 Throttle control motor relay ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a C
P1126 fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
P1128 Throttle control motor ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring. D
When accelerator pedal is depressed, engine speed will not rise more than 2,500 rpm
P1171 Intake air
due to fuel cut.
P1229 Sensor power supply ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a E
fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
● When there is an open circuit on MI circuit, the ECM can not warn the driver by lighting MI up when there
is a malfunction on engine control system. F
Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related diagnoses is continuously detected
as NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system has a malfunction and MI circuit is
open by means of operating fail-safe function.
The fail-safe function also operate when above diagnoses except MI circuit and demands the driver to G
repair the malfunction.
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode Engine speed will not rise more than 2,500 rpm due to the fuel cut
H

EC-453
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Basic Inspection EBS00OKL

1. INSPECTION START
1. Check service records for any recent repairs that may indicate a related malfunction, or a current need for
scheduled maintenance.
2. Open engine hood and check the following:
– Harness connectors for improper connections
– Wiring harness for improper connections, pinches and cut
– Vacuum hoses for splits, kinks and improper connections
– Hoses and ducts for leaks
– Air cleaner clogging
– Gasket
3. Confirm that electrical or mechanical loads are not applied.
– Headlamp switch is OFF. SEF983U

– Air conditioner switch is OFF.

– Rear window defogger switch is OFF.
– Steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position, etc.
4. Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature
indicator points the middle of gauge.
Ensure engine stays below 1,000 rpm.

SEF976U

5. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-
load.
6. Make sure that no DTC is displayed with CONSULT-II.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.

SEF977U

2. REPAIR OR REPLACE
Repair or replace components as necessary according to corresponding “Diagnostic Procedure”.

>> GO TO 3

EC-454
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
3. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED A
With CONSULT-II
1. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load.
EC
2. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no-
load, then run engine at idle speed for about 1 minute.

E
SEF978U

3. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.

M/T: 650 ± 50 rpm F
A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)

SEF058Y

I
Without CONSULT-II
1. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load.
2. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no-load, then run engine at idle speed for about J
1 minute.
3. Check idle speed.
K
M/T: 650 ± 50 rpm
A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
OK or NG L
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 4.

4. PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING M

1. Stop engine.
2. Perform EC-435, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .

>> GO TO 5.

5. PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING

Perform EC-435, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .

>> GO TO 6.

EC-455
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
6. PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING
Refer to EC-435, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 7.
No >> 1. Follow the instruction of “Idle Air Volume Learning”.
2. GO TO 4.

7. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
M/T: 650 ± 50 rpm
A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Check idle speed.
M/T: 650 ± 50 rpm
A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 8.

8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-577 .
● Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-570 .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> 1. Repair or replace.
2. GO TO 4.

9. CHECK ECM FUNCTION

1. Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but
this is the rarely the case.)
2. Perform initialization of NATS system and registration of NATS ignition key IDs. Refer to EC-443, "NATS
(Nissan Anti-theft System)" .

>> GO TO 4.

10. CHECK IGNITION TIMING

1. Run engine at idle.
2. Check ignition timing with a timing light.
M/T: 5 ± 5° BTDC
A/T: 5 ± 5° BTDC (in “P” or “N” position)
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 11.
EC-456
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
11. PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING A
1. Stop engine.
2. Perform EC-435, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
EC
>> GO TO 12.

12. PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING C

Perform EC-435, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .

D
>> GO TO 13.

13. PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING E

Refer to EC-435, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully?
Yes or No F
Yes >> GO TO 14.
No >> 1. Follow the instruction of “Idle Air Volume Learning”.
2. GO TO 4. G

14. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN

H
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. I
M/T: 650 ± 50 rpm
A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
J
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Check idle speed. K
M/T: 650 ± 50 rpm
A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 17. M
15. CHECK IGNITION TIMING AGAIN
1. Run engine at idle.
2. Check ignition timing with a timing light.
M/T: 5 ± 5° BTDC
A/T: 5 ± 5° BTDC (in “P” or “N” position)
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 16.

EC-457
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
16. CHECK TIMING CHAIN INSTALLATION
Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-46, "TIMING CHAIN" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG >> 1. Repair the timing chain installation.
2. GO TO 4.

17. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-577 .
● Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-570 .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18.
NG >> 1. Repair or replace.
2. GO TO 4.

18. CHECK ECM FUNCTION

1. Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but
this is the rarely the case.)
2. Perform initialization of NATS system and registration of NATS ignition key IDs. Refer to EC-443, "NATS
(Nissan Anti-theft System)" .

>> GO TO 4.
Symptom Matrix Chart EBS00OKM

SYSTEM — BASIC ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM

SYMPTOM
OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH
LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION
HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)

BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)

HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT

EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION

EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION

SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION

SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE

Reference
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE

page
IDLING VIBRATION
ENGINE STALL

Warranty symptom code AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA

Fuel Fuel pump circuit 1 1 2 3 2 2 2 3 2 EC-717
Fuel pressure regulator system 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 EC-437
Injector circuit 1 1 2 3 2 2 2 2 EC-711
Evaporative emission system 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 EC-731

EC-458
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
SYMPTOM
A

OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH

LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION
HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)

BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)

EC

HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT

EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION

EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION

SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION

SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE

Reference C

ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
page

IDLING VIBRATION
D

ENGINE STALL E

Warranty symptom code AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA

Air Positive crankcase ventilation sys- F
3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 1 EC-735
tem
Incorrect idle speed adjustment 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 EC-454
G
EC-591,
EC-593 ,
Electric throttle control actuator 1 1 2 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2
EC-599 ,
EC-604 H
Ignition Incorrect ignition timing adjustment 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 EC-454
Ignition circuit 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 EC-683
Main power supply and ground circuit 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 EC-500
I

Manifold absolute pressure sensor circuit 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 EC-508

Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit 1 1 2 2 2 3 2 2 3 1 2 EC-513 J
EC-536,
EC-542 ,
EC-628 ,
Throttle position sensor circuit 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 K
EC-634 ,
EC-636 ,
EC-647
EC-548, L
Accelerator pedal position sensor circuit 3 2 1 2 2 EC-557 ,
EC-638
EC-518, M
Heated oxygen sensor 1 circuit 1 2 3 2 2 2 2 EC-524 ,
EC-671
Knock sensor circuit 2 2 3 EC-566
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) circuit 2 2 EC-570
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) circuit 2 2 EC-577
Vehicle speed signal circuit 2 3 3 3 EC-699
EC-584,
ECM 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
EC-587
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cir-
3 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 3 EC-700
cuit
PNP switch circuit 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 EC-706
Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit 2 3 3 3 3 4 EC-722
Electrical load signal circuit 3 3 3 3 EC-727

EC-459
 Fuel
Air conditioner circuit

Fuel tank

Vapor lock
(continued on next page)

Fuel piping
Warranty symptom code
Warranty symptom code

Valve deposit

line, Low octane)

Poor fuel (Heavy weight gaso-
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection.
HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)

2
HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)

5
5
AA

AA
ENGINE STALL

2
ENGINE STALL

5
AB

AB
HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT

4
HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT

5
5
AC

AC
SYSTEM — ENGINE MECHANICAL & OTHER
SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION
3
SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION

5
5
AD

AD

EC-460
LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION
3
LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION

5
5
AE

AE
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
3

HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE

AF

AF
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
3

ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING

5
5
AG

AG
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

SYMPTOM

SYMPTOM
IDLING VIBRATION
3

IDLING VIBRATION

5
5
AH

AH
SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE
3

SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE

AJ

AJ
OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH
AK

AK
EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION
3

EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION

5
5
AL

AL
EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION
AM

AM
BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)
2

BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)

HA

HA

28
FL-8
page

page
BRC-6

—
—
—
MTC-14
ATC-7 or

FL-3, EM-
Reference

Reference
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
SYMPTOM
A

OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH

LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION
HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)

BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)

EC

HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT

EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION

EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION

SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION

SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE

Reference C

ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
page

IDLING VIBRATION
D

ENGINE STALL E

Warranty symptom code AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA

Air Air duct F
Air cleaner
Air leakage from air duct EM-14 G
(Manifold absolute pressure sen-
sor —electric throttle control 5 5 5 5 5 5
actuator)
5 5 5 5
Electric throttle control actuator H
Air leakage from intake manifold/
EM-18
Collector/Gasket
Cranking Battery SC-4
I
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Alternator circuit SC-14
Starter circuit 3 SC-27 J
Signal plate/Flywheel/Drive plate 6 EM-69
PNP switch MT-8 or
4
AT-354 K
Engine Cylinder head
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 EM-57
Cylinder head gasket 4 3
L
Cylinder block
Piston 4
Piston ring M
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 EM-69
Connecting rod
Bearing
Crankshaft
Valve Timing chain EM-46
mecha-
Camshaft EM-34
nism
Intake valve timing control 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 EM-46
Intake valve
3 EM-57
Exhaust valve
Exhaust Exhaust manifold/Tube/Muffler/
Gasket EM-20, EX-
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
3
Three way catalyst

EC-461
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
SYMPTOM

OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH

LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION
HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)

BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)

HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT

EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION

EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION

SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION

SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE

Reference

ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
page

IDLING VIBRATION
ENGINE STALL

Warranty symptom code AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA

Lubrica- Oil pan/Oil strainer/Oil pump/Oil EM-22, LU-
tion filter/Oil gallery 6 , LU-7 ,
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 2 LU-3
Oil level (Low)/Filthy oil LU-4
Cooling Radiator/Hose/Radiator filler cap CO-10
Thermostat 5 CO-22
Water pump CO-20
Water gallery 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 2 5 CO-6
Cooling fan 5 CO-10
Coolant level (low)/Contaminated
CO-7
coolant
EC-443 or
NATS (Nissan Anti-theft System) 1 1
BL-201
1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection.

EC-462
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Engine Control Component Parts Location EBS00OKN

EC

MBIB0267E

EC-463
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]

MBIB0316E

EC-464
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]

EC

MBIB0317E

EC-465
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]

MBIB0318E

EC-466
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]

EC

F
MBIB0320E

MBIB0319E J

MBIB0282E

EC-467
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Circuit Diagram EBS00OKO

MBWA0265E

EC-468
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]

EC

MBWA0266E

EC-469
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout EBS00OKP

MBIB0045E

ECM Terminals and Reference Value EBS00OKQ

PREPARATION
1. ECM is located left hand side of the engine room.
2. Remove ECM harness protector.

MBIB0274E

3. When disconnecting ECM harness connector, loosen it with

levers as far as they will go as shown at right.
4. Connect a break-out box (SST) and Y-cable adapter (SST)
between the ECM and ECM harness connector.
● Use extreme care not to touch 2 pins at one time.

● Data is for comparison and may not be exact.

MBIB0145E

ECM INSPECTION TABLE

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMI-
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
1 B ECM ground Engine ground
● Idle speed

EC-470
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
TERMI-
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) A
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
● Engine speed is below 3,800 rpm after the EC
following conditions are met.
– Engine: After warming up 0 - 1.0V
– Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 C
Heated oxygen sensor 2 and 4,000 rpm for one minute and at idle for
2 GY
heater one minute under no load.
[Ignition switch “ON”] D
● Engine stopped BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Engine is running] (11 - 14V)
● Engine speed is above 3,800 rpm E
Throttle control motor BATTERY VOLTAGE
3 LG [Ignition switch “ON”]
relay power supply (11 - 14V)

0 - 14V F
[Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped
Throttle control motor G
4 L ● Shift lever position is “D” (A/T model)
(Close)
● Shift lever position is “1st” (M/T model)
● Accelerator pedal is releasing
PBIB0534E
H

0 - 14V
[Ignition switch “ON”]
I
● Engine stopped
Throttle control motor
5 P ● Shift lever position is “D” (A/T model)
(Open)
● Shift lever position is “1st” (M/T model)
J
● Accelerator pedal is depressing
PBIB0533E

Approximately 3.0V K

[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition L
● Idle speed

Crankshaft position PBIB0527E M

13 Y
sensor (POS)
Approximately 3.0V

[Engine is running]
● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm

PBIB0528E

EC-471
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
TERMI-
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.

1.0 - 4.0V

[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
● Idle speed

PBIB0525E
Camshaft position sen-
14 R
sor (PHASE)
1.0 - 4.0V

[Engine is running]
● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.

PBIB0526E

[Engine is running]
15 W Knock sensor Approximately 2.5V
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
● Engine speed is Below 3,600 rpm after the
16 LG Heated oxygen sensor 2 following conditions are met. 0 - Approximately 1.0V
● Keeping the engine speed between 3,500
and 4,000 rpm for one minute and at idle for
one minute under no load.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)

[Engine is running]
● Idle speed

EVAP canister purge

PBIB0050E
19 LG volume control solenoid
valve
Approximately 10V

[Engine is running]
● Engine speed is about 2,000 rpm (More than
100 seconds after starting engine)

PBIB0520E

EC-472
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
TERMI-
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) A
COLOR
NO.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V) EC
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
C
● Idle speed

22 OR Injector No. 3
23 L Injector No. 1 PBIB0529E D
41 R Injector No. 4 BATTERY VOLTAGE
42 GY Injector No. 2
(11 - 14V)
E
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm
F

PBIB0530E

G
Approximately 7.0V

[Engine is running]
H
● Warm-up condition
Heated oxygen sensor 1
24 Y ● Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm.
heater
I
PBIB0519E

[Engine is running] BATTERY VOLTAGE

● Engine speed is above 3,600 rpm. (11 - 14V)
J
Sensors' ground [Engine is running]
29 B (Camshaft position sen- ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
sor) ● Idle speed K
Sensors' ground [Engine is running]
30 B (Crankshaft position ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
sensor) ● Idle speed L
Approximately 0 - 4.8V
Intake air temperature
34 OR [Engine is running] Output voltage varies with
sensor
intake air temperature. M
[Engine is running]
0 - Approximately 1.0V
35 BR Heated oxygen sensor 1 ● Warm-up condition
(Periodically change)
● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
45 L Sensor's power supply [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 5V
Sensor's power supply
46 W (Refrigerant pressure [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 5V
sensor)
Sensor's power supply
47 L (Throttle position sen- [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 5V
sor)

EC-473
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
TERMI-
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped
● Shift lever position is “D” (A/T model) More than 0.36V
● Shift lever position is “1st” (M/T model)
Throttle position ● Accelerator pedal fully released
49 Y
sensor 1 [Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped
● Shift lever position is “D” (A/T model) Less than 4.75V
● Shift lever position is “1st” (M/T model)
● Accelerator pedal fully depressed
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition Approximately 1.5V
Manifold absolute pres- ● Idle speed
51 W
sure sensor [Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition Approximately 1.2V
● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
[Engine is running]
Sensors' ground
54 — ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
(Knock sensor)
● Idle speed

Sensors' ground [Engine is running]

56 B (Manifold absolute pres- ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
sure sensor) ● Idle speed

Sensors' ground [Engine is running]

57 Y (Refrigerant pressure ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
sensor) ● Idle speed

0 - 0.1V

[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
● Idle speed

60 Y Ignition signal No. 3

61 PU Ignition signal No. 1 PBIB0521E

79 G Ignition signal No. 4

0 - 0.2V
80 BR Ignition signal No. 2

[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.

PBIB0522E

EC-474
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
TERMI-
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) A
COLOR
NO.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V) EC
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
C
● Idle speed

Intake valve timing MBIB0052E D

62 LG
control solenoid valve Approximately 4V - BATTERY
VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)
[Engine is running] E
● Warm-up condition
● When revving engine up to 2,000 rpm
quickly F

PBIB0532E

[Engine is running]
G
Sensors' ground
66 B (Throttle position sen- ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
sor) ● Idle speed
H
[Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped
● Shift lever position is “D” (A/T model) Less than 4.75V
I
● Shift lever position is “1st” (M/T model)
Throttle position ● Accelerator pedal fully released
68 R
sensor 2 [Ignition switch “ON”] J
● Engine stopped
● Shift lever position is “D” (A/T model) More than 0.36V
● Shift lever position is “1st” (M/T model) K
● Accelerator pedal fully depressed
[Engine is running]
L
Refrigerant pressure ● Warm-up condition
69 BR 1.0 - 4.0V
sensor ● Both A/C switch and blower switch are “ON”
(Compressor operates.)
M
Approximately 0 - 4.8V
Engine coolant tempera-
72 P [Engine is running] Output voltage varies with
ture sensor
engine coolant temperature.

Sensors' ground [Engine is running]

73 B (Engine coolant temper- ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
ature sensor) ● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
Sensors' ground
74 B ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
(Heated oxygen sensor)
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
Sensor's ground
82 B ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
(APP sensor 1)
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
Sensor's ground
83 B ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
(APP sensor 2)
● Idle speed

EC-475
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
TERMI-
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Ignition switch “ON”] BATTERY VOLTAGE
85 LG DATA link connector
● CONSULT-II is disconnected. (11 - 14V)

86 W CAN communication line [Ignition switch “ON”] 1.0 - 2.5V

Sensor's power supply
90 OR [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 5V
(APP sensor 1)
Sensor's power supply
91 BR [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 5V
(APP sensor 2)
[Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped
Approximately 0.8V
● Shift lever position is “D” (A/T models)
Throttle position sensor ● Accelerator pedal fully released
92 GY signal output
(A/T models) [Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped
Approximately 4.6V
● Shift lever position is “D” (A/T models)
● Accelerator pedal fully depressed
94 R CAN communication line [Ignition switch “ON”] 2.5 - 4.0V
[Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped 0.3 - 0.6V
Accelerator pedal ● Accelerator pedal fully released
98 GY
position sensor 2 [Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped 1.95 - 2.4V
● Accelerator pedal fully depressed
[Ignition switch “ON”]
Approximately 0V
● Brake pedal fully released
101 W Stop lamp switch
[Ignition switch “ON”] BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Brake pedal depressed (11 - 14V)

[Ignition switch “ON”]

● Gear position is “P” or “N” (A/T models), Approximately 0V
102 GY PNP switch “Neutral” (M/T models)
[Ignition switch “ON”] BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Except the above gear position (11 - 14V)

10 - 11V

[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
● Idle speed

Tachometer signal MBIB0053E

103 L/OR output
(A/T models) 10 - 11V

[Engine is running]
● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm

MBIB0054E

EC-476
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
TERMI-
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) A
COLOR
NO.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
Throttle control motor [Ignition switch “OFF”]
104 G (11 - 14V) EC
relay
[Ignition switch “ON”] 0 - 1.0V
[Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped 0.6 - 0.9V C
Accelerator pedal posi- ● Accelerator pedal fully released
106 W
tion sensor 1 [Ignition switch “ON”]
D
● Engine stopped 3.9 - 4.7V
● Accelerator pedal fully depressed
[Ignition switch “OFF”] 0V
E
109 PU Ignition switch BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Ignition switch “ON”]
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running] F
[Ignition switch “OFF”]
0 - 1.0V
● For 5 seconds after turning ignition switch
ECM relay “OFF”
111 P
(Self shut-off) G
[Ignition switch “OFF”]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● 5 seconds passed after turning ignition (11 - 14V)
switch “OFF”
H
[Ignition switch “ON”]
● For 1 seconds after turning ignition switch
0 - 1.0V
“ON”
I
113 R Fuel pump relay [Engine is running]
[Ignition switch “ON”]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● More than 1 seconds after turning ignition (11 - 14V) J
switch “ON”.

115 B [Engine is running]

ECM ground Engine ground
116 B ● Idle speed K
119 BATTERY VOLTAGE
G Power supply for ECM [Ignition switch “ON”]
120 (11 - 14V)
Power supply for ECM BATTERY VOLTAGE L
121 BR [Ignition switch “OFF”]
(Back-up) (11 - 14V)

: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
M
CONSULT-II Function EBS00OKR

FUNCTION
Diagnostic test mode Function
This mode enables a technician to adjust some devices faster and more accurately by following the
Work support
indications on the CONSULT-II unit.
Self-diagnostic results such as 1st trip DTC, DTCs and 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data
Self-diagnostic results
can be read and erased quickly.*
Data monitor Input/Output data in the ECM can be read.
Input/Output of the specification for Basic fuel schedule, A/F feedback control value and the other data
Data monitor (SPEC)
monitor items can be read.
Diagnostic Test Mode in which CONSULT-II drives some actuators apart from the ECMs and also
Active test
shifts some parameters in a specified range.
Function test This mode is used to inform customers when their vehicle condition requires periodic maintenance.
ECM part number ECM part number can be read.
*: The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared when the ECM memory is erased.

EC-477
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
● Diagnostic trouble codes
● 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes
● Freeze frame data
● 1st trip freeze frame data
● Others

ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS/CONTROL SYSTEMS APPLICATION

DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC DTC & SRT
RESULTS DATA CONFIRMATION
Item WORK DATA
MONI- ACTIVE DTC
SUP- FREEZE MONI-
TOR TEST SRT WORK
PORT DTC*1 FRAME TOR
(SPEC) STATUS SUP-
DATA*2
PORT
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) × × × ×
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) × × ×
Manifold absolute pressure sensor × × ×
Engine coolant temperature sensor × × × × ×
Heated oxygen sensor 1 × × × × ×
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS

Heated oxygen sensor 2 × × × × ×

Vehicle speed signal × × × ×
Accelerator pedal position sensor × × ×
Throttle position sensor × × ×
INPUT

Intake air temperature sensor × × ×

Knock sensor ×
Refrigerant pressure sensor × ×
Closed throttle position switch
(accelerator pedal position sensor × ×
signal)
Air conditioner switch × ×
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch × × ×
Stop lamp switch × × ×
Battery voltage × ×
Electrical load signal × ×
Injectors × × ×

Power transistor (Ignition timing) × × ×

ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS

Throttle control motor relay × × ×

Throttle control motor ×
EVAP canister purge volume con-
× × × ×
trol solenoid valve
OUTPUT

Air conditioner relay × ×

Fuel pump relay × × × ×
Cooling fan relay × × × ×
Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater × × × ×
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater × × × ×
Intake valve timing control solenoid
× × × ×
valve
Calculated load value × × ×
X: Applicable

EC-478
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
*1: This item includes 1st trip DTCs.
*2: This mode includes 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data. The items appear on CONSULT-II screen in freeze frame data A
mode only if a 1st trip DTC or DTC is detected. For details, refer to EC-441 .

EC

EC-479
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection to CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carry out CAN communication.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Connect “CONSULT-II” and “CONSULT-II CONVERTER” to
data link connector, which is located under drivers side dash
panel.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.

MBIB0275E

4. Touch “START(NISSAN BASED VHCL)”.

MBIB0233E

5. Touch “ENGINE”.
If “ENGINE” is not indicated, go to GI-36 , “CONSULT-II Data
Link Connector (DLC) Circuit”

SEF995X

6. Perform each diagnostic test mode according to each service

procedure.
For further information, see the CONSULT-II Operation Manual.

SEF838Z

EC-480
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
WORK SUPPORT MODE
Work Item A
WORK ITEM CONDITION USAGE
FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE ● FUEL PUMP WILL STOP BY TOUCHING “START” DUR- When releasing fuel pressure
EC
ING IDLING. from fuel line
CRANK A FEW TIMES AFTER ENGINE STALLS.
IDLE AIR VOL LEARN ● THE IDLE AIR VOLUME THAT KEEPS THE ENGINE When learning the idle air volume
WITHIN THE SPECIFIED RANGE IS MEMORIZED IN C
ECM.
SELF-LEARNING CONT ● THE COEFFICIENT OF SELF-LEARNING CONTROL When clearing the coefficient of
MIXTURE RATIO RETURNS TO THE ORIGINAL COEF- self-learning control value D
FICIENT.
TARGET IGN TIM ADJ* ● IDLE CONDITION When adjusting target ignition tim-
ing E
TARGET IDLE RPM ADJ* ● IDLE CONDITION When setting target idle speed
*: This function is not necessary in the usual service procedure.
F
SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE
Self Diagnostic Item
Regarding items of “DTC and 1st trip DTC”, refer to EC-413, "INDEX FOR DTC" . G
Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data
Freeze frame data
item*
Description H

DIAG TROUBLE
● The engine control component part/control system has a trouble code, it is displayed as “PXXXX”. (Refer
CODE
to EC-413, "INDEX FOR DTC" .)
[PXXXX] I
● “Fuel injection system status” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
● One mode in the following is displayed.
“MODE 2”: Open loop due to detected system malfunction J
FUEL SYS-B1
“MODE 3”: Open loop due to driving conditions (power enrichment, deceleration enrichment)
“MODE 4”: Closed loop - using oxygen sensor(s) as feedback for fuel control
“MODE 5”: Open loop - has not yet satisfied condition to go to closed loop
K
CAL/LD VALUE [%] ● The calculated load value at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
COOLANT TEMP [°C]
● The engine coolant temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
or [°F] L
● “Long-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
L-FUEL TRIM-B1 [%] ● The long-term fuel trim indicates much more gradual feedback compensation to the base fuel schedule
than short-term fuel trim. M
● “Short-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
S-FUEL TRIM-B1 [%] ● The short-term fuel trim indicates dynamic or instantaneous feedback compensation to the base fuel
schedule.
ENGINE SPEED
● The engine speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[rpm]
VHCL SPEED [km/h]
● The vehicle speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
or [mph]
B/FUEL SCHDL
● The base fuel schedule at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[msec]
INT/A TEMP SE [°C]
● The intake air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
or [°F]
*: The items are the same as those of 1st trip freeze frame data.

EC-481
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
DATA MONITOR MODE
Monitored Item
×: Applicable
CAN
ECM
MAIN DIAG
Monitored item INPUT
SIG- SUP- Description Remarks
[Unit] SIG-
NALS PORT
NALS
MNTR
● Accuracy becomes poor if engine
● Indicates the engine speed computed speed drops below the idle rpm.
from the signals of the crankshaft posi-
ENG SPEED [rpm] × × ● If the signal is interrupted while the
tion sensor (POS) and camshaft posi-
tion sensor (PHASE). engine is running, an abnormal
value may be indicated.
● When the engine coolant tempera-
● The engine coolant temperature (deter- ture sensor is open or short-cir-
COOLAN TEMP/S mined by the signal voltage of the cuited, ECM enters fail-safe mode.
× ×
[°C] or [°F] engine coolant temperature sensor) is The engine coolant temperature
displayed. determined by the ECM is dis-
played.
● The signal voltage of the heated oxygen
HO2S1 (B1) [V] × ×
sensor 1 is displayed.
● The signal voltage of the heated oxygen
HO2S2 (B1) [V] ×
sensor 2 is displayed.

● Display of heated oxygen sensor 1 sig- ● After turning ON the ignition

nal during air-fuel ratio feedback control: switch, “RICH” is displayed until
RICH ... means the mixture became air-fuel mixture ratio feedback
HO2S1 MNTR (B1) “rich”, and control is being affected control begins.
× ×
[RICH/LEAN] toward a leaner mixture. ● When the air-fuel ratio feedback is
LEAN ... means the mixture became clamped, the value just before the
“lean”, and control is being affected clamping is displayed continu-
toward a rich mixture. ously.
● Display of heated oxygen sensor 2 sig-
nal:
RICH ... means the amount of oxygen
HO2S2 MNTR (B1) after three way catalyst is relatively ● When the engine is stopped, a
×
[RICH/LEAN] small. certain value is indicated.
LEAN ... means the amount of oxygen
after three way catalyst is relatively
large.
● When the engine is stopped, a
● The mean value of the air-fuel ratio certain value is indicated.
A/F ALPHA-B1 [%] × feedback correction factor per cycle is ● This data also includes the data
indicated. for the air-fuel ratio learning con-
trol.
VHCL SPEED SE ● The vehicle speed computed from the
× ×
[km/h] or [mph] vehicle speed signal is displayed.
BATTERY VOLT ● The power supply voltage of ECM is dis-
× ×
[V] played.
● “Base fuel schedule” indicates the fuel
B/FUEL SCHDL injection pulse width programmed into
×
[msec] ECM, prior to any learned on board cor-
rection.
ACCEL SEN 1 [V] × × ● The accelerator pedal position sensor
ACCEL SEN 2 [V] × signal voltage is displayed.

THRTL SEN 1 [V] × × ● The throttle position sensor signal volt-

THRTL SEN 2 [V] × age is displayed.

EC-482
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
CAN
ECM
MAIN DIAG A
Monitored item INPUT
SIG- SUP- Description Remarks
[Unit] SIG-
NALS PORT
NALS
MNTR
EC
● The intake air temperature (determined
INT/A TEMP SE
× × by the signal voltage of the intake air
[°C] or [°F]
temperature sensor) is indicated.
C
● The signal voltage of the manifold abso-
TURBO BST SEN ×
lute pressure sensor is displayed.
● Indicates start signal status [ON/OFF]
● After starting the engine, [OFF] is D
START SIGNAL computed by the ECM according to the
× × displayed regardless of the starter
[ON/OFF] signals of engine speed and battery volt-
signal.
age.
● Indicates idle position [ON/OFF] com- E
CLSD THL POS
× × puted by the ECM according to the
[ON/OFF]
accelerator pedal position sensor signal.
● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of the air F
AIR COND SIG
× × conditioner switch as determined by the
[ON/OFF]
air conditioner signal.
● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the G
P/N POSI SW
× × park/neutral position (PNP) switch sig-
[ON/OFF]
nal.
● [ON/OFF] condition of the power steer-
H
PW/ST SIGNAL ing oil pressure switch as determined by
× ×
[ON/OFF] the power steering oil pressure signal is
indicated.
● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the I
electrical load signal.
ON ... Rear window defogger switch is
LOAD SIGNAL
× × ON and/or lighting switch is in 2nd posi- J
[ON/OFF]
tion.
OFF ... Both rear window defogger
switch and lighting switch are OFF.
K
IGNITION SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from igni-
×
[ON/OFF] tion switch.
HEATER FAN SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the
× L
[ON/OFF] heater fan switch signal.
BRAKE SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the
×
[ON/OFF] stop lamp switch signal.
M
● Indicates the actual fuel injection pulse ● When the engine is stopped, a
INJ PULSE-B1
× width compensated by ECM according certain computed value is indi-
[msec]
to the input signals. cated.
IGN TIMING ● Indicates the ignition timing computed ● When the engine is stopped, a
×
[BTDC] by ECM according to the input signals. certain value is indicated.
● “Calculated load value” indicates the
CAL/LD VALUE [%] value of the current airflow divided by
peak airflow.
● Indicates the EVAP canister purge vol-
ume control solenoid valve control value
PURG VOL C/V computed by the ECM according to the
[%] input signals.
● The opening becomes larger as the
value increases.
INT/V TIM (B1) ● Indicates [°CA] of intake camshaft
[°CA] advanced angle.

EC-483
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
CAN
ECM
MAIN DIAG
Monitored item INPUT
SIG- SUP- Description Remarks
[Unit] SIG-
NALS PORT
NALS
MNTR
● The control condition of the intake valve
timing control solenoid valve (deter-
mined by ECM according to the input
signals) is indicated.
INT/V SOL (B1) [%]
ON ... intake valve timing control is oper-
ating.
OFF ... Intake valve timing control is not
operating.
● The air conditioner relay control condi-
AIR COND RLY
× tion (determined by ECM according to
[ON/OFF]
the input signals) is indicated.
● Indicates the fuel pump relay control
FUEL PUMP RLY
× condition determined by ECM according
[ON/OFF]
to the input signals.
● Indicates the throttle control motor relay
THRTL RELAY
× control condition determined by the
[ON/OFF]
ECM according to the input signals.
● Indicates the condition of the cooling fan
(determined by ECM according to the
COOLING FAN input signals).
[HI/LOW/OFF] HI ... High speed operation
LOW ... Low speed operation
OFF ... Stop
● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of heated
HO2S1 HTR (B1)
oxygen sensor 1 heater determined by
[ON/OFF]
ECM according to the input signals.
● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of heated
HO2S2 HTR (B1)
oxygen sensor 2 heater determined by
[ON/OFF]
ECM according to the input signals.
● Indicates the vehicle speed computed
VEHICLE SPEED
× from the secondary speed sensor sig-
[km/h] or [mph]
nal.
● Display the condition of idle air volume
learning
IDL A/V LEARN YET ... Idle air volume learning has not
[YET/CMPLT] been performed yet.
CMPLT ... Idle air volume learning has
already been performed successfully.
TRVL AFTER MIL
● Distance traveled while MI is activated.
[km] or [mile]
● Indicates the heated oxygen sensor 1
O2 SEN HTR DTY
heater control valve computed by the
[%]
ECM according to the input signals.
AC PRESS SEN ● The signal voltage from the refrigerant
×
[V] pressure sensor is displayed.
● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of
CRUISE LAMP
CRUISE lamp determined by the ECM
[ON/OFF]
according to the input signals.

EC-484
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
CAN
ECM
MAIN DIAG A
Monitored item INPUT
SIG- SUP- Description Remarks
[Unit] SIG-
NALS PORT
NALS
MNTR
EC
Voltage [V]
Frequency ● Only “#” is displayed if item is
[msec], [Hz] or [%] unable to be measured.
C
DUTY-HI ● Voltage, frequency, duty cycle or pulse ● Figures with “#”s are temporary
width measured by the probe. ones. They are the same figures
DUTY-LOW
as an actual piece of data which
PLS WIDTH-HI was just previously measured. D
PLS WIDTH-LOW
CAN COMM
× E
[OK/NG]
CAN CIRC 1
×
[OK/UNKWN]
CAN CIRC 2 F
×
[OK/UNKWN]
CAN CIRC 3
×
[OK/UNKWN] G
CAN CIRC 4
× ● These items are not displayed in
[OK/UNKWN] ● Indicates the communication condition
“SELECTION FROM MENU”
CAN CIRC 5 of CAN communication line. H
× mode.
[OK/UNKWN]
CAN CIRC 6
×
[OK/UNKWN] I
CAN CIRC 7
×
[OK/UNKWN]
CAN CIRC 8 J
×
[OK/UNKWN]
CAN CIRC 9
×
[OK/UNKWN] K
NOTE:
● Any monitored item that does not match the vehicle being diagnosed is deleted from the display automatically.

DATA MONITOR (SPEC) MODE L

Monitored Item
ECM
Main M
Monitored item [Unit] input Description Remarks
signals
signals
● Indicates the engine speed computed
ENG SPEED [rpm] × from the signal of the crankshaft position
sensor (POS).
● “Base fuel schedule” indicates the fuel
B/FUEL SCHDL injection pulse width programmed into ● When engine is running specification
[msec] ECM, prior to any learned on board cor- range is indicated.
rection.
● When engine is running specification
● The mean value of the air-fuel ratio feed- range is indicated.
A/F ALPHA-B1 [%] × back correction factor per cycle is indi-
cated. ● This data also includes the data for the
air-fuel ratio learning control.
NOTE:
● Any monitored item that does not match the vehicle being diagnosed is deleted from the display automatically.

EC-485
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
ACTIVE TEST MODE
Test Item
TEST ITEM CONDITION JUDGEMENT CHECK ITEM (REMEDY)
● Engine: Return to the original ● Harness and connectors
FUEL INJEC- trouble condition If trouble symptom disappears, see
● Fuel injectors
TION ● Change the amount of fuel injec- CHECK ITEM.
tion using CONSULT-II. ● Heated oxygen sensor 1

● Engine: Return to the original

trouble condition
IGNITION TIM- If trouble symptom disappears, see ● Perform “Idle Air Volume Learn-
● Timing light: Set
ING CHECK ITEM. ing”.
● Retard the ignition timing using
CONSULT-II.

● Engine: After warming up, idle ● Harness and connectors

the engine. ● Compression
POWER BAL- ● A/C switch “OFF” ● Fuel injectors
Engine runs rough or dies.
ANCE ● Shift lever “N” ● Power transistor
● Cut off each injector signal one at ● Spark plugs
a time using CONSULT-II. ● Ignition coils

● Ignition switch: ON ● Harness and connectors

1 Cooling fan moves and stops. ● Cooling fan relay
COOLING FAN* ● Turn the cooling fan “ON” and
“OFF” with CONSULT-II. ● Cooling fan motor

● Engine: Return to the original ● Harness and connectors

ENG COOLANT trouble condition If trouble symptom disappears, see ● Engine coolant temperature sen-
TEMP ● Change the engine coolant tem- CHECK ITEM. sor
perature using CONSULT-II. ● Fuel injectors
● Ignition switch: ON (Engine
stopped)
FUEL PUMP Fuel pump relay makes the operat- ● Harness and connectors
RELAY ● Turn the fuel pump relay “ON” ing sound. ● Fuel pump relay
and “OFF” using CONSULT-II
and listen to operating sound.
● Engine: After warming up, run
engine at 1,500 rpm.
PURG VOL ● Change the EVAP canister purge Engine speed changes according to ● Harness and connectors
CONT/V volume control solenoid valve the opening percent. ● Solenoid valve
opening percent using CON-
SULT-II.
● Engine: Return to the original
● Harness and connectors
V/T ASSIGN trouble condition If trouble symptom disappears, see
ANGLE CHECK ITEM. ● Intake valve timing control sole-
● Change intake valve timing using
noid valve
CONSULT-II.
*1:Leaving cooling fan “OFF” with CONSULT-II while engine is running may cause the engine to overheat.

REAL TIME DIAGNOSIS IN DATA MONITOR MODE (RECORDING VEHICLE DATA)

Description
CONSULT-II has two kinds of triggers and they can be selected by touching “SETTING” in “DATA MONITOR”
mode.
1. “AUTO TRIG” (Automatic trigger):

EC-486
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
● The malfunction will be identified on the CONSULT-II screen
in real time. A
In other words, DTC/1st trip DTC and malfunction item will be
displayed if the malfunction is detected by ECM.
At the moment a malfunction is detected by ECM, “MONI-
EC
TOR” in “DATA MONITOR” screen is changed to “Recording
Data ... xx%” as shown at right, and the data after the mal-
function detection is recorded. Then when the percentage
reached 100%, “REAL-TIME DIAG” screen is displayed. If C
“STOP” is touched on the screen during “Recording Data ...
xx%”, “REAL-TIME DIAG” screen is also displayed.
MBIB0295E
The recording time after the malfunction detection and the D
recording speed can be changed by “TRIGGER POINT” and
“Recording Speed”. Refer to CONSULT-II OPERATION MAN-
UAL.
2. “MANU TRIG” (Manual trigger): E
● DTC/1st trip DTC and malfunction item will not be displayed
automatically on CONSULT-II screen even though a malfunc-
tion is detected by ECM. F
DATA MONITOR can be performed continuously even though
a malfunction is detected.
G
SEF707X

Operation
1. “AUTO TRIG” H
● While trying to detect the DTC/1st trip DTC by performing the “DTC Confirmation Procedure”, be sure
to select to “DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)” mode. You can confirm the malfunction at the moment it is
detected. I
● While narrowing down the possible causes, CONSULT-II should be set in “DATA MONITOR (AUTO
TRIG)” mode, especially in case the incident is intermittent.
When you are inspecting the circuit by gently shaking (or twisting) the suspicious connectors, compo- J
nents and harness in the “DTC Confirmation Procedure”, the moment a malfunction is found the DTC/
1st trip DTC will be displayed. (Refer to “Incident Simulation Tests” in GI-24, "How to Perform Efficient
Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" .)
2. “MANU TRIG” K
● If the malfunction is displayed as soon as “DATA MONITOR” is selected, reset CONSULT-II to “MANU
TRIG”. By selecting “MANU TRIG” you can monitor and store the data. The data can be utilized for fur-
ther diagnosis, such as a comparison with the value for the normal operating condition. L

EC-487
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]

PBIB0197E

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00OKT

Remarks:
● Specification data are reference values.
● Specification data are output/input values which are detected or supplied by the ECM at the connector.
* Specification data may not be directly related to their components signals/values/operations.
i.e. Adjust ignition timing with a timing light before monitoring IGN TIMING, because the monitor may show the specification data in
spite of the ignition timing not being adjusted to the specification data. This IGN TIMING monitors the data calculated by the ECM
according to the signals input from the camshaft position sensor and other ignition timing related sensors.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
● Tachometer: Connect
Almost the same speed as the
ENG SPEED ● Run engine and compare CONSULT-II value with the tachometer indica- tachometer indication.
tion.
● Engine: After warming up Idle 2.5 - 3.5 msec
● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/
B/FUEL SCHDL T)
2,000 rpm 2.5 - 3.5 msec
● Air conditioner switch: OFF
● No-load
Maintaining engine speed at 2,000
A/F ALPHA-B1 ● Engine: After warming up 54% - 155%
rpm
COOLAN TEMP/S ● Engine: After warming up More than 70°C (158°F)
Maintaining engine speed at 2,000
HO2S1 (B1) ● Engine: After warming up 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
rpm
● Engine: After warming up
● Keeping the engine speed
Revving engine from idle to 3,000
HO2S2 (B1) between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
rpm quickly.
for one minute and at idle for
one minute under no load.
LEAN ←→ RICH
Maintaining engine speed at 2,000
HO2S1 MNTR (B1) ● Engine: After warming up Changes more than 5 times dur-
rpm
ing 10 seconds.

EC-488
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
A
● Engine: After warming up
● Keeping the engine speed
Revving engine from idle to 3,000
HO2S2 MNTR (B1) between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm LEAN ←→ RICH
rpm quickly.
for one minute and at idle for EC
one minute under no load.
● Turn drive wheels and compare CONSULT-II value with the speedometer Almost the same speed as the
VEH SPEED SE
indication. speedometer indication. C
BATTERY VOLT ● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) 11 - 14V

● Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.6 - 0.9V

ACCEL SEN1 D
(Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed 4.0 - 4.8V

● Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.6 - 0.9V

ACCEL SEN2*2
(Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed 3.9 - 4.8V E
● Ignition switch: ON
Accelerator pedal: Fully released More than 0.36V
(Engine stopped)
THRTL SEN1
THRTL SEN2*1
● Shift lever: F
D (A/T model) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V
1st (M/T model)
● Engine: After warming up At idle Approximately 1.5V G
● Air conditioner switch: OFF
TURBO BST SEN
● Shift lever: N At 2,500 rpm Approximately 1.2V
● No-load H
START SIGNAL ● Ignition switch: ON → START → ON OFF → ON → OFF

● Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released ON

CLSD THL POS I
(Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed OFF
Air conditioner switch: OFF OFF
● Engine: After warming up, idle
AIR COND SIG Air conditioner switch: ON J
the engine ON
(Compressor operates.)
Shift lever:
ON
P/N POSI SW ● Ignition switch: ON P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T)
K
Shift lever: Except above OFF
Steering wheel is in neutral position.
● Engine: After warming up, idle OFF
PW/ST SIGNAL (Forward direction) L
the engine
Steering wheel is turned. ON
Rear window defogger switch is ON
ON
and/or lighting switch is in 2nd. M
LOAD SIGNAL ● Ignition switch: ON
Rear window defogger switch is OFF
OFF
and lighting switch is OFF.
IGNITION SW ● Ignition switch: ON → OFF → ON ON → OFF → ON

● Engine: After warming up, idle Heater fan is operating. ON

HEATER FAN SW
the engine Heater fan is not operating OFF
Brake pedal: Fully released OFF
BRAKE SW ● Ignition switch: ON
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON
● Engine: After warming up Idle 2.0 - 3.0 msec
● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/
INJ PULSE-B1 T)
2,000 rpm 1.9 - 2.9 msec
● Air conditioner switch: OFF
● No-load

EC-489
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
● Engine: After warming up Idle 0° - 10° BTDC
● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/
IGN TIMING T)
2,000 rpm 25° - 45° BTDC
● Air conditioner switch: OFF
● No-load
● Engine: After warming up Idle 10% - 35%
● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/
CAL/LD VALUE T)
2,500 rpm 10% - 35%
● Air conditioner switch: OFF
● No-load
● Engine: After warming up Idle 1.0 - 4.0 g·m/s
● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/
MASS AIRFLOW T)
2,500 rpm 4.0 - 10.0 g·m/s
● Air conditioner switch: OFF
● No-load
● Engine: After warming up Idle 0%
● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/
PURG VOL C/V T)
2,000 rpm 20 - 30%
● Air conditioner switch: OFF
● No-load
● Engine: After warming up Idle −5° - 5°CA
● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/
INT/V TIM (B1) T)
When revving up to 2,000 rpm quickly Approx. 0° - 20°CA
● Air conditioner switch: OFF
● No-load
● Engine: After warming up Idle 0% - 2%
● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/
INT/V SOL (B1) T)
When revving up to 2,000 rpm quickly Approx. 0% - 50%
● Air conditioner switch: OFF
● No-load
Air conditioner switch: OFF OFF
● Engine: After warming up, idle
AIR COND RLY Air conditioner switch: ON
the engine ON
(Compressor operates)
● For 1 seconds after turning ignition switch ON
ON
FUEL PUMP RLY ● Engine running or cranking
● Except above conditions OFF
THRTL RELAY ● Ignition switch: ON ON
Engine coolant temperature is 94°C
OFF
(201°F) or less
● Engine: After warming up, idle Engine coolant temperature is
COOLING FAN the engine between 95°C (203°F) and 104°C LOW*2
● Air conditioner switch: OFF (210°F)
Engine coolant temperature is 105°C
(212°F) or more HIGH*2

● Engine: After warming up

ON
HO2S1 HTR (B1) ● Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm
● Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm OFF

EC-490
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
A
● Engine speed is below 3,800 rpm after the following conditions are met.
– Engine: After warming up
ON
HO2S2 HTR (B1) – Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for one minute
EC
and at idle for one minute under no load.
● Engine speed: Above 3,800 rpm OFF
Vehicle has traveled after MI has 0 - 65,535 km C
TRVL AFTER MIL ● Ignition switch: ON
turned ON. (0 - 40,723 mile)
● Engine coolant temperature when engine started: More than 80°C
O2SEN HTR DTY (176°F) Approx. 50%
D
● Engine speed: below 3,600 rpm
● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Approx. 0V
AC PRESS SEN ● Engine: Idle E
1.0 - 4.0V
● Air conditioner switch: OFF
CAN COMM OK
CAN CIRC 1 OK F
CAN CIRC 2 OK or UNKWN
CAN CIRC 3 OK
G
CAN CIRC 4 OK
● Ignition switch: ON
CAN CIRC 5 UNKWN
CAN CIRC 6 OK H
CAN CIRC 7 OK
CAN CIRC 8 UNKWN
I
CAN CIRC 9 OK or UNKWN

*1 : Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal and throttle position sensor 2 signal are converted by ECM internally. Thus, they differ
from ECM terminals voltage signal. J
*2 : Models without air conditioner, cooling fan operates only ON and OFF operation, but CONSULT-II display will change OFF, LOW and
HI depends on engine coolant temperature.

Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor Mode EBS00OKU

K
The following are the major sensor reference graphs in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
CLSD THL POS, ACCEL SEN 1, THRTL SEN 1 L
Below is the data for “CLSD THL POS”, “ACCEL SEN 1” and “THRTL SEN 1” when depressing the accelera-
tor pedal with the ignition switch “ON” and with selector lever in “D” position (A/T models) or with shift lever in
“1st” position (M/T models). M
The signal of “ACCEL SEN 1” and “THRTL SEN 1” should rise gradually without any intermittent drop or rise
after “CLSD THL POS” is changed from “ON” to “OFF”.

PBIB0198E

ENG SPEED, THRTL SEN 1, HO2S2 (B1), HO2S1 (B1), INJ PULSE-B1
Below is the data for “ENG SPEED”, “THRTL SEN 1”, “HO2S2 (B1)”, “HO2S1 (B1)” and “INJ PULSE-B1”
when revving engine quickly up to 4,800 rpm under no load after warming up engine sufficiently.

EC-491
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Each value is for reference, the exact value may vary.

MBIB0545E

EC-492
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]

EC

PBIB0668E

EC-493
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE PFP:00031

Description EBS00OKV

The specification (SP) value indicates the tolerance of the value that is displayed in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)”
mode of CONSULT-II during normal operation of the Engine Control System. When the value in “DATA MONI-
TOR (SPEC)” mode is within the SP value, the Engine Control System is confirmed OK. When the value in
“DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode is NOT within the SP value, the Engine Control System may have one or
more malfunctions.
The SP value is used to detect malfunctions that may affect the Engine Control System, but will not light the
MI.
The SP value will be displayed for the following three items:
● B/FUEL SCHDL (The fuel injection pulse width programmed into ECM prior to any learned on board cor-
rection)
● A/F ALPHA-B1 (The mean value of air-fuel ratio feedback correction factor per cycle)
Testing Condition EBS00OKW

● Vehicle driven distance: More than 5,000 km (3,017 miles)

● Barometric pressure: 98.3 - 104.3 kPa (0.983 - 1.043 bar, 1.003 - 1.064 kg/cm2 , 14.25 - 15.12 psi)
● Atmospheric temperature: 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)
● Engine coolant temperature: 75 - 95°C (167 - 203°F)
● Transmission: Warmed-up*1
● Electrical load: Not applied*2
● Engine speed: Idle
*1: For A/T models, after the engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature, drive vehicle until “FLUID
TEMP SE” (A/T fluid temperature sensor signal) indicates more than 60°C (140°F).
For M/T models, after the engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature, drive vehicle for 5 minutes.
*2: Rear window defogger switch, air conditioner switch, lighting switch are “OFF”. Steering wheel is straight
ahead.
Inspection Procedure EBS00OKX

NOTE:
Perform “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode in maximum scale display.
1. Perform EC-454, "Basic Inspection" .
2. Confirm that the testing conditions indicated above are met.
3. Select “B/FUEL SCHDL” and “A/F ALPHA-B1” in “DATA MONI-
TOR (SPEC)” mode with CONSULT-II.
4. Make sure that monitor items are within the SP value.
5. If NG, go to EC-495, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SEF601Z

EC-494
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00OKY

CHECK A/F ALPHA–B1 A

EC

SEF613ZD

EC-495
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]

SEF768Z

EC-496
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
CHECK B/FUEL SCHDL
A

EC

PBIA1516E

EC-497
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]

MBIB0658E

EC-498
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT PFP:00006
A
Description EBS00OKZ

Intermittent incidents (I/I) may occur. In many cases, the malfunction resolves itself (the part or circuit function
returns to normal without intervention). It is important to realize that the symptoms described in the customer's EC
complaint often do not recur on (1st trip) DTC visits. Realize also that the most frequent cause of I/I occur-
rences is poor electrical connections. Because of this, the conditions under which the incident occurred may
not be clear. Therefore, circuit checks made as part of the standard diagnostic procedure may not indicate the
specific malfunctioning area. C
Common I/I Report Situations
STEP in Work Flow Situation
D
II The CONSULT-II is used. The SELF-DIAG RESULTS screen shows time data other than “0” or “[1t]”.
III The symptom described by the customer does not recur.
IV (1st trip) DTC does not appear during the DTC Confirmation Procedure. E
VI The Diagnostic Procedure for PXXXX does not indicate the malfunctioning area.

Diagnostic Procedure EBS00OL0

F

1. INSPECTION START
G
Erase (1st trip) DTCs. Refer to EC-442, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMA-
TION" .
H
>> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK GROUND TERMINALS I

Check ground terminals for corroding or loose connection.
Refer to GI-24, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" , “Incident Simulation Tests”,
“Ground Inspection”. J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace. K

3. SEARCH FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT

L
Perform GI-24, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" , “Incident Simulation Tests”.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END M
NG >> Repair or replace.

EC-499
 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM PFP:24110

Wiring Diagram EBS00OL1

MBWA0267E

EC-500
 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: A
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER- EC
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
1 B [Engine is running] C
115 B ECM ground Engine ground
116 B ● Idle speed

[Ignition switch “OFF”] 0V

D
109 PU Ignition switch BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Ignition switch “ON”]
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running] E
[Ignition switch “OFF”] 0 - 1.0V
ECM relay ● For 5 seconds after turning ignition switch “OFF”
111 P
(Self shut-off) [Ignition switch “OFF”]
BATTERY VOLTAGE F
● 5 seconds passed after turning ignition switch (11 - 14V)
“OFF”
119 Power supply for BATTERY VOLTAGE G
G [Ignition switch “ON”]
120 ECM (11 - 14V)

Diagnostic Procedure EBS00OL2

1. INSPECTION START H

Start engine.
Is engine running? I
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 8.
No >> GO TO 2. J

2. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and then “ON”. K
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 109 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
L
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. M
NG >> GO TO 3.

MBIB0015E

3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Harness connectors M1, E101
● Fuse block (J/B) connector M16
● 10A fuse
● Harness for open or short between ECM and fuse

>> Repair harness or connectors.

EC-501
 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
4. CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 1, 115, 116 and engine ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.

5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Harness connectors F1, E50
● Harness for open or short between ECM and engine ground

>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.

6. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II

1. Reconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
3. Check voltage between IPDE E/R harness connector E14 termi-
nal 33 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK >> Go to EC-683, "IGNITION SIGNAL" .
NG >> GO TO 7.

MBIB0601E

7. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III

1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and then “OFF”.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminals 119, 120 and ground
with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: After turning ignition switch “OFF”, battery
voltage will exist for a few seconds, then
drop approximately 0V.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG (Battery voltage does not exist.)>>GO TO 8.
NG (Battery voltage exists for more than a few seconds.)>>GO TO
13. MBIB0016E

EC-502
 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
8. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV A
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 111 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester. EC

Voltage: Battery voltage

OK or NG C
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 10.
D

PBIB1191E
E
9. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-V
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
F
2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 119, 120 and IPDM E/R terminal 32.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. G
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
I
10. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-VI
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. J
2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 111 and IPDM E/R terminal 29.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. K
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. M
11. CHECK 20A FUSE
1. Disconnect 20A fuse from IPDM E/R.
2. Check 20A fuse.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> Replace 20A fuse.

EC-503
 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
12. CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 1, 115, 116 and engine ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.

13. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-499, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK >> Replace IPDM E/R.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.

EC-504
 DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE PFP:23710
A
Description EBS00OL3

CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle mul-
tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many elec- EC
tronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other
control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2
communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring.
Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. C

On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00OL4

D
Trouble diagnosis
DTC No. DTC detecting condition Possible cause
name

U1000*1 ● ECM cannot communicate to other control E

1000*1 units. ● Harness or connectors
CAN communication
(CAN communication line is open or
line ECM cannot communicate for more than the
U1001*2 ●
shorted.)
specified time.
1001*2 F
*1:These self-diagnosis have the one trip detection logic.
*2:The MI will not light up for this self-diagnosis.
G
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00OL5

1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 3 seconds.

2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. H
3. If 1st trip DTC or DTC is detected, go to EC-507, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

EC-505
 DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Wiring Diagram EBS00OL6

MBWA0268E

EC-506
 DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00OL7

1. INSPECTION START A

1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.

2. Select “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. EC
3. Print out the CONSULT-II screen.
A/T Models with EPS
C

MBIB0296E
F
A/T Models without EPS

MBIB0297E
J
M/T Models with EPS

MBIB0298E

M/T Models without EPS

MBIB0299E

>> Go to LAN-3, "Precautions When Using CONSULT-II" .

EC-507
 DTC P0107, P0108 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
DTC P0107, P0108 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR PFP:22365

Component Description EBS00OL8

The manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor is placed intake man-

ifold corrector. It detects intake manifold pressure and sends the
voltage signal to the ECM, ECM uses the signal to compute intake
air volume value.
The sensor uses a silicon diaphragm which is sensitive to the
change in pressure. As the pressure increase, the voltage rises.

MBIB0278E

On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00OL9

Trouble diagnosis
DTC No. DTC detecting condition Possible cause
name

Manifold absolute ● Harness or connectors

P0107 An excessively low voltage from the sensor is (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
pressure sensor
0107 sent to ECM.
circuit low input ● Manifold absolute pressure sensor
● Harness or connectors
Manifold absolute (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
P0108 An excessively high voltage from the sensor is
pressure sensor
0108 sent to ECM. ● Manifold absolute pressure sensor
circuit high input
● Intake air leaks

FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and MI lights up.
Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
Manifold absolute pressure sensor circuit Engine speed will not rise more than 2,500 rpm due to the fuel cut.

DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00OLA

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Wait at least 5 seconds.
4. If the 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-510, "Diagnostic Proce-
dure" .

SEF058Y

WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 5 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn “ON”.
3. Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)” with ECM.
4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-510, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

EC-508
 DTC P0107, P0108 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Wiring Diagram EBS00OLB

EC

MBWA0304E

EC-509
 DTC P0107, P0108 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition Approximately 1.5V
Manifold absolute pres- ● Idle speed
51 W
sure sensor [Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition Approximately 1.2V
● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.

Diagnostic Procedure EBS00OLC

1. CHECK MAP SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect manifold absolute pressure sensor harness connec-
tor.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.

MBIB0278E

4. Check voltage between MAP sensor terminal 2 and ground.

Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair harness or connectors.

MBIB0602E

2. CHECK MAP SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check harness continuity between MAP sensor terminal 4 and ECM terminal 56
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair harness or connectors.

EC-510
 DTC P0107, P0108 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
3. CHECK MAP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A
1. Check harness continuity between MAP sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal 51.
Refer to Wiring Diagram
EC
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG C
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair harness or connectors.
D
4. CHECK MAP SENSOR
Refer to EC-511, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG E
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace manifold absolute pressure sensor.
F
5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-499, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
G

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00OLD
H
MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. I
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 51(manifold absolute
pressure sensor signal) and ground.
NOTE: J
● To avoid the affection of intake manifold vacuum, Check the
voltage 1 or more minutes past after engine is stopped.
● Because the sensor is absolute pressure sensor, output value K
may differ depends on atmospheric pressure and altitude.
4. Measure the atmospheric pressure.
NOTE: L
As atmospheric pressure describe on synoptic chart is value at SEF006P
sea level, please compensate the actual pressure with the fol-
lowing chart. M
Altitude Compensated pressure
0m 0hPa
200m -24hPa
400m -47hPa
600m -70hPa
800m -92hPa
1,000m -114hPa
1,500m -168hPa
2,000m -218hPa
5. Check the manifold absolute pressure sensor value corresponds to the atmospheric pressure.

EC-511
 DTC P0107, P0108 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]

Atmospheric pressure Voltage

800hPa 3.2 - 3.6v
850hPa 3.4 - 3.8v
900hPa 3.7 - 4.1v
960hPa 3.9 - 4.3v
1,000hPa 4.1 - 4.5v
1,050hPa 4.3 - 4.7v

MBIB0655E

6. Check the voltage between ECM terminal 51 and ground at

idling and confirm the voltage difference between engine is
stopped and at idling is within following chart.
Intake manifold vacuum Voltage difference
-40kPa (-300mmHg) 1.6 - 2.0v
-53.3kPa (-400mmHg) 2.2 - 2.6v
-66.7kPa (-500mm) 2.8 - 3.2v
-80kPa (-600mmHg) 3.4 - 3.8v
SEF487R

Removal and Installation EBS00OLE

MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR

Refer to EM-14, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" .

EC-512
 DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR PFP:22630
A
Component Description EBS00OLF

The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine

coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the EC
ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant
temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to
the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the ther-
mistor decreases as temperature increases. C

SEF594K

E
<Reference data>
Engine coolant
Voltage* V Resistance kΩ F
temperature °C (°F)
−10 (14) 4.4 7.0 - 11.4
20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9 G
50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260
*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 72 H
(Engine coolant temperature sensor) and ground. SEF012P

CAUTION:
I
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00OLG
J
Trouble Diagnosis
DTC No. DTC Detecting Condition Possible Cause
Name
Engine coolant K
P0117 An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
temperature sen-
0117 sent to ECM.
sor circuit low input ● Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
Engine coolant L
P0118 temperature sen- An excessively high voltage from the sensor is ● Engine coolant temperature sensor
0118 sor circuit high sent to ECM.
input
M
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When this malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MI lights up.
Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the time after turning ignition switch “ON”
or “START”. CONSULT-II displays the engine coolant temperature decided by ECM.
Engine coolant temperature decided
Condition
(CONSULT-II display)
Just as ignition switch is turned ON or Start 40°C (104°F)
Engine coolant temper-
ature sensor circuit More than approx. 4 minutes after ignition ON or
80°C (176°F)
Start
40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F)
Except as shown above
(Depends on the time)
When the fail-safe system for engine coolant temperature sensor is activated, the cooling fan operates
while engine is running.

EC-513
 DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00OLH

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Wait at least 5 seconds.
4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-516, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.

SEF058Y

WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 5 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn “ON”.
3. Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)” with ECM.
4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-516, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

EC-514
 DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Wiring Diagram EBS00OLI

EC

MBWA0271E

EC-515
 DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00OLJ

1. CHECK ECT SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor harness
connector.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.

MBIB0279E

4. Check voltage between ECT sensor terminal 1 and ground with

CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors.

PBIB0080E

2. CHECK ECT SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check harness continuity between ECT sensor terminal 2 and engine ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.

3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Harness connectors E50, F1
● Harness for open or short between engine coolant temperature sensor and ECM
● Harness for open or short between engine coolant temperature sensor and TCM

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4. CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR

Refer to EC-517, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor.

EC-516
 DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT A
Refer to EC-499, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END EC

Component Inspection EBS00OLK

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR C

1. Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor
terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure.
D

F
PBIB0081E

<Reference data> G
Engine coolant
Voltage* V Resistance kΩ
temperature °C (°F)
−10 (14) 4.4 7.0 - 11.4 H
20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00
I
90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260
*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal
72 (Engine coolant temperature sensor) and ground. SEF012P J
2. If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
Removal and Installation EBS00OLL

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR K

Refer to CO-22, "THERMOSTAT" .
L

EC-517
 DTC P0132 HO2S1
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
DTC P0132 HO2S1 PFP:22690

Component Description EBS00OLM

The heated oxygen sensor 1 is placed into the exhaust manifold. It

detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas compared to the
outside air. The heated oxygen sensor 1 has a closed-end tube
made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from
approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions. The
heated oxygen sensor 1 signal is sent to the ECM. The ECM adjusts
the injection pulse duration to achieve the ideal air-fuel ratio. The
ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical change from 1V to 0V.

SEF463R

SEF288D

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00OLN

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
HO2S1 (B1) ● Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
LEAN ←→ RICH
HO2S1 MNTR (B1) ● Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm Changes more than 5 times during
10 seconds.

On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00OLO

To judge the malfunction, the diagnosis checks that the heated oxy-
gen sensor 1 output is not inordinately high.

SEF301UA

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
● Harness or connectors
P0132 Heated oxygen sensor 1 An excessively high voltage from the sensor (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
0132 circuit high voltage is sent to ECM.
● Heated oxygen sensor 1

EC-518
 DTC P0132 HO2S1
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00OLP

A
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
EC
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds. C
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
5. Restart engine and let it idle for 2 minutes. D
6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-521, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
E

SEF174Y

WITHOUT CONSULT-II G
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
H
3. Restart engine and let it idle for 2 minutes.
4. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
5. Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)” with ECM. I
6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-521, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

EC-519
 DTC P0132 HO2S1
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Wiring Diagram EBS00OLQ

MBWA0272E

EC-520
 DTC P0132 HO2S1
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: A
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMI- EC
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running] C
0 - Approximately 1.0V
35 BR Heated oxygen sensor 1 ● Warm-up condition
(Periodically change)
● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
[Engine is running] D
Sensors' ground
74 B ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
(Heated oxygen sensor)
● Idle speed
E
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00OLR

1. RETIGHTEN HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1

F
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten heated oxygen sensor 1.
Tightening torque: 40 - 60 N·m (4.1 - 6.2 kg-m, 30 - 44 ft-lb) G

>> GO TO 2. H

MBIB0281E

J
2. CHECK HO2S1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 harness connector.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. K
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 74 and HO2S1
terminal 3.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. L

Continuity should exist.

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. MBIB0280E
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors.

EC-521
 DTC P0132 HO2S1
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
3. CHECK HO2S1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 35 and HO2S1 terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 35 or HO2S1 terminal 2 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should not exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4. CHECK HO2S1 CONNECTOR FOR WATER

1. Turn ignition switch ″OFF″.
2. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 harness connector
3. Check connectors for water
Water should not exist.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1

Refer to EC-522, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 1.

6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-499, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00OLS

HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “MANU TRIG” and adjust “TRIGGER POINT” to 100% in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-
II.
3. Select “HO2S1 (B1)” and “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)”.
4. Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during the follow-
ing steps.
5. Touch “RECORD” on CONSULT-II screen.

MBIB0301E

EC-522
 DTC P0132 HO2S1
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]

6. Check the following. A

● “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode changes
from “RICH” to “LEAN” to “RICH” 5 times in 10 seconds.
5 times (cycles) are counted as shown at right.
EC
● “HO2S1 (B1)” voltage goes above 0.6V at least once.

● “HO2S1 (B1)” voltage goes below 0.3V at least once.

● “HO2S1 (B1)” voltage never exceeds 1.0V. C

SEF217YA
D

G
SEF648Y

CAUTION:
H
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. I

Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. J
2. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 35 (HO2S1 signal) and engine ground.
3. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm con-
stant under no load. K
● The voltage fluctuates between 0 to 0.3V and 0.6 to 1.0V
more than 5 times within 10 seconds.
● The maximum voltage is over 0.6V at least one time. L
● The minimum voltage is below 0.3V at least one time.

● The voltage never exceeds 1.0V.

1 time: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V M

2 times: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V
CAUTION: MBIB0018E

● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped

from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new
one.
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Removal and Installation EBS00OLT

HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1

Refer to EM-20, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" .

EC-523
 DTC P0134 HO2S1
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
DTC P0134 HO2S1 PFP:22690

Component Description EBS00OLU

The heated oxygen sensor 1 is placed into the exhaust manifold. It

detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas compared to the
outside air. The heated oxygen sensor 1 has a closed-end tube
made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from
approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions. The
heated oxygen sensor 1 signal is sent to the ECM. The ECM adjusts
the injection pulse duration to achieve the ideal air-fuel ratio. The
ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical change from 1V to 0V.

SEF463R

SEF288D

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00OLV

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
Maintaining engine speed at 2,000
HO2S1 (B1) ● Engine: After warming up 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
rpm
LEAN ←→ RICH
Maintaining engine speed at 2,000
HO2S1 MNTR (B1) ● Engine: After warming up Changes more than 5 times dur-
rpm
ing 10 seconds.

On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00OLW

Under the condition in which the heated oxygen sensor 1 signal is

not input, the ECM circuits will read a continuous approximately
0.3V. Therefore, for this diagnosis, the time that output voltage is
within 200 to 400 mV range is monitored, and the diagnosis checks
that this time is not inordinately long.

SEF237U

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
● Harness or connectors
P0134 Heated oxygen sensor 1 The voltage from the sensor is constantly (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
0134 circuit no activity detected approx. 0.3V.
● Heated oxygen sensor 1

EC-524
 DTC P0134 HO2S1
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Overall Function Check EBS00OLY

A
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 1 circuit. During this check, a
DTC might not be confirmed.
WITH CONSULT-II EC
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “MANU TRIG” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CON-
SULT-II, and select “H02S1 (B1)”. C
3. Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load.
4. Make sure that the indications do not remain in the range
between 0.2V to 0.4V. D
5. If NG, go to EC-527, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SEF646Y

WITHOUT CONSULT-II F
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 35 (HO2S1 signal) and engine ground.
G
3. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm con-
stant under no load.
● The voltage does not remain in the range of 0.2 - 0.4V.
H
4. If NG, go to EC-527, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

J
MBIB0018E

EC-525
 DTC P0134 HO2S1
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Wiring Diagram EBS00OLZ

MBWA0272E

EC-526
 DTC P0134 HO2S1
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: A
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMI- EC
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running] C
0 - Approximately 1.0V
35 BR Heated oxygen sensor 1 ● Warm-up condition
(Periodically change)
● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
[Engine is running] D
Sensors' ground
74 B ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
(Heated oxygen sensor)
● Idle speed
E
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00OM0

1. INSPECTION START
F
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten body ground screws.
G
>> GO TO 2.

MBIB0290E

J
2. CHECK HO2S1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 harness connector.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. K
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 74 and HO2S1
terminal 3. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
L
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG M
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power MBIB0280E
in harness or connectors.

EC-527
 DTC P0134 HO2S1
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
3. CHECK HO2S1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 35 and HO2S1 terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.

2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 35 or HO2S1 terminal 2 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should not exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1

Refer to EC-528, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace heated oxygen sensor 1.

5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-499, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00OM1

HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “MANU TRIG” and adjust “TRIGGER POINT” to 100% in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-
II.
3. Select “HO2S1 (B1)” and “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)”.
4. Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during the follow-
ing steps.
5. Touch “RECORD” on CONSULT-II screen.

MBIB0301E

6. Check the following.

● “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode changes
from “RICH” to “LEAN” to “RICH” 5 times in 10 seconds.
5 times (cycles) are counted as shown at right.
● “HO2S1 (B1)” voltage goes above 0.6V at least once.

● “HO2S1 (B1)” voltage goes below 0.3V at least once.

● “HO2S1 (B1)” voltage never exceeds 1.0V.

SEF217YA

EC-528
 DTC P0134 HO2S1
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]

EC

SEF648Y

CAUTION: D
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread E
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Without CONSULT-II
F
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 35 (HO2S1 signal) and engine ground.
3. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm con- G
stant under no load.
● The voltage fluctuates between 0 to 0.3V and 0.6 to 1.0V
more than 5 times within 10 seconds.
H
● The maximum voltage is over 0.6V at least one time.

● The minimum voltage is below 0.3V at least one time.

● The voltage never exceeds 1.0V. I

1 time: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V
2 times: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V
CAUTION: MBIB0018E
J
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped
from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new
one.
K
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Removal and Installation EBS00OM2 L
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1
Refer to EM-20, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" .
M

EC-529
 DTC P0138 HO2S2
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
DTC P0138 HO2S2 PFP:226A0

Component Description EBS00OM3

The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold),

monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas.
Even if switching characteristics of the heated oxygen sensor 1 are
shifted, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal
from the heated oxygen sensor 2.
This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates volt-
age from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner condi-
tions.
Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for
engine control operation.
SEF327R

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00OM4

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
HO2S2 (B1) ● Engine: After warming up 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
● Keeping the engine speed
Revving engine from idle to 3,000
between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm rpm quickly.
HO2S2 MNTR (B1) LEAN ←→ RICH
for one minute and at idle for
one minute under no load.

On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00OM5

The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time

between rich and lean than the heated oxygen sensor 1. The oxygen
storage capacity before the three way catalyst (manifold) causes the
longer switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen
sensor 2, ECM monitors whether the voltage is unusually high during
the various driving condition such as fuel-cut.

SEF305UA

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
● Harness or connectors
P0138 Heated oxygen sensor 2 An excessively high voltage from the sensor (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
0138 circuit high voltage is sent to ECM.
● Heated oxygen sensor 2

DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00OM6

CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

EC-530
 DTC P0138 HO2S2
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode A
with CONSULT-II.
2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating tempera-
ture. EC
3. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for at least one minute under no load. C
5. Let engine idle for two minutes.
6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-533, "Diagnostic Procedure"
. SEF189Y
D

WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
E
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least one minute under no
load.
F
4. Let engine idle for two minutes.
5. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
6. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least one minute under no G
load.
7. Let engine idle for two minutes.
8. Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)” with ECM. H
9. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-533, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

EC-531
 DTC P0138 HO2S2
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Wiring Diagram EBS00OM7

MBWA0273E

EC-532
 DTC P0138 HO2S2
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: A
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER- EC
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running] C
● Warm-up condition
● Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly
16 LG Heated oxygen sensor 2 after the following conditions are met. 0 - Approximately 1.0V
D
● Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for one minute and at idle for one
minute under no load.
E
[Engine is running]
Sensors' ground
74 B ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
(Heated oxygen sensor)
● Idle speed F
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00OM8

1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS G

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten body ground screws.
H
>> GO TO 2.
I

MBIB0290E
K
2. CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. L
2. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector.
3. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 74 and HO2S2 M
terminal 3.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. MBIB0282E
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors.

EC-533
 DTC P0138 HO2S2
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
3. CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 16 and HO2S2 terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 16 or HO2S2 terminal 2 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should not exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2

Refer to EC-534, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace heated oxygen sensor 2.

5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-499, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00OM9

HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ″ON″ and select ″DATA MONITOR″ mode
with CONSULT-II.
2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating tempera-
ture.
3. Turn ignition switch ″OFF″ and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for at least one minute under no load.
5. Let engine idle for one minute.

SEF174Y

6. Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select

“HO2S2(B1)” as the monitor item with CONSULT-II.

SEF662Y

EC-534
 DTC P0138 HO2S2
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
7. Check “HO2S2 (B1)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%.
A

EC

MBIB0662E D
“HO2S2 (B1)” should be above 0.68V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%.
“HO2S2 (B1)” should be below 0.60V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%.
CAUTION: E
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread F
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. G
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least one minute under no
load. H
4. Let engine idle for one minute.
5. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 16 (HO2S2 signal) and engine ground.
I
6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load
at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
The voltage should be above 0.68V at least once during this J
procedure.
If the voltage is above 0.68V at step 6, step 7 is not neces-
sary. K
7. Keep vehicle idling for 10 minutes, then check voltage. Or check
the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in “D” posi-
tion (A/T), 3rd gear position (M/T). L
The voltage should be below 0.60V at least once during this MBIB0020E
procedure.
8. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2.
M
CAUTION:
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Removal and Installation EBS00OMA

HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2

Refer to EX-3, "EXHAUST SYSTEM" .

EC-535
 DTC P0221 TP SENSOR
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
DTC P0221 TP SENSOR PFP:16119

Component Description EBS00OMB

Electric Throttle Control Actuator consists of throttle control motor,

throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to
the throttle valve movement.
The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are
a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position
into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addi-
tion, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the
throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM
judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these sig-
nals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the
throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condi-
PBIB0145E
tion.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00OMC

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
● Ignition switch: ON
Accelerator pedal: Fully released More than 0.36V
(Engine stopped)
THRTL SEN1
THRTL SEN2* ● Shift lever:
D (A/T model) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V
1st (M/T model)
*: Throttle position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal.

On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00OMD

This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
● Harness or connector
Throttle position sensor Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM (The TP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is open or
P0221 shorted.)
circuit range/performance compared with the signals from TP sensor 1
0221
problem and TP sensor 2. ● Electric throttle control actuator
(TP sensor 1 and 2)

FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MI lights up.
Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10
degrees.
The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition.
So, the acceleration will be poor.

DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00OME

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.

EC-536
 DTC P0221 TP SENSOR
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. A
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
EC
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-539, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

D
SEF058Y

WITHOUT CONSULT-II E
1. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn “ON”.
3. Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)” with ECM. F
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-539, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

EC-537
 DTC P0221 TP SENSOR
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Wiring Diagram EBS00OMF

MBWA0275E

EC-538
 DTC P0221 TP SENSOR
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: A
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMI- WIRE EC
ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
NAL NO. COLOR
Sensor's power supply
47 L [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 5V
(Throttle position sensor) C
[Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped
● Shift lever position is “D” (A/T model) More than 0.36V D
● Shift lever position is “1st” (M/T model)
● Accelerator pedal fully released
49 Y Throttle position sensor 1 E
[Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped
● Shift lever position is “D” (A/T model) Less than 4.75V
F
● Shift lever position is “1st” (M/T model)
● Accelerator pedal fully depressed
[Engine is running] G
Sensors′ ground
66 B ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
(Throttle position sensor)
● Idle speed
[Ignition switch “ON”] H
● Engine stopped
● Shift lever position is “D” (A/T model) Less than 4.75V
● Shift lever position is “1st” (M/T model) I
● Accelerator pedal fully released
68 R Throttle position sensor 2
[Ignition switch “ON”]
J
● Engine stopped
● Shift lever position is “D” (A/T model) More than 0.36V
● Shift lever position is “1st” (M/T model)
K
● Accelerator pedal fully depressed

Diagnostic Procedure EBS00OMG

1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS L

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.

2. Loosen and retighten body ground screws. M

>> GO TO 2.

MBIB0290E

EC-539
 DTC P0221 TP SENSOR
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”.

MBIB0308E

3. Check voltage between electric throttle control actuator terminal

1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors.

PBIB0082E

3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 66 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 5.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 49 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 4, ECM
terminal 68 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

5. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

Refer to EC-541, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.

EC-540
 DTC P0221 TP SENSOR
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
6. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR A
1. Replace the electric throttle control actuator.
2. Perform EC-435, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
3. Perform EC-435, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . EC

>> INSPECTION END

C
7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-499, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . D

>> INSPECTION END

E
Component Inspection EBS00OMH

THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
F
2. Perform EC-435, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Set selector lever to “D” position (A/T models) or “1st” position (M/T models). G
5. Check voltage between ECM terminals 49 (TP sensor 1 signal),
68 (TP sensor 2 signal) and engine ground under the following
conditions.
H
Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage

49 Fully released More than 0.36V

(Throttle position sensor 1) Fully depressed Less than 4.75V
I

68 Fully released Less than 4.75V

(Throttle position sensor 2) Fully depressed More than 0.36V J
6. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to the next MBIB0022E

step.
7. Perform EC-435, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . K
8. Perform EC-435, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Remove and Installation EBS00OMI
L
ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
Refer to EM-14, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" .
M

EC-541
 DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR PFP:16119

Component Description EBS00OMJ

Electric Throttle Control Actuator consists of throttle control motor,

throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to
the throttle valve movement.
The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are
a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position
into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addi-
tion, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the
throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM
judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these sig-
nals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the
throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condi-
PBIB0145E
tion.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00OMK

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
● Ignition switch: ON
Accelerator pedal: Fully released More than 0.36V
(Engine stopped)
THRTL SEN1
THRTL SEN2* ● Shift lever:
D (A/T model) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V
1st (M/T model)
*: Throttle position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal.

On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00OML

These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P0222 Throttle position sensor 1 An excessively low voltage from the TP sensor 1 ● Harness or connectors
0222 circuit low input is sent to ECM. (The TP sensor 1 circuit is open or
shorted.)
P0223 Throttle position sensor 1 An excessively high voltage from the TP sensor
● Electric throttle control actuator
0223 circuit high input 1 is sent to ECM.
(TP sensor 1)

FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MI lights up.
Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10
degrees.
The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition.
So, the acceleration will be poor.

DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00OMM

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.

EC-542
 DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. A
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
EC
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-545, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

D
SEF058Y

WITHOUT CONSULT-II E
1. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn “ON”.
3. Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)” with ECM. F
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-545, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

EC-543
 DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Wiring Diagram EBS00OMN

MBWA0276E

EC-544
 DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: A
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMI- EC
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
Sensor's power supply C
47 L [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 5V
(Throttle position sensor)
[Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped D
● Shift lever position is “D” (A/T model) More than 0.36V
● Shift lever position is “1st” (M/T model)
● Accelerator pedal fully released E
49 Y Throttle position sensor 1
[Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped
● Shift lever position is “D” (A/T model) Less than 4.75V F
● Shift lever position is “1st” (M/T model)
● Accelerator pedal fully depressed
G
[Engine is running]
Sensors′ ground
66 B ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
(Throttle position sensor)
● Idle speed
H
[Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped
● Shift lever position is “D” (A/T model) Less than 4.75V I
● Shift lever position is “1st” (M/T model)
● Accelerator pedal fully released
68 R Throttle position sensor 2
[Ignition switch “ON”] J
● Engine stopped
● Shift lever position is “D” (A/T model) More than 0.36V
● Shift lever position is “1st” (M/T model) K
● Accelerator pedal fully depressed

Diagnostic Procedure EBS00OMO L

1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. M
2. Loosen and retighten body ground screws.

>> GO TO 2.

MBIB0290E

EC-545
 DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”.

MBIB0308E

3. Check voltage between electric throttle control actuator terminal

1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors.

PBIB0082E

3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 66 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 5.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 49 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 4.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

5. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

Refer to EC-547, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.

EC-546
 DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
6. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR A
1. Replace the electric throttle control actuator.
2. Perform EC-435, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
3. Perform EC-435, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . EC

>> INSPECTION END

C
7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-499, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . D

>> INSPECTION END

E
Component Inspection EBS00OMP

THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
F
2. Perform EC-435, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Set selector lever to “D” position (A/T models) or “1st” position (M/T models). G
5. Check voltage between ECM terminals 49 (TP sensor 1 signal),
68 (TP sensor 2 signal) and engine ground under the following
conditions.
H
Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage

49 Fully released More than 0.36V

(Throttle position sensor 1) Fully depressed Less than 4.75V
I

68 Fully released Less than 4.75V

(Throttle position sensor 2) Fully depressed More than 0.36V J
6. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to the next MBIB0022E

step.
7. Perform EC-435, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . K
8. Perform EC-435, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Remove and Installation EBS00OMQ
L
ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
Refer to EM-14, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" .
M

EC-547
 DTC P0226 APP SENSOR
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
DTC P0226 APP SENSOR PFP:18002

Component Description EBS00OMR

The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end

of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelera-
tor position and sends a signal to the ECM.
Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors
are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal
position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM.
In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of
the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The
ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from
these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these
signals.
PBIB0146E
Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM
receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine oper-
ation such as fuel cut.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00OMS

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION

● Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.6 - 0.9V

ACCEL SEN1
(Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed 4.0 - 4.8V

● Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.6 - 0.9V

ACCEL SEN2*
(Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed 3.9 - 4.8V

● Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released ON

CLSD THL POS
(Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed OFF
*: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage.

On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00OMT

This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
● Harness or connector
Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM (The APP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is
P0226 Accelerator pedal position sensor open or shorted.)
compared with the signals from APP sensor
0226 circuit range/performance problem
1 and APP sensor 2. ● Accelerator pedal position sensor 1
and 2

FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MI lights up.
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10
degrees.
The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition.
So, the acceleration will be poor.

DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00OMU

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.

EC-548
 DTC P0226 APP SENSOR
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. A
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
EC
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-553, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

D
SEF058Y

WITHOUT CONSULT-II E
1. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn “ON”.
3. Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)” with ECM. F
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-553, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

EC-549
 DTC P0226 APP SENSOR
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Wiring Diagram EBS00OMV

LHD MODELS

MBWA0277E

EC-550
 DTC P0226 APP SENSOR
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. A
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
EC
TERMI-
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
C
[Engine is running]
Sensor′s ground
82 B ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
(APP sensor 1)
● Idle speed
D
[Ignition switch “ON”]
Sensor′s ground
83 B ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
(APP sensor 2)
● Idle speed E
Sensors′ power supply
90 OR [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 5V
(APP sensor 1)
Sensors′ power supply F
91 BR [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 5V
(APP sensor 2)
[Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped 0.3 - 0.6V G
Accelerator pedal position ● Accelerator pedal fully released
98 GY
sensor 2 [Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped 1.95 - 2.4V H
● Accelerator pedal fully depressed
[Ignition switch “ON”]
I
● Engine stopped 0.6 - 0.9V
Accelerator pedal position ● Accelerator pedal fully released
106 W
sensor 1 [Ignition switch “ON”]
J
● Engine stopped 3.9 - 4.7V
● Accelerator pedal fully depressed

EC-551
 DTC P0226 APP SENSOR
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
RHD MODELS

MBWA0278E

EC-552
 DTC P0226 APP SENSOR
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: A
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMI- EC
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running] C
Sensor′s ground
82 B ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
(APP sensor 1)
● Idle speed
[Ignition switch “ON”] D
Sensor′s ground
83 B ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
(APP sensor 2)
● Idle speed
E
Sensors′ power supply
90 OR [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 5V
(APP sensor 1)
Sensors′ power supply
91 BR [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 5V
(APP sensor 2) F
[Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped 0.3 - 0.6V
● Accelerator pedal fully released
G
Accelerator pedal position
98 GY
sensor 2 [Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped 1.95 - 2.4V
H
● Accelerator pedal fully depressed
[Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped 0.6 - 0.9V I
Accelerator pedal position ● Accelerator pedal fully released
106 W
sensor 1 [Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped 3.9 - 4.7V J
● Accelerator pedal fully depressed

Diagnostic Procedure EBS00OMW

K
1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
L
2. Loosen and retighten body ground screws.

>> GO TO 2. M

MBIB0290E

EC-553
 DTC P0226 APP SENSOR
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
2. CHECK APP SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness
connector.
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”.

MBIB0285E

3. Check voltage between APP sensor terminals 4, 5 and ground

with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.

MBIB0303E

3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Harness connectors M1, E101 (RHD models)
● Harness connectors M71, M201 (RHD models)
● Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4. CHECK APP SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 82 and APP sensor terminal 2, ECM terminal 83 and
APP sensor terminal 1.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.

EC-554
 DTC P0226 APP SENSOR
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A
Check the following.
● Harness connectors M1, E101 (RHD models)
● Harness connectors M71, M201 (RHD models) EC
● Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor
● Harness for open or short between TCM and accelerator pedal position sensor
C

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

6. CHECK APP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT D

1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 106 and APP sensor terminal 3, ECM terminal 98 and
APP sensor terminal 6. E
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
F
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. G
NG >> GO TO 7.

7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART H

Check the following.
● Harness connectors M1, E101 (RHD models)
● Harness connectors M71, M201 (RHD models) I
● Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor

J
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

8. CHECK APP SENSOR

K
Refer to EC-556, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10. L
NG >> GO TO 9.

9. REPLACE APP SENSOR M

1. Replace the accelerator pedal position sensor.
2. Perform EC-435, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
3. Perform EC-435, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
4. Perform EC-435, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .

>> INSPECTION END

10. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-499, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

EC-555
 DTC P0226 APP SENSOR
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Component Inspection EBS00OMX

ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR

1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminals 106 (APP sensor 1 sig-
nal), 98 (APP sensor 2 signal) and engine ground under the fol-
lowing conditions.
Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage
106 Fully released 0.6 - 0.9V
(Accelerator pedal position
sensor 1) Fully depressed 3.9 - 4.7V

98 Fully released 0.3 - 0.6V

(Accelerator pedal position
sensor 2) Fully depressed 1.95 - 2.4V
MBIB0023E

4. If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly and go to the next

step.
5. Perform EC-435, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
6. Perform EC-435, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
7. Perform EC-435, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Remove and Installation EBS00OMY

ACCELERATOR PEDAL
Refer to ACC-2, "ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM" .

EC-556
 DTC P0227, P0228 APP SENSOR
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
DTC P0227, P0228 APP SENSOR PFP:18002
A
Component Description EBS00OMZ

The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end

of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelera- EC
tor position and sends a signal to the ECM.
Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors
are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal
position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. C
In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of
the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The
ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from D
these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these
signals.
PBIB0146E
Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM
E
receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine oper-
ation such as fuel cut.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00ON0
F
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
G
● Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.6 - 0.9V
ACCEL SEN1
(Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed 4.0 - 4.8V

● Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.6 - 0.9V H

ACCEL SEN2*
(Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed 3.9 - 4.8V

● Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released ON

CLSD THL POS
(Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed OFF I
*: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage.

On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00ON1 J

These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause K
P0227 Accelerator pedal position An excessively low voltage from the APP sensor 1 ● Harness or connectors
0227 sensor 1 circuit low input is sent to ECM. (The APP sensor 1 circuit is open or
shorted.) L
P0228 Accelerator pedal position An excessively high voltage from the APP sensor 1
● Accelerator pedal position sensor
0228 sensor 1 circuit high input is sent to ECM.
(Accelerator pedal position sensor 1)

M
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MI lights up.
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10
degrees.
The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition.
So, the acceleration will be poor.

DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00ON2

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.

EC-557
 DTC P0227, P0228 APP SENSOR
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-562, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SEF058Y

WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn “ON”.
3. Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)” with ECM.
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-562, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

EC-558
 DTC P0227, P0228 APP SENSOR
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Wiring Diagram EBS00ON3

LHD MODELS A

EC

MBWA0279E

EC-559
 DTC P0227, P0228 APP SENSOR
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMI-
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
Sensor′s ground
82 B ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
(APP sensor 1)
● Idle speed
[Ignition switch “ON”]
Sensor′s ground
83 B ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
(APP sensor 2)
● Idle speed
Sensors′ power supply
90 OR [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 5V
(APP sensor 1)
Sensors′ power supply
91 BR [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 5V
(APP sensor 2)
[Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped 0.3 - 0.6V
Accelerator pedal position ● Accelerator pedal fully released
98 GY
sensor 2 [Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped 1.95 - 2.4V
● Accelerator pedal fully depressed
[Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped 0.6 - 0.9V
Accelerator pedal position ● Accelerator pedal fully released
106 W
sensor 1 [Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped 3.9 - 4.7V
● Accelerator pedal fully depressed

EC-560
 DTC P0227, P0228 APP SENSOR
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
RHD MODELS
A

EC

MBWA0280E

EC-561
 DTC P0227, P0228 APP SENSOR
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMI-
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
Sensor′s ground
82 B ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
(APP sensor 1)
● Idle speed
[Ignition switch “ON”]
Sensor′s ground
83 B ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
(APP sensor 2)
● Idle speed
Sensors′ power supply
90 OR [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 5V
(APP sensor 1)
Sensors′ power supply
91 BR [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 5V
(APP sensor 2)
[Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped 0.3 - 0.6V
Accelerator pedal position ● Accelerator pedal fully released
98 GY
sensor 2 [Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped 1.95 - 2.4V
● Accelerator pedal fully depressed
[Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped 0.6 - 0.9V
Accelerator pedal position ● Accelerator pedal fully released
106 W
sensor 1 [Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped 3.9 - 4.7V
● Accelerator pedal fully depressed

Diagnostic Procedure EBS00ON4

1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten body ground screws.

>> GO TO 2.

MBIB0290E

EC-562
 DTC P0227, P0228 APP SENSOR
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
2. CHECK APP SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A
1. Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness
connector.
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”. EC

D
MBIB0285E

3. Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 4 and ground with E

CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
G

MBIB0304E H

3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following. I
● Harness connectors M1, E101 (RHD models)
● Harness connectors M71, M201 (RHD models)
J
● Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. K
4. CHECK APP SENSOR 1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. L
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 82 and APP sensor terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. M

Continuity should exist.

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.

5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Harness connectors M1, E101 (RHD models)
● Harness connectors M71, M201 (RHD models)
● Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

EC-563
 DTC P0227, P0228 APP SENSOR
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
6. CHECK APP SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 106 and APP sensor terminal 3.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.

7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Harness connectors M1, E101 (RHD models)
● Harness connectors M71, M201 (RHD models)
● Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

8. CHECK APP SENSOR

Refer to EC-564, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 9.

9. REPLACE APP SENSOR

1. Replace the accelerator pedal position sensor.
2. Perform EC-435, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
3. Perform EC-435, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
4. Perform EC-435, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .

>> INSPECTION END

10. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-499, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00ON5

ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR

1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”.

EC-564
 DTC P0227, P0228 APP SENSOR
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
3. Check voltage between ECM terminals 106 (APP sensor 1 sig-
nal), 98 (APP sensor 2 signal) and engine ground under the fol- A
lowing conditions.
Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage
EC
106 Fully released 0.6 - 0.9V
(Accelerator pedal position
sensor 1) Fully depressed 3.9 - 4.7V

98 Fully released 0.3 - 0.6V C

(Accelerator pedal position
sensor 2) Fully depressed 1.95 - 2.4V
MBIB0023E

4. If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly and go to the next D

step.
5. Perform EC-435, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
6. Perform EC-435, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . E
7. Perform EC-435, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Remove and Installation EBS00ON6
F
ACCELERATOR PEDAL
Refer to ACC-2, "ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM" .
G

EC-565
 DTC P0327, P0328 KS
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
DTC P0327, P0328 KS PFP:22060

Component Description EBS00OS6

The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine

knocking using a piezoelectric element. A knocking vibration from
the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This pressure is
converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM.

MBIB0306E

On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00OS7

The MI will not light up for these self-diagnoses.

DTC No. Trouble Diagnosis Name DTC Detected Condition Possible Cause
P0327 Knock sensor circuit low An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
● Harness or connectors
0327 input sent to ECM.
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
P0328 Knock sensor circuit high An excessively high voltage from the sensor is
● Knock sensor
0328 input sent to ECM.

DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00OS8

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
2. Start engine and run it for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
3. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-568, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.

SEF058Y

WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and run it for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn “ON”.
3. Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)” with ECM.
4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-568, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

EC-566
 DTC P0327, P0328 KS
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Wiring Diagram EBS00OS9

EC

MBWA0281E

EC-567
 DTC P0327, P0328 KS
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMI-
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
15 W Knock sensor Approximately 2.5V
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
Sensors' ground
54 — ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
(Knock sensor)
● Idle speed

Diagnostic Procedure EBS00OSA

1. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-I

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check resistance between ECM terminal 15 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
NOTE:
It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more than 10 MΩ.
Resistance: Approximately 530 - 590kΩ [at 20°C (68°F)]
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-II

1. Disconnect knock sensor harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 15 and knock
sensor terminal 1.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
MBIB0306E
in harness or connectors.

3. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR

Refer to EC-569, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace knock sensor.

EC-568
 DTC P0327, P0328 KS
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
4. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 54 and engine ground.
Continuity should exist
EC
2. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. C
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.

5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT D

Refer to EC-499, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

E
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection EBS00OSB

KNOCK SENSOR F
Check resistance between knock sensor terminal 1 and ground.
NOTE:
It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more G
than 10 MΩ.
Resistance: Approximately 530 - 590kΩ [at 20°C (68°F)]
H
CAUTION:
Do not use any knock sensors that have been dropped or phys-
ically damaged. Use only new ones.
I
SEF546P

Removal and Installation EBS00OSC

J
KNOCK SENSOR
Refer to EM-69, "CYLINDER BLOCK" .
K

EC-569
 DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) PFP:23731

Component Description EBS00ONA

The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the cylinder

block rear housing facing the gear teeth (cogs) of the signal plate at
the end of the crankshaft. It detects the fluctuation of the engine rev-
olution.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC.
When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth
cause the gap with the sensor change.
The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to
change.
Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor
changes.
PBIB0562E
The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the fluctuation of
the engine revolution.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00ONB

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
● Tachometer: Connect
Almost the same speed as the
ENG SPEED ● Run engine and compare CONSULT-II value with the tachometer indica- tachometer indication.
tion.

On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00ONC

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
● The crankshaft position sensor (POS) signal is not
detected by the ECM during the first few seconds of
● Harness or connectors
engine cranking.
(The sensor circuit is open or
P0335 Crankshaft position ● The proper pulse signal from the crankshaft position shorted.)
0335 sensor (POS) circuit sensor (POS) is not sent to ECM while the engine is
● Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
running.
● Signal plate
● The crankshaft position sensor (POS) signal is not in
the normal pattern during engine running.

DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00OND

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V with igni-
tion switch ON”.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT-II.
2. Crank engine for at least 2 seconds and run it for at least 5 sec-
onds at idle speed.
3. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-573, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.

SEF058Y

EC-570
 DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1. Crank engine for at least 2 seconds and run it for at least 5 seconds at idle speed. A
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn “ON”.
3. Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)” with ECM.
EC
4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-573, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

EC-571
 DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Wiring Diagram EBS00ONE

MBWA0282E

EC-572
 DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: A
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER- EC
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.

Approximately 3.0V C

[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition D
● Idle speed

Crankshaft position PBIB0527E E

13 Y
sensor (POS)
Approximately 3.0V

F
[Engine is running]
● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm
G
PBIB0528E

Sensors' ground [Engine is running]

H
30 B (Crankshaft position ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
sensor) ● Idle speed

: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) I

Diagnostic Procedure EBS00ONF

1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS J

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.

2. Loosen and retighten body ground screws.
K

>> GO TO 2.
L

MBIB0290E

EC-573
 DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
2. CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR (POS) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect crankshaft position (CKP) sensor (POS) harness
connector.
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”.

MBIB0283E

3. Check voltage between CKP sensor (POS) terminal 3 and

ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.

SEF479Y

3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Harness connectors F1, E50
● Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (POS) and ECM
● Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (POS) and IPDM E/R

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4. CHECK CKP SENSOR (POS) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between CKP sensor (POS) terminal 1 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

EC-574
 DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
5. CHECK CKP SENSOR (POS) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 13 and CKP sensor (POS) terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
EC
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG C
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
D
6. CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)
Refer to EC-575, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG E
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS).
F
7. CHECK GEAR TOOTH
Visually check for chipping signal plate gear tooth.
G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Replace the signal plate. H
8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-499, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . I

>> INSPECTION END

J
Component Inspection EBS00ONG

CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)

1. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor.
K
2. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (POS) harness connector.
3. Remove the sensor.
4. Visually check the sensor for chipping. L

PBIB0563E

EC-575
 DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
5. Check resistance as shown in the figure.
Terminal No. (Polarity) Resistance Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
3 (+) - 1 (-)
3 (+) - 2 (-) Except 0 or ∞
2 (+) - 1 (-)
6. If NG, replace crankshaft position sensor (POS).

MBIB0024E

Removal and Installation EBS00ONH

CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)

Refer to EM-69, "CYLINDER BLOCK" .

EC-576
 DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) PFP:23731
A
Component Description EBS00ONI

The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the retraction with

intake valve camshaft to identify a particular cylinder. The camshaft EC
position sensor (PHASE) senses the piston position.
When the crankshaft position sensor (POS) system becomes inoper-
ative, the camshaft position sensor (PHASE) provides various con-
trols of engine parts instead, utilizing timing of cylinder identification C
signals.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC.
When engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause D
the gap with the sensor to change.
The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to
PBIB0562E
change.
E
Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes.
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00ONJ

F
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
● Harness or connectors
● The cylinder No. signal is not sent to ECM
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
for the first few seconds during engine G
cranking. ● Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
P0340 Camshaft position sensor ● Camshaft (Intake)
● The cylinder No. signal is not set to ECM
0340 (PHASE) circuit
during engine running. ● Starter motor (Refer to SC-27 .) H
● The cylinder No. signal is not in the normal ● Starting system circuit (Refer to SC-27 .)
pattern during engine running.
● Dead (Weak) battery
I
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00ONK

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at J
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V with igni-
tion switch “ON”. K
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
L
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Crank engine for at least 2 seconds and run it for at least 5 sec-
onds at idle speed.
M
4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-580, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to next step.
5. Maintain engine speed at more than 800 rpm for at least 5 sec-
onds.
6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-580, "Diagnostic Procedure"
. SEF013Y

WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1. Crank engine for at least 2 seconds and run it for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn “ON”.
3. Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)” with ECM.
4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-580, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to next step.
5. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
6. Start engine and maintain engine speed at more than 800 rpm for at least 5 seconds.

EC-577
 DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
7. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn “ON”.
8. Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)” with ECM.
9. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-580, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

EC-578
 DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Wiring Diagram EBS00ONL

EC

MBWA0283E

EC-579
 DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMI-
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.

1.0 - 4.0V

[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
● Idle speed

PBIB0525E
Camshaft position
14 R
sensor (PHASE)
1.0 - 4.0V

[Engine is running]
● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.

PBIB0526E

Sensors' ground [Engine is running]

29 B (Camshaft position ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
sensor) ● Idle speed

: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)

Diagnostic Procedure EBS00ONM

1. CHECK STARTING SYSTEM

Turn ignition switch to “START” position.
Does the engine turn over?
Does the starter motor operate?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> Check starting system. (Refer to SC-27, "STARTING SYSTEM" .)

2. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten body ground screws.

>> GO TO 3.

MBIB0290E

EC-580
 DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
3. CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR (PHASE) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A
1. Disconnect camshaft position (CMP) sensor (PHASE) harness
connector.
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”. EC

D
MBIB0279E

3. Check voltage between CMP sensor (PHASE) terminal 3 and E

ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
F
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. G
NG >> GO TO 4.

SEF479Y
H

4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

I
Check the following.
● Harness connectors F1, E50
● Harness for open or short between camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and ECM J
● Harness for open or short between camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and IPDM E/R

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. K

5. CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
L
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between CMP sensor (PHASE) terminal 1 and ground. M
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

EC-581
 DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
6. CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 14 and CMP sensor (PHASE) terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground or short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

7. CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)

Refer to EC-582, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Replace camshaft position sensor (PHASE).

8. CHECK CAMSHAFT (INTAKE)

Check the following.
● Accumulation of debris to the signal plate of camshaft rear end
● Chipping signal plate of camshaft rear end
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Remove debris and clean the signal plate of camshaft
rear end or replace camshaft.

PBIB0565E

9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-499, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00ONN

CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)

1. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor.
2. Disconnect camshaft position sensor (PHASE) harness connector.
3. Remove the sensor.
4. Visually check the sensor for chipping.

PBIB0563E

EC-582
 DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
5. Check resistance as shown in the figure.
A
Terminal No. (Polarity) Resistance Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
3 (+) - 1 (-)
3 (+) - 2 (-) Except 0 or ∞ EC
2 (+) - 1 (-)

MBIB0024E

D
Removal and Installation EBS00ONO

CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)

Refer to EM-34, "CAMSHAFT" .
E

EC-583
 DTC P0605 ECM
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
DTC P0605 ECM PFP:23710

Component Description EBS00ONP

The ECM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal

input and output and for power supply. The ECM controls the engine.

PBIB1164E

On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00ONQ

This self-diagnosis has one or two trip detection logic.

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
A) ECM calculation function is malfunctioning.
P0605
Engine control module B) ECM EEP-ROM system is malfunctioning. ● ECM
0605
C) ECM self shut-off function is malfunctioning.

FAIL-SAFE MODE
ECM enters fail-safe mode when malfunction A is detected.
Detected items Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode
ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5
Malfunction A
degrees) by the return spring.

DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00ONR

Perform “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A” first. If the DTC cannot be confirmed, perform “PRO-
CEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B”. If there is no malfunction on “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B”,
perform “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C”.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. If DTC is detected, go to EC-586, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SEF058Y

Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn “ON”.
3. Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)” with ECM.

EC-584
 DTC P0605 ECM
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-586, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
A
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 1 second.
EC
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds, and then
turn “ON”.
C
4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-586, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
D

E
SEF058Y

Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 1 second. F
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn “ON”.
3. Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)” with ECM.
4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-586, "Diagnostic Procedure" . G

PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C

With CONSULT-II H
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 1 second.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds, and then I
turn “ON”.
4. Repeat step 3 for 32 times.
5. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-586, "Diagnostic Procedure" J
.

SEF058Y

L
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 1 second.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn “ON”.
M
3. Repeat step 2 procedure, 32 times.
4. Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)” with ECM.
5. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-586, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

EC-585
 DTC P0605 ECM
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00ONS

1. INSPECTION START
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select “SELF DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “ERASE”.
4. Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.
See EC-584 .
5. Is the 1st trip DTC P0605 displayed again?
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Erase the “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)” memory. Refer to EC-442, "HOW TO ERASE
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .
3. Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.
See EC-584 .
4. Is the 1st trip DTC P0605 displayed again?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> INSPECTION END

2. REPLACE ECM
1. Replace ECM.
2. Perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition key IDs. Refer to EC-443,
"NATS (Nissan Anti-theft System)" .
3. Perform EC-435, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
4. Perform EC-435, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
5. Perform EC-435, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .

>> INSPECTION END

EC-586
 DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY PFP:23710
A
Component Description EBS00ONT

Battery voltage is supplied to the ECM even when the ignition switch
is turned OFF for the ECM memory function of the DTC memory, the EC
air-fuel ratio feedback compensation value memory, the idle air vol-
ume learning value memory, etc.
C

PBIB1164E

E
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00ONU

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
F
● Harness or connectors
P1065 ECM back-up RAM system does not function [ECM power supply (back-up) circuit is
ECM power supply circuit open or shorted.]
1065 properly.
● ECM G

DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00ONV

NOTE: H
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II I
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 1 second.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second. J
4. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds, and then
turn “ON”.
K
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 four times.
6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-589, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
L

SEF058Y
M
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 1 second.
2. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn “ON”.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 four times.
5. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn “ON”.
6. Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)” with ECM.
7. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-589, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

EC-587
 DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Wiring Diagram EBS00ONW

MBWA0285E

EC-588
 DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: A
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER- EC
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
Power supply for ECM BATTERY VOLTAGE C
121 BR [Ignition switch “OFF”]
(Buck-up) (11 - 14V)

Diagnostic Procedure EBS00ONX

D
1. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. E
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 121 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
F
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. G
NG >> GO TO 2.

H
MBIB0026E

2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART I

Check the following.

● 20A fuse J
● IPDM E/R harness connector E14
● Harness for open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R
K
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

3. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT L

Refer to EC-499, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

OK or NG M
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

EC-589
 DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
4. PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select “SELF DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “ERASE”.
4. Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.
See EC-587 .
5. Is the 1st trip DTC P1065 displayed again?
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Erase the “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)” memory. Refer to EC-442, "HOW TO ERASE
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .
3. Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.
See EC-587 .
4. Is the 1st trip DTC P1065 displayed again?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 5.
No >> INSPECTION END

5. REPLACE ECM
1. Replace ECM.
2. Perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition key IDs. Refer to EC-443,
"NATS (Nissan Anti-theft System)" .
3. Perform EC-435, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
4. Perform EC-435, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
5. Perform EC-435, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .

>> INSPECTION END

EC-590
 DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR PFP:16119
A
Component Description EBS00ONY

Electric Throttle Control Actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc.
The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve. EC
The throttle position sensor detects the throttle valve position, and the opening and closing speed of the throt-
tle valve and feeds the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle
valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening
angle properly in response to driving condition. C

On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00ONZ

D
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
Electric throttle control actuator does not function
A)
properly due to the return spring malfunction.
E
Throttle valve opening angle in fail-safe mode is
P1121 Electric throttle control B)
not in specified range. ● Electric throttle control actuator
1121 actuator
ECM detect the throttle valve is stuck open.
C) This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection
F
logic.

FAIL-SAFE MODE G
When the malfunction A or B is detected in the two consecutive trips, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the
MIL lights up.
When the malfunction C is detected even in the 1st trip, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. H

Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode

The ECM controls the electric throttle actuator by regulating the throttle opening around the idle position.
Malfunction A I
The engine speed will not rise more than 2,000 rpm.
Malfunction B ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to 20 degrees or less.
While the vehicle is driving, it slows down gradually by fuel cut. After the vehicle stops, the engine stalls. J
Malfunction C
The engine can restart in “N” or “P” position, and engine speed will not exceed 1,000 rpm or more.

DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00OO0

K
NOTE:
● Perform “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B” first. If the 1st trip DTC cannot be con-
firmed, perform “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C”.
● If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and L
wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B
M
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition witch “ON” and wait at least 1 second.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Shift selector lever to “D” position (A/T), “1st” position (M/T) and
wait at least 2 seconds.
4. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds, and then
turn “ON”.
5. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-592, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.

SEF058Y

Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 1 second.
2. Shift selector lever to “D” position (A/T), “1st” position (M/T) and wait at least 2 seconds.

EC-591
 DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn “ON”.
4. Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)” with ECM.
5. If DTC is detected, go to EC-592, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 1 second.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Shift selector lever to “D” position (A/T), “1st” position (M/T) and
wait at least 2 seconds.
4. Shift selector lever to “N” or “P” position (A/T) or “Neutral” posi-
tion (M/T).
5. Start engine and let it idle for 3 seconds.
6. If DTC is detected, go to EC-592, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SEF058Y

Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 1 second.
2. Shift selector lever to “D” position (A/T), “1st” position (M/T) and wait at least 2 seconds.
3. Shift selector lever to “N” or “P” position.
4. Start engine and let it idle for the 3 seconds.
5. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn “ON”.
6. Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)” with ECM.
7. If DTC is detected, go to EC-592, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00OO1

1. CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY

1. Remove the intake air duct.
2. Check if a foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve
and the housing.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle
control actuator inside.

MBIB0307E

2. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR

1. Replace the electric throttle control actuator.
2. Perform EC-435, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
3. Perform EC-435, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .

>> INSPECTION END

EC-592
 DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION PFP:16119
A
Description EBS00OO2

NOTE:
If DTC P1122 is displayed with DTC P1121 or 1126, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1121 or EC
P1126. Refer to EC-591 or EC-599 .
Electric Throttle Control Actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc.
The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve.
The current opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor and it provides feed- C
back to the ECM to control the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in
response to driving condition.
D
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00OO3

This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
E

● Harness or connectors
P1122 Electric throttle control Electric throttle control function does not (Throttle control motor circuit is open or
1122 performance problem operate properly. shorted.) F
● Electric throttle control actuator

FAIL-SAFE MODE G
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MI lights up.
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
H
ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return
spring.

DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00OO4 I

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. J
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 2 seconds.
K
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds.
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-595, "Diagnostic Procedure" . L

SEF058Y

WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 2 seconds.
2. Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn “ON”.
4. Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)” with ECM.
5. If DTC is detected, go to EC-595, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

EC-593
 DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Wiring Diagram EBS00OO5

MBWA0286E

EC-594
 DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: A
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER- EC
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
Throttle control motor relay BATTERY VOLTAGE C
3 LG [Ignition switch “ON”]
power supply (11 - 14V)

0 - 14V
[Ignition switch “ON”] D
● Engine stopped
Throttle control motor
4 L ● Shift lever position is “D” (A/T model)
(Close)
● Shift lever position is “1st” (M/T model) E
● Accelerator pedal is releasing
PBIB0534E

F
0 - 14V
[Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped
Throttle control motor G
5 P ● Shift lever position is “D” (A/T model)
(Open)
● Shift lever position is “1st” (M/T model)
● Accelerator pedal is depressing
H
PBIB0533E

BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Ignition switch “OFF”]
104 G Throttle control motor relay (11 - 14V)
I
[Ignition switch “ON”] 0 - 1.0V

: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
J
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00OO6

1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. K
2. Loosen and retighten body ground screws.
L
>> GO TO 2.

MBIB0290E

EC-595
 DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
2. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY SIGNAL CIRCUIT-I
Check voltage between ECM terminal 3 and ground under the fol-
lowing conditions with CONSULT-II or tester.
Ignition switch Voltage
OFF Approximately 0V
Battery voltage
ON
(11 - 14V)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 3. MBIB0028E

3. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-II

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E14.
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 3 and IPDM E/R terminal 28.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.

4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Harness connectors E50, F1
● IPDM E/R harness connector E14
● Harness for open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

5. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I

1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 104 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 6.

PBIB1171E

EC-596
 DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
6. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II A
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E17.
3. Check continuity between ECM terminal 104 and IPDM E/R terminal 70. EC
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
C
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. D
NG >> GO TO 7.

7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART E

Check the following.
● IPDM E/R harness connector E17
F
● Harness for open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. G
8. CHECK FUSE
1. Disconnect 20A fuse. H
2. Check 20A fuse for blown.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. I
NG >> Replace 20A fuse.

9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT J

Refer to EC-499, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

OK or NG K
OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-18, "IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MOD-
ULE ENGINE ROOM)" .
NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
L
10. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. M
2. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
3. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
4. Check harness continuity between the following terminals.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Electric throttle control
ECM terminal Continuity
actuator terminal
5 Should not exist
3
4 Should exist
5 Should exist MBIB0308E
6
4 Should not exist

5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> Repair or replace.

EC-597
 DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
11. CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY
1. Remove the intake air duct.
2. Check if foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve and
the housing.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle
control actuator inside.

MBIB0307E

12. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR

Refer to EC-598, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> GO TO 14.

13. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-499, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

14. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR

1. Replace the electric throttle control actuator.
2. Perform EC-435, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
3. Perform EC-435, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00OO7

THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR

1. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
2. Check resistance between terminals 3 and 6.
Resistance: Approximately 1 - 15 Ω [at 25 °C (77°F)]
3. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to next
step.
4. Perform EC-435, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
5. Perform EC-435, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .

PBIB0095E

Remove and Installation EBS00OO8

ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR

Refer to EM-14, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" .

EC-598
 DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY PFP:16119
A
Component Description EBS00OO9

Power supply for the Throttle Control motor is provided to the ECM via throttle control motor relay. The throttle
control motor relay is ON/OFF controlled by the ECM. When the ignition switch is turned ON, the ECM sends EC
an ON signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is provided to the ECM. When the ignition
switch is turned OFF, the ECM sends an OFF signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is not
provided to the ECM.
C
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00OOA

Specification data are reference values.

D
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
THRTL RELAY ● Ignition switch: ON ON

On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00OOB

E

These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause F
● Harness or connectors
P1124 Throttle control motor ECM detects the throttle control motor relay (Throttle control motor relay circuit is shorted.)
1124 relay circuit short is stuck ON.
● Throttle control motor relay G
● Harness or connectors
P1126 Throttle control motor ECM detects a voltage of power source for (Throttle control motor relay circuit is open.)
1126 relay circuit open throttle control motor is excessively low.
● Throttle control motor relay H

FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MI lights up. I

Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode

ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return J
spring.

DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00OOC

K
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
L
PROCEDURE FOR DTC P1124
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle. M
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 1 second.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. If DTC is detected, go to EC-602, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SEF058Y

EC-599
 DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 1 second.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn “ON”.
3. If DTC is detected, go to EC-602, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
PROCEDURE FOR DTC P1126
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 2 seconds.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds.
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-602, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SEF058Y

Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 2 second.
2. Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn “ON”.
4. Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)” with ECM.
5. If DTC is detected, go to EC-602, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

EC-600
 DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Wiring Diagram EBS00OOD

EC

MBWA0287E

EC-601
 DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
Throttle control motor relay BATTERY VOLTAGE
3 LG [Ignition switch “ON”]
power supply (11 - 14V)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Ignition switch “OFF”]
104 G Throttle control motor relay (11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch “ON”] 0 - 1.0V

Diagnostic Procedure EBS00OOE

1. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 104 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2.

PBIB1171E

2. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-II

1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E17.
3. Check continuity between ECM terminal 104 and IPDM E/R terminal 70.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.

3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● IPDM E/R harness connector E17
● Harness for open or shot between ECM and IPDM E/R

>> Repair open circuit of short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4. CHECK FUSE
1. Disconnect 20A fuse.
2. Check 20A fuse for blown.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Replace 20A fuse.

EC-602
 DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
5. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY SIGNAL CIRCUIT-I A
1. Reconnect all disconnected connectors.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 3 and ground under the
following conditions with CONSULT-II or tester. EC

Ignition switch Voltage

OFF Approximately 0V C
Battery voltage
ON
(11 - 14V)

OK or NG D
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 6. MBIB0028E
E
6. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
F
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E14.
4. Check continuity between ECM terminal 3 and IPDM E/R terminal 28. G
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
H
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. I
NG >> GO TO 7.

7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART J

Check the following.
● Harness connectors E50, F1
● IPDM E/R harness connector E14 K
● Harness for open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R

L
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

M
Refer to EC-499, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-18, "IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MOD-
ULE ENGINE ROOM)" .
NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

EC-603
 DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR PFP:16119

Component Description EBS00OOF

The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve.
The current opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor and it provides feed-
back to the ECM to control the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in
response to driving condition.
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00OOG

This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
● Harness or connectors
P1128 Throttle control motor ECM detects short in both circuits between (Throttle control motor circuit is shorted.)
1128 circuit short ECM and throttle control motor. ● Electric throttle control actuator
(Throttle control motor)

FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MI lights up.
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return
spring.

DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00OOH

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 2 seconds.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds.
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-606, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SEF058Y

WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 2 second.
2. Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn “ON”.
4. Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)” with ECM.
5. If DTC is detected, go to EC-606, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

EC-604
 DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Wiring Diagram EBS00OOI

EC

MBWA0288E

EC-605
 DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.

0 - 14V
[Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped
Throttle control motor
4 L ● Shift lever position is “D” (A/T model)
(Close)
● Shift lever position is “1st” (M/T model)
● Accelerator pedal is releasing
PBIB0534E

0 - 14V
[Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped
Throttle control motor
5 P ● Shift lever position is “D” (A/T model)
(Open)
● Shift lever position is “1st” (M/T model)
● Accelerator pedal is depressing
PBIB0533E

: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)

Diagnostic Procedure EBS00OOJ

1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten body ground screws.

>> GO TO 2.

MBIB0290E

EC-606
 DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
2. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT A
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
3. Disconnect ECM harness connector. EC
4. Check harness continuity between the following terminals.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
C
Electric throttle control
ECM terminal Continuity
actuator terminal
4 Should exist D
3
5 Should not exist
4 Should not exist MBIB0308E
6
5 Should exist E

5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.

OK or NG
F
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace.

3. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR G

Refer to EC-607, "Component Inspection" .

OK or NG H
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 5.
I
4. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-499, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
K
5. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
1. Replace the electric throttle control actuator. L
2. Perform EC-435, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
3. Perform EC-435, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
M
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection EBS00OOK

THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR

1. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
2. Check resistance between terminals 3 and 6.
Resistance: Approximately 1 - 15 Ω [at 25 °C (77°F)]
3. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to next
step.
4. Perform EC-435, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
5. Perform EC-435, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .

PBIB0095E

EC-607
 DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Remove and Installation EBS00OOL

ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR

Refer to EM-14, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" .

EC-608
 DTC P1171 INTAKE ERROR
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
DTC P1171 INTAKE ERROR PFP:22365
A
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00OSS

NOTE:
If DTC 1171 is displayed with DTC P0108, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0108. EC
Refer toEC-510
ECM computes two intake air volume values.
1: Computed from manifold absolute pressure signal and intake air temperature signal.
2: Computed from engine revolution signal and throttle position signal. C

In normal condition, value 1 is used for engine control.

If intake air leak occurred between throttle valve and intake air port, manifold absolute pressure sensor signal D
might increase, and then ECM increases amount of fuel injected. In this case, ECM uses value 2 for engine
control instead of value1.
ECM monitors the difference between value 1 and value 2. If the difference is extremely large, ECM judges E
intake air leak occurs and light up the MI

This diagnosis has one trip detection logic. F

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
● Harness or connectors
(The manifold absolute pressure sensor G
circuit is open or shorted.)
P1171 An excessively high voltage from manifold
Intake error ● Manifold absolute pressure
1171 absolute pressure sensor is sent to ECM.
● Intake air leaks H
● Vacuum hoses

FAIL-SAFE MODE I
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and MI lights up.
Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
J
When accelerator pedal is depressed, engine speed will not rise more than 2,500 rpm
Intake air system problem
due to fuel cut.

DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00OST K

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. L

WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
M
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and wait at least 5 seconds.
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-611, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SEF174Y

WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 5 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn “ON”.
3. Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)” with ECM.
4. If trip DTC is detected, go to EC-611, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

EC-609
 DTC P1171 INTAKE ERROR
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Wiring Diagram EBS00OSU

MBWA0304E

EC-610
 DTC P1171 INTAKE ERROR
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: A
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER- EC
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running] C
● Warm-up condition Approximately 1.5V
Manifold absolute pres- ● Idle speed
51 W
sure sensor [Engine is running] D
● Warm-up condition Approximately 1.2V
● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
E
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00OSV

1. CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAK

F
Listen for an intake air leak after the air cleaner element.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. G
NG >> Repair or replace.

2. CHECK VACUUM HOSE H

1. Check intake manifold vacuum hoses for clogging or disconnection. Refer to EC-423, "Vacuum Hose
Drawing" .
OK or NG I
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace.
J
3. CHECK MAP SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
K
2. Disconnect manifold absolute pressure sensor harness connec-
tor.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
L

MBIB0276E

4. Check voltage between manifold absolute pressure sensor ter-

minal 2 and ground.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair harness or connectors.

MBIB0602E

EC-611
 DTC P1171 INTAKE ERROR
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
4. CHECK MAP SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check harness continuity between manifold absolute pressure sensor terminal 4 and ECM terminal 56.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair harness or connectors.

5. CHECK MAP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between manifold absolute pressure sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal 51.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Repair harness or connectors.

6. CHECK MAP SENSOR

Refer to EC-511, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace sensor.

7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-499, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

EC-612
 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE PFP:00000
A
System Description EBS00OOM

NOTE:
If DTC P1217 is displayed with DTC U1000, U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, EC
U1001. Refer to EC-505, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
COOLING FAN CONTROL
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator C
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed*1
D
Battery Battery voltage*1
Vehicle speed signal Vehicle speed*2 Cooling fan IPDM E/R
control (Cooling fan relay)
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature E
Air conditioner switch*3 Air conditioner “ON” signal*2

Refrigerant pressure sensor*3 Refrigerant pressure F

*1: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
*2: These signals are sent to ECM through CAN communication line.
*3: Models with air conditioner.
G
The ECM controls the cooling fan corresponding to the vehicle speed, engine coolant temperature, refrigerant
pressure, and air conditioner ON signal. The control system has 3-step control [HIGH/LOW/OFF] (models with
A/C) or 2 step control [ON/OFF] (models without A/T). H
The ECM controls cooling fan relays through CAN communication line.
OPERATION
(Models with A/C) I

MBIB0650E

EC-613
 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
(Models without A/C)

MBIB0656E

EC-614
 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00OON

A
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
Air conditioner switch: OFF OFF EC
● Engine: After warming up, idle
AIR COND SIG Air conditioner switch: ON
the engine ON
(Compressor operates.)
Engine coolant temperature is 94°C C
OFF
(201°F) or less
(Models with A/C)
Engine coolant temperature is
● Engine: After warming up, idle
COOLING FAN between 95°C (203°F) and 104°C LOW* D
the engine
(210°F)
● Air conditioner switch: OFF
Engine coolant temperature is 105°C
HI*
(212°F) or more
E
*:Models without air conditioner, cooling fan operates only ON and OFF operation, but CONSULT-II display will change OFF, LOW and
HI depends on engine coolant temperature.

On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00OOO F

If the cooling fan or another component in the cooling system malfunctions, engine coolant temperature will
rise. When the engine coolant temperature reaches an abnormally high temperature condition, a malfunction
is indicated. G
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
H
● Harness or connectors
(The cooling fan circuit is open or
shorted.)
● Cooling fan does not operate properly (Over- I
● Cooling fan
heat).
● Radiator hose
P1217 Engine over tempera- ● Cooling fan system does not operate prop- ● Radiator
1217 ture (Overheat) erly (Overheat). J
● Radiator cap
● Engine coolant was not added to the system
using the proper filling method. ● Water pump
● Thermostat K
For more information, refer to EC-627,
"Main 12 Causes of Overheating" .

CAUTION: L
When a malfunction is indicated, be sure to replace the coolant. Refer to CO-7, "Changing Engine
coolant" . Also, replace the engine oil. Refer to LU-5, "Changing Engine Oil" .
1. Fill radiator with coolant up to specified level with a filling speed of 2 liters per minute. Be sure to M
use coolant with the proper mixture ratio. Refer to MA-13, "Engine Coolant Mixture Ratio" .
2. After refilling coolant, run engine to ensure that no water-flow noise is emitted.
Overall Function Check EBS00OOP

Use this procedure to check the overall function of the cooling fan. During this check, a DTC might not be con-
firmed.
WARNING:
Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pres-
sure fluid escaping from the radiator.
Wrap a thick cloth around cap. Carefully remove the cap by turning it a quarter turn to allow built-up
pressure to escape. Then turn the cap all the way off.

EC-615
 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank and radiator.
Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level.
If the coolant level in the reservoir tank and/or radiator is below
the proper range, skip the following steps and go to EC-620,
"Diagnostic Procedure" .
2. Confirm whether customer filled the coolant or not. If customer
filled the coolant, skip the following steps and go to EC-620,
"Diagnostic Procedure" .
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.

SEF621W

4. Perform “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CON-

SULT-II.
5. If the results are NG, go to EC-620, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SEF784Z

WITHOUT CONSULT-II
(Models with air conditioner)
1. Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank and radiator.
Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level.
If the coolant level in the reservoir tank and/or radiator is below
the proper range, skip the following steps and go to EC-620,
"Diagnostic Procedure" .
2. Confirm whether customer filled the coolant or not. If customer
filled the coolant, skip the following steps and go to EC-620,
"Diagnostic Procedure" .
3. Start engine.
Be careful not to overheat engine.
4. Set temperature control lever to full cold position. SEF621W

5. Turn air conditioner switch “ON”.

6. Turn blower fan switch “ON”.
7. Run engine at idle for a few minutes with air conditioner operating.
Be careful not to overheat engine.
8. Make sure that cooling fans operates at low speed.
If NG, go to EC-620, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If OK, go to the following step.
9. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
10. Turn air conditioner switch and blower fan switch “OFF”.
11. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connec-
tor.
12. Connect 150Ω resistor to engine coolant temperature sensor
harness connector.
MBIB0651E

EC-616
 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
13. Restart engine and make sure that cooling fan operates at
higher speed than low speed. A
Be careful not to overheat engine.
14. If NG, go to EC-620, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
EC

SEF023R

D
(Models without air conditioner)
1. Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank and radiator.
Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level.
If the coolant level in the reservoir tank and/or radiator is below E
the proper range, skip the following steps and go to EC-620,
"Diagnostic Procedure" .
2. Confirm whether customer filled the coolant or not. If customer F
filled the coolant, skip the following steps and go to EC-620,
"Diagnostic Procedure" .
3. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connec- G
tor.
4. Connect 150Ω resistor to engine coolant temperature sensor SEF621W

harness connector. H
5. Start engine and make that cooling fan operates. Be careful not
to overheat engine.
6. If NG, go to EC-620, "Diagnostic Procedure" . I

K
SEF023R

EC-617
 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Wiring Diagram EBS00OOQ

WITH AIR CONDITIONER

MBWA0289E

EC-618
 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
WITHOUT AIR CONDITIONER
A

EC

MBWA0290E

EC-619
 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00OOR

PROCEDURE FOR MODELS WITH AIR CONDITIONER

1. INSPECTION START
Do you have CONSULT-II?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> GO TO 4.

2. CHECK COOLING FAN LOW SPEED OPERATION

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Perform “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CON-
SULT-II and touch “LOW” on the CONSULT-II screen.
3. Make sure that cooling fan operates at low speed.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Check cooling fan low speed control circuit. (Go to EC-
625, "PROCEDURE A" .)

SEF784Z

3. CHECK COOLING FAN HIGH SPEED OPERATION

With CONSULT-II
1. Touch “HIGH”on the CONSULT-II screen.
2. Make sure that cooling fan operates at higher speed than low
speed.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Check cooling fan high speed control circuit. (Go to EC-
625, "PROCEDURE A" .)

SEF785Z

EC-620
 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
4. CHECK COOLING FAN LOW SPEED OPERATION A
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and let it idle.
EC
2. Turn air conditioner switch “ON”.
3. Turn blower fan switch “ON”.
4. Make sure that cooling fan operates at low speed.
C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Check cooling fan low speed control circuit. (Go to EC- D
625, "PROCEDURE A" .)

MBIB0651E
F
5. CHECK COOLING FAN HIGH SPEED OPERATION
Without CONSULT-II G
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Turn air conditioner switch and blower fan switch “OFF”.
H
3. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector.
4. Connect 150Ω resistor to engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector.
5. Restart engine and make sure that cooling fan operates at
I
higher speed than low speed.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. J
NG >> Check cooling fan high speed control circuit. (Go to EC-
625, "PROCEDURE A" .)

SEF023R
L
6. CHECK COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAK
Apply pressure to the cooling system with a tester, and check if the pressure drops. M
Testing pressure: 157 kPa (1.57 bar, 1.6 kg/cm2 , 23psi)
CAUTION:
Higher than the specified pressure may cause radiator damage.
Pressure should not drop.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.

SLC754A

EC-621
 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following for leak.
● Hose
● Radiator
● Water pump (Refer toCO-20, "WATER PUMP" .)

>> Repair or replace.

8. CHECK RADIATOR CAP

Apply pressure to cap with a tester and check radiator cap relief
pressure.
Radiator cap relief pressure:
59 - 98 kPa (0.59 - 0.98 bar, 0.6 - 1.0 kg/cm2 , 9 - 14 psi)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace radiator cap.

SLC755A

9. CHECK THERMOSTAT
1. Remove thermostat.
2. Check valve seating condition at normal room temperatures.
It should seat tightly.
3. Check valve opening temperature and valve lift.
Valve opening temperature:
80.5 - 83.5 °C (177 - 182 °F)
Valve lift:
More than 8 mm/95 °C (0.31 in/203 °F)
4. Check if valve is closed at 5°C (9°F) below valve opening tem-
perature. For details, refer to CO-22, "THERMOSTAT" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10. SLC343

NG >> Replace thermostat.

10. CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR

Refer to EC-517, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor.

11. CHECK MAIN 12 CAUSES

If the cause cannot be isolated, go to EC-627, "Main 12 Causes of Overheating" .

>> INSPECTION END

EC-622
 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
PROCEDURE FOR MODELS WITHOUT AIR CONDITIONER
A
1. INSPECTION START
Do you have CONSULT-II?
Yes or No EC
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> GO TO 3.
C
2. CHECK COOLING FAN OPERATION
With CONSULT-II D
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Perform “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CON-
SULT-II and touch “ON” on the CONSULT-II screen. E
3. Make sure that cooling fan operates.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO4. F
NG >> Check cooling fan low speed control circuit. (Go to EC-
625, "PROCEDURE A" .)
G

SEF784Z

H
3. CHECK COOLING FAN OPERATION
Without CONSULT-II I
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector.
3. Connect 150Ω resistor to engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector. J
4. Restart engine and make sure that cooling fan operates.
OK or NG
K
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Check cooling fan high speed control circuit-1. (Go to
EC-625, "PROCEDURE A" .)
L

M
SEF023R

EC-623
 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
4. CHECK COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAK
Apply pressure to the cooling system with a tester, and check if the pressure drops.
Testing pressure: 157 kPa (1.57 bar, 1.6 kg/cm2 , 23psi)
CAUTION:
Higher than the specified pressure may cause radiator damage.
Pressure should not drop.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.

SLC754A

5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following for leak.
● Hose
● Radiator
● Water pump (Refer toCO-20, "WATER PUMP" .)

>> Repair or replace.

6. CHECK RADIATOR CAP

Apply pressure to cap with a tester and check radiator cap relief
pressure.
Radiator cap relief pressure:
59 - 98 kPa (0.59 - 0.98 bar, 0.6 - 1.0 kg/cm2 , 9 - 14 psi)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace radiator cap.

SLC755A

7. CHECK THERMOSTAT
1. Remove thermostat.
2. Check valve seating condition at normal room temperatures.
It should seat tightly.
3. Check valve opening temperature and valve lift.
Valve opening temperature:
80.5 - 83.5 °C (177 - 182 °F)
Valve lift:
More than 8 mm/95 °C (0.31 in/203 °F)
4. Check if valve is closed at 5°C (9°F) below valve opening tem-
perature. For details, refer to CO-22, "THERMOSTAT" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. SLC343

NG >> Replace thermostat.

EC-624
 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
8. CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR A
Refer to EC-517, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. EC
NG >> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor.

9. CHECK MAIN 12 CAUSES C

If the cause cannot be isolated, go to EC-627, "Main 12 Causes of Overheating" .
D
>> INSPECTION END
PROCEDURE A
E
1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E12. F
3. Check voltage between IPDM E/R terminal 14 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
G
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. H
NG >> GO TO 2.

I
MBIB0607E

2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART J

Check the following.

● 40A fusible links K
● Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and battery

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. L

EC-625
 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
3. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTORS CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect cooling fan motor harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between cooling fan motor terminal 1
and IPDM E/R terminal 12, cooling fan motor terminal 2 and
ground.
Refer to wiring diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
4. For models with air conditioner, check harness continuity
between IPDM E/R terminal 10, and cooling fan motor terminal
1. MBIB0648E

Refer to wiring diagram.

Continuity should exist.
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.

4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Harness for open or short between cooling fan motor and IPDM E/R
● Harness for open or short between cooling fan motor and ground
● Harness for open or short between resistor and IPDM E/R (models with A/T)
● Harness for open or short between resistor and cooling fan motor (models with A/T)
● Resistor E5 (models with A/C)

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

5. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTORS

Refer to EC-627, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace cooling fan motors.

6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Perform EC-499, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-18, "IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MOD-
ULE ENGINE ROOM)" .
NG >> Repair or replace harness or connector.

EC-626
 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Main 12 Causes of Overheating EBS00OOS

A
Engine Step Inspection item Equipment Standard Reference page
OFF 1 ● Blocked radiator ● Visual No blocking —
● Blocked condenser EC
● Blocked radiator grille
● Blocked bumper
2 ● Coolant mixture ● Coolant tester 50 - 50% coolant mixture See MA-13, "Engine C
Coolant Mixture Ratio" .
3 ● Coolant level ● Visual Coolant up to MAX level See CO-7, "LEVEL
in reservoir tank and radi- CHECK" . D
ator filler neck
4 ● Radiator cap ● Pressure tester 59 - 98 kPa See CO-14, "Checking
(0.59 - 0.98 bar, 0.6 - 1.0 Radiator Cap" . E
kg/cm2 , 9 - 14 psi) (Limit)

ON*2 5 ● Coolant leaks ● Visual No leaks See CO-7, "LEAK

CHECK" .
F
ON*2 6 ● Thermostat ● Touch the upper and Both hoses should be hot See CO-22, "THERMO-
lower radiator hoses STAT" , and CO-10,
"RADIATOR" .
G
ON*1 7 ● Cooling fan ● CONSULT-II Operating See trouble diagnosis for
DTC P1217 (EC-620 ).
OFF 8 ● Combustion gas leak ● Color checker chemical Negative —
tester 4 Gas analyzer
H

ON*3 9 ● Coolant temperature ● Visual Gauge less than 3/4 —

gauge when driving
I
● Coolant overflow to ● Visual No overflow during driving See CO-7, "Changing
reservoir tank and idling Engine coolant" .

OFF*4 10 ● Coolant return from ● Visual Should be initial level in See CO-7, "LEVEL
reservoir tank to radia- reservoir tank CHECK" . J
tor
OFF 11 ● Cylinder head ● Straight gauge feeler 0.1 mm (0.004 in) Maxi- See EM-57, "CYLINDER
gauge mum distortion (warping) HEAD" . K
12 ● Cylinder block and pis- ● Visual No scuffing on cylinder See EM-69, "CYLINDER
tons walls or piston BLOCK" .
*1: Turn the ignition switch ON.
L
*2: Engine running at 3,000 rpm for 10 minutes.
*3: Drive at 90 km/h (55 MPH) for 30 minutes and then let idle for 10 minutes.
*4: After 60 minutes of cool down time. M
For more information, refer to CO-4, "OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS" .

Component Inspection EBS00OOT

COOLING FAN MOTOR

1. Disconnect cooling fan motor harness connectors.
2. Supply cooling fan motor terminals with battery voltage and
check operation.

Terminals
(+) (-)
Cooling fan motor 1 2

MBIB0607E

EC-627
 DTC P1223, P1224 TP SENSOR
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
DTC P1223, P1224 TP SENSOR PFP:16119

Component Description EBS00OSG

Electric Throttle Control Actuator consists of throttle control motor,

throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to
the throttle valve movement.
The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are
a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position
into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addi-
tion, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the
throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM
judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these sig-
nals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the
throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condi-
PBIB0145E
tion.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00OSH

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
● Ignition switch: ON
Accelerator pedal: Fully released More than 0.36V
(Engine stopped)
THRTL SEN1
THRTL SEN2* ● Shift lever:
D (A/T model) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V
1st (M/T model)
*: Throttle position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal.

On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00OSI

These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P1223 Throttle position sensor 2 An excessively low voltage from the TP sensor 2 ● Harness or connectors
1223 circuit low input is sent to ECM. (The TP sensor 2 circuit is open or
shorted.)
P1224 Throttle position sensor 2 An excessively high voltage from the TP sensor 2
● Electric throttle control actuator
1224 circuit high input is sent to ECM.
(TP sensor 2)

FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MI lights up.
Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10
degrees.
The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition.
So, the acceleration will be poor.

DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00OSJ

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.

EC-628
 DTC P1223, P1224 TP SENSOR
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. A
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
EC
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-631, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

D
SEF058Y

WITHOUT CONSULT-II E
1. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn “ON”.
3. Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)” with ECM. F
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-631, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

EC-629
 DTC P1223, P1224 TP SENSOR
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Wiring Diagram EBS00OSK

MBWA0291E

EC-630
 DTC P1223, P1224 TP SENSOR
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: A
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMI- WIRE EC
ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
NAL NO. COLOR
Sensors' power supply
47 L [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 5V
(Throttle position sensor) C
[Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped
● Shift lever position is “D” (A/T model) More than 0.36V D
● Shift lever position is “1st” (M/T model)
● Accelerator pedal fully released
49 Y Throttle position sensor 1 E
[Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped
● Shift lever position is “D” (A/T model) Less than 4.75V
F
● Shift lever position is “1st” (M/T model)
● Accelerator pedal fully depressed
[Engine is running] G
Sensors' ground
66 B ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
(Throttle position sensor)
● Idle speed
[Ignition switch “ON”] H
● Engine stopped
● Shift lever position is “D” (A/T model) Less than 4.75V
● Shift lever position is “1st” (M/T model) I
● Accelerator pedal fully released
68 R Throttle position sensor 2
[Ignition switch “ON”]
J
● Engine stopped
● Shift lever position is “D” (A/T model) More than 0.36V
● Shift lever position is “1st” (M/T model)
K
● Accelerator pedal fully depressed

Diagnostic Procedure EBS00OSL

1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS L

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.

2. Loosen and retighten body ground screws. M

>> GO TO 2.

MBIB0290E

EC-631
 DTC P1223, P1224 TP SENSOR
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”.

MBIB0308E

3. Check voltage between electric throttle control actuator terminal

1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors.

PBIB0082E

3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 66 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 5.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 68 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

5. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

Refer to EC-633, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.

EC-632
 DTC P1223, P1224 TP SENSOR
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
6. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR A
1. Replace the electric throttle control actuator.
2. Perform EC-435, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
3. Perform EC-435, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . EC

>> INSPECTION END

C
7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-499, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . D

>> INSPECTION END

E
Component Inspection EBS00OSM

THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
F
2. Perform EC-435, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Set selector lever to “D” position (A/T models) or “1st” position (M/T models). G
5. Check voltage between ECM terminals 49 (TP sensor 1 signal),
68 (TP sensor 2 signal) and engine ground under the following
conditions.
H
Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage

49 Fully released More than 0.36V

(Throttle position sensor 1) Fully depressed Less than 4.75V
I

68 Fully released Less than 4.75V

(Throttle position sensor 2) Fully depressed More than 0.36V J
6. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to the next MBIB0022E

step.
7. Perform EC-435, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . K
8. Perform EC-435, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Remove and Installation EBS00OSN
L
ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
Refer to EM-14, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" .
M

EC-633
 DTC P1225 TP SENSOR
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
DTC P1225 TP SENSOR PFP:16119

Component Description EBS00OOU

Electric Throttle Control Actuator consists of throttle control motor,

throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to
the throttle valve movement.
The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are
a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position
into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addi-
tion, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the
throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM
judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these sig-
nals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the
throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condi-
PBIB0145E
tion.
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00OOV

The MI will not light up for this self-diagnosis.

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
Closed throttle position
P1225 Closed throttle position learning value is excessively ● Electric throttle control actuator
learning performance
1225 low. (TP sensor 1 and 2)
problem

DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00OOW

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
5. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-635, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.

SEF058Y

WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn “ON”.
3. Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)” with ECM.
4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-635, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

EC-634
 DTC P1225 TP SENSOR
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00OOX

1. CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY A

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.

2. Remove the intake air duct. EC
3. Check if foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve and
the housing.
OK or NG C
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle
control actuator inside. D

E
MBIB0307E

2. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR F

1. Replace the electric throttle control actuator.

2. Perform EC-435, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . G
3. Perform EC-435, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .

>> INSPECTION END H

Remove and Installation EBS00OOY

ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR

I
Refer to EM-14, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" .

EC-635
 DTC P1226 TP SENSOR
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
DTC P1226 TP SENSOR PFP:16119

Component Description EBS00OOZ

Electric Throttle Control Actuator consists of throttle control motor,

throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to
the throttle valve movement.
The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are
a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position
into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addi-
tion, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the
throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM
judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these sig-
nals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the
throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condi-
PBIB0145E
tion.
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00OP0

The MI will not light up for this self-diagnosis.

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
Closed throttle position
P1226 Closed throttle position learning is not performed ● Electric throttle control actuator
learning performance
1226 successfully, repeatedly. (TP sensor 1 and 2)
problem

DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00OP1

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4, 32 times.
6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-637, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.

SEF058Y

WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn “ON”.
3. Repeat step 2, 32 times.
4. Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)” with ECM.
5. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-637, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

EC-636
 DTC P1226 TP SENSOR
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00OP2

1. CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY A

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.

2. Remove the intake air duct. EC
3. Check if foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve and
the housing.
OK or NG C
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle
control actuator inside. D

E
MBIB0307E

2. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR F

1. Replace the electric throttle control actuator.

2. Perform EC-435, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . G
3. Perform EC-435, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .

>> INSPECTION END H

Remove and Installation EBS00OP3

ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR

I
Refer to EM-14, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" .

EC-637
 DTC P1227, P1228 APP SENSOR
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
DTC P1227, P1228 APP SENSOR PFP:18002

Component Description EBS00OP4

The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end

of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelera-
tor position and sends a signal to the ECM.
Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors
are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal
position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM.
In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of
the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The
ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from
these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these
signals.
PBIB0146E
Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM
receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine oper-
ation such as fuel cut.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00OP5

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION

● Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.6 - 0.9V

ACCEL SEN1
(Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed 4.0 - 4.8V

● Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.6 - 0.9V

ACCEL SEN2*
(Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed 3.9 - 4.8V

● Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released ON

CLSD THL POS
(Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed OFF
*: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differ from ECM terminal voltage signal.

On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00OP6

These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P1227 Accelerator pedal position An excessively low voltage from the APP sensor 2 ● Harness or connectors
1227 sensor 2 circuit low input is sent to ECM. (The APP sensor 2 circuit is open or
shorted.)
P1228 Accelerator pedal position An excessively high voltage from the APP sensor 2
● Accelerator pedal position sensor
1228 sensor 2 circuit high input is sent to ECM.
(Accelerator pedal position sensor 2)

FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MI lights up.
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10
degrees.
The ECM regulates the opening speed of throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition.
So, the acceleration will be poor.

DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00OP7

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.

EC-638
 DTC P1227, P1228 APP SENSOR
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. A
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
EC
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-643, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

D
SEF058Y

WITHOUT CONSULT-II E
1. Start engine and let it idle for 1 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn “ON”.
3. Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)” with ECM. F
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-643, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

EC-639
 DTC P1227, P1228 APP SENSOR
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Wiring Diagram EBS00OP8

LHD MODELS

MBWA0292E

EC-640
 DTC P1227, P1228 APP SENSOR
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: A
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMI- EC
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running] C
Sensor′s ground
82 B ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
(APP sensor 1)
● Idle speed
[Ignition switch “ON”] D
Sensor′s ground
83 B ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
(APP sensor 2)
● Idle speed
E
Sensors′ power supply
90 OR [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 5V
(APP sensor 1)
Sensors′ power supply
91 BR [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 5V
(APP sensor 2) F
[Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped 0.3 - 0.6V
● Accelerator pedal fully released
G
Accelerator pedal position
98 GY
sensor 2 [Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped 1.95 - 2.4V
H
● Accelerator pedal fully depressed
[Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped 0.6 - 0.9V I
Accelerator pedal position ● Accelerator pedal fully released
106 W
sensor 1 [Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped 3.9 - 4.7V J
● Accelerator pedal fully depressed

EC-641
 DTC P1227, P1228 APP SENSOR
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
RHD MODELS

MBWA0293E

EC-642
 DTC P1227, P1228 APP SENSOR
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: A
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMI- EC
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running] C
Sensor′s ground
82 B ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
(APP sensor 1)
● Idle speed
[Ignition switch “ON”] D
Sensor′s ground
83 B ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
(APP sensor 2)
● Idle speed
E
Sensors′ power supply
90 OR [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 5V
(APP sensor 1)
Sensors′ power supply
91 BR [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 5V
(APP sensor 2) F
[Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped 0.3 - 0.6V
● Accelerator pedal fully released
G
Accelerator pedal position
98 GY
sensor 2 [Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped 1.95 - 2.4V
H
● Accelerator pedal fully depressed
[Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped 0.6 - 0.9V I
Accelerator pedal position ● Accelerator pedal fully released
106 W
sensor 1 [Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped 3.9 - 4.7V J
● Accelerator pedal fully depressed

Diagnostic Procedure EBS00OP9

K
1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
L
2. Loosen and retighten body ground screws.

>> GO TO 2. M

MBIB0290E

EC-643
 DTC P1227, P1228 APP SENSOR
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
2. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness
connector.
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”.

MBIB0285E

3. Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 5 and ground with

CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.

MBIB0309E

3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Harness connectors M71, M201 (RHD models)
● Harness connectors M1, E101 (RHD models)
● Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 83 and APP sensor terminal 1.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.

5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Harness connectors M71, M201 (RHD models)
● Harness connectors M1, E101 (RHD models)
● Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

EC-644
 DTC P1227, P1228 APP SENSOR
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
6. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 98 and APP sensor terminal 6.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
EC
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG C
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.
D
7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
● Harness connectors M71, M201 (RHD models) E
● Harness connectors M1, E101 (RHD models)
● Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor
F

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

8. CHECK APP SENSOR G

Refer to EC-645, "Component Inspection" .

OK or NG H
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 9.
I
9. REPLACE APP SENSOR
1. Replace the accelerator pedal position sensor.
J
2. Perform EC-435, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
3. Perform EC-435, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
4. Perform EC-435, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . K

>> INSPECTION END

L
10. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-499, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
M
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection EBS00OPA

ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR

1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”.

EC-645
 DTC P1227, P1228 APP SENSOR
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
3. Check voltage between ECM terminals 106 (APP sensor 1 sig-
nal), 98 (APP sensor 2 signal) and engine ground under the fol-
lowing conditions.
Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage
106 Fully released 0.6 - 0.9V
(Accelerator pedal position
sensor 1) Fully depressed 3.9 - 4.7V

98 Fully released 0.3 - 0.6V

(Accelerator pedal position
sensor 2) Fully depressed 1.95 - 2.4V
MBIB0023E

4. If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly and go to the next

step.
5. Perform EC-435, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
6. Perform EC-435, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
7. Perform EC-435, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Remove and Installation EBS00OPB

ACCELERATOR PEDAL
Refer to ACC-2, "ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM" .

EC-646
 DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY PFP:16119
A
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00OPC

This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.

EC
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
● Harness or connectors
(The TP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is shorted.)
P1229 Sensor power supply circuit ECM detects a voltage of power source C
● Electric throttle control actuator
1229 short for sensor is excessively low or high.
(TP sensor 1 and 2)
● ECM pin terminal
D
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MI lights up.
E
Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode
ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return
spring. F
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00OPD

NOTE: G
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle. H

WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. I
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-649, "Diagnostic Procedure" . J

L
SEF058Y

WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and let it idle for 1 seconds. M
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn “ON”.
3. Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)” with ECM.
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-649, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

EC-647
 DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Wiring Diagram EBS00OPE

MBWA0463E

EC-648
 DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: A
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER- EC
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
Sensor's power supply C
47 L [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 5V
(Throttle position sensor)

Diagnostic Procedure EBS00OPF

D
1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten body ground screws. E

>> GO TO 2.
F

H
MBIB0290E

2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

I
1. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
J

L
MBIB0308E

3. Check voltage between electric throttle control actuator terminal

1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. M

Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.

PBIB0082E

EC-649
 DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
3. CHECK SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITS FOR SHORT
Check the following.
● Harness for short to power and short to ground between ECM terminal 47 and electric throttle control
actuator terminal 1.
● ECM pin terminal.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

Refer to EC-541, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.

5. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR

1. Replace electric throttle control actuator.
2. Perform EC-435, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
3. Perform EC-435, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .

>> INSPECTION END

6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-499, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

EC-650
 DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH PFP:25320
A
Description EBS00OPG

Brake switch signal is applied to the ECM through the stop lamp
switch when the brake pedal is depressed. This signal is used EC
mainly to decrease the engine speed when the vehicle is driving.

MBIB0286E

E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00OPH

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION F
Brake pedal: Fully released OFF
BRAKE SW ● Ignition switch: ON
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON
G
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00OPI

The MI will not light up for this self-diagnosis.

H
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause

A brake switch signal is not sent to ECM for ● Harness or connectors

P1805 (Stop lamp switch circuit is open or shorted.)
Brake switch an extremely long time while the vehicle is I
1805
driving. ● Stop lamp switch

FAIL-SAFE MODE EBS00OPJ

J
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode.
Engine operation condition in fail-fail safe mode
K
ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to a small range.Therefore,acceleration will be
poor.
Vehicle condition Driving condition
L
When engine is idling Normal
When accelerating Poor acceleration

DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00OPK

M
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Fully depress the brake pedal for at least 5 seconds.
3. Erase the DTC with CONSULT-II.
4. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
5. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-654, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.

SEF058Y

EC-651
 DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Fully depress the brake pedal at least 5 seconds.
3. Erase the “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)” memory. Refer to EC-442 .
4. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn “ON”.
5. Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)” with ECM.
6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-654, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

EC-652
 DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Wiring Diagram EBS00OPL

EC

MBWA0295E

EC-653
 DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
Approximately 0V
● Brake pedal fully released
101 W Stop lamp switch
[Engine is running] BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Brake pedal depressed (11 - 14V)

Diagnostic Procedure EBS00OPM

1. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check the stop lamp when depressing and releasing the brake pedal.
Brake pedal Stop lamp
Fully released Not illuminated
Depressed Illuminated
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.

MBIB0286E

2. Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 1 and ground

with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.

PBIB0117E

EC-654
 DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A
Check the following.
● 10A fuse
● Fuse block (J/B) connector M16 EC
● Harness connectors M1, E101 (LHD models)
● Harness connectors M71, M201 (RHD models)
C
● Harness for open and short between stop lamp switch and fuse

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. D
4. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. E
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 101 and stop lamp switch terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. F

Continuity should exist.

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5. H

5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following. I
● Harness connectors M71, M201 (RHD models)
● Harness connectors M1, E101 (RHD models)
J
● Harness for open or short between ECM and stop lamp switch

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. K

6. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH

Refer to EC-656, "Component Inspection" . L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace stop lamp switch. M

7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-499, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

EC-655
 DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Component Inspection EBS00OPN

STOP LAMP SWITCH

1. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.

MBIB0286E

2. Check continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2

under the following conditions.

MBIB0604E

MBIB0605E

Conditions Continuity
Brake pedal fully released Should not exist.
Brake pedal depressed Should exist.

If NG, adjust brake pedal installation, refer to BR-6, "BRAKE PEDAL" , and perform step 2 again.

EC-656
 HO2S1 HEATER
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
HO2S1 HEATER PFP:22690
A
Description EBS00OPO

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator EC
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Engine speed Heated oxygen sensor 1 Heated oxygen sensor 1
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
heater control heater
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature C
The ECM performs ON/OFF duty control of the heated oxygen sensor 1 heater corresponding to the engine
speed and engine coolant temperature. The duty percent varies with engine coolant temperature when engine
is started. D

OPERATION
Engine speed rpm Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater E
Above 3,600 OFF
Below 3,600 after warming up ON
F
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00OPP

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION G
● Engine: After warming up
ON
HO2S1 HTR (B1) ● Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm
H
● Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm OFF

EC-657
 HO2S1 HEATER
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Wiring Diagram EBS00OPQ

MBWA0464E

EC-658
 HO2S1 HEATER
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: A
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER- EC
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.

Approximately 7.0V C

[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition. D
Heated oxygen sen-
24 Y ● Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm.
sor 1 heater

PBIB0519E E
[Engine is running] BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Engine speed is above 3,600 rpm. (11 - 14V)
F
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)

Diagnostic Procedure EBS00OPR

1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION G

1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.

2. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds. H
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Set tester prove between ECM terminal 24 (HO2S1 heater signal) and ground.
I
5. Start engine and let it idle.
6. Check the voltage under the following conditions.
Verify that the oscilloscope screen shows the signal waves as
shown below. J

Conditions Voltage

Approximately 7.0V K

At idle L

MBIB0038E
PBIB0519E M
BATTERY VOLTAGE
Engine speed is above 3,600 rpm.
(11 - 14V)

: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 2.

EC-659
 HO2S1 HEATER
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
2. CHECK HO2S1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 harness connector.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.

MBIB0280E

4. Check voltage between HO2S1 terminal 4 and ground with

CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.

PBIB0541E

3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Harness connectors E50, F1
● IPDM E/R connector E13
● 10A fuse
● Harness for open or short between heated oxygen sensor 1 and fuse

>> Repair harness or connectors.

4. CHECK HO2S1 OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 24 and HO2S1 terminal 1.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER

Refer to EC-661, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace heated oxygen sensor 1.

EC-660
 HO2S1 HEATER
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT A
Refer to EC-499, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END EC

Component Inspection EBS00OPS

HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER C

1. Check resistance between HO2S1 terminals as follows.
Terminal No. Resistance
1 and 4 3.3 - 4.0 Ω at 25°C (77°F)
D

2 and 1, 3, 4 ∞Ω
3 and 1, 2, 4 (Continuity should not exist)
E
2. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 1.
CAUTION:
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped F
from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard sur-
face such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system G
threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-
18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
H

PBIB0542E
J
Removal and Installation EBS00OPT

HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1

Refer to EM-20, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" . K

EC-661
 HO2S2 HEATER
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
HO2S2 HEATER PFP:226A0

Description EBS00OPU

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM Function Actuator
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Engine speed
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Heated oxygen sensor 2
Engine coolant tempera- Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
Engine coolant temperature sensor heater control
ture
Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor Amount of intake air

The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater corresponding to the engine speed,
amount of intake air and engine coolant temperature.
OPERATION
Engine speed rpm Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
Above 3,800 OFF
● Below 3,800 rpm after the following conditions are met.
● Engine: After warming up
ON
● Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for
one minute and at idle for one minute under no load

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00OPV

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
● Engine speed is below 3,800 rpm after the following conditions are met.
– Engine: After warming up
ON
HO2S2 HTR (B1) – Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for one minute
and at idle for one minute under no load.
● Engine speed: Above 3,800 rpm OFF

EC-662
 HO2S2 HEATER
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Wiring Diagram EBS00OPW

EC

MBWA0465E

EC-663
 HO2S2 HEATER
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
● Engine speed: Below 3,800 rpm after the follow-
ing conditions are met.
– Engine: After warming up 0 - 1.0V
– Keeping the engine speed at between 3,500 to
Heated oxygen sensor 2 4,000 rpm for one minute and at idle for one
2 GY
heater minute under no load
[Ignition switch “ON”]
● Engine stopped BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Engine is running] (11 - 14V)
● Engine speed is above 3,800 rpm.

Diagnostic Procedure EBS00OPX

1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION

1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least one minute under no
load.
4. Let engine idle for one minute.
5. Set voltmeter proves between ECM terminal 2 (HO2S2 heater signal) and ground.
6. Check the voltage under the following conditions.
Conditions Voltage
At idle 0 - 1V
Engine speed is above 3,800 rpm. Battery voltage

OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 2.

PBIB0673E

EC-664
 HO2S2 HEATER
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
2. CHECK HO2S2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”. EC

MBIB0282E
E
4. Check voltage between HO2S2 terminal 4 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
F
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. G
NG >> GO TO 3.

H
PBIB0541E

3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART I

Check the following.

● Harness connectors E50, F1 J
● IPDM E/R connector E13
● 10A fuse
● Harness for open or short between heated oxygen sensor 2 and fuse K

>> Repair harness or connectors.

L
4. CHECK HO2S2 OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. M
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 2 and HO2S2 terminal 1.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER

Refer to EC-666, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace heated oxygen sensor 2.

EC-665
 HO2S2 HEATER
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-499, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00OPY

HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER

1. Check resistance between HO2S2 terminals as follows.
Terminal No. Resistance
1 and 4 3.3 - 4.0 Ω at 25°C (77°F)
2 and 1, 3, 4 ∞Ω
3 and 1, 2, 4 (Continuity should not exist)

2. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2.

CAUTION:
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped
from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard sur-
face such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system
threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-
18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.

PBIB0542E

Removal and Installation EBS00OPZ

HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2

Refer to EX-3, "EXHAUST SYSTEM" .

EC-666
 IAT SENSOR
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
IAT SENSOR PFP:22630
A
Component Description EBS00OQ0

The intake air temperature sensor is built into manifold absolute

pressure sensor. The sensor detects intake air temperature and EC
transmits a signal to the ECM.
The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive to
the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the thermistor
decreases in response to the temperature rise. C

MBIB0276E

E
<Reference data>
Intake air
Voltage* V Resistance kΩ F
temperature °C (°F)
−10 (14) 4.43 7.9 - 9.3
25 (77) 3.32 1.9 - 2.1 G
80 (176) 1.23 0.31 - 0.37
*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 34
(Intake air temperature sensor) and ground. H
CAUTION: SEF012P

Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output

voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM termi- I
nals, such as the ground.

EC-667
 IAT SENSOR
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Wiring Diagram EBS00OQ1

MBWA0466E

EC-668
 IAT SENSOR
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00OQ2

1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION A

1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.

2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 34 and ground with CON- EC
SULT-II or tester.
Voltage: 0.04 - 4.84V
C
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 2. D

MBIB0041E
E

2. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

F
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect manifold absolute pressure sensor (intake air tem-
perature sensor is built-into) harness connector.
G
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.

MBIB0276E

J
4. Check voltage between MAP sensor terminal 3 and ground.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG K
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair harness or connectors.
L

M
MBIB0300E

3. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check harness continuity between MAP sensor terminal 4 and ECM terminal 56.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair harness or connectors.

EC-669
 IAT SENSOR
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
4. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-670, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace manifold absolute pressure sensor (with intake air temperature sensor).

5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-499, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00OQ3

INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR

1. Check resistance between manifold absolute pressure sensor
terminals 3 and 5 under the following conditions.
Intake air temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ
25 (77) 1.9 - 2.1
2. If NG, replace manifold absolute pressure sensor (with intake air
temperature sensor).

MBIB0276E

SEF012P

Removal and Installation EBS00OQ4

MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR

Refer to EM-14, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" .

EC-670
 HO2S1
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
HO2S1 PFP:22690
A
Component Description EBS00OQ5

The heated oxygen sensor 1 is placed into the exhaust manifold. It

detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas compared to the EC
outside air. The heated oxygen sensor 1 has a closed-end tube
made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from
approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions. The
heated oxygen sensor 1 signal is sent to the ECM. The ECM adjusts C
the injection pulse duration to achieve the ideal air-fuel ratio. The
ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical change from 1V to 0V.
D

SEF463R

H
SEF288D

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00OQ6 I

Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION J
HO2S1 (B1) ● Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
LEAN ←→ RICH
HO2S1 MNTR (B1) ● Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm Changes more than 5 times during K
10 seconds.

EC-671
 HO2S1
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Wiring Diagram EBS00OQ7

MBWA0464E

EC-672
 HO2S1
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: A
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMI- EC
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running] C
0 - Approximately 1.0V
35 BR Heated oxygen sensor 1 ● Warm-up condition
(Periodically change)
● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
[Engine is running] D
Sensors' ground
74 B ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
(Heated oxygen sensor)
● Idle speed
E
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00OQ8

1. INSPECTION START
F
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
Tightening torque: 40 - 60 N·m (4.1 - 6.2 kg-m, 30 - 44 ft-lb) G

>> GO TO 2. H

MBIB0142E

EC-673
 HO2S1
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Keep the engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load, and make
sure that the monitors fluctuates between LEAN and RICH more
than five times in 10 seconds.
1 time: RICH → LEAN → RICH
2 times: RICH → LEAN → RICH → LEAN →RICH

SEF820Y

Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Stop engine and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Set ECM in “Diagnostic test mode - II (Heated oxygen sensor 1 monitor)”.
Refer to EC-442, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .
4. Keep the engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load, and make
sure that the MI comes ON more than five times in 10 seconds.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 3.

SAT652J

3. CHECK HO2S1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 harness connector.
3. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 74 and HO2S1
terminal 3.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. MBIB0280E
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors.

EC-674
 HO2S1
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
4. CHECK HO2S1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 35 and HO2S1 terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
EC
Continuity should exist.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 35 or HO2S1 terminal 2 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
C
Continuity should not exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
E
5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1
Refer to EC-675, "Component Inspection" . F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace heated oxygen sensor 1. G

6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-499, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . H

>> INSPECTION END

I
Component Inspection EBS00OQ9

HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1

With CONSULT-II J
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “MANU TRIG” and adjust “TRIGGER POINT” to 100% in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-
II. K
3. Select “HO2S1 (B1)” and “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)”.
4. Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during the follow-
ing steps. L
5. Touch “RECORD” on CONSULT-II screen.

MBIB0301E

6. Check the following.

● “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode changes
from “RICH” to “LEAN” to “RICH” 5 times in 10 seconds.
5 times (cycles) are counted as shown at right.
● “HO2S1 (B1)” voltage goes above 0.6V at least once.

● “HO2S1 (B1)” voltage goes below 0.3V at least once.

● “HO2S1 (B1)” voltage never exceeds 1.0V.

SEF217YA

EC-675
 HO2S1
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]

SEF648Y

CAUTION:
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 35 [HO2S1 (B1) signal] and engine ground.
3. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm con-
stant under no load.
● The voltage fluctuates between 0 to 0.3V and 0.6 to 1.0V
more than 5 times within 10 seconds.
● The maximum voltage is over 0.6V at least one time.

● The minimum voltage is below 0.3V at least one time.

● The voltage never exceeds 1.0V.

1 time: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V

2 times: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V
CAUTION: MBIB0018E

● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped

from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new
one.
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Removal and Installation EBS00OQA

HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1

Refer to EM-20, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" .

EC-676
 HO2S2
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
HO2S2 PFP:226A0
A
Component Description EBS00OQB

The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold),

monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank. EC
Even if switching characteristics of the heated oxygen sensor 1 are
shifted, the air fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal
from the heated oxygen sensor 2.
This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates volt- C
age from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner condi-
tions.
Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for D
engine control operation.
SEF327R

E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00OQC

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION F
HO2S2 (B1) ● Engine: After warming up 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
● Keeping the engine speed
Revving engine from idle to 3,000
between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm rpm quickly.
G
HO2S2 MNTR (B1) LEAN ←→ RICH
for one minute and at idle for
one minute under no load
H

EC-677
 HO2S2
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Wiring Diagram EBS00OQD

MBWA0465E

EC-678
 HO2S2
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: A
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER- EC
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running] C
● Warm-up condition
● Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly
16 LG Heated oxygen sensor 2 after the following conditions are met. 0 - Approximately 1.0V
D
● Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for one minute and at idle for one
minute under no load
E
[Engine is running]
Sensors' ground
74 B ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
(Heated oxygen sensor)
● Idle speed F
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00OQE

1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-I G

1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
H
3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least one minute under no
load.
4. Let engine idle for one minute.
I
5. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 16 (HO2S2 signal) and ground.
6. Check the voltage while revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load
at least 10 times. (Depress and release the accelerator pedal as
quickly as possible.) J

The voltage does not remain in the range of 0.2 - 0.4V

OK or NG K
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 2.
L

MBIB0020E

2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-II M

Keep engine at idle for 10 minutes, then check the voltage between ECM terminal 16 and ground, or check
voltage when coasting 80 km/h (50 MPH) in 3rd gear (M/T) or “D” position (A/T).
The voltage does not remain in the range of 0.2 - 0.4V
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 3.

EC-679
 HO2S2
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
3. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten body ground screws.

>> GO TO 4.

MBIB0290E

4. CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector.
3. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 74 and HO2S2
terminal 3.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. MBIB0282E
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors.

5. CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 16 and HO2S2 terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 16 or HO2S2 terminal 2 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should not exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

6. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2

Refer to EC-681, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace heated oxygen sensor 2.

EC-680
 HO2S2
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT A
Refer to EC-499, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END EC

Component Inspection EBS00OQF

HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 C

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT-II. D

SEF174Y

G
2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
3. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least one minute under no H
load.
5. Let engine idle for one minute.
6. Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select I
“HO2S2 (B1)” as the monitor item with CONSULT-II.

SEF662Y L

7. Check “HO2S2 (B1)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%.
M

MBIB0662E

“HO2S2 (B1)” should be above 0.68V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%.
“HO2S2 (B1)” should be below 0.60V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%.
CAUTION:
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.

EC-681
 HO2S2
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least one minute under no
load.
4. Let engine idle for one minute.
5. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 16 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] and engine ground.
6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load
at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
The voltage should be above 0.68V at least once during this
procedure.
If the voltage is above 0.68V at step 6, step 7 is not neces-
sary.
7. Keep vehicle idling for 10 minutes, then check voltage. Or check
the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in “D” posi-
tion (A/T), 3rd gear position (M/T).
The voltage should be below 0.60V at least once during this MBIB0020E
procedure.
8. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2.
CAUTION:
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Removal and Installation EBS00OQG

HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2

Refer to EX-3, "EXHAUST SYSTEM" .

EC-682
 IGNITION SIGNAL
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
IGNITION SIGNAL PFP:22448
A
Component Description EBS00OQH

IGNITION COIL & POWER TRANSISTOR

The ignition signal from the ECM is sent to and amplified by the EC
power transistor. The power transistor turns on and off the ignition
coil primary circuit. This on-off operation induces the proper high
voltage in the coil secondary circuit.
C

MBIB0272E
E

EC-683
 IGNITION SIGNAL
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Wiring Diagram EBS00OQI

MBWA0296E

EC-684
 IGNITION SIGNAL
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: A
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMI- EC
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running] C
[Ignition switch “OFF”]
0 - 1.0V
● For 5 seconds after turning ignition switch
ECM relay “OFF”
111 P D
(Self shut-off)
[Ignition switch “OFF”]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● 5 seconds passed after turning ignition (11 - 14V)
switch “OFF”
E
119 BATTERY VOLTAGE
G Power supply for ECM [Ignition switch “ON”]
120 (11 - 14V)

EC-685
IGNITION SIGNAL
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]

MBWA0297E

EC-686
 IGNITION SIGNAL
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: A
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMI- EC
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.

0 - 0.1V C

[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition D
● Idle speed

60 Y Ignition signal No. 3

61 PU Ignition signal No. 1 PBIB0521E E
79 G Ignition signal No. 4
0 - 0.2V
80 BR Ignition signal No. 2

[Engine is running] F
● Warm-up condition
● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
G
PBIB0522E

: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) H
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00OQJ

1. CHECK ENGINE START I

Turn ignition switch “OFF”, and restart engine.
Is engine running?
Yes or No J
Yes (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 2.
Yes (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 3.
No >> GO TO 4. K

2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION

L
With CONSULT-II
1. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
2. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine M
speed drop.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 9.

MBIB0302E

EC-687
 IGNITION SIGNAL
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
3. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
Without CONSULT-II
1. Let engine idle.
2. Read the voltage signal between ECM terminals 60, 61, 79, 80
and ground with an oscilloscope.
3. Verify that the oscilloscope screen shows the signal wave as
shown below.

PBIB0521E
MBIB0033E

OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 9.

4. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I

1. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminals 119, 120 and ground
with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Go to EC-500, "POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM"
.

MBIB0034E

5. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect condenser harness connector.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between condenser terminal 1 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.

PBIB0624E

EC-688
 IGNITION SIGNAL
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
6. DETECT MALFUNCTION PART A
Check the following.
● IPDM E/R harness connector E14
● Harness connectors E50, F1 EC

>> Repair or replace

C
7. CHECK CONDENSER GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. D
2. Disconnect condenser harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between condenser terminal 2 and ground.
Refer to Wiring diagram. E
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power. F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connector. G
8. CHECK CONDENSER
Refer to EC-690, "Component Inspection" . H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace condenser. I

9. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-V

J
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
3. Disconnect ignition coil harness connector. K
4. Turn ignition switch “ON”.

MBIB0272E

5. Check voltage between ignition coil terminal 1 and ground with

CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 10.

SEF107S

EC-689
 IGNITION SIGNAL
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
10. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check harness for open or short between ignition coil and IPDM E/R.

>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

11. CHECK IGNITION COIL GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check harness continuity between ignition coil terminal 2 and engine ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.

12. CHECK IGNITION COIL OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 60, 61, 79, 80 and ignition coil terminal 3.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

13. CHECK IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR

Refer to EC-690, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
NG >> Replace ignition coil with power transistor.

14. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-499, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00OQK

CONDENSER
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect condenser harness connector.

EC-690
 IGNITION SIGNAL
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
3. Check resistance between condenser terminals 1 and 2.
A
Resistance: Above 1 MΩ at 25°C (77°F)

EC

MBIB0031E

D
IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ignition coil harness connector.
E
3. Check resistance between ignition coil terminals as follows.
Terminal No. Resistance Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
2 and 3 Except 0 or ∞ F
1 and 2
Except 0
1 and 3
G

H
MBIB0032E

Removal and Installation EBS00OQL

IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR I

Refer to EM-25, "IGNITION COIL" .

EC-691
 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE PFP:14920

Description EBS00OQM

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed*1

Manifold absolute pressure sensor Amount of intake air

Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature
Battery Battery voltage*1 EVAP canister EVAP canister purge volume
Throttle position sensor Throttle position purge flow control control solenoid valve

Accelerator pedal position sensor Closed throttle position

Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
Heated oxygen sensors 1
(Mixture ratio feedback signal)

Vehicle speed signal*2 Vehicle speed

*1: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
*2: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.

This system controls flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The opening of the vapor by-pass pas-
sage in the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve changes to control the flow rate. The EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve repeats ON/OFF operation according to the signal sent from the
ECM. The opening of the valve varies for optimum engine control. The optimum value stored in the ECM is
determined by considering various engine conditions. When the engine is operating, the flow rate of fuel vapor
from the EVAP canister is regulated as the air flow changes.
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve uses a ON/
OFF duty to control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canis-
ter. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is
moved by ON/OFF pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON pulse,
the greater the amount of fuel vapor that will flow through the valve.

SEF337U

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00OQN

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
● Engine: After warming up Idle 0%
● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/
PURG VOL C/V T)
2,000 rpm 20 - 30%
● Air conditioner switch: OFF
● No-load

EC-692
 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Wiring Diagram EBS00OQO

EC

MBWA0467E

EC-693
 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)

[Engine is running]
● Idle speed

EVAP canister purge

PBIB0050E
19 LG volume control solenoid
valve
Approximately 10V

[Engine is running]
● Engine speed is about 2,000 rpm
(More than 100 seconds after starting engine)

PBIB0520E

: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)

EC-694
 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00OQP

1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION A

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. EC
2. Disconnect the EVAP purge hose connected to the EVAP canister.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”, and select “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
C
4. Start engine and let it idle.

F
PBIB0569E

5. Change the valve opening percentage with touching “Qu” or “Qd” on CONSULT-II screen, and check for
vacuum existence at the EVAP purge hose under the following conditions. G

Conditions Vacuum
At idle Should not exist. H
Engine speed is about 2,000 rpm. Should exist.

Without CONSULT-II I
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect the EVAP purge hose connected to the EVAP canister.
J
3. Start engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds.
4. Check for vacuum existence at the EVAP purge hose under the following conditions.
Conditions Vacuum K
At idle Should not exist.
Engine speed is about 2,000 rpm. Should exist.
L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> GO TO 3. M
2. CHECK EVAP CANISTER
Refer to EC-734, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Replace EVAP canister.

3. CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE

Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks or improper connection.
Refer to EC-731, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose.

EC-695
 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
4. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIR-
CUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
harness connector.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.

MBIB0273E

4. Check voltage between EVAP canister purge volume control

solenoid valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.

PBIB0148E

5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Harness connectors E50, F1
● IPDM E/R harness connector E14
● Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and IPDM E/R
● Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and ECM

>> Repair harness or connectors.

6. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIR-
CUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 19 and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 7.
OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 8.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground and short to power in harness or connectors.

EC-696
 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
7. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION A
With CONSULT-II
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
EC
2. Start engine.
3. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according to the
valve opening. C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 8. D

PBIB0569E

8. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE F

Refer to EC-697, "Component Inspection" .

OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
H
9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-499, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
I
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection EBS00OQQ J
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control K
solenoid valve under the following conditions.
Condition Air passage continuity
(PURG VOL CONT/V value) between A and B
L
100.0% Yes
0.0% No
M

PBIB0149E

Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve under the following conditions.
Air passage continuity
Condition
between A and B
12V direct current supply between termi-
Yes
nals 1 and 2
No supply No

PBIB0150E

EC-697
 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Removal and Installation EBS00OQR

EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

Refer to EM-14, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" .

EC-698
 VSS
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
VSS PFP:32702
A
Description EBS00OSW

The vehicle speed signal is sent to the combination meter from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
through CAN communication line. The combination meter then sends a signal to the ECM through CAN com- EC
munication line.
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00OSX

1. INSPECTION START C

Do you have CONSULT-II?

Yes or No D
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> GO TO 3.
E
2. CHECK OVERRALL FUNCTION
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
F
2. Lift up the vehicle.
3. Start engine and let it idle
4. Select “VHCL SPEED SE” in“DATA MONITOR” mode with G
CONSULT-II.
5. Select “VHCL SPEED SE” indication when rotating wheels with
suitable gear position. H
“VHCL SPEED SE” indication should
exceed 10km/h (6MPH).
OK or NG I
OK >> INSPECTION END.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB0164E J

3. CHECK DTC
Refer to BRC-6, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" . K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair or replace. L

4. CHECK COMBINATION METER

M
Check combination meter function.
Refer to DI-5, "COMBINATION METERS" .

>> INSPECTION END

EC-699
 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE PFP:23796

Description EBS00OQS

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor Input signal to ECM ECM function Actuator
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Engine speed
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Intake valve Intake valve timing control
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature timing control solenoid valve

Vehicle speed signal* Vehicle speed

*: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.

PBIB0540E

This mechanism hydraulically controls cam phases continuously with the fixed operating angle of the intake
valve.
The ECM receives signals such as crankshaft position, camshaft position, engine speed, and engine coolant
temperature. Then, the ECM sends ON/OFF pulse duty signals to the intake valve timing control solenoid
valve depending on driving status. This makes it possible to control the shut/open timing of the intake valve to
increase engine torque in low/mid speed range and output in high-speed range.
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve is activated by ON/OFF
pulse duty (ratio) signals from the ECM.
The intake valve timing control solenoid valve changes the oil
amount and direction of flow through intake valve timing control unit
or stops oil flow.
The longer pulse width advances valve angle.
The shorter pulse width retards valve angle.
When ON and OFF pulse widths become equal, the solenoid valve
stops oil pressure flow to fix the intake valve angle at the control
position.
PBIB0195E

EC-700
 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00OQT

A
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
● Engine: After warming up Idle −5° - 5°CA EC
● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/
INT/V TIM (B1) T)
When revving up to 2,000 rpm quickly Approx. 0° - 20°CA
● Air conditioner switch: OFF C
● No-load
● Engine: After warming up Idle 0% - 2%
● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/ D
INT/V SOL (B1) T)
When revving up to 2,000 rpm quickly Approx. 0% - 50%
● Air conditioner switch: OFF
● No-load E

EC-701
 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Wiring Diagram EBS00OQU

MBWA0468E

EC-702
 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: A
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER- EC
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
BATTERY VOLTAGE C
(11 - 14V)

[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition D
● Idle speed

E
MBIB0052E
Intake valve timing
62 LG
control solenoid valve Approximately 4V - BATTERY
VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) F
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
● When revving engine up to 2,000 rpm quickly
G

PBIB0532E H
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)

Diagnostic Procedure EBS00OQV

I
1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION CHECK
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. J
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Set the tester probe between ECM terminals 62 (IVT control solenoid valve signal) and ground. K
5. Start engine and let it idle.
6. Check the voltage under the following conditions.
Verify that the oscilloscope screen shows the signal wave as L
shown below.
Conditions Voltage
M
BATTERY VOLTAGE
At idle
(11 - 14V)

Approximately 4V - BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)

When revving engine up

to 2,000 rpm quickly SEF955V

PBIB0532E

: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 2.

EC-703
 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
2. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness
connector.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.

MBIB0284E

4. Check voltage between intake valve timing control solenoid

valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.

PBIB0285E

3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Harness connectors E50, F1
● IPDM E/R harness connector E14
● Harness for open or short between intake valve timing control solenoid valve and IPDM E/R

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR
OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 62 and intake valve timing control solenoid valve termi-
nal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

5. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

Refer to EC-705, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve.

EC-704
 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
6. CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS) A
Refer to EC-575, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. EC
NG >> Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS).

7. CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE) C

Refer to EC-582, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
D
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Replace camshaft position sensor (PHASE).

8. CHECK CAMSHAFT (INTAKE) E

Check the following.

● Accumulation of debris to the signal plate of camshaft rear end F
● Chipping signal plate of camshaft rear end
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. G
NG >> Remove debris and clean the signal plate of camshaft
rear end or replace camshaft.
H

PBIB0565E

I
9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-499, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
J

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00OQW K
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
1. Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector.
2. Check resistance between intake valve timing control solenoid L
valve terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions.
Terminals Resistance
M
1 and 2 Approximately 7.2Ω at 20°C (68°F)
∞Ω
1 or 2 and ground
(Continuity should not exist)

MBIB0027E

Removal and Installation EBS00OQX

INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

Refer to EM-31, "ROCKER COVER" .

EC-705
 PNP SWITCH
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
PNP SWITCH PFP:32006

Component Description EBS00OQY

When the shift lever position is “P” or “N” (A/T models) or “Neutral” (M/T models), park/neutral position (PNP)
switch is “ON”.
ECM detects the position because the continuity of the line (the “ON” signal) exists.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00OQZ

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
Shift lever:
ON
P/N POSI SW ● Ignition switch: ON P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T)
Shift lever: Except above OFF

EC-706
 PNP SWITCH
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Wiring Diagram EBS00OR0

EC

MBWA0469E

EC-707
 PNP SWITCH
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMI-
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Ignition switch “ON”]
● Shift lever position is “P” or “N” (A/T models), Approximately 0V
102 GY PNP switch “Neutral” (M/T models).
[Ignition switch “ON”]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Except the above gear position

Diagnostic Procedure EBS00OR1

1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select “P/N POSI SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CON-
SULT-II.
3. Check the “P/N POSI SW” signal under the following conditions.
Selector lever position P/N POSI SW signal
“P” and “N” (A/T models), “Neutral” (M/T
ON
models) position
Except the above position OFF

PBIB0102E

Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 102 and ground under the
following conditions.
Selector lever position Voltage
“P” and “N” (A/T models), “Neutral”
Approximately 0V
(M/T models) position
Except the above position Battery voltage

MBIB0043E

OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 2.

EC-708
 PNP SWITCH
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
2. CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT A
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Check voltage between IPDM E/R terminal 31 and ground under
following condition. EC

Shift lever position Voltage

“P” or “N” (A/T models) C
Battery voltage (11- 14V)
Neutral (M/T models)
Except above position Approximately 0V

OK or NG D
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 3. MBIB0652E
E
3. CHECK PNP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
F
2. Connect IPDM E/R harness connector.
3. Disconnect PNP switch harness connector.
4. Turn ignition switch “ON”. G
5. Check voltage between PNP switch terminal 1(A/T models),
2(M/T models) and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
H

J
MBIB0653E

MBIB0654E

Voltage: Battery voltage

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.

EC-709
 PNP SWITCH
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PARTS
Check the following.
● 10A fuse
● Harness connectors E50, F1
● IPDM E/R connector E14
● Harness for short or open between PNP switch and fuse

>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

5. CHECK HARNESS CONTINUTY BETWEEN PNP SWITCH AND IPDM E/R

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E14.
3. Check harness continuity between IPDM E/R terminal 31 and PNP switch terminal 2(A/T models), 3(M/T
models).
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.

6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PARTS

Check the following.
● Harness connectors E50,F1
● Harness for short or open between PNP switch and IPDM E/R

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

7. CHECK PNP SWITCH

Refer to AT-354, "COMPONENT INSPECTION" (A/T models) or MT-8, "POSITION SWITCH" (M/T models).
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace PNP switch.

8. CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E17
3. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 102 and IPDM E/R terminal 64.
Continuity should exist.
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO OT 9.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-499, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

EC-710
 INJECTOR CIRCUIT
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
INJECTOR CIRCUIT PFP:16600
A
Component Description EBS00OR2

The fuel injector is a small, precise solenoid valve. When the ECM
supplies a ground to the injector circuit, the coil in the injector is EC
energized. The energized coil pulls the needle valve back and allows
fuel to flow through the injector into the intake manifold. The amount
of fuel injected depends upon the injection pulse duration. Pulse
duration is the length of time the injector remains open. The ECM C
controls the injection pulse duration based on engine fuel needs.

SEF375Z

E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00OR3

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION F
● Engine: After warming up Idle 2.5 - 3.5 msec
● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T)
B/FUEL SCHDL G
● Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm 2.5 - 3.5 msec
● No-load
● Engine: After warming up Idle 2.0 - 3.0 msec
H
● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T)
INJ PULSE-B1
● Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm 1.9 - 2.9 msec
● No-load I

EC-711
 INJECTOR CIRCUIT
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Wiring Diagram EBS00OR4

MBWA0298E

EC-712
 INJECTOR CIRCUIT
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: A
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMI- EC
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
BATTERY VOLTAGE C
(11 - 14V)

[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
D
● Idle speed

22 OR Injector No. 3 E
PBIB0529E
23 L Injector No. 1
41 R Injector No. 4 BATTERY VOLTAGE
42 GY Injector No. 2
(11 - 14V) F
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
G
● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm

PBIB0530E H
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)

Diagnostic Procedure EBS00OR5 I

1. INSPECTION START
Turn ignition switch to “START”. J
Is any cylinder ignited?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2. K
No >> GO TO 3.

EC-713
 INJECTOR CIRCUIT
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT-II.
3. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine
speed drop.

MBIB0302E

Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Listen to each injector operating sound.
Clicking noise should be heard.

MEC703B

OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 3.

EC-714
 INJECTOR CIRCUIT
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
3. CHECK INJECTOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect injector harness connector.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”. EC

MBIB0271E
E
4. Check voltage between injector terminal 1 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage F

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. G
NG >> GO TO 4.

H
PBIB0582E

4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART I

Check the following.
● Harness connectors F1, E50
J
● IPDM E/R connector E13
● 10A fuse
● Harness for open or short between injector and fuse K

>> Repair harness or connectors.

L
5. CHECK INJECTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
M
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between injector terminal 2 and ECM terminals 22, 23, 41, 42.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

6. CHECK INJECTOR
Refer to EC-716, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace injector.

EC-715
 INJECTOR CIRCUIT
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-499, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00OR6

INJECTOR
1. Disconnect injector harness connector.
2. Check resistance between terminals as shown in the figure.
Resistance: 12.1 - 12.9Ω [at 20°C (68°F)]

PBIB0181E

Removal and Installation EBS00OR7

INJECTOR
Refer to EM-28, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" .

EC-716
 FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT PFP:17042
A
Description EBS00OR8

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM Function Actuator EC
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Engine speed*
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Fuel pump control Fuel pump relay
Battery Battery voltage* C
*: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.

The ECM activates the fuel pump for several seconds after the ignition switch is turned on to improve engine
D
startability. If the ECM receives a engine speed signal from the crankshaft position sensor (POS) and cam-
shaft position sensor (PHASE), it knows that the engine is rotating, and causes the pump to operate. If the
engine speed signal is not received when the ignition switch is ON, the engine stalls. The ECM stops pump
operation and prevents battery discharging, thereby improving safety. The ECM does not directly drive the fuel E
pump. It controls the ON/OFF fuel pump relay, which in turn controls the fuel pump.
Condition Fuel pump operation
Ignition switch is turned to ON. Operates for 1 second. F
Engine running and cranking Operates.
When engine is stopped Stops in 1.5 seconds.
G
Except as shown above Stops.

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
H
A turbine type design fuel pump is used in the fuel tank.

K
MBIB0291E

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00OR9

Specification data are reference values. L

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION

● For 1 seconds after turning ignition switch ON
ON M
FUEL PUMP RLY ● Engine running or cranking
● Except above conditions OFF

EC-717
 FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Wiring Diagram EBS00ORA

MBWA0299E

EC-718
 FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: A
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER- EC
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Ignition switch “ON”] C
● For 1 seconds after turning ignition switch “ON” 0 - 1.0V
[Engine is running]
113 R Fuel pump relay
[Ignition switch “ON”] D
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● More than 1 seconds after turning ignition switch (11 - 14V)
“ON”.
E
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00ORB

1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION

1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. F
2. Pinch fuel feed hose with two fingers.
Fuel pressure pulsation should be felt on the fuel hose for 1
second after ignition switch is turned “ON”. G
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 2. H

MBIB0310E

2. CHECK FUEL PUMP RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT J

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.

2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. K
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between ECM terminals 113 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester. L

Voltage: Battery voltage

OK or NG M
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 3.

PBIB1187E

EC-719
 FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
3. CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E17.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between IPDM E/R terminal 69 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 9.

MBIB0312E

4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● IPDM E/R connector E17
● Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and ECM

>> Repair harness or connectors.

5. CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump harness con-
nector.
3. Check harness continuity between terminal 20 of IPDM E/R con-
nector E13 and fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump terminal 1,
fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump terminal 3 and body ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
MBIB0288E
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.

6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Harness connectors M1, E101
● Harness connectors B1, M10
● Harness for open or short between fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump and IPDM E/R
● Harness for open or short between fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump and body ground

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

EC-720
 FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
7. CHECK FUEL PUMP RELAY OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 113 and terminal 69 of IPDM E/R connector E17.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC

Continuity should exist.

3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Repair open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R. D

8. CHECK FUEL PUMP

Refer to EC-721, "Component Inspection" . E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace fuel pump. F

9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

G
Refer to EC-499, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK >> Replace IPDM E/R H
NG >> Repair or replace harness or connector
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection EBS00ORC I
FUEL PUMP
1. Disconnect fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump harness connector.
2. Check resistance between fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump J
terminals 1 and 3.
Resistance: Approximately 1.0Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
K

MBIB0311E M

Removal and Installation EBS00ORD

FUEL PUMP
Refer to FL-4, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" .

EC-721
 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR PFP:92136

Component Description EBS00ORE

The refrigerant pressure sensor is installed at the liquid tank of the

air conditioner system. The sensor uses an electrostatic volume
pressure transducer to convert refrigerant pressure to voltage. The
voltage signal is sent to ECM, and ECM controls cooling fan system.

MBIB0292E

SEF099X

EC-722
 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Wiring Diagram EBS00ORF

EC

MBWA0300E

EC-723
 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMI-
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
Sensor's ground
57 Y ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
(Refrigerant pressure sensor)
● Idle speed
Sensor's power supply
46 W [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 5V
(Refrigerant pressure sensor)
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
69 BR Refrigerant pressure sensor ● Both A/C switch and blower switch are 1.0 - 4.0V
“ON”.
(Compressor operates.)

Diagnostic Procedure EBS00ORG

1. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR OVERALL FUNCTION

1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn A/C switch and blower switch “ON”.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 69 and ground with CON-
SULT-II or tester.
Voltage: 1.0 - 4.0V
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 2.

MBIB0035E

EC-724
 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
2. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A
1. Turn A/C switch and blower switch “OFF”.
2. Stop engine.
3. Disconnect refrigerant pressure sensor harness connector. EC
4. Turn ignition switch “ON”.

E
MBIB0292E

5. Check voltage between refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 3

and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. F

Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
H

SEF479Y
I
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. J
● Harness connectors E50, F1
● Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor
K
>> Repair harness or connectors.

4. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT L

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.

2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. M
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 57 and refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 1.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.

5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Harness connectors E50, F1
● Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

EC-725
 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
6. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 69 and refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.

7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Harness connectors E50, F1
● Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-499, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK >> Replace refrigerant pressure sensor.
NG >> Repair or replace.
Removal and Installation EBS00ORH

REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR

Refer to ATC-7, "REFRIGERATION SYSTEM" (Automatic air conditioner models) or MTC-14, "REFRIGERA-
TION SYSTEM" (Manual air conditioner models).

EC-726
 ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL PFP:25350
A
Description EBS00ORI

The electrical load signal (Headlamp switch signal, rear window defogger switch signal, etc.) is transferred
through the CAN communication line from IPDM E/R to ECM. EC
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00ORJ

Specification data are reference values.

C
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
Rear window defogger switch is ON and/or
ON
lighting switch is 2nd. D
LOAD SIGNAL ● Ignition switch: ON
Rear window defogger switch is OFF and light-
OFF
ing switch is OFF.

Diagnostic Procedure EBS00ORK

E

1. INSECTION START
Do you have CONSULT-II? F
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> GO TO 6. G

2. CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-I

H
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Connect CONSULT-II and select “DATA MONITOR” mode.
3. Select “LOAD SIGNAL” and check indication under the following I
conditions.
Condition Indication
J
Rear window defogger switch “ON” ON
Rear window defogger switch “OFF” OFF
OK or NG K
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIB0103E L

3. CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-II

Check “LOAD SIGNAL” indication under the following conditions. M

Condition Indication
Lighting switch “ON” at 2nd position ON
Lighting switch “OFF” OFF
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 5.

PBIB0103E

4. CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM

Refer to GW-14, "REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER" .

>> INSPECTION END

EC-727
 ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
5. CHECK HEADLAMP SYSTEM
Refer to LT-5, "HEADLAMP -CONVENTIONAL TYPE-" or LT-32, "HEADLAMP - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM -
".

>> INSPECTION END

6. CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM

Refer to GW-14, "REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace

7. CHECK HEADLAMP SYSTEM

Refer to LT-5, "HEADLAMP -CONVENTIONAL TYPE-" or LT-32, "HEADLAMP - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM -
".

>> INSPECTION END

EC-728
 MI & DATA LINK CONNECTORS
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
MI & DATA LINK CONNECTORS PFP:24814
A
Wiring Diagram (LHD Models) EBS00ORL

EC

MBWA0301E

EC-729
 MI & DATA LINK CONNECTORS
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Wiring Diagram (RHD Models) EBS00ORM

MBWA0302E

EC-730
 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM PFP:14950
A
Description EBS00ORN

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
EC

G
PBIB0491E

The evaporative emission system is used to reduce hydrocarbons emitted into the atmosphere from the fuel
system. This reduction of hydrocarbons is accomplished by activated charcoals in the EVAP canister. H
The fuel vapor in the sealed fuel tank is led into the EVAP canister which contains activated carbon and the
vapor is stored there when the engine is not operating or when refueling to the fuel tank.
The vapor in the EVAP canister is purged by the air through the purge line to the intake manifold when the
engine is operating. EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is controlled by ECM. When the I
engine operates, the flow rate of vapor controlled by EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is
proportionally regulated as the air flow increases.
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve also shuts off the vapor purge line during decelerating and J
idling.

EC-731
 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING

MBIB0544E

EC-732
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]

EC

MBIB0541E

EC-733
 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Component Inspection EBS00ORO

EVAP CANISTER
Check EVAP canister as follows:
1. Block port B . Orally blow air through port A .
Check that air flows freely through port C .
2. Block port A . Orally blow air through port B .
Check that air flows freely through port C .

PBIB0663E

FUEL CHECK VALVE

1. Blow air through connector on fuel tank side.
A considerable resistance should be felt and a portion of air flow
should be directed toward the EVAP canister side.
2. Blow air through connector on EVAP canister side.
Air flow should be smoothly directed toward fuel tank side.
3. If fuel check valve is suspected of not properly functioning in
steps 1 and 2 above, replace it.

SEF552Y

FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FILLER CAP)
1. Wipe clean valve housing.

SEF989X

2. Check valve opening pressure and vacuum.

Pres- 15.3 - 20.0 kPa (0.153 - 0.200 bar,
sure: 0.156 - 0.204 kg/cm2 , 2.22 - 2.90 psi)
Vacuum: −6.0 to −3.4 kPa (−0.060 to −0.034 bar,
−0.061 to −0.035 kg/cm2 , −0.87 to −0.49 psi)
3. If out of specification, replace fuel filler cap as an assembly.

SEF943S

EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

Refer to EC-697, "Component Inspection" .

EC-734
 POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION PFP:11810
A
Description EBS00ORP

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
EC

G
PBIB0492E

This system returns blow-by gas to the intake manifold.

The positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve is provided to conduct crankcase blow-by gas to the intake H
manifold. During partial throttle operation of the engine, the intake manifold sucks the blow-by gas through the
PCV valve. Normally, the capacity of the valve is sufficient to handle any blow-by and a small amount of venti-
lating air. The ventilating air is then drawn from the air inlet tubes into the crankcase. In this process the air
passes through the hose connecting air inlet tubes to rocker cover. Under full-throttle condition, the manifold I
vacuum is insufficient to draw the blow-by flow through the valve. The flow goes through the hose connection
in the reverse direction.
On vehicles with an excessively high blow-by, the valve does not J
meet the requirement. This is because some of the flow will go
through the hose connection to the air inlet tubes under all condi-
tions.
K

SEF559A M
Component Inspection EBS00ORQ

PCV (POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION) VALVE

With engine running at idle, remove PCV valve from rocker cover. A
properly working valve makes a hissing noise as air passes through
it. A strong vacuum should be felt immediately when a finger is
placed over valve inlet.

SEC137A

EC-735
 POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
PCV VALVE VENTILATION HOSE
1. Check hoses and hose connections for leaks.
2. Disconnect all hoses and clean with compressed air. If any hose
cannot be freed of obstructions, replace.

S-ET277

EC-736
 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) PFP:00030
A
Fuel Pressure EBS00ORR

Fuel pressure at idle Approximately 350 kPa (3.5bar, 3.57kg/cm2 , 51psi)

EC
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing EBS00ORS

M/T: 650±50 rpm

Target idle speed No-load*1 (in “P” or N” position)
A/T: 700±50 rpm C
Ignition timing In “P” or N” position 5°±5° BTDC
*1: Under the following conditions:
D
● Air conditioner switch: OFF
● Electric load: OFF (Lights, heater fan & rear window defogger)
● Steering wheel: Kept in straight-ahead position
E
Calculated Load Value EBS00ORT

Calculated load value% (Using CONSULT-II)

F
At idle 10 - 35
At 2,500 rpm 10 - 35
G
Manifold absolute pressure sensor EBS00ORU

Supply voltage Approximately 5.0V

Output voltage at idle 1.4 - 1.5V* H
*: Engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature and running under no-load.

Intake Air Temperature Sensor EBS00ORV

I
Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ
25 (77) 1.9 - 2.1
J
80 (176) 0.31 - 0.37

Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EBS00ORW

K
Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ
20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00 L
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260

Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 Heater EBS00ORX

M
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] 3.3 - 4.0Ω

Heated Oxygen sensor 2 Heater EBS00ORY

Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] 3.3 - 4.0Ω

Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS) EBS00ORZ

Refer to EC-575, "Component Inspection" .

Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) EBS00OS0

Refer to EC-582, "Component Inspection" .

Throttle Control Motor EBS00OS1

Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] Approximately 1 - 15Ω

EC-737
 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
Injector EBS00OS2

Resistance [at 20°C (68°F)] 12.1 - 12.9Ω

Fuel Pump EBS00OS3

Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] Approximately 1.0Ω

EC-738